D700 Instruction Guide PDF

INVERTER
FR-D700
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
FR-D700-EC
FR-D740-012(SC) to 160(SC) - EC
FR-D720S-008(SC) to 100(SC) - EC
INVERTER
OUTLINE
1
WIRING
2
PRECAUTIONS FOR USE

OF THE INVERTER 3
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
PARAMETERS
4
TROUBLESHOOTING
5
HEAD OFFICE: TOKYO BUILDING 2-7-3, MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN
PRECAUTIONS FOR
MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 6
SPECIFICATIONS
7
IB(NA)-0600353ENG-F (1201)MEE Printed in Japan Specifications subject to change without notice.
F
Thank you for choosing this Mitsubishi Inverter.
This Instruction Manual provides instructions for advanced use of the FR-D700 series inverters.
Incorrect handling might cause an unexpected fault. Before using the inverter, always read this Instruction Manual
and the Installation Guideline [IB-0600352ENG] packed with the product carefully to use the equipment to its
optimum performance.
2. Fire Prevention
This section is specifically about safety matters CAUTION
Do not attempt to install, operate, maintain or inspect the  Inverter must be installed on a nonflammable wall without
inverter until you have read through the Instruction Manual holes (so that nobody touches the inverter heatsink on the
and appended documents carefully and can use the rear side, etc.). Mounting it to or near flammable material
equipment correctly. Do not use this product until you have can cause a fire.
a full knowledge of the equipment, safety information and  If the inverter has become faulty, the inverter power must
instructions. be switched OFF. A continuous flow of large current could
In this Instruction Manual, the safety instruction levels are cause a fire.
classified into "WARNING" and "CAUTION".  When using a brake resistor, a sequence that will turn OFF
power when a fault signal is output must be configured.
Incorrect handling may cause
WARNING hazardous conditions, resulting in
Otherwise the brake resistor may overheat due to damage
of the brake transistor and possibly cause a fire.
death or severe injury.
 Do not connect a resistor directly to the DC terminals P/+
Incorrect handling may cause and N/-. Doing so could cause a fire.
CAUTION hazardous conditions, resulting in
medium or slight injury, or may cause 3.Injury Prevention
only material damage. CAUTION
 The voltage applied to each terminal must be the ones
The CAUTION level may even lead to a serious specified in the Instruction Manual. Otherwise burst,
consequence according to conditions. Both instruction damage, etc. may occur.
levels must be followed because these are important to  The cables must be connected to the correct terminals.
personal safety. Otherwise burst, damage, etc. may occur.
1. Electric Shock Prevention  Polarity must be correct. Otherwise burst, damage, etc.
may occur.
WARNING  While power is ON or for some time after power-OFF, do
 While power is ON or when the inverter is running, do not not touch the inverter since the inverter will be extremely
open the front cover. Otherwise you may get an electric hot. Doing so can cause burns.
shock.
 Do not run the inverter with the front cover or wiring cover 4. Additional Instructions
removed. Otherwise you may access the exposed high- Also the following points must be noted to prevent an
voltage terminals or the charging part of the circuitry and accidental failure, injury, electric shock, etc.
get an electric shock. (1) Transportation and Mounting
 Even if power is OFF, do not remove the front cover
except for wiring or periodic inspection. You may CAUTION
accidentally touch the charged inverter circuits and get an  The product must be transported in correct method that
electric shock. corresponds to the weight. Failure to do so may lead to
 Before wiring or inspection, power must be switched OFF. injuries.
To confirm that, LED indication of the operation panel  Do not stack the boxes containing inverters higher than
must be checked. (It must be OFF.) Any person who is the number recommended.
involved in wiring or inspection shall wait for at least 10  The product must be installed to the position where
minutes after the power supply has been switched OFF withstands the weight of the product according to the
and check that there are no residual voltage using a tester information in the Instruction Manual.
or the like. The capacitor is charged with high voltage for  Do not install or operate the inverter if it is damaged or
some time after power OFF, and it is dangerous. has parts missing.
 This inverter must be earthed (grounded). Earthing  When carrying the inverter, do not hold it by the front
(grounding) must conform to the requirements of national cover or setting dial; it may fall off or fail.
and local safety regulations and electrical code (NEC  Do not stand or rest heavy objects on the product.
section 250, IEC 536 class 1 and other applicable standards).  The inverter mounting orientation must be correct.
A neutral-point earthed (grounded) power supply for 400V  Foreign conductive objects must be prevented from
class inverter in compliance with EN standard must be used. entering the inverter. That includes screws and metal
 Any person who is involved in wiring or inspection of this fragments or other flammable substance such as oil.
equipment shall be fully competent to do the work.  As the inverter is a precision instrument, do not drop or
 The inverter must be installed before wiring. Otherwise subject it to impact.
you may get an electric shock or be injured.  The inverter must be used under the following
 Setting dial and key operations must be performed with environment: Otherwise the inverter may be damaged.
dry hands to prevent an electric shock. Otherwise you Surrounding
may get an electric shock. air -10°C to +50°C (non-freezing)
 Do not subject the cables to scratches, excessive stress, temperature
heavy loads or pinching. Otherwise you may get an Ambient
90%RH or less (non-condensing)
humidity
electric shock.
Environment
Storage
 Do not change the cooling fan while power is ON. It is temperature
-20°C to +65°C *1
dangerous to change the cooling fan while power is ON. Indoors (free from corrosive gas, flammable gas,
 Do not touch the printed circuit board or handle the cables Atmosphere
oil mist, dust and dirt)
with wet hands. Otherwise you may get an electric shock. Maximum 1000m above sea level for standard
 When measuring the main circuit capacitor capacity, the operation. After that derate by 3% for every extra
Altitude/ 500m up to 2500m (91%).
DC voltage is applied to the motor for 1s at powering OFF. vibration
Never touch the motor terminal, etc. right after powering 5.9m/s2 or less at 10 to 55Hz (directions of X, Y, Z
axes)
OFF to prevent an electric shock.
1 Temperature applicable for a short time, e.g. in transit.
A-1
(2) Wiring
CAUTION CAUTION
 The electronic thermal relay function does not guarantee
 Do not install a power factor correction capacitor or surge
protection of the motor from overheating. It is
suppressor/capacitor type filter on the inverter output
recommended to install both an external thermal and PTC
side. These devices on the inverter output side may be
thermistor for overheat protection.
overheated or burn out.
 Do not use a magnetic contactor on the inverter input for
 The connection orientation of the output cables U, V, W to
frequent starting/stopping of the inverter. Otherwise, the
the motor affects the rotation direction of the motor.
life of the inverter decreases.
(3) Trial run  The effect of electromagnetic interference must be
reduced by using an EMC filter or by other means.
CAUTION Otherwise nearby electronic equipment may be affected.
 Before starting operation, each parameter must be  Appropriate measures must be taken to suppress
confirmed and adjusted. A failure to do so may cause harmonics. Otherwise power supply harmonics from the
some machines to make unexpected motions. inverter may heat/damage the power factor correction
capacitor and generator.
(4) Usage
 When driving a 400V class motor by the inverter, the
WARNING motor must be an insulation-enhanced motor or measures
 Any person must stay away from the equipment when the must be taken to suppress surge voltage. Surge voltage
retry function is set as it will restart suddenly after trip. attributable to the wiring constants may occur at the
motor terminals, deteriorating the insulation of the motor.
 Since pressing key may not stop output depending  When parameter clear or all parameter clear is performed,
the required parameters must be set again before starting
on the function setting status, separate circuit and switch
operations because all parameters return to the initial value.
that make an emergency stop (power OFF, mechanical
 The inverter can be easily set for high-speed operation.
brake operation for emergency stop, etc.) must be provided.
Before changing its setting, the performances of the
 OFF status of the start signal must be confirmed before
motor and machine must be fully examined.
resetting the inverter fault. Resetting inverter alarm with
 Stop status cannot be hold by the inverter's brake
the start signal ON restarts the motor suddenly.
function. In addition to the inverter's brake function, a
 The inverter must be used for three-phase induction
holding device must be installed to ensure safety.
motors.
 Before running an inverter which had been stored for a
Connection of any other electrical equipment to the
long period, inspection and test operation must be
inverter output may damage the equipment.
performed.
 Do not modify the equipment.
 For prevention of damage due to static electricity, nearby
 Do not perform parts removal which is not instructed in this
metal must be touched before touching this product to
manual. Doing so may lead to fault or damage of the product.
eliminate static electricity from your body.
 If you are installing the inverter to drive a three-phase
device while you are contracted for lighting and power
service, consult your electric power supplier.
(5) Emergency stop
CAUTION
 A safety backup such as an emergency brake must be
provided to prevent hazardous condition to the machine
and equipment in case of inverter failure.
 When the breaker on the inverter input side trips, the
wiring must be checked for fault (short circuit), and
internal parts of the inverter for a damage, etc. The cause
of the trip must be identified and removed before turning
ON the power of the breaker.
 When any protective function is activated, appropriate
corrective action must be taken, and the inverter must be
reset before resuming operation.
(6) Maintenance, inspection and parts replacement

CAUTION
 Do not carry out a megger (insulation resistance) test on
the control circuit of the inverter. It will cause a failure.
(7) Disposal
CAUTION
 The inverter must be treated as industrial waste.
General instruction
Many of the diagrams and drawings in this Instruction
Manual show the inverter without a cover or partially open
for explanation. Never operate the inverter in this manner.
The cover must be always reinstalled and the instruction in
this Instruction Manual must be followed when operating
the inverter.
A-2
CONTENTS
1 OUTLINE 1
1.1 Product checking and parts identification ......................................... 2
CONTENTS
1.2 Inverter and peripheral devices .......................................................... 3
1.2.1 Peripheral devices .......................................................................................................................... 4
1.3 Removal and reinstallation of the cover............................................. 5

1.3.1 Front cover ..................................................................................................................................... 5
1.3.2 Wiring cover.................................................................................................................................... 7
1.4 Installation of the inverter and enclosure design .............................. 8

1.4.1 Inverter installation environment..................................................................................................... 8
1.4.2 Cooling system types for inverter enclosure................................................................................. 10
1.4.3 Inverter placement ........................................................................................................................ 11
2 WIRING 13
2.1 Wiring ................................................................................................. 14

2.1.1 Terminal connection diagram (sink-logic safety terminal model).................................................. 14
2.1.2 Terminal connection diagram (source-logic safety terminal model) ............................................. 15
2.2 Main circuit terminal specifications ................................................. 16

2.2.1 Specification of main circuit terminal ............................................................................................ 16
2.2.2 Terminal arrangement of the main circuit terminal, power supply and the motor wiring .............. 16
2.2.3 Cables and wiring length .............................................................................................................. 17
2.3 Control circuit specifications ........................................................... 20

2.3.1 Control circuit terminal (sink-logic safety terminal model) ............................................................ 20
2.3.2 Control circuit terminal (source-logic safety terminal model) ........................................................ 22
2.3.3 Changing the control logic ............................................................................................................ 24
2.3.4 Wiring of control circuit ................................................................................................................. 26
2.3.5 Safety stop function (sink-logic safety terminal model) ................................................................ 29
2.3.6 Safety stop function (source-logic safety terminal model) ............................................................ 31
2.3.7 Connection to the PU connector................................................................................................... 33
2.4 Connection of stand-alone option unit.............................................. 35

2.4.1 Connection of a dedicated external brake resistor (MRS type, FR-ABR)
(FR-D740-012(SC) or higher, FR-D720S-025(SC) or higher) ...................................................... 35
2.4.2 Connection of the brake unit (FR-BU2) ........................................................................................ 37
2.4.3 Connection of the high power factor converter (FR-HC) .............................................................. 38
2.4.4 Connection of the power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) ............................................ 39
2.4.5 Connection of a DC reactor (FR-HEL).......................................................................................... 39
I
3 PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER 41
3.1 EMC and leakage currents................................................................ 42

3.1.1 Leakage currents and countermeasures ...................................................................................... 42
3.1.2 EMC measures ............................................................................................................................. 44
3.1.3 Power supply harmonics............................................................................................................... 46
3.2 Installation of power factor improving reactor................................ 47
3.3 Power-OFF and magnetic contactor (MC) ........................................ 48
3.4 Inverter-driven 400V class motor ..................................................... 49
3.5 Precautions for use of the inverter .................................................. 50
3.6 Failsafe of the system which uses the inverter............................... 52
4 PARAMETERS 55
4.1 Operation panel................................................................................. 56

4.1.1 Names and functions of the operation panel ................................................................................ 56
4.1.2 Basic operation (factory setting) ................................................................................................... 57
4.1.3 Easy operation mode setting (easy setting mode)........................................................................ 58
4.1.4 Changing the parameter setting value.......................................................................................... 59
4.1.5 Setting dial push ........................................................................................................................... 59
4.2 Parameter list ................................................................................... 60

4.2.1 Parameter list................................................................................................................................ 60
4.3 Adjustment of the output torque (current) of the motor................. 77

4.3.1 Manual torque boost (Pr. 0, Pr. 46) ............................................................................................. 77
4.3.2 Acquiring large starting torque and low speed torque (General-purpose magnetic
flux vector control (Pr. 71, Pr. 80))............................................................................................... 78
4.3.3 Slip compensation (Pr. 245 to Pr. 247)........................................................................................ 81
4.3.4 Stall prevention operation (Pr. 22, Pr. 23, Pr. 48, Pr. 66, Pr. 156, Pr. 157) ................................. 82
4.4 Limiting the output frequency ......................................................... 86

4.4.1 Maximum/minimum frequency (Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Pr. 18)..................................................................... 86
4.4.2 Avoiding mechanical resonance points (frequency jumps) (Pr. 31 to Pr. 36) .............................. 87
4.5 V/F pattern........................................................................................ 88

4.5.1 Base frequency, voltage (Pr. 3, Pr. 19, Pr. 47) ............................................................................ 88
4.5.2 Load pattern selection (Pr. 14) .................................................................................................... 90
4.6 Frequency setting by external terminals ........................................ 92

4.6.1 Operation by multi-speed operation (Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27, Pr. 232 to Pr. 239)............. 92
II
4.6.2 Jog operation (Pr. 15, Pr. 16) ...................................................................................................... 94
4.6.3 Remote setting function (Pr. 59) .................................................................................................. 96
4.7 Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/
CONTENTS
deceleration pattern......................................................................... 99
4.7.1 Setting of the acceleration and deceleration time
(Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 20, Pr. 44, Pr. 45) ............................................................................................. 99
4.7.2 Starting frequency and start-time hold function (Pr. 13, Pr. 571) .............................................. 101
4.7.3 Acceleration/deceleration pattern (Pr. 29) ................................................................................. 102
4.8 Selection and protection of a motor .............................................. 103

4.8.1 Motor overheat protection (Electronic thermal O/L relay, PTC thermistor protection) (Pr. 9, Pr. 51,
Pr. 561) ...................................................................................................................................... 103
4.8.2 Applied motor (Pr. 71, Pr. 450) .................................................................................................. 106
4.8.3 Exhibiting the best performance for the motor (offline auto tuning)
(Pr. 71, Pr. 80, Pr. 82 to Pr. 84, Pr. 90, Pr. 96).......................................................................... 108
4.9 Motor brake and stop operation..................................................... 112

4.9.1 DC injection brake (Pr. 10 to Pr. 12).......................................................................................... 112
4.9.2 Selection of a regenerative brake (Pr. 30, Pr. 70) ..................................................................... 113
4.9.3 Stop selection (Pr. 250) ............................................................................................................. 115
4.10 Function assignment of external terminal and control................. 116

4.10.1 Input terminal function selection (Pr. 178 to Pr. 182) ................................................................ 116
4.10.2 Inverter output shutoff signal (MRS signal, Pr. 17) .................................................................... 118
4.10.3 Condition selection of function validity by second function selection signal (RT) ...................... 119
4.10.4 Start signal operation selection (STF, STR, STOP signal, Pr. 250) .......................................... 120
4.10.5 Output terminal function selection (Pr. 190, Pr. 192, Pr. 197) ................................................... 122
4.10.6 Detection of output frequency (SU, FU signal, Pr. 41 to Pr. 43) ................................................ 126
4.10.7 Output current detection function
(Y12 signal, Y13 signal, Pr. 150 to Pr. 153, Pr. 166, Pr. 167) ................................................... 127
4.10.8 Remote output selection (REM signal, Pr. 495, Pr. 496) ........................................................... 129
4.11 Monitor display and monitor output signal .................................... 130

4.11.1 Speed display and speed setting (Pr. 37).................................................................................. 130
4.11.2 Monitor display selection of operation panel/PU and terminal AM
(Pr. 52, Pr.158, Pr. 170, Pr. 171, Pr. 268, Pr. 563, Pr. 564, Pr. 891) ........................................ 131
4.11.3 Reference of the terminal AM (analog voltage output) (Pr. 55, Pr. 56) ..................................... 136
4.11.4 Terminal AM calibration (calibration parameter C1 (Pr.901)) .................................................... 137
4.12 Operation selection at power failure and instantaneous power

failure.............................................................................................. 139
4.12.1 Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure/flying start
(Pr. 30, Pr. 57, Pr. 58, Pr. 96, Pr. 162, Pr. 165, Pr. 298, Pr. 299, Pr. 611) ................................ 139
4.12.2 Power-failure deceleration stop function (Pr. 261) .................................................................... 145
4.13 Operation setting at fault occurrence ........................................... 147
III
4.13.1 Retry function (Pr. 65, Pr. 67 to Pr. 69) ..................................................................................... 147
4.13.2 Input/output phase loss protection selection (Pr. 251, Pr. 872) ................................................. 149
4.13.3 Earth (ground) fault detection at start (Pr. 249) ......................................................................... 149
4.14 Energy saving operation ................................................................ 150

4.14.1 Optimum excitation control (Pr. 60) ........................................................................................... 150
4.15 Motor noise, EMI measures, mechanical resonance .................... 151

4.15.1 PWM carrier frequency and Soft-PWM control (Pr. 72, Pr. 240, Pr. 260).................................. 151
4.15.2 Speed smoothing control (Pr. 653) ............................................................................................ 152
4.16 Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 2, 4) ........................ 153

4.16.1 Analog input selection (Pr. 73, Pr. 267) ..................................................................................... 153
4.16.2 Response level of analog input and noise elimination (Pr. 74).................................................. 155
4.16.3 Bias and gain of frequency setting voltage (current)
(Pr. 125, Pr. 126, Pr. 241, C2 (Pr. 902) to C7 (Pr. 905)) ........................................................... 156
4.17 Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction ........ 161

4.17.1 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection (Pr. 75) .................................... 161
4.17.2 Parameter write disable selection (Pr. 77)................................................................................. 164
4.17.3 Reverse rotation prevention selection (Pr. 78) .......................................................................... 165
4.17.4 Extended parameter display (Pr. 160) ....................................................................................... 165
4.17.5 Password function (Pr. 296, Pr. 297)......................................................................................... 166
4.18 Selection of operation mode and operation location ................... 168

4.18.1 Operation mode selection (Pr. 79)............................................................................................. 168
4.18.2 Operation mode at power-ON (Pr. 79, Pr. 340) ......................................................................... 178
4.18.3 Start command source and frequency command source during communication
operation (Pr. 338, Pr. 339, Pr. 551).......................................................................................... 179
4.19 Communication operation and setting .......................................... 183

4.19.1 Wiring and configuration of PU connector ................................................................................. 183
4.19.2 Initial settings and specifications of RS-485 communication
(Pr. 117 to Pr. 120, Pr. 123, Pr. 124, Pr. 549) ........................................................................... 186
4.19.3 Operation selection at communication error occurrence (Pr. 121, Pr. 122, Pr. 502) ................. 187
4.19.4 Communication EEPROM write selection (Pr. 342) .................................................................. 190
4.19.5 Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link communication) ...................................................... 191
4.19.6 Modbus-RTU communication specifications
(Pr. 117, Pr. 118, Pr. 120, Pr. 122, Pr. 343, Pr. 502, Pr. 549) ................................................... 203
4.20 Special operation and frequency control ...................................... 215

4.20.1 PID control (Pr. 127 to Pr. 134, Pr. 575 to Pr. 577) ................................................................... 215
4.20.2 Dancer control (Pr. 44, Pr. 45, Pr. 128 to Pr. 134)..................................................................... 223
4.20.3 Traverse function (Pr. 592 to Pr. 597) ....................................................................................... 229
4.20.4 Regeneration avoidance function (Pr. 665, Pr. 882, Pr. 883, Pr. 885, Pr. 886)......................... 231
4.21 Useful functions ............................................................................. 233
IV
4.21.1 Cooling fan operation selection (Pr. 244) .................................................................................. 233
4.21.2 Display of the lives of the inverter parts (Pr. 255 to Pr. 259) ..................................................... 234
4.21.3 Maintenance timer alarm (Pr. 503, Pr. 504) .............................................................................. 238
CONTENTS
4.21.4 Current average value monitor signal (Pr. 555 to Pr. 557) ........................................................ 239
4.21.5 Free parameter (Pr. 888, Pr. 889) ............................................................................................. 241
4.22 Setting the parameter unit and operation panel ........................... 242
4.22.1 RUN key rotation direction selection (Pr. 40) ............................................................................ 242
4.22.2 PU display language selection (Pr.145) .................................................................................... 242
4.22.3 Operation panel frequency setting/key lock selection (Pr. 161) ................................................ 243
4.22.4 Magnitude of frequency change setting (Pr. 295)...................................................................... 245
4.22.5 Buzzer control (Pr. 990)............................................................................................................. 246
4.22.6 PU contrast adjustment (Pr. 991) .............................................................................................. 246
4.23 Parameter clear/ All parameter clear ............................................ 247
4.24 Initial value change list.................................................................. 248
4.25 Check and clear of the faults history ............................................ 249
5 TROUBLESHOOTING 251
5.1 Reset method of protective function .............................................. 252
5.2 List of fault or alarm indications..................................................... 253
5.3 Causes and corrective actions ....................................................... 254
5.4 Correspondences between digital and actual characters ............. 263
5.5 Check first when you have a trouble .............................................. 264

5.5.1 Motor does not start.................................................................................................................... 264
5.5.2 Motor or machine is making abnormal acoustic noise................................................................ 266
5.5.3 Inverter generates abnormal noise............................................................................................. 267
5.5.4 Motor generates heat abnormally ............................................................................................... 267
5.5.5 Motor rotates in the opposite direction ....................................................................................... 267
5.5.6 Speed greatly differs from the setting ......................................................................................... 267
5.5.7 Acceleration/deceleration is not smooth ..................................................................................... 268
5.5.8 Speed varies during operation.................................................................................................... 268
5.5.9 Operation mode is not changed properly ................................................................................... 269
5.5.10 Operation panel display is not operating .................................................................................... 269
5.5.11 Motor current is too large............................................................................................................ 269
5.5.12 Speed does not accelerate ......................................................................................................... 270
5.5.13 Unable to write parameter setting............................................................................................... 270
6 PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 271
V
6.1 Inspection items ............................................................................. 272
6.1.1 Daily inspection........................................................................................................................... 272
6.1.2 Periodic inspection...................................................................................................................... 272
6.1.3 Daily and periodic inspection ...................................................................................................... 273
6.1.4 Display of the life of the inverter parts ........................................................................................ 274
6.1.5 Cleaning...................................................................................................................................... 275
6.1.6 Replacement of parts.................................................................................................................. 275
6.2 Measurement of main circuit voltages, currents and powers....... 279

6.2.1 Measurement of powers ............................................................................................................. 281
6.2.2 Measurement of voltages and use of PT .................................................................................... 281
6.2.3 Measurement of currents............................................................................................................ 282
6.2.4 Use of CT and transducer........................................................................................................... 282
6.2.5 Measurement of inverter input power factor ............................................................................... 282
6.2.6 Measurement of converter output voltage (across terminals P/+ and N/-) ................................. 282
6.2.7 Insulation resistance test using megger ..................................................................................... 283
6.2.8 Pressure test............................................................................................................................... 283
7 SPECIFICATIONS 285
7.1 Rating .............................................................................................. 286

7.1.1 Inverter rating.............................................................................................................................. 286
7.2 Common specifications .................................................................. 287
7.3 Outline dimension drawings ........................................................... 288
APPENDIX 291
Appendix 1 Specification change ................................................................................ 292

Appendix 1-1 SERIAL number check .................................................................................................... 292
Appendix 1-2 Changed function ............................................................................................................ 292
Appendix 2 Index ........................................................................................................... 293
VI
1 OUTLINE
This chapter explains the "OUTLINE" for use of this product.

Always read the instructions before using the equipment.
1.1 Product checking and parts identification ................................. 2

1.2 Inverter and peripheral devices................................................... 3
1.3 Removal and reinstallation of the cover ..................................... 5 1
1.4 Installation of the inverter and enclosure design ...................... 8
<Abbreviation>
PU .................................................. Operation panel and parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07)
Inverter ........................................... Mitsubishi inverter FR-D700 series 2
FR-D700 ........................................ Mitsubishi inverter FR-D700 series
Pr. ................................................... Parameter number (Number assigned to function)
PU operation .................................. Operation using the PU (operation panel/FR-PU04/FR-PU07)
External operation .......................... Operation using the control circuit signals
Combined operation ....................... Operation using both the PU (operation panel/FR-PU04/FR- 3
PU07) and External operation
Operation panel for E500, PA02..... FR-E500 series operation panel (FR-PA02-02)
Mitsubishi standard motor .............. SF-JR
Mitsubishi constant-torque motor ... SF-HRCA
<Trademark> 4
 Microsoft and Visual C++ are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States
and/or other countries.
 Company and product names herein are the trademarks and registered trademarks of their
respective owners.
<Mark> 5
REMARKS :Additional helpful contents and relations with other functions are stated.
NOTE :Contents requiring caution or cases when set functions are not
activated are stated.
6
POINT :Useful contents and points are stated.
Parameters referred to : Related parameters are stated.
1
Product checking and parts identification
1.1 Product checking and parts identification

Unpack the inverter and check the capacity plate on the front cover and the rating plate on the inverter side face to ensure that
the product agrees with your order and the inverter is intact.
Inverter model
FR - D740 - 036 - EC
Symbol Voltage class Symbol Model

Represents the
D740 Three-phase 400V class rated current No symbol Sink-logic safety terminal
D720S Single-phase 200V class SC Source-logic safety terminal
Operation panel
(Refer to page 56) Cooling fan
(Refer to page 275)
Voltage/current input switch

(Refer to page 20)
PU connector
(Refer to page 21)
Front cover
Control circuit terminal
(Refer to page 5) block
(Refer to page 20)
Changing the control

logic jumper connector
(Refer to page 24)
Main circuit
terminal block
(Refer to page 16)
Combed shaped
wiring cover
(Refer to page 7)
Capacity plate
Production year and month
036
Rating plate DATE:XXXX-XX
Inverter model Serial number Inverter model FR-D740-036-EC

Input rating
Output rating
Serial number
 Accessory
· Fan cover fixing screws (M3  35mm)
These screws are necessary for compliance with the EU Directive. (Refer to the Installation Guideline)
Type Quantity
FR-D740-036(SC) to 080(SC)
1
FR-D720S-070(SC), 100(SC)
FR-D740-120(SC), 160(SC) 2
2
Inverter and peripheral devices
1.2 Inverter and peripheral devices

Three-phase AC power supply Enclosure surface operation
Use within the permissible power supply
panel (FR-PA07)
specifications of the inverter. To ensure
safety, use a moulded case circuit breaker, By connecting the connection RS-232C - RS-485 converter is
earth leakage circuit breaker or magnetic cable (FR-CB2) to the PU required when connecting to PC
contactor to switch power ON/OFF. connector, operation can be with RS-232C interface.
(Refer to page 286) performed from FR-PU07, FR- (Refer to page 183)
Moulded case circuit breaker PA07. (Refer to page 33)
(MCCB) or earth leakage circuit Parameter unit
breaker (ELB), fuse (FR-PU07)
The breaker must be selected carefully
since an in-rush current flows in the
inverter at power on. RS-485 RS-232C
(Refer to page 4) Converter
Magnetic contactor (MC)
Install the magnetic contactor to ensure
safety. Do not use this magnetic contactor
S1 Approved safety
to start and stop the inverter. Doing so will
S2 relay module
cause the inverter life to be shorten. Required for
(Refer to page 48) SC
compliance with
Reactor (FR-HAL, FR-HEL option) safety standard.
Reactors (option) must be used when
power harmonics measures are taken,
the power factor is to be improved or the
inverter is installed near a large power
supply system (500kVA or more). The
inverter may be damaged if you do not
use reactors. Select the reactor according
to the model. Remove the jumpers across
Brake resistor
terminals P/+ and P1 to connect the DC reactor.
(FR-ABR, MRS type)
AC reactor (FR-HAL) DC reactor (FR-HEL) Braking capability can be improved.
* (Refer to page 35)
1
P/+
Inverter (FR-D700) PR
P/+ P1
OUTLINE
EMC filter (ferrite core)* EMC filter (ferrite core)*
(FR-BSF01, FR-BLF) (FR-BSF01, FR-BLF)
Install a noise filter to reduce R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
EMC filter Earth (Ground) Install an EMC filter (ferrite core)
the electromagnetic noise
(capacitor) * U VW to reduce the electromagnetic noise
generated from the inverter.
(FR-BIF) generated from the inverter.
Effective in the range from P/+ N/- Effective in the range from about
about 1MHz to 10MHz. When Reduces the 1MHz to 10MHz. A wire should be
more wires are passed radio noise.
through, a more effective result wound four turns at a maximum.
can be obtained. A wire should
be wound four turns or more. Motor
* Filterpack (FR-BFP2), which contains DC reactor and EMC filter in one package, is also available.
Brake unit
(FR-BU2)
Devices connected to the output Earth (Ground)

Do not install a power factor correction capacitor,
P/+ PR
surge suppressor or capacitor type filter on the output
P/+ side of the inverter. When installing a moulded case
PR circuit breaker on the output side of the inverter,
contact each manufacturer for selection of the
moulded case circuit breaker.
High power factor Power regeneration Resistor unit (FR-BR) Earth (Ground)
converter (FR-HC) common converter Discharging resistor (GZG, GRZG)
To prevent an electric shock, always earth (ground)
(FR-CV)
the motor and inverter. For reduction of induction noise
Power supply harmonics Great braking capability The regenerative braking capability
from the power line of the inverter, it is recommended
can be greatly suppressed. is obtained. of the inverter can be exhibited fully.
to wire the earth (ground) cable by returning it to the
Install this as required. Install this as required. Install this as required.
earth (ground) terminal of the inverter.
NOTE
 The life of the inverter is influenced by surrounding air temperature. The surrounding air temperature should be as low as
possible within the permissible range. This must be noted especially when the inverter is installed in an enclosure. (Refer to page 8)
 Wrong wiring might lead to damage of the inverter. The control signal lines must be kept fully away from the main
circuit to protect them from noise. (Refer to page 14)
 Do not install a power factor correction capacitor, surge suppressor or EMC filter (capacitor) on the inverter output
side. This will cause the inverter to trip or the capacitor and surge suppressor to be damaged. If any of the above
devices are connected, immediately remove them.
 Electromagnetic wave interference
The input/output (main circuit) of the inverter includes high frequency components, which may interfere with the
communication devices (such as AM radios) used near the inverter. In this case, install the FR-BIF optional EMC filter
(capacitor) (for use in the input side only) or FR-BSF01 or FR-BLF EMC filter (ferrite core) to minimize interference. (Refer
to page 44).
 Refer to the Instruction Manual of each option and peripheral devices for details of peripheral devices.
3
Inverter and peripheral devices
1.2.1 Peripheral devices
Check the inverter model of the inverter you purchased. Appropriate peripheral devices must be selected according to the capacity.
Refer to the following list and prepare appropriate peripheral devices.
Moulded Case Circuit Breaker
(MCCB)  Magnetic Contactor (MC)
Motor Reactor
or Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker 
Inverter Model Output (ELB) 
(kW) Reactor connection Reactor connection
FR-HAL FR-HEL
without with without with
FR-D740-012(SC) 0.4 5A 5A S-N10 S-N10 H0.4K H0.4K
Three-Phase 400V

FR-D740-120(SC) 5.5 30A 20A S-N20, S-N21 S-N11, S-N12 H5.5K H5.5K
FR-D740-160(SC) 7.5 30A 30A S-N20, S-N21 S-N20, S-N21 H7.5K H7.5K
FR-D720S-008(SC) 0.1 5A 5A S-N10 S-N10 0.4K 0.4K
Single-Phase 200V
FR-D720S-014(SC) 0.2 5A 5A S-N10 S-N10 0.4K 0.4K

FR-D720S-025(SC) 0.4 10A 10A S-N10 S-N10 0.75K 0.75K
FR-D720S-042(SC) 0.75 15A 10A S-N10 S-N10 1.5K 1.5K
FR-D720S-070(SC) 1.5 20A 20A S-N10 S-N10 2.2K 2.2K
FR-D720S-100(SC) 2.2 40A 30A S-N20, S-N21 S-N10 3.7K 3.7K
 Select a MCCB according to the power supply capacity.

MCCB INV IM
Install one MCCB per inverter.
MCCB INV IM
 For the use in the United States or Canada, select an UL and cUL certified fuse with Class T fuse equivalent cut-off
speed or faster with the appropriate rating for branch circuit protection. Alternatively, select a UL489 molded case circuit breaker (MCCB).
 Magnetic contactor is selected based on the AC-1 class. The electrical durability of magnetic contactor is 500,000 times. When the magnetic contactor is
used for emergency stop during motor driving, the electrical durability is 25 times.
When using the MC for emergency stop during motor driving or using on the motor side during commercial-power supply operation, select the MC with class
AC-3 rated current for the motor rated current.
 The power factor may be slightly lower.
NOTE
 When the inverter capacity is larger than the motor capacity, select an MCCB and a magnetic contactor according to the inverter model,
and cable and reactor according to the motor output.
 When the breaker on the inverter input side trips, check for the wiring fault (short circuit), damage to internal parts of the inverter, etc.
Identify the cause of the trip, then remove the cause and power ON the breaker.
4
Removal and reinstallation of the cover
1.3 Removal and reinstallation of the cover

1.3.1 Front cover
FR-D740-080(SC) or lower
FR-D720S-008(SC) to 100(SC)
Removal (Example of FR-D740-036(SC))
1) Loosen the installation screws of the front cover. (The screws cannot be removed.)
2) Remove the front cover by pulling it like the direction of arrow.
1) 2)
Installation screw
Reinstallation (Example of FR-D740-036(SC))

1
1) Place the front cover in front of the inverter, and install it straight.
2) Tighten the installation screws on the front cover.
OUTLINE
1) 2)
Installation screw
5
FR-D740-120(SC) or higher
Removal (Example of FR-D740-160(SC))
1) Loosen the installation screws of the front cover. (The screws cannot be removed.)
2) Remove the front cover by pulling it like the direction of arrow with holding the installation hook on the front cover.
Installation hook
1) 2)
Installation
screw
Reinstallation (Example of FR-D740-160(SC))

1) Insert the two fixed hooks on the lower side of the front cover into the sockets of the inverter.
2) Tighten the installation screws on the front cover.
1) 2)
Installation screw
Fixed hook
Socket of the inverter
NOTE
 Fully make sure that the front cover has been reinstalled securely.
 The same serial number is printed on the capacity plate of the front cover and the rating plate of the inverter. Since
these plates have the same serial numbers, always reinstall the removed cover onto the original inverter.
6
1.3.2 Wiring cover

Removal and reinstallation
FR-D740-080(SC) or lower, FR-D720S-008(SC) to 100(SC)

 Hold the side of the wiring cover, and pull it downward for  Also pull the wiring cover downward by holding a
removal. frontal part of the wiring cover.
To reinstall, fit the cover to the inverter along the guides.
Wiring cover
Guide
Wiring cover
Example of FR-D740-036(SC)
1
OUTLINE
 The cover can be removed easily by pulling it toward you.
To reinstall, fit the cover to the inverter along the guides.
Guide
Guide
Wiring cover
7
Installation of the inverter and enclosure design
1.4 Installation of the inverter and enclosure design

When an inverter enclosure is to be designed and manufactured, heat generated by contained equipment, etc., the
environment of an operating place, and others must be fully considered to determine the enclosure structure, size and
equipment layout. The inverter unit uses many semiconductor devices. To ensure higher reliability and long period of
operation, operate the inverter in the ambient environment that completely satisfies the equipment specifications.
1.4.1 Inverter installation environment

As the inverter installation environment should satisfy the standard specifications indicated in the following table, operation in
any place that does not meet these conditions not only deteriorates the performance and life of the inverter, but also causes a
failure. Refer to the following points and take adequate measures.
Environmental standard specifications of inverter
Item Description
Surrounding air
-10°C to +50°C (non-freezing)
temperature
Ambient humidity 90%RH or less (non-condensing)
Atmosphere Free from corrosive and explosive gases, free from dust and dirt
Maximum altitude 1,000m or less
Vibration 5.9m/s2 or less at 10 to 55Hz (directions of X, Y, Z axes)
(1) Temperature
The permissible surrounding air temperature of the inverter is between -10°C and +50°C. Always operate the inverter within
this temperature range. Operation outside this range will considerably shorten the service lives of the semiconductors, parts,
capacitors and others. Take the following measures so that the surrounding air temperature of the inverter falls within the
specified range.
1) Measures against high temperature
 Use a forced ventilation system or similar cooling system. (Refer to page 10)
 Install the panel in an air-conditioned electrical chamber.
 Block direct sunlight.
 Provide a shield or similar plate to avoid direct exposure to the radiated heat and wind of a heat source.
 Ventilate the area around the panel well.
2) Measures against low temperature

 Provide a space heater in the enclosure.
 Do not power OFF the inverter. (Keep the start signal of the inverter OFF.)
3) Sudden temperature changes

 Select an installation place where temperature does not change suddenly.
 Avoid installing the inverter near the air outlet of an air conditioner.
 If temperature changes are caused by opening/closing of a door, install the inverter away from the door.
(2) Humidity
Normally operate the inverter within the 45 to 90% range of the ambient humidity. Too high humidity will pose problems of
reduced insulation and metal corrosion. On the other hand, too low humidity may produce a spatial electrical breakdown. The
insulation distance specified in JEM1103 "Control Equipment Insulator" is defined as humidity 45 to 85%.
1) Measures against high humidity
 Make the panel enclosed, and provide it with a hygroscopic agent.
 Take dry air into the enclosure from outside.
 Provide a space heater in the enclosure.
2) Measures against low humidity

What is important in fitting or inspection of the unit in this status is to discharge your body (static electricity)
beforehand and keep your body from contact with the parts and patterns, besides blowing air of proper humidity into
the enclosure from outside.
3) Measures against condensation

Condensation may occur if frequent operation stops change the in-enclosure temperature suddenly or if the outside-
air temperature changes suddenly.
Condensation causes such faults as reduced insulation and corrosion.
 Take the measures against high humidity in 1).
 Do not power OFF the inverter. (Keep the start signal of the inverter OFF.)
8
(3) Dust, dirt, oil mist

Dust and dirt will cause such faults as poor contact of contact points, reduced insulation or reduced cooling effect due to
moisture absorption of accumulated dust and dirt, and in-enclosure temperature rise due to clogged filter. In the atmosphere
where conductive powder floats, dust and dirt will cause such faults as malfunction, deteriorated insulation and short circuit in
a short time.
Since oil mist will cause similar conditions, it is necessary to take adequate measures.
Countermeasures
 Place in a totally enclosed enclosure.
Take measures if the in-enclosure temperature rises. (Refer to page 10)
 Purge air.
Pump clean air from outside to make the in-enclosure pressure higher than the outside-air pressure.
(4) Corrosive gas, salt damage

If the inverter is exposed to corrosive gas or to salt near a beach, the printed board patterns and parts will corrode or the
relays and switches will result in poor contact.
In such places, take the measures given in Section 3.
(5) Explosive, flammable gases

As the inverter is non-explosion proof, it must be contained in an explosion proof enclosure. In places where explosion may be
caused by explosive gas, dust or dirt, an enclosure cannot be used unless it structurally complies with the guidelines and has
passed the specified tests. This makes the enclosure itself expensive (including the test charges). The best way is to avoid
installation in such places and install the inverter in a non-hazardous place. 1
(6) Highland
OUTLINE
Use the inverter at the altitude of within 1000m. If it is used at a higher place, it is likely that thin air will reduce the cooling
effect and low air pressure will deteriorate dielectric strength.
Maximum 1000m above sea level for standard operation. After that derate by 3% for every extra 500m up to 2500m (91%).
(7) Vibration, impact

The vibration resistance of the inverter is up to 5.9m/s2 at 10 to 55Hz frequency and 1mm amplitude for the directions of X, Y,
Z axes. Vibration or impact, if less than the specified value, applied for a long time may make the mechanism loose or cause
poor contact to the connectors.
Especially when impact is imposed repeatedly, caution must be taken as the part pins are likely to break.
Countermeasures
 Provide the panel with rubber vibration isolators.
 Strengthen the structure to prevent the enclosure from resonance.
 Install the enclosure away from sources of vibration.
9
1.4.2 Cooling system types for inverter enclosure
From the enclosure that contains the inverter, the heat of the inverter and other equipment (transformers, lamps, resistors,
etc.) and the incoming heat such as direct sunlight must be dissipated to keep the in-enclosure temperature lower than the
permissible temperatures of the in-enclosure equipment including the inverter.
The cooling systems are classified as follows in terms of the cooling calculation method.
1) Cooling by natural heat dissipation from the enclosure surface (totally enclosed type)
2) Cooling by heat sink (aluminum fin, etc.)
3) Cooling by ventilation (forced ventilation type, pipe ventilation type)
4) Cooling by heat exchanger or cooler (heat pipe, cooler, etc.)
Cooling System Enclosure Structure Comment
Low in cost and generally used, but the enclosure size

Natural ventilation
increases as the inverter capacity increases. For relatively
(enclosed, open type) INV
small capacities.
Natural
cooling
Being a totally enclosed type, the most appropriate for hostile
Natural ventilation
environment having dust, dirt, oil mist, etc. The enclosure size
(totally enclosed type)
INV increases depending on the inverter capacity.
Heatsink Having restrictions on the heatsink mounting position and

Heatsink cooling
INV area, and designed for relative small capacities.
For general indoor installation. Appropriate for enclosure

Forced Forced ventilation
INV downsizing and cost reduction, and often used.
cooling
Heat pipe
Heat pipe Totally enclosed type for enclosure downsizing.

INV
10
1.4.3 Inverter placement
(1) Installation of the inverter

Enclosure surface mounting
Remove the front cover and wiring cover to mount the inverter to the surface.
FR-D720S-008(SC) to 042(SC) FR-D740-012(SC) or higher
FR-D720S-070(SC), 100(SC)
Front cover
Front cover
Wiring cover
Wiring cover
NOTE
 When encasing multiple inverters, install them in parallel as a cooling
measure.
1
 Install the inverter vertically.
OUTLINE
Vertical
Refer to th
e clearanc
shown on e
the left.
(2) Clearances around inverter

To ensure ease of heat dissipation and maintenance, leave at least the shown clearances around the inverter. At least the
following clearances are required under the inverter as a wiring space, and above the inverter as a heat dissipation space.
Surrounding air temperature and humidity Clearances (front) Clearances (side)
Measurement
position
5cm Inverter 5cm 10cm or more
1cm 1cm
5cm or more* or more*
Measurement Inverter
1cm
position
or more
*
Temperature: -10 C to +50 C
Humidity: 90% RH or less 10cm or more
Leave enough clearances and * When using the inverters at the surrounding * 5cm or more for the FR-
take cooling measures. air temperature of 40 C or less, the inverters D740-120(SC) or higher
can be installed without any clearance
between them (0cm clearance).
When surrounding air temperature exceeds
40 C, clearances between the inverters
should be 1cm or more (5cm or more for the
FR-D740-120(SC) or higher).
11
(3) Inverter mounting orientation

Mount the inverter on a wall as specified. Do not mount it horizontally or any other way.
(4) Above inverter

Heat is blown up from inside the inverter by the small fan built in the unit. Any equipment placed above the inverter should be
heat resistant.
(5) Arrangement of multiple inverters
When multiple inverters are placed in the same

enclosure, generally arrange them horizontally as shown
in the right figure (a). When it is inevitable to arrange
Inverter Inverter Inverter Inverter
them vertically to minimize space, take such measures as
to provide guides since heat from the bottom inverters
can increase the temperatures in the top inverters, Guide Guide Guide
causing inverter failures.
Inverter Inverter
When mounting multiple inverters, fully take caution not
to make the surrounding air temperature of the inverter
higher than the permissible value by providing ventilation Enclosure Enclosure
and increasing the enclosure size. (a) Horizontal arrangement (b) Vertical arrangement
Arrangement of multiple inverters
(6) Arrangement of ventilation fan and inverter
Heat generated in the inverter is blown up from the bottom of

the unit as warm air by the cooling fan. When installing a
ventilation fan for that heat, determine the place of ventilation
fan installation after fully considering an air flow. (Air passes
through areas of low resistance. Make an airway and airflow
plates to expose the inverter to cool air.) Inverter Inverter
<Good example> <Bad example>

Arrangement of ventilation fan and inverter
12
2 WIRING
This chapter describes the basic "WIRING" for use of this

product.
2.1 Wiring............................................................................................. 14 1
2.2 Main circuit terminal specifications ............................................ 16
2.3 Control circuit specifications ...................................................... 20
2.4 Connection of stand-alone option unit ....................................... 35
13
Wiring
2.1 Wiring
2.1.1 Terminal connection diagram (sink-logic safety terminal model)
Source logic *1. DC reactor (FR-HEL)
Main circuit terminal When connecting a DC reactor, remove the
jumper across P1 and P/+.
Single-phase power input Brake unit *6 A brake transistor is not built-in to the
(Option) FR-D720S-008 and 014.
MCCB MC
Single-phase *1
L1 R
*7 Brake resistor (FR-ABR, MRS type)
AC power Earth
N (Ground) *7 Install a thermal relay to prevent an
supply overheat and burnout of the brake resistor.
Jumper PR N/- (The brake resistor can not be connected
to the FR-D720S-008 and 014.)
MCCB MC P1 P/+ *6
Motor
Three-phase R/L1 U
Inrush current
AC power S/L2 V
limit circuit IM
supply T/L3 W
Earth
(Ground)
Main circuit Earth (Ground)
Control circuit
Control input signals (No voltage input allowed) C Relay output

The function of these Forward STF
Terminal functions vary
terminals can be rotation start B by Pr. 192 A,B,C terminal
STR Relay output
changed to the reset Reverse function selection
signal, etc. with the input rotation start (Fault output)
A
terminal assignment RH
High
(Pr. 178 to Pr. 182). speed
Multi-speed selection Middle RM
Open collector output
speed
SOURCE
RUN
Low RL Terminal functions vary by Pr. 190
Running
SINK
speed RUN terminal function selection

External transistor common SD
24VDC power supply common 24V Open collector output common
SE
Sink/source common
Contact input common PC *2
24VDC power supply
*2 When using terminals PC-SD as a 24VDC power
supply, take care not to short across terminals PC-SD.
Frequency setting signals (Analog) 3 10(+5V)

*3 Terminal input specifications Frequency AM (+)
can be changed by analog setting 2 0 to 5VDC *3 Analog signal output
input specifications potentiometer 2
(0 to 10VDC) (0 to 10VDC)
switchover (Pr. 73). 5 (-)
Terminal 10 and terminal 2
1/2W1kΩ
are used as PTC input *5 5(Analog common)
terminal (Pr. 561). 1
PU
*4 It is recommended to connector
Terminal 4
use 2W1kΩ when the input (+) 4 4 to 20mADC
frequency setting signal (Current (-) 0 to 5VDC
0 to 10VDC *4
is changed frequently.
input)
*5 Terminal input specifications can be changed by analog
input specifications switchover (Pr. 267). Set the V I
voltage/current input switch in the "V" position to select
voltage input (0 to 5V/0 to10V) and "I" (initial value) to Voltage/current
select current input (4 to 20mA). input switch *4
To use terminal 4 (initial setting is current input), set "4"
in any of Pr.178 to Pr.182 (input terminal function selection)
to assign the function, and turn ON AU signal.
Safety stop signal Shorting Terminal functions vary by Pr. 197 SO

wire S1 terminal function selection
Safety stop input (Channel 1) SO
S2 Output shutoff
circuit Safety monitor output *8
Safety stop input (Channel 2)
SC *8 Common terminal of terminal SO is terminal SC.
Safety stop input common (Connected to terminal SD inside of the inverter.)
NOTE
 To prevent a malfunction caused by noise, separate the signal cables more than 10cm from the power cables. Also
separate the main circuit wire of the input side and the output side.
 After wiring, wire offcuts must not be left in the inverter.
Wire offcuts can cause an alarm, failure or malfunction. Always keep the inverter clean. When drilling mounting holes
in an enclosure etc., take care not to allow chips and other foreign matter to enter the inverter.
 The output of the single-phase power input model is three-phase 200V.
14
Wiring
2.1.2 Terminal connection diagram (source-logic safety terminal model)

Source logic *1. DC reactor (FR-HEL)
Main circuit terminal When connecting a DC reactor, remove the
jumper across P1 and P/+.
Single-phase power input Brake unit *6 A brake transistor is not built-in to the
(Option) FR-D720S-008SC and 014SC.
MCCB MC
Single-phase *1
L1 R
*7 Brake resistor (FR-ABR, MRS type)
AC power Earth
N (Ground) *7 Install a thermal relay to prevent an
supply overheat and burnout of the brake resistor.
Jumper PR N/- (The brake resistor can not be connected
to the FR-D720S-008SC and 014SC.)
MCCB MC P1 P/ + *6
Motor
Three-phase R/L1 U
Inrush current
AC power S/L2 V
limit circuit IM
supply T/L3 W
Earth
(Ground)
Main circuit Earth (Ground)
Control circuit
Control input signals (No voltage input allowed) C Relay output
The function of these Forward STF
Terminal functions vary
terminals can be rotation start B by Pr. 192 A,B,C terminal
STR Relay output
changed to the reset Reverse function selection
signal, etc. with the input rotation start (Fault output)
A
terminal assignment RH
High
(Pr. 178 to Pr. 182). speed
Multi-speed selection Middle RM
speed
SOURCE
Low RL
AM (+)
SINK
speed Analog signal output

SD (0 to 10VDC)
External transistor common 5 (-)
24VDC power supply common 24V
Contact input common

24VDC power supply
PC *2
*2 When using terminals PC-SD as a 24VDC power
2
supply, take care not to short across terminals PC-SD.
PU
connector
Frequency setting signals (Analog) 3 10(+5V)
*3 Terminal input specifications Frequency
can be changed by analog setting
input specifications potentiometer 2 2 0 to 5VDC *3 WIRING
switchover (Pr. 73). (0 to 10VDC)
Terminal 10 and terminal 2
1/2W1kΩ
are used as PTC input *5 5(Analog common)
terminal (Pr. 561). 1 Open collector output
RUN
Terminal functions vary by Pr. 190
*4 It is recommended to Terminal 4 Running
use 2W1kΩ when the input (+) 4 4 to 20mADC RUN terminal function selection
frequency setting signal (Current (-) 0 to 5VDC
0 to 10VDC *4
is changed frequently.
input) SE Open collector output common
*5 Terminal input specifications can be changed by analog Safety monitor output common
input specifications switchover (Pr. 267). Set the V I Sink/source common
voltage/current input switch in the "V" position to select
voltage input (0 to 5V/0 to10V) and "I" (initial value) to Voltage/current
select current input (4 to 20mA). input switch *4
To use terminal 4 (initial setting is current input), set "4"
in any of Pr.178 to Pr.182 (input terminal function selection)
to assign the function, and turn ON AU signal.
Safety stop signal Terminal functions vary by Pr. 197 SO

Shorting terminal function selection
wire S1 SO
Safety stop input (Channel 1)
Output shutoff Safety monitor output *8
S2
Safety stop input (Channel 2) circuit
*8 Common terminal of terminal SO is terminal SE.
24V
Safety stop input common
SC
NOTE
 To prevent a malfunction caused by noise, separate the signal cables more than 10cm from the power cables. Also
separate the main circuit wire of the input side and the output side.
 After wiring, wire offcuts must not be left in the inverter.
Wire offcuts can cause an alarm, failure or malfunction. Always keep the inverter clean. When drilling mounting holes
in an enclosure etc., take care not to allow chips and other foreign matter to enter the inverter.
 The output of the single-phase power input model is three-phase 200V.
15
Main circuit terminal specifications
2.2 Main circuit terminal specifications

2.2.1 Specification of main circuit terminal
Terminal
Terminal Name Description
Symbol
R/L1, Connect to the commercial power supply.
S/L2, AC power input Keep these terminals open when using the high power factor converter (FR-HC) or
T/L3 power regeneration common converter (FR-CV).
U, V, W Inverter output Connect a three-phase squirrel-cage motor.
Connect a brake resistor (FR-ABR, MRS type) across terminals P/+ and PR.
P/+, PR Brake resistor connection
(The brake resistor can not be connected to the FR-D720S-008(SC) and 014(SC).)
Connect the brake unit (FR-BU2), power regeneration common converter (FR-CV)
P/+, N/- Brake unit connection
or high power factor converter (FR-HC).
P/+, P1 DC reactor connection Remove the jumper across terminals P/+ and P1 and connect a DC reactor.
Earth (Ground) For earthing (grounding) the inverter chassis. Must be earthed (grounded).
 When using single-phase power input, terminals are L1 and N.

 Indicated as "+" on the terminal block of the single-phase power input model.
 Indicated as "-" on the terminal block of the single-phase power input model.
2.2.2 Terminal arrangement of the main circuit terminal, power supply and the motor
wiring
Three-phase 400V class
FR-D740-012(SC) to 080(SC) FR-D740-120(SC), 160(SC)
Jumper Jumper Screw size (M4)

N/- P/+ R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
Screw size (M4)
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
N/- P/+ PR
PR
Screw size
(M4)
Screw size IM IM
(M4)
Power supply Motor Power supply Motor
Single-phase 200V class

FR-D720S-008(SC) to 042(SC) FR-D720S-070(SC), 100(SC)
Jumper Jumper
Screw size (M3.5)
- +
Screw size (M4)
L1 N
- + PR
L1 N PR
Screw size IM
Screw size (M4)
(M3.5) IM Power supply Motor
Power supply Motor
NOTE
 Make sure the power cables are connected to the R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3. (Phase need not be matched.) Never connect
the power cable to the U, V, and W of the inverter. Doing so will damage the inverter.
 Connect the motor to U, V, and W. Turning ON the forward rotation switch (signal) at this time rotates the motor
counterclockwise when viewed from the load shaft.
16
2.2.3 Cables and wiring length

(1) Applied wire size
Select the recommended cable size to ensure that a voltage drop will be 2% or less.
If the wiring distance is long between the inverter and motor, a main circuit cable voltage drop will cause the motor torque to
decrease especially at the output of a low frequency.
The following table indicates a selection example for the wiring length of 20m.
Three-phase 400V class (when input power supply is 440V)
Crimping Cable Size
Terminal Tightening Terminal
HIV Cables, etc. AWG  (mm2)  PVC Cables, etc. (mm2) 
Applicable Inverter
Screw Torque R/L1 R/L1 Earth R/L1 R/L1 Earth
Model
Size  N·m S/L2 U, V, W S/L2 U, V, W (ground) S/L2 U, V, W S/L2 U, V, W (ground)
T/L3 T/L3 cable T/L3 T/L3 cable
FR-D740-012(SC) to
M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
080(SC)
FR-D740-120(SC) M4 1.5 5.5-4 2-4 3.5 2 3.5 12 14 4 2.5 4
FR-D740-160(SC) M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 3.5 3.5 3.5 12 12 4 4 4
Single-phase 200V class (when input power supply is 220V)

Crimping Cable Size
Terminal Tightening Terminal HIV Cables, etc. (mm2)  AWG  PVC Cables, etc. (mm2) 
Applicable Inverter
Screw Torque Earth Earth
Model L1 L1 L1 L1
Size  N·m U, V, W U, V, W (ground) U, V, W U, V, W (ground)
N N N N
cable cable
FR-D720S-008(SC) to
M3.5 1.2 2-3.5 2-3.5 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
042(SC)
FR-D720S-070(SC) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
FR-D720S-100(SC) M4 1.5 5.5-4 2-4 3.5 2 3.5 12 14 4 2.5 4
 The cable size is that of the cable (HIV cable (600V class 2 vinyl-insulated cable) etc.) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 75°C. Assumes
that the surrounding air temperature is 50°C or less and the wiring distance is 20m or less.
 The recommended cable size is that of the cable (THHW cable) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 75°C. Assumes that the surrounding
air temperature is 40°C or less and the wiring distance is 20m or less.

(Selection example for use mainly in the United States.)
The recommended cable size is that of the cable (PVC cable) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 70°C. Assumes that the surrounding air 2
temperature is 40°C or less and the wiring distance is 20m or less.
(Selection example for use mainly in Europe.)
 The terminal screw size indicates the terminal size for R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U, V, W, PR, P/+, N/-, P1 and a screw for earthing (grounding).
For single-phase power input, the terminal screw size indicates the size of terminal screw for L1, N, U, V, W, PR, +, -, P1 and a screw for earthing WIRING
(grounding).
NOTE
 Tighten the terminal screw to the specified torque. A screw that has been tightened too loosely can cause a short circuit or
malfunction. A screw that has been tightened too tightly can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the unit breakage.
 Use crimping terminals with insulation sleeve to wire the power supply and motor.
The line voltage drop can be calculated by the following formula:
3 × wire resistance[mΩ/m] × wiring distance[m] × current[A]
Line voltage drop [V]=
1000
Use a larger diameter cable when the wiring distance is long or when it is desired to decrease the voltage drop (torque
reduction) in the low speed range.
17
(2) Earthing (Grounding) precautions

 Always earth (ground) the motor and inverter.
1) Purpose of earthing (grounding)
Generally, an electrical apparatus has an earth (ground) terminal, which must be connected to the ground before use.
An electrical circuit is usually insulated by an insulating material and encased. However, it is impossible to manufacture
an insulating material that can shut off a leakage current completely, and actually, a slight current flow into the case.
The purpose of earthing (grounding) the case of an electrical apparatus is to prevent operator from getting an electric
shock from this leakage current when touching it.
To avoid the influence of external noises, this earthing (grounding) is important to audio equipment, sensors, computers
and other apparatuses that handle low-level signals or operate very fast.
2) Earthing (grounding) methods and earthing (grounding) work
As described previously, earthing (grounding) is roughly classified into an electrical shock prevention type and a noise-
affected malfunction prevention type. Therefore, these two types should be discriminated clearly, and the following
work must be done to prevent the leakage current having the inverter's high frequency components from entering the
malfunction prevention type earthing (grounding):
(a)If possible, use (l) independent earthing (grounding) in figure below for the inverter. If independent earthing
(grounding) is not available, use (ll) common earthing (grounding) in the figure below which the inverter is connected
with the other equipment at an earthing (grounding) point.
The (lll) common earthing (grounding) as in the figure below, which inverter shares a common earth (ground) cable
with the other equipment, must be avoided.
A leakage current including many high frequency components flows in the earth (ground) cables of the inverter and
inverter-driven motor. Therefore, use the independent earthing (grounding) and separate the earthing (grounding)
cable of the inverter from equipment sensitive to EMI.
In a high building, it may be effective to use the EMI prevention type earthing (grounding) connecting to an iron
structure frame, and electric shock prevention type earthing (grounding) with the independent earthing (grounding)
together.
(b)This inverter must be earthed (grounded). Earthing (Grounding) must conform to the requirements of national and
local safety regulations and electrical codes. (NEC section 250, IEC 536 class 1 and other applicable standards).
Use an neutral-point earthed (grounded) power supply for 400V class inverter in compliance with EN standard.
(c)Use the thickest possible earth (ground) cable. The earth (ground) cable size should be no less than the size
indicated in the table on page 17.
(d)The earthing (grounding) point should be as close as possible to the inverter, and the earth (ground) cable length
should be as short as possible.
(e)Run the earth (ground) cable as far away as possible from the I/O wiring of equipment sensitive to noises and run
them in parallel in the minimum distance.
Other Other Other

Inverter Inverter Inverter
equipment equipment equipment
(I)Independent earthing (grounding).......Best (II)Common earthing (grounding).......Good (III)Common earthing (grounding) cable.......Not allowed
POINT
To be compliant with the EU Directive (Low Voltage Directive), refer to the Installation Guideline.
18
(3) Total wiring length

The overall wiring length for connection of a single motor or multiple motors should be within the value in the table
below.
200V class
Pr. 72 PWM frequency
070 or
selection Setting 008 014 025 042
higher
(carrier frequency)
1 (1kHz) or less 200m 200m 300m 500m 500m
2 to15
30m 100m 200m 300m 500m
(2kHz to 14.5kHz)
400V class
Pr. 72 PWM frequency
080 or
selection Setting 012 022 036 050
higher
(carrier frequency)
1 (1kHz) or less 200m 200m 300m 500m 500m
2 to15
30m 100m 200m 300m 500m
(2kHz to 14.5kHz)
Total wiring length (FR-D720S-070(SC) or higher, FR-D740-080(SC)

or higher)
500m or less
300m
2
300m
300m+300m=600m WIRING
When driving a 400V class motor by the inverter, surge voltages attributable to the wiring constants may occur at the
motor terminals, deteriorating the insulation of the motor.(Refer to page 86)
NOTE
 Especially for long-distance wiring, the inverter may be affected by a charging current caused by the stray
capacitances of the wiring, leading to a malfunction of the overcurrent protective function, fast response current limit
function, or stall prevention function or a malfunction or fault of the equipment connected on the inverter output side.
If malfunction of fast-response current limit function occurs, disable this function. If malfunction of stall prevention
function occurs, increase the stall level. (Refer to page 82 for Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level and Pr. 156 Stall prevention
operation selection )
 Refer to page 151 for details of Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection. Refer to the manual of the option for details of surge
voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H/FR-BMF-H).
 When using the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function with wiring length exceeding below,
select without frequency search (Pr. 162 = "1, 11"). (Refer to page 139)
Motor capacity 0.1kW 0.2kW 0.4kW or higher
Wiring length 20m 50m 100m
19
Control circuit specifications
2.3 Control circuit specifications

2.3.1 Control circuit terminal (sink-logic safety terminal model)
indicates that terminal functions can be selected using Pr. 178 to Pr. 182, Pr. 190, Pr. 192, Pr. 197 (I/O terminal function
selection). (Refer to page 116).
(1) Input signal
Terminal Refer to
Type Terminal Name Description Rated Specifications
Symbol Page
Turn ON the STF signal to
STF Forward rotation start start forward rotation and When the STF and STR Input resistance 4.7k
turn it OFF to stop. signals are turned ON Voltage when contacts are
120
Turn ON the STR signal to simultaneously, the stop open
STR Reverse rotation start start reverse rotation and command is given. 21 to 26VDC
turn it OFF to stop. When contacts are short-
RH, circuited
Multi-speed can be selected according to the
RM, Multi-speed selection 4 to 6mADC 92
combination of RH, RM and RL signals.
RL
Contact input common Common terminal for contact input terminal (sink
(sink) logic).
Contact input
Connect this terminal to the power supply common

External transistor terminal of a transistor output (open collector output)
common (source) device, such as a programmable controller, in the
SD — —
(initial setting) source logic to avoid malfunction by undesirable
currents.
Common output terminal for 24VDC 0.1A power
24VDC power supply
supply (PC terminal).
common
Isolated from terminals 5 and SE.
Power supply voltage range
common (sink) device, such as a programmable controller, in the sink
22 to 26.5VDC
PC logic to avoid malfunction by undesirable currents. 25
Contact input common permissible load current
Common terminal for contact input terminal (source
(source) (initial setting) logic). 100mA
24VDC power supply Can be used as 24VDC 0.1A power supply.
Used as power supply when connecting potentiometer 5.0V0.2VDC
Frequency setting power
10 for frequency setting (speed setting) from outside of permissible load current 153
supply
the inverter. (Refer to Pr. 73 Analog input selection.) 10mA
Inputting 0 to 5VDC (or 0 to 10V) provides the maximum Input resistance10k1k
Frequency setting output frequency at 5V (10V) and makes input and output
2 Permissible maximum 153
(voltage) proportional. Use Pr. 73 to switch between input 0 to
5VDC input (initial setting) and 0 to 10VDC. voltage 20VDC
Current input:
Inputting 4 to 20mADC (or 0 to 5V, 0 to 10V) provides Input resistance 2495
the maximum output frequency at 20mA and makes Maximum permissible
Frequency setting
input and output proportional. This input signal is valid current 30mA
only when the AU signal is ON (terminal 2 input is
invalid). To use terminal 4 (initial setting is current Voltage input:
input), set "4" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.182 (input terminal Input resistance10k 1k
Frequency setting
4 function selection) to assign the function, and turn ON Permissible maximum 153
(current)
AU signal. voltage 20VDC
Use Pr. 267 to switch from among input 4 to 20mA
(initial setting), 0 to 5VDC and 0 to 10VDC. Set the Current input
voltage/current input switch in the "V" position to select (initial status) Voltage input
voltage input (0 to 5V/0 to 10V).
Common terminal for frequency setting signal

Frequency setting
5 (terminal 2 or 4) and analog output terminal AM. Do — —
common
not earth (ground).
Adaptive PTC thermistor
PTC thermistor
For connecting PTC thermistor output. specification

10 When PTC thermistor protection is valid (Pr. 561 
PTC thermistor input Heat detection resistance : 103
2 "9999"), terminal 2 is not available for frequency
setting. 500 to 30k (Set by Pr.
561)
20
NOTE
Set Pr. 267 and a voltage/current input switch correctly, then input analog signals in accordance with the settings.
Applying a voltage with voltage/current input switch in "I" position (current input is selected) or a current with switch in
"V" position (voltage input is selected) could cause component damage of the inverter or analog circuit of output
devices. (Refer to page 153 for details.)
(2) Output signal

Terminal Reference
Symbol Page
1 changeover contact output indicates that the inverter Contact capacity:230VAC
Relay output (fault protective function has activated and the output stopped. 0.3A
Relay
A, B, C 122
output) Fault: discontinuity across B-C (continuity across A-C), (power factor =0.4)
Normal: continuity across B-C (discontinuity across A-C) 30VDC 0.3A
Switched Low when the inverter output frequency is equal
Permissible load 24VDC
to or higher than the starting frequency (initial value 0.5Hz).
(maximum 27VDC) 0.1A
Open collector
Switched High during stop or DC injection brake operation.

RUN Inverter running (a voltage drop is 3.4V 122
(Low is when the open collector output transistor is ON
maximum when the signal
(conducts). High is when the transistor is OFF (does not
is ON)
conduct).)
Open collector
SE Common terminal of terminal RUN. — —
output common
Select one e.g. output Output signal 0 to 10VDC
frequency from monitor items. Permissible load current
Output item:
Analog
Analog signal Not output during inverter reset. 1mA

AM Output frequency (initial 131
output The output signal is proportional (load impedance 10k or
setting)
to the magnitude of the more)
corresponding monitoring item. Resolution 8 bit
(3) Communication
Terminal Reference
Type Terminal Name Description
Symbol Page
With the PU connector, communication can be made through RS-485. 2
 Conforming standard: EIA-485 (RS-485)
RS-485
— PU connector  Transmission format: Multidrop link 183

 Communication speed: 4800 to 38400bps WIRING
 Overall length: 500m
(4) Safety stop signal

Terminal Reference
Terminal Name Description Rated Specifications
Symbol Page
Safety stop input Terminals S1 and S2 are for safety stop input signals used Input resistance: 4.7k
S1 with the safety relay module. Terminals S1 and S2 are used Current: 4 to 6 mA
(Channel 1)
simultaneously (dual channel). Inverter output is shut off by (In case of shorted to
SC)
shortening/opening across terminals S1 and SC and across
Voltage: 21 to 26 V
Safety stop input S2 and SC. In the initial status, terminals S1 and S2 are
S2 (In case of open from
(Channel 2) shorted with terminal SC by shortening wire. SC)
Remove the shortening wire and connect the safety relay Logic: sink logic. (cannot
module when using the safety stop function. be changed)
The signal indicates the status of safety stop input. Low
indicates safe state, and High indicates drive enabled or fault 29
detected. Load: 24VDC/0.1A max.
(Low is when the open collector output transistor is ON Voltage drop: 3.4V max.
Safety monitor output
SO (conducts). High is when the transistor is OFF (does not (In case of 'ON' state)
(open collector output)
conduct).) Logic: sink logic. (cannot
If High is output when both of terminals S1 and S2 are open, be changed)
refer to the Safety stop function instruction manual (BCN-A211508-
000) for the cause and countermeasure.
Safety stop input Common terminal for terminals S1, S2 and SO. Connected to
SC ----------
terminal common terminal SD inside of the inverter.
21
2.3.2 Control circuit terminal (source-logic safety terminal model)

indicates that terminal functions can be selected using Pr. 178 to Pr. 182, Pr. 190, Pr. 192, Pr. 197 (I/O terminal function
selection). ( Refer to page 116).

(1) Input signal
Terminal Refer to
Symbol Page
Turn ON the STF signal to
STF Forward rotation start start forward rotation and When the STF and STR Input resistance 4.7k
turn it OFF to stop. signals are turned ON Voltage when contacts are
120
Turn ON the STR signal to simultaneously, the stop open
STR Reverse rotation start start reverse rotation and command is given. 21 to 26VDC
turn it OFF to stop. When contacts are short-
RH, circuited
Multi-speed can be selected according to the
RM, Multi-speed selection 4 to 6mADC 92
combination of RH, RM and RL signals.
RL
Contact input common
Common terminal for contact input terminal (sink logic)
(sink)
Contact input

common (source) device, such as a programmable controller, in the
SD — —
(initial setting) source logic to avoid malfunction by undesirable
currents.
Common output terminal for 24VDC 0.1A power
24VDC power supply
supply (PC terminal).
common
Isolated from terminals 5 and SE.
Power supply voltage range
common (sink) device, such as a programmable controller, in the sink
22 to 26.5VDC
PC logic to avoid a malfunction by undesirable currents. 25
Contact input common permissible load current
Common terminal for contact input terminal (source
(source) (initial setting) logic). 100mA
24VDC power supply Can be used as 24VDC 0.1A power supply.
Used as power supply when connecting potentiometer 5.0V0.2VDC
Frequency setting power
10 for frequency setting (speed setting) from outside of permissible load current 153
supply
the inverter. (Refer to Pr. 73 Analog input selection.) 10mA
Inputting 0 to 5VDC (or 0 to 10V) provides the maximum Input resistance10k1k
Frequency setting output frequency at 5V (10V) and makes input and output
2 Permissible maximum 153
(voltage) proportional. Use Pr. 73 to switch between input 0 to
5VDC input (initial setting) and 0 to 10VDC. voltage 20VDC
Current input:
Inputting 4 to 20mADC (or 0 to 5V, 0 to 10V) provides Input resistance 2495
the maximum output frequency at 20mA and makes Maximum permissible
Frequency setting
input and output proportional. This input signal is valid current 30mA
only when the AU signal is ON (terminal 2 input is
invalid). To use terminal 4 (initial setting is current Voltage input:
input), set "4" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.182 (input terminal Input resistance10k 1k
Frequency setting
4 function selection) to assign the function, and turn ON Permissible maximum 153
(current)
AU signal. voltage 20VDC
Use Pr. 267 to switch from among input 4 to 20mA
(initial setting), 0 to 5VDC and 0 to 10VDC. Set the Current input
voltage/current input switch in the "V" position to select (initial status) Voltage input
voltage input (0 to 5V/0 to 10V).
Common terminal for frequency setting signal

Frequency setting
5 (terminal 2 or 4) and analog output terminal AM. Do — —
common
not earth (ground).
Adaptive PTC thermistor
PTC thermistor
For connecting PTC thermistor output. specification

10 When PTC thermistor protection is valid (Pr. 561 
PTC thermistor input Heat detection resistance : 103
2 "9999"), terminal 2 is not available for frequency
setting. 500 to 30k (Set by Pr.
561)
22
NOTE
Set Pr. 267 and a voltage/current input switch correctly, then input analog signals in accordance with the settings.
Applying a voltage with voltage/current input switch in "I" position (current input is selected) or a current with switch in
"V" position (voltage input is selected) could cause component damage of the inverter or analog circuit of output
devices. (Refer to page 153 for details.)
(2) Output signal

Terminal Reference
Symbol Page
1 changeover contact output indicates that the inverter Contact capacity:230VAC
Relay output (fault protective function has activated and the output stopped. 0.3A
Relay
A, B, C 122
output) Fault: discontinuity across B-C (continuity across A-C), (power factor =0.4)
Normal: continuity across B-C (discontinuity across A-C) 30VDC 0.3A
Switched Low when the inverter output frequency is equal

Permissible load 24VDC
to or higher than the starting frequency (initial value 0.5Hz).
(maximum 27VDC) 0.1A
Open collector
Switched High during stop or DC injection brake operation.

RUN Inverter running (a voltage drop is 3.4V 122
(Low is when the open collector output transistor is ON
maximum when the signal
(conducts). High is when the transistor is OFF (does not
is ON)
conduct).)
Open collector
SE Common terminal of terminal RUN and terminal SO. — —
output common
Select one e.g. output Output signal 0 to 10VDC
frequency from monitor items. Permissible load current
Output item:
Analog
Analog signal Not output during inverter reset. 1mA

AM Output frequency (initial 131
output The output signal is proportional (load impedance 10k or
setting)
to the magnitude of the more)
corresponding monitoring item. Resolution 8 bit
(3) Communication
Terminal Reference
Type Terminal Name Description
Symbol Page
With the PU connector, communication can be made through RS-485.
 Conforming standard: EIA-485 (RS-485) 2
RS-485
— PU connector  Transmission format: Multidrop link 183

 Communication speed: 4800 to 38400bps
 Overall length: 500m WIRING
(4) Safety stop signal
Terminal Reference
Terminal Name Description Rated Specifications
Symbol Page
Safety stop input Input resistance: 4.7k
S1 Terminals S1 and S2 are for safety stop input signals used
(Channel 1) Current: 4 to 6 mA
with the safety relay module. Terminals S1 and S2 are used
(In case of shorted to
simultaneously (dual channel). Inverter output is shut off by
SC)
shortening/opening across terminals S1 and SC and across
Voltage: 21 to 26 V
Safety stop input S2 and SC. In the initial status, terminals S1 and S2 are
S2 (In case of open from
(Channel 2) shorted with terminal SC by shortening wire.
SC)
Remove the shortening wire and connect the safety relay
Logic: source logic.
module when using the safety stop function.
(cannot be changed)
Safety stop input Common terminal for terminals S1 and S2. Connected to
SC ----------
terminal common terminal PC inside of the inverter.
31
The signal indicates the status of safety stop input. Low
indicates safe state, and High indicates drive enabled or fault
detected.
(Low is when the open collector output transistor is ON Load: 24VDC/0.1A max.
Safety monitor output
SO (conducts). High is when the transistor is OFF (does not Voltage drop: 3.4V max.
(open collector output)
conduct).) (In case of 'ON' state)
If High is output when both of terminals S1 and S2 are open,
refer to the Safety stop function instruction manual (BCN-A211508-
005) for the cause and countermeasure.
Open collector output
SE Common terminal of terminal RUN and terminal SO. ----------
common
23
2.3.3 Changing the control logic
The input signals are set to source logic (SOURCE) when

shipped from the factory.
To change the control logic, the jumper connector above the
control terminal must be moved to the other position.
Change the jumper connector in the source logic (SOURCE)
position to sink logic (SINK) position using tweezers, a pair of
long-nose pliers etc. Change the jumper connector position
before switching power ON.
NOTE
 Fully make sure that the front cover has been reinstalled securely.
 The capacity plate is placed on the front cover and the rating plate is on the inverter. Since these plates have the
same serial numbers, always reinstall the removed cover onto the original inverter.
 The sink-source logic change-over jumper connector must be fitted in only one of those positions. If it is fitted in both
positions at the same time, the inverter may be damaged.
24
(1) Sink logic type and source logic type

 In sink logic, a signal switches ON when a current flows from the corresponding signal input terminal.
Terminal SD is common to the contact input signals. Terminal SE is common to the open collector output signals.
 In source logic, a signal switches ON when a current flows into the corresponding signal input terminal.
Terminal PC is common to the contact input signals. Terminal SE is common to the open collector output signals.
Current flow concerning the input/output signal when sink logic is Current flow concerning the input/output signal when source logic is
selected selected
Sink logic Source logic

PC
Current
Sink Current
STF connector
R STF
R Source
connector
STR
R STR
R
SD
DC input (sink type) DC input (source type)

<Example: QX40> Inverter <Example: QX80>
Inverter
RUN TB1 RUN TB1

R R
R R
SE TB17 SE TB18
24VDC 24VDC
Current flow Current flow
2
When using an external power supply for transistor output
 Sink logic type  Source logic type

WIRING
Use terminal PC as a common terminal, and perform Use terminal SD as a common terminal, and perform
wiring as shown below. (Do not connect terminal SD of the wiring as shown below. (Do not connect terminal PC of the
inverter with terminal 0V of the external power supply. inverter with terminal +24V of the external power supply.
When using terminals PC-SD as a 24VDC power supply, When using terminals PC-SD as a 24VDC power supply,
do not install an external power supply in parallel with the do not install an external power supply in parallel with the
inverter. Doing so may cause a malfunction in the inverter inverter. Doing so may cause a malfunction in the inverter
due to undesirable currents.) due to undesirable currents.)
QY40P type transistor Inverter QY80 type transistor Inverter

output unit output unit
TB1 STF PC
24VDC
(SD)
TB1 STF 24VDC
TB2 STR (SD)
TB2 STR
Constant TB17 Constant
voltage
24VDC
PC voltage
circuit circuit
Fuse TB17
TB18
TB18 SD
24VDC SD
Current flow Current flow
25
2.3.4 Wiring of control circuit

(1) Standard control circuit terminal layout
Recommend wire size:

0.3mm2 to 0.75mm2 10 2 5 4 AM
RUN SE SO S1 S2 SC SD
A B C RL RM RH SD PC STF STR
(2) Wiring method

Wiring
Use a blade terminal and a wire with a sheath stripped off for the control circuit wiring. For a single wire, strip off the sheath of
the wire and apply directly.
Insert the blade terminal or the single wire into a socket of the terminal.
1) Strip off the sheath about the length below. If the length of the sheath peeled is too long, a short circuit may occur
among neighboring wires. If the length is too short, wires might come off.
Wire the stripped wire after twisting it to prevent it from becoming loose. In addition, do not solder it.
Wire stripping length
10mm
2) Crimp the blade terminal.

Insert wires to a blade terminal, and check that the wires come out for about 0 to 0.5 mm from a sleeve.
Check the condition of the blade terminal after crimping. Do not use a blade terminal of which the crimping is
inappropriate, or the face is damaged.
Unstranded
wires
ire
W
ell
Sh
ve
Sl
ee mm Wires are not inserted
o 0.5 Damaged Crumpled tip into the shell
0t
Blade terminals available on the market: (as of January 2010)

Phoenix Contact Co.,Ltd.
Blade Terminal Model Blade terminal
Wire Size (mm2) crimping tool
with insulation sleeve without insulation sleeve for UL wire 
0.3 AI 0,5-10WH — —
0.5 AI 0,5-10WH — AI 0,5-10WH-GB
0.75 AI 0,75-10GY A 0,75-10 AI 0,75-10GY-GB
CRIMPFOX 6/6T-F
1 AI 1-10RD A1-10 AI 1-10RD/1000GB
1.25, 1.5 AI 1,5-10BK A1,5-10 AI 1,5-10BK/1000GB 
0.75 (for two wires) AI-TWIN 2 x 0,75-10GY — —
 A blade terminal with an insulation sleeve compatible with MTW wire which has a thick wire insulation
 Applicable for the terminal ABC.
NICHIFU Co.,Ltd.
Blade terminal product Blade terminal
Wire Size (mm2) number
Insulation product number
crimping tool
0.3 to 0.75 BT 0.75-11 VC 0.75 NH 67
26
3) Insert the wire into a socket.
When using a single wire or a stranded wire without a blade terminal, push an open/close button all the way down
with a flathead screw driver, and insert the wire.
Open/close button
Flathead screwdriver
NOTE
 When using a stranded wire without a blade terminal, twist enough to avoid short circuit with a nearby terminals or
wires.
 Place the flathead screwdriver vertical to the open/close button. In case the blade tip slips, it may cause to damage of
inverter or injury.
Wire removal
Pull the wire with pushing the open/close button all the way down firmly with a flathead screwdriver.
2
Open/close button
WIRING
Flathead screwdriver
NOTE
 Pulling out the terminal block forcefully without pushing the open/close button all the way down may damage the
terminal block.
Use a small flathead screwdriver (Tip thickness: 0.4mm/tip width: 2.5mm).
If a flathead screwdriver with a narrow tip is used, terminal block may be damaged.
Introduced products :(as of January 2010)
Product Type Maker
Flathead screwdriver SZF 0- 0,4 x 2,5 Phoenix Contact Co.,Ltd.
 Place the flathead screwdriver vertical to the open/close button. In case the blade tip slips, it may cause to damage of
inverter or injury.
27
(3) Control circuit common terminals (PC, 5, SE)

Terminals PC, SE and 5 are common terminals for I/O signals.(All common terminals are isolated from each other.) Do not
earth them. Avoid connecting the terminal PC and 5 and the terminal SE and 5.
Terminal PC is a common terminal for the contact input terminals (STF, STR, RH, RM, RL). The open collector circuit is
isolated from the internal control circuit by photocoupler
Terminal 5 is a common terminal for the frequency setting signals (terminals 2 or 4) and analog signal output (AM). It should
be protected from external noise using a shielded or twisted cable.
Terminal SE is a common terminal for the open collector output terminal (RUN, SO ). The contact input circuit is isolated from
the internal control circuit by photocoupler.
 In a sink-logic safety terminal model, terminal SC is the common terminal for terminal SO.
(4) Signal inputs by contactless switches
The contacted input terminals of the inverter (STF, STR,

RH, RM, RL) can be controlled using a transistor Inverter
instead of a contacted switch as shown on the right. PC
+24V
STF, etc.
R
External signal input using transistor
(5) Wiring instructions

1) It is recommended to use the cables of 0.3mm2 to 0.75mm2 gauge for connection to the control circuit terminals.
2) The maximum wiring length should be 30m.
3) Do not short across terminals PC and SD. Inverter may be damaged.
4) When using contact inputs, use two or more parallel micro-signal contacts or
twin contacts to prevent contact faults since the control circuit input signals are
micro-currents.
Micro signal contacts Twin contacts

5) Use shielded or twisted cables for connection to the control circuit terminals
and run them away from the main and power circuits (including the 200V relay sequence circuit).
6) Do not apply a voltage to the contact input terminals (e.g. STF) of the control circuit.
7) Always apply a voltage to the fault output terminals (A, B, C) via a relay coil, lamp, etc.
28
2.3.5 Safety stop function (sink-logic safety terminal model)

(1) Description of the function
The terminals related to the safety stop function are shown below.
Refer to page 20 for the rated specification of each terminal.
Terminal
Description
Symbol
S1 For input of safety stop channel 1. Between S1 and SC / S2 and SC
Open: In safety stop mode.
S2 For input of safety stop channel 2.
Short: Other than safety stop mode.
For output of safety stop condition. OFF: Drive enabled, or drive stop (at
SAFE an internal safety circuit fault)
SO The signal is output when inverter output is shut off due to the safety stop
signal ON: Drive stop (no internal safety
function. circuit fault)
Common terminal for S1,S2,SO signals. (SC is connected terminal SD
SC —
internally.)
RUN SAFE2 Outputs when an alarm or failure is detected OFF: Internal safety circuit fault
 signal Outputs when there is no internal safety circuit fault ON: No internal safety circuit fault
SE Common terminal for open collector outputs (terminal RUN) —
 In the initial status, terminal S1 and S2 are shorted with terminal SC by shortening wire. Remove the shortening wire and connect the safety relay module
when using the safety stop function.
 In the initial setting, safety monitor output signal (SAFE signal) is assigned to terminal SO. The function can be assigned to other terminals by setting "80
(positive logic) or 180 (negative logic)" to any of Pr. 190, Pr. 192 or Pr. 197 (Output terminal function selection). (Refer to page 122)
 In the initial setting, inverter running (RUN signal) is assigned to terminal RUN. Set "81" to Pr. 190 RUN terminal function selection to assign SAFE2 signal. The
function can be assigned to other terminals by setting "81 (positive logic) or 181 (negative logic)" to any of Pr. 190, Pr. 192 or Pr. 197 (Output terminal function
selection). (Refer to page 122)
 At an internal safety circuit fault, E.SAF or E.CPU is displayed on the operation panel.
NOTE
 Use SAFE signal for the purpose to monitor safety stop status. SAFE signal cannot be used as safety stop input
signal to other devices (other than the safety relay module.)
 SAFE2 signal can only be used to output an alarm or to prevent restart of an inverter. The signal cannot be used as
safety stop input signal to other devices.
(2) Wiring connection diagram

To prevent restart at fault occurrence, connect terminals RUN (SAFE2 signal) and SE to terminals XS0 and XS1, which are 2
the feedback input terminals of the safety relay module.
By setting Pr.190 RUN terminal function selection = "81 (SAFE2 signal)", terminal RUN is turned OFF at fault occurrence.
WIRING
Pr. 178 = "60 (initial value)" Inverter R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
Pr. 179 = "25" SO (SAFE)*1
Pr. 190 = "81" monitor
Pr. 197 = "80 (initial value)"
RUN (SAFE2)*1
START/RESET SE
STF
STF*2
STR(STOP)*2 I/O control
Emergency
stop button
STOP S1
Output
S2 shutoff
circuit
+24V X0 COM0 X1 COM1 XS0 XS1 Z00 Z10 Z20 SC

PC
Internal K1
DC24V
Safety
U VW
Circuit K2
IM
24G Z01 Z11 Z21
*1 Output signals differ by the setting of Pr. 190, Pr. 192
and Pr. 197 (Output terminal function selection).
MITSUBISHI MELSEC Safety relay module *2 Input signals differ by the setting of Pr. 178 to Pr. 182
QS90SR2SN-Q (Input terminal function selection).
NOTE
 Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 190, Pr. 192, and Pr. 197 (output terminal function selection) may affect the
other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
29
(3) Safety stop function operation
Input signal Internal Output signal

Input power safety Operation state
S1-SC S2-SC SAFE SAFE2
circuit
OFF ----- ----- ----- OFF OFF Output shutoff (Safe state)
No failure OFF ON Drive enabled
Short Short
Detected OFF OFF Output shutoff (Safe state)
No failure ON ON Output shutoff (Safe state)
ON Open Open
Short Open N/A OFF OFF Output shutoff (Safe state)
Open Short N/A OFF OFF Output shutoff (Safe state)
" N/A " denotes a condition where circuit fault does not apply.
 At an internal safety circuit fault, E.SAF or E.CPU is displayed on the operation panel.
 SA is displayed on the operation panel when both the S1 and S2 signals are in the open state without any internal safety circuit fault (E.SAF, E.CPU).
 ON: Transistor used for an open collector output is conducted.
OFF: Transistor used for an open collector output is not conducted.
For more details, refer to the Safety stop function instruction manual (BCN-A211508-000).
CAUTION
To use the safety stop function, connect the FR-D700 sink-logic safety terminal models only to a safety relay
module. If the FR-D700 sink-logic safety terminal models and the FR-D700 source-logic safety terminal models
are connected, the safety stop function does not operate.
30
2.3.6 Safety stop function (source-logic safety terminal model)

(1) Description of the function
The terminals related to the safety stop function are shown below.
Refer to page 20 for the rated specification of each terminal.
Terminal
Description
Symbol
S1 For input of safety stop channel 1. Between S1 and SC / S2 and SC
Open: In safety stop mode.
S2 For input of safety stop channel 2.
Short: Other than safety stop mode.
SC Common terminal for S1,S2 signals. (SC is connected terminal PC internally.) —
For output of safety stop condition. OFF: Drive enabled, or drive stop (at
SAFE an internal safety circuit fault)
SO The signal is output when inverter output is shut off due to the safety stop
signal ON: Drive stop (no internal safety
function. circuit fault)
RUN SAFE2 Outputs when an alarm or failure is detected OFF: Internal safety circuit fault
 signal Outputs when there is no internal safety circuit fault ON: No internal safety circuit fault
SE Common terminal for open collector outputs (terminal RUN and terminal SO) —
 In the initial status, terminal S1 and S2 are shorted with terminal SC by shortening wire. Remove the shortening wire and connect the safety relay module
when using the safety stop function.
 In the initial setting, safety monitor output signal (SAFE signal) is assigned to terminal SO. The function can be assigned to other terminals by setting "80
(positive logic) or 180 (negative logic)" to any of Pr. 190, Pr. 192 or Pr. 197 (Output terminal function selection).
 In the initial setting, inverter running (RUN signal) is assigned to terminal RUN. Set "81" to Pr. 190 RUN terminal function selection to assign SAFE2 signal. The
function can be assigned to other terminals by setting "81 (positive logic) or 181 (negative logic)" to any of Pr. 190, Pr. 192 or Pr. 197 (Output terminal function
selection).
 At an internal safety circuit fault, E.SAF or E.CPU is displayed on the operation panel.
NOTE
 Use SAFE signal for the purpose to monitor safety stop status. SAFE signal cannot be used as safety stop input
signal to other devices (other than the safety relay module.)
 SAFE2 signal can only be used to output an alarm or to prevent restart of an inverter. The signal cannot be used as
safety stop input signal to other devices.
(2) Wiring connection diagram

To prevent restart at fault occurrence, connect terminals RUN (SAFE2 signal) and SE to terminals XS0 and XS1, which are
2
the feedback input terminals of the safety relay module.
By setting Pr.190 RUN terminal function selection = "81 (SAFE2 signal)", terminal RUN is turned OFF at fault occurrence.
WIRING
Pr. 178 = "60 (initial value)" Inverter R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
Pr. 179 = "25" SO (SAFE)*1
Pr. 190 = "81" monitor
Pr. 197 = "80 (initial value)"
RUN (SAFE2)*1
START/RESET SE
STF
STF*2
STR(STOP)*2 I/O control
Emergency
stop button
STOP S1
Output
S2 shutoff
circuit
+24V X0 COM0 X1 COM1 XS0 XS1 Z00 Z10 Z20 SC

PC
Internal K1
DC24V
Safety
U VW
Circuit K2
IM
24G Z01 Z11 Z21
*1 Output signals differ by the setting of Pr. 190, Pr. 192
and Pr. 197 (Output terminal function selection).
MITSUBISHI MELSEC Safety relay module *2 Input signals differ by the setting of Pr. 178 to Pr. 182
QS90SR2SN-Q (Input terminal function selection).
NOTE
31
(3) Safety stop function operation
Input signal Internal Output signal

Input power safety Operation state
S1-SC S2-SC SAFE SAFE2
circuit
OFF ----- ----- ----- OFF OFF Output shutoff (Safe state)
No failure OFF ON Drive enabled
Short Short
No failure ON ON Output shutoff (Safe state)
ON Open Open
Short Open N/A OFF OFF Output shutoff (Safe state)
Open Short N/A OFF OFF Output shutoff (Safe state)
" N/A " denotes a condition where circuit fault does not apply.
 At an internal safety circuit fault, E.SAF or E.CPU is displayed on the operation panel.
 SA is displayed on the operation panel when both the S1 and S2 signals are in the open state without any internal safety circuit fault (E.SAF, E.CPU).
 ON: Transistor used for an open collector output is conducted.
OFF: Transistor used for an open collector output is not conducted.
For more details, refer to the Safety stop function instruction manual (BCN-A211508-005).
CAUTION
To use the safety stop function, connect the FR-D700 source-logic safety terminal models only to a safety
relay module. If the FR-D700 source-logic safety terminal models and the FR-D700 sink-logic safety terminal
models are connected, the safety stop function does not operate.
32
2.3.7 Connection to the PU connector

Using the PU connector, you can perform communication operation from the parameter unit (FR-PA07), enclosure surface
operation panel (FR-PA07), or a personal computer, etc.
Parameter setting and monitoring can be performed by FR Configurator (FR-SW3-SETUP-W).
Remove the inverter front cover when connecting.
When connecting the parameter unit or enclosure surface operation panel using a connection cable
Use the optional FR-CB2 or connector and cable available on the market.
Insert the cable plugs securely into the PU connector of the inverter and the connection connector of the FR-PU07, FR-PA07
along the guide until the tabs snap into place.
Install the inverter front cover after connecting.
2
Parameter unit connection cable
(FR-CB2)(option)
WIRING
PU connector
STF FWD PU
FR-PA07 FR-PU07
REMARKS
 Refer to the following when fabricating the cable on the user side. Keep the total cable length within 20m.
Examples of product available on the market (as of January 2010)
Product Type Maker
SGLPEV-T (Cat5e/300m)
1) Communication cable Mitsubishi Cable Industries, Ltd.
24AWG4P
2) RJ-45 connector 5-554720-3 Tyco Electronics Corporation
33
RS-485 communication
When the PU connector is connected with a personal, FA or other computer by a communication cable, a user program can
run and monitor the inverter or read and write to parameters.
The protocol can be selected from Mitsubishi inverter and Modbus-RTU.
 PU connector pin-outs
Pin
Name Description
Number
Earth (ground)
1) SG
(connected to terminal 5)
2) — Parameter unit power supply
3) RDA Inverter receive+
Inverter 4) SDB Inverter send-
(receptacle side) 5) SDA Inverter send+
Viewed from bottom
6) RDB Inverter receive-
8) to 1) Earth (ground)
7) SG
NOTE
 Pins No. 2 and 8 provide power to the parameter unit. Do not use these pins for RS-485 communication.
 When making RS-485 communication with a combination of the FR-D700 series, FR-E500 series and FR-S500 series,
incorrect connection of pins No.2 and 8 (parameter unit power supply) of the above PU connector may result in the
inverter malfunction or failure.
 Do not connect the PU connector to the computer's LAN board, FAX modem socket or telephone modular connector.
The product could be damaged due to differences in electrical specifications.
For further details, Refer to page 183.

Conforming standard: EIA-485 (RS-485)
Transmission form: Multidrop link
Communication speed: Maximum 38400 bps
Overall extension: 500m
34
Connection of stand-alone option unit
2.4 Connection of stand-alone option unit

The inverter accepts a variety of stand-alone option units as required.
Incorrect connection will cause inverter damage or accident. Connect and operate the option unit carefully in accordance with
the corresponding option unit manual.
2.4.1 Connection of a dedicated external brake resistor (MRS type, FR-ABR)

(FR-D740-012(SC) or higher, FR-D720S-025(SC) or higher)
Install a dedicated brake resistor (MRS type, FR-ABR) outside when the motor driven by the inverter is made to run by the
load, quick deceleration is required, etc. Connect a dedicated brake resistor (MRS type, FR-ABR) to terminal P/+ and PR.
(For the locations of terminal P/+ and PR, refer to the terminal block layout (page 16).)
Set parameters below.
Connected Brake Resistor Pr. 30 Regenerative function selection Setting Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake duty Setting
MRS type 0 (initial value) —
Refer to page
FR-ABR 1 10%
113
FR-D740-012(SC) to 080(SC) FR-D720S-025(SC), 042(SC)

FR-D720S-070(SC), 100(SC)
Connect the brake resistor across terminals P/+ and PR. Connect the brake resistor across terminals + and PR.
Jumper *1
Jumper *1
Terminal +
Terminal P/+
Terminal PR Terminal PR
2
Brake resistor
Brake resistor
FR-D740-120(SC), 160(SC) WIRING
Connect the brake resistor across terminals P/+ and PR.
Jumper *1, *2
Terminal P/+
Terminal PR
Brake resistor
 Do not remove a jumper across terminal P/+ and P1 except when connecting a DC reactor.
 The shape of jumper differs according to capacities.
35
(1) When using the brake resistor (MRS type) and high-duty brake resistor (FR-ABR)
 It is recommended to configure a sequence, which shuts off power in the input side of the inverter by the external thermal
relay as shown below, to prevent overheat and burnout of the brake resistor (MRS type) and high duty brake resistor (FR-
ABR) in case the regenerative brake transistor is damaged. (The brake resistor can not be connected to the FR-D720S-
008(SC) and 014(SC).)
Thermal relay High-duty brake Thermal relay High-duty brake

<Example 1> <Example 2>
MC Inverter (OCR) (*1) resistor (FR-ABR) MC Inverter (OCR) (*1) resistor (FR-ABR)
R/L1 P/+ R R/L1 P/+ R
Power supply S/L2 Power supply S/L2
T/L3 PR T/L3 PR
T *2 T *2
F F
B
ON OFF MC ON OFF MC
C
OCR OCR
MC Contact MC Contact
 Refer to the table below for the type number of each capacity of thermal relay and the diagram below for the connection.
 When the power supply is 400V class, install a step-down transformer.
Power
Thermal Relay Type
Supply Brake Resistor Contact Rating
(Mitsubishi product)
Voltage
MRS120W200 TH-N20CXHZ-0.7A 110VAC 5A,
MRS120W100 TH-N20CXHZ-1.3A 220VAC 2A(AC11 class)
200V 110VDC 0.5A,
MRS120W60 TH-N20CXHZ-2.1A
220VDC 0.25A(DC11 class)
MRS120W40 TH-N20CXHZ-3.6A
Power
High-duty Thermal Relay Type
Supply Contact Rating
Brake Resistor (Mitsubishi product)
Voltage
FR-ABR-0.4K TH-N20CXHZ-0.7A
200V FR-ABR-0.75K TH-N20CXHZ-1.3A
1/L1 5/L3
FR-ABR-2.2K TH-N20CXHZ-2.1A TH-N20
110VAC 5A,
FR-ABR-H0.4K TH-N20CXHZ-0.24A
220VAC 2A(AC11 class)
FR-ABR-H1.5K TH-N20CXHZ-0.9A 110VDC 0.5A,
2/T1 6/T3
400V FR-ABR-H2.2K TH-N20CXHZ-1.3A 220VDC 0.25A(DC11 class)
To the inverter To a resistor
terminal P/+
NOTE
 The brake resistor connected should only be the dedicated brake resistor.
 Perform wiring and operation according to the Instruction Manual of each option unit.
 Brake resistor can not be used with the brake unit, high power factor converter, power supply regeneration converter,
etc.
 Do not use the brake resistor (MRS type) with a lead wire extended.
 Do not connect a resistor directly to terminals P/+ and N/-. This could cause a fire.
36
2.4.2 Connection of the brake unit (FR-BU2)

Connect the brake unit (FR-BU2(-H)) as shown below to improve the braking capability at deceleration. If the transistors in the
brake unit should become faulty, the resistor can be unusually hot. To prevent unusual overheat and fire, install a magnetic
contactor on the inverter's input side to configure a circuit so that a current is shut off in case of fault.
(1) Connection example with the GRZG type discharging resistor
ON OFF OCR contact
T 
MC
MC
GRZG type

OCR discharging resistor
MCCB MC
R R
R/L1 U Motor External thermal
Three-phase AC
power supply S/L2 V IM relay 
T/L3 W
 FR-BU2
Inverter
PR
A
P/+ P/+ B
 
N/- N/- C
BUE
 SD
5m or less
 Connect the inverter terminals (P/+ and N/-) and brake unit (FR-BU2) terminals so that their terminal names match with each other.
(Incorrect connection will damage the inverter and brake unit.)
 The wiring distance between the inverter, brake unit (FR-BU2) and discharging resistor should be within 5m.
Even when the wiring is twisted, the cable length must not exceed 10m.
 It is recommended to install an external thermal relay to prevent overheat of discharging resistor.
 Refer to FR-BU2 manual for connection method of discharging resistor.
2
<Recommended external thermal relay>
Recommended External 1/L1 5/L3
Brake Unit Discharging Resistor TH-N20
Thermal Relay
WIRING
FR-BU2-1.5K GZG 300W-50 (one) TH-N20CXHZ 1.3A
FR-BU2-H7.5K GRZG 200-10 (six in series) TH-N20CXHZ 3.6A
2/T1 6/T3
FR-BU2-H15K GRZG 300-5 (eight in series) TH-N20CXHZ 6.6A
To the brake To a resistor
unit terminal P/+
NOTE
 Set "1" in Pr. 0 Brake mode selection of the FR-BU2 to use GRZG type discharging resistor.
 Do not remove the jumper across terminals P/+ and P1 except when connecting a DC reactor.
37
(2) Connection example with the FR-BR(-H) type resistor
ON OFF
T 
MC
MC
FR-BR
MCCB MC
R/L1 U Motor 
Three-phase AC P TH1
power supply S/L2 V IM PR
T/L3 W TH2

Inverter FR-BU2
PR
A
P/+ P/+ B
 
N/- N/- C
BUE 
 SD
5m or less
 Connect the inverter terminals (P/+ and N/-) and brake unit (FR-BU2) terminals so that their terminal names match
with each other.
(Incorrect connection will damage the inverter and brake unit.)
 The wiring distance between the inverter, brake unit (FR-BU2) and resistor unit (FR-BR) should be within 5m each.
Even when the wiring is twisted, the cable length must not exceed 10m.
 Normal: across TH1-TH2...close, Alarm: across TH1-TH2...open
 A jumper is connected across BUE and SD in the initial status.
NOTE
 Do not remove the jumper across terminals P/+ and P1 except when connecting a DC reactor.
2.4.3 Connection of the high power factor converter (FR-HC)

When connecting the high power factor converter (FR-HC) to suppress power harmonics, perform wiring securely as shown
below. Incorrect connection will damage the high power factor converter and inverter.
Outside box High power factor converter

(FR-HCB) (FR-HC) Inverter
MC1 MC1 Motor
MC2 MC2 R/L1 U
Reactor 1 Reactor 2 S/L2  V IM
(FR-HCL01) (FR-HCL02) T/L3 W
MCCB MC
Three-phase R R2 R2 R3 R3 R4 R4 P P/+ 
AC power S S2 S2 S3 S3 S4 S4 N N/-
supply T T2 T2 T3 T3 T4 T4

RDY X10 
RSO RES 
R
SE SD
S Phase
T detection
 Keep input terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) open. Incorrect connection will damage the inverter.
 Do not insert an MCCB between the terminals P/+ and N/- (between P and P/+, between N and N/-). Opposite polarity of terminals N/- and P/+ will
damage the inverter.
 Use Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection) to assign the terminals used for the X10, RES signal. (Refer to page 116)
 Be sure to connect terminal RDY of the FR-HC to the X10 signal or MRS signal assigned terminal of the inverter, and connect terminal SE of the
FR-HC to terminal SD of the inverter. Without proper connecting, FR-HC will be damaged.
NOTE
 The voltage phases of terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 and terminals R4, S4, T4 must be matched.
 Use sink logic when the FR-HC is connected. The FR-HC cannot be connected when source logic (factory setting) is
selected.
 Do not remove the jumper across terminals P/+ and P1.
38
2.4.4 Connection of the power regeneration common converter (FR-CV)

When connecting the power regeneration common converter (FR-CV), connect the inverter terminals (P/+ and N/-) and power
regeneration common converter (FR-CV) terminals as shown below so that their symbols match with each other.
R/L1 U
S/L2 *1
T/L3 V IM
W
Dedicated stand-alone FR-CV type power

reactor (FR-CVL) regeneration common converter
MCCB MC1 Inverter
R/L11 R2/L12
R2/L1
Three-phase S/L21 S2/L22
S2/L2 P/L+ P/+
AC power supply T/L31 T2/L32 *2
T2/L3 N/L- N/-
P24 PC
R/L11 SD SD
S/L21 *3
RDYA
T/MC1 *5
RDYB X10 *4
RSO RES *4
SE SD
 Keep input terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) open. Incorrect connection will damage the inverter.
 Do not insert an MCCB between the terminals P/+ and N/- (between P/L+ and P/+, between N/L- and N/-). Opposite polarity of terminals
N/- and P/+ will damage the inverter.
 Always connect the power supply and terminals R/L11, S/L21, T/MC1.
Operating the inverter without connecting them will damage the power regeneration common converter.
 Use Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection) to assign the terminals used for the X10, RES signal. (Refer to page 116)
 Be sure to connect terminal RDYB of the FR-CV to the X10 signal or MRS signal assigned terminal of the inverter, and connect terminal
SE of the FR-CV to terminal SD of the inverter. Without proper connecting, FR-CV will be damaged.
NOTE
 The voltage phases of terminals R/L11, S/L21, T/MC1 and terminals R2/L1, S2/L2, T2/L3 must be matched.
2
 Use sink logic when the FR-CV is connected. The FR-CV cannot be connected when source logic (factory setting) is
selected.
 Do not remove the jumper across terminals P/+ and P1.
WIRING
2.4.5 Connection of a DC reactor (FR-HEL)
When using the DC reactor (FR-HEL), connect it across terminals P/+ and P1.
In this case, the jumper connected across terminals P/+ and P1 must be removed. Otherwise, the reactor will not exhibit its
performance.
P1 P/+
FR-HEL
Remove the jumper.
NOTE
 The wiring distance should be within 5m.
 The size of the cables used should be equal to or larger than that of the power supply cables (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3). (Refer
to page 17)
39
MEMO
40
3 PRECAUTIONS FOR USE
OF THE INVERTER
This chapter explains the "PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE

INVERTER" for use of this product.
1
3.1 EMC and leakage currents .......................................................... 42
3.2 Installation of power factor improving reactor ......................... 47
3.3 Power-OFF and magnetic contactor (MC) ................................. 48
3.4 Inverter-driven 400V class motor ................................................ 49 2
3.5 Precautions for use of the inverter ............................................ 50
3.6 Failsafe of the system which uses the inverter ........................ 52
41
EMC and leakage currents
3.1 EMC and leakage currents
3.1.1 Leakage currents and countermeasures

Capacitances exist between the inverter I/O cables, other cables and earth and in the motor, through which a leakage current
flows. Since its value depends on the static capacitances, carrier frequency, etc., low acoustic noise operation at the
increased carrier frequency of the inverter will increase the leakage current. Therefore, take the following measures. Select
the earth leakage current breaker according to its rated sensitivity current, independently of the carrier frequency setting.
(1) To-earth (ground) leakage currents
Leakage currents may flow not only into the inverter's own line but also into the other lines through the earth (ground) cable,
etc. These leakage currents may operate earth (ground) leakage circuit breakers and earth leakage relays unnecessarily.
Suppression technique
 If the carrier frequency setting is high, decrease the Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection setting.
Note that motor noise increases. Selecting Pr. 240 Soft-PWM operation selection makes the sound inoffensive.
 By using earth leakage circuit breakers designed for harmonic and surge suppression in the inverter's own line and other
line, operation can be performed with the carrier frequency kept high (with low noise).
To-earth (ground) leakage currents
 Take caution as long wiring will increase the leakage current. Decreasing the carrier frequency of the inverter reduces the
leakage current.
 Increasing the motor capacity increases the leakage current. The leakage current of the 400V class is larger than that of
the 200V class.
(2) Line-to-line leakage currents
Harmonics of leakage currents flowing in static capacitances between the inverter output cables may operate the external
thermal relay unnecessarily. When the wiring length is long (50m or more) for the 400V class small-capacity model (FR-D740-
160(SC) or lower), the external thermal relay is likely to operate unnecessarily because the ratio of the leakage current to the
rated motor current increases.
Line-to-line leakage current data example (400V class)
Motor Capacity Rated Motor Leakage Current (mA) * Motor: SF-JR 4P
(kW) Current (A) Wiring length 50m Wiring length 100m Carrier frequency: 14.5kHz
0.4 1.1 620 1000 Used wire: 2mm2, 4 cores
0.75 1.9 680 1060 Cabtyre cable
1.5 3.5 740 1120
2.2 4.1 800 1180
3.7 6.4 880 1260
5.5 9.7 980 1360
7.5 12.8 1070 1450
*The leakage current of the 200V class is about a half.

MCCB MC Thermal relay Motor
Power
supply Inverter IM
Line-to-line static
capacitances
Line-to-line leakage currents path
Measures
 Use Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay.
 If the carrier frequency setting is high, decrease the Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection setting.
Note that motor noise increases. Selecting Pr. 240 Soft-PWM operation selection makes the sound inoffensive.
To ensure that the motor is protected against line-to-line leakage currents, it is recommended to use a temperature
sensor to directly detect motor temperature.
Installation and selection of moulded case circuit breaker

Install a moulded case circuit breaker (MCCB) on the power receiving side to protect the wiring of the inverter input side.
Select the MCCB according to the inverter input side power factor (which depends on the power supply voltage, output
frequency and load). Especially for a completely electromagnetic MCCB, one of a slightly large capacity must be selected
since its operation characteristic varies with harmonic currents. (Check it in the data of the corresponding breaker.) As an
earth leakage current breaker, use the Mitsubishi earth leakage current breaker designed for harmonics and surge
suppression.
42
(3) Selection of rated sensitivity current of earth (ground) leakage current breaker
When using the earth leakage current breaker with the inverter circuit, select its rated sensitivity current as follows,
independently of the PWM carrier frequency.
 Breaker designed for harmonic and Ig1, Ig2: Leakage currents in wire path during commercial
surge suppression power supply operation
Rated sensitivity current: Ign: Leakage current of inverter input side EMC filter
In10(Ig1+Ign+Igi+Ig2+Igm) Igm: Leakage current of motor during commercial power
 Standard breaker supply operation
Rated sensitivity current: Igi: Leakage current of inverter unit
In10{Ig1+Ign+Igi+3(Ig2+Igm)}
Example of leakage current of Example of leakage current Example of leakage current per 1km during Example of leakage current of three-
cable path per 1km during the of three-phase induction motor the commercial power supply operation phase induction motor during the
commercial power supply operation during the commercial when the CV cable is routed in metal conduit commercial power supply operation
when the CV cable is routed in power supply operation (Three-phase three-wire delta (Totally-enclosed fan-cooled
metal conduit (200V 60Hz) connection 400V60Hz) type motor 400V60Hz)
(200V 60Hz)
Leakage currents (mA)
Leakage currents (mA)
1.0 2. 0
leakage currents (mA)
leakage currents (mA)

120 120
0.7
100 0.5 100 1. 0
0.3
80 0.2 80 0. 7
0. 5
60 0.1 60
0.07 0. 3
40 0.05 40
0. 2
0.03 20
20 0.02
0 0. 1
0 2 3.5 8 142238 80150 1.5 3.7 7.5 15
2 3.5 8 142238 80150 0.1 0.2 0.75 2.2 5.5 11 20 5.5 30 60100 2.2 5.5 11 20
5.5 30 60 100 0.4 1.5 3.7 7.5 15 Cable size (mm ) 2
Motor capacity (kW)
Cable size (mm2) Motor capacity (kW) For " " connection, the amount of leakage current is appox.1/3 of the above value.
Example
Selection example (in the case of the left figure (400V class connection))
Breaker Designed for
Harmonic and Surge Standard Breaker
Suppression
1 5m
Leakage current Ig1 (mA) 66  = 0.11
5.5mm2 × 5m 5.5mm2 × 60m 3 1000m
ELB EMC
filter Leakage current Ign (mA) 0 (without EMC filter)
3φ
Inverter IM 400V Leakage current Igi (mA) 1
2.2kW
1 60m
Ig1 Ign Ig2 Igm
Leakage current Ig2 (mA) 66  = 1.32
Igi 3 1000m
Motor leakage current Igm (mA) 0.36
Total leakage current (mA) 2.79 6.15
Rated sensitivity current (mA) Ig  10) 30 100 3
NOTE
PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF THE INVERTER
 Install the earth leakage breaker (ELB) on the input side of the inverter.
 In the connection earthed-neutral system, the sensitivity current is blunt against an earth (ground) fault in the
inverter output side. Earthing (Grounding) must conform to the requirements of national and local safety regulations
and electrical codes. (NEC section 250, IEC 536 class 1 and other applicable standards)
 When the breaker is installed on the output side of the inverter, it may be unnecessarily operated by harmonics even
if the effective value is less than the rating.
In this case, do not install the breaker since the eddy current and hysteresis loss will increase, leading to temperature
rise.
 General products indicate the following models. ...... BV-C1, BC-V, NVB, NV-L, NV-G2N, NV-G3NA, NV-2F earth leakage
relay (except NV-ZHA), NV with AA neutral wire open-phase protection
The other models are designed for harmonic and surge suppression ....NV-C/NV-S/MN series, NV30-FA, NV50-FA, BV-
C2, earth leakage alarm breaker (NF-Z), NV-ZHA, NV-H
43
3.1.2 EMC measures
Some electromagnetic noises enter the inverter to malfunction it and others are radiated by the inverter to malfunction
peripheral devices. Though the inverter is designed to have high immunity performance, it handles low-level signals, so it
requires the following basic techniques. Also, since the inverter chops outputs at high carrier frequency, that could generate
electromagnetic noises. If these electromagnetic noises cause peripheral devices to malfunction, EMI measures should be
taken to suppress noises. These techniques differ slightly depending on EMI paths.
(1) Basic techniques

 Do not run the power cables (I/O cables) and signal cables of the inverter in parallel with each other and do not bundle
them.
 Use twisted shield cables for the detector connecting and control signal cables and connect the sheathes of the shield
cables to terminal SD.
 Earth (Ground) the inverter, motor, etc. at one point.
(2) Techniques to reduce electromagnetic noises that enter and malfunction the inverter (Immunity measures)
When devices that generate many electromagnetic noises (which use magnetic contactors, magnetic brakes, many relays,
for example) are installed near the inverter and the inverter may be malfunctioned by electromagnetic noises, the following
measures must be taken:
 Provide surge suppressors for devices that generate many electromagnetic noises to suppress electromagnetic noises.
 Fit data line filters (page 45) to signal cables.
 Earth (Ground) the shields of the detector connection and control signal cables with cable clamp metal.
(3) Techniques to reduce electromagnetic noises that are radiated by the inverter to malfunction peripheral devices (EMI
measures)
Inverter-generated electromagnetic noises are largely classified into those radiated by the cables connected to the inverter
and inverter main circuits (I/O), those electromagnetically and electrostatically induced to the signal cables of the peripheral
devices close to the main circuit power supply, and those transmitted through the power supply cables.
Inverter Air propagated Noise directly

Path 1)
generated electromagnetic radiated from inverter
electromagnetic noise
noise Noise radiated from
Path 2)
power supply cable (5) Telephone
Noise radiated from
motor connection cable Path 3)
(7) (7)
Electromagnetic (2)
induction noise Path 4), 5)
(1) Sensor
Electrostatic power supply
induction noise
Path 6) (3) Inverter
Instrument Receiver
(6) (1) (8)
Electrical path Noise propagated through
propagated noise power supply cable
Path 7) (4)
(3) Sensor
Noise from earth (ground) Motor IM
cable due to leakage Path 8)
current
44
Propagation Path Measures

When devices that handle low-level signals and are liable to malfunction due to electromagnetic noises, e.g.
instruments, receivers and sensors, are contained in the enclosure that contains the inverter or when their signal
cables are run near the inverter, the devices may be malfunctioned by air-propagated electromagnetic noises. The
following measures must be taken:
(1)(2)(3)  Install easily affected devices as far away as possible from the inverter.
 Run easily affected signal cables as far away as possible from the inverter and its I/O cables.
 Do not run the signal cables and power cables (inverter I/O cables) in parallel with each other and do not bundle them.
 Insert common mode filters into I/O and capacitors between the input lines to suppress cable-radiated noises.
 Use shield cables as signal cables and power cables and run them in individual metal conduits to produce further effects.
When the signal cables are run in parallel with or bundled with the power cables, magnetic and static induction noises
may be propagated to the signal cables to malfunction the devices and the following measures must be taken:
 Install easily affected devices as far away as possible from the inverter.
(4)(5)(6)
 Run easily affected signal cables as far away as possible from the I/O cables of the inverter.
 Use shield cables as signal cables and power cables and run them in individual metal conduits to produce further effects.
When the power supplies of the peripheral devices are connected to the power supply of the inverter in the same line,
inverter-generated noises may flow back through the power supply cables to malfunction the devices and the
(7)
following measures must be taken:
 Install the common mode filter (FR-BLF, FR-BSF01) to the power cables (output cable) of the inverter.
When a closed loop circuit is formed by connecting the peripheral device wiring to the inverter, leakage currents may
(8) flow through the earth (ground) cable of the inverter to malfunction the device. In such a case, disconnection of the
earth (ground) cable of the device may cause the device to operate properly.
Data line filter

Data line filter is effective as an EMC measure. Provide a data line filter for the detector cable, etc.
EMC measures
FR- BLF FR- BLF

Install common mode filter Decrease Install common mode filter
FR- BSF01 FR- BSF01
on inverter input side. Enclosure carrier frequency
on inverter output side.
Inverter
power FR- FR-
supply BSF01 Inverter BSF01 IM Motor
Install capacitor type FR-BIF filter Use 4-core cable for motor
on inverter input side. FR-
power cable and use one
BIF
cable as earthing cable. 3
Separate inverter and power
line by more than 30cm (at Use a twisted pair shielded cable
least 10cm) from sensor circuit.
Sensor
Control Power
power supply
supply for sensor
Do not earth (ground) Do not earth (ground) shield but
enclosure directly. connect it to signal common cable.
Do not earth (ground) control cable.
NOTE
 For compliance with the EU EMC directive, refer to the Installation Guideline.
45
3.1.3 Power supply harmonics
The inverter may generate power supply harmonics from its converter circuit to affect the power generator, power capacitor
etc. Power supply harmonics are different from noise and leakage currents in source, frequency band and transmission path.
Take the following countermeasure suppression techniques.
The differences between harmonics and RF noises are indicated below:
Item Harmonics Noise

Normally 40th to 50th degrees or less
Frequency High frequency (several 10kHz to 1GHz order)
(up to 3kHz or less)
Environment To-electric channel, power impedance To-space, distance, wiring path
Quantitative understanding Theoretical calculation possible Random occurrence, quantitative grasping difficult
Change with current variation ratio (larger as switching
Generated amount Nearly proportional to load capacity
speed increases)
Affected equipment immunity Specified in standard per equipment Different depending on maker's equipment specifications
Suppression example Provide reactor. Increase distance.
Suppression technique
The harmonic current generated from the inverter
DC reactor
to the input side differs according to various (FR-HEL)
conditions such as the wiring impedance, whether
a reactor is used or not, and output frequency and
output current on the load side. MCCB MC P/+ P1
R X
For the output frequency and output current, we R/L1 U
Power S Y
understand that this should be calculated in the supply S/L2 V IM
conditions under the rated load at the maximum T Z
T/L3 W
operating frequency.
AC reactor Inverter
(FR-HAL) Do not insert
power factor improving
capacitor.
NOTE
The power factor improving capacitor and surge suppressor on the inverter output side may be overheated or damaged
by the harmonic components of the inverter output. Also, since an excessive current flows in the inverter to activate
overcurrent protection, do not provide a capacitor and surge suppressor on the inverter output side when the motor is
driven by the inverter. For power factor improvement, install a reactor on the inverter input side or in the DC circuit.
46
Installation of power factor improving reactor
3.2 Installation of power factor improving reactor
When the inverter is connected near a large-capacity power transformer (500kVA or more) or when a power capacitor is to be
switched over, an excessive peak current may flow in the power input circuit, damaging the converter circuit. To prevent this,
always install an optional reactor (FR-HAL, FR-HEL).
Three-phase power input

AC reactor
Power supply system capacity

(FR-HAL) Inverter
MCCB MC
R X 1500
R/L1 U Range requiring
Power supply S Y installation of
(kVA)
S/L2 V IM 1000 the reactor
T Z
T/L3 W
500
P/+ P1
0
Wiring length (m) 10
DC reactor
(FR-HEL) *
Single-phase power input

AC reactor
(FR-HAL) Inverter
MCCB MC
R X
L1 U
Power supply S Y
N V IM
T Z
W
+ P1
DC reactor
(FR-HEL) *
 When connecting the FR-HEL, remove the jumper across terminals P/+ and P1.
The wiring length between the FR-HEL and inverter should be 5m maximum and minimized.
REMARKS
 Use the same wire size as that of the power supply wire (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3). (Refer to page 17)
3
47
Power-OFF and magnetic contactor (MC)
3.3 Power-OFF and magnetic contactor (MC)
(1) Inverter input side magnetic contactor (MC)

On the inverter input side, it is recommended to provide an MC for the following purposes.
(Refer to page 4 for selection.)
1) To release the inverter from the power supply when the fault occurs or when the drive is not functioning (e.g. emergency
stop operation). For example, MC avoids overheat or burnout of the brake resistor when heat capacity of the resistor is
insufficient or brake regenerative transistor is damaged with short while connecting an optional brake resistor.
2) To prevent any accident due to an automatic restart at restoration of power after an inverter stop made by a power failure
3) While the power is ON, inverter is consuming a little power even during inverter stop. When stopping the inverter for an
extended period of time, powering OFF the inverter will save power slightly.
4) To separate the inverter from the power supply to ensure safe maintenance and inspection work.
If using an MC for emergency stop during operation, select an MC regarding the inverter input side current as JEM1038-AC-3
class rated current.
REMARKS
Since repeated inrush currents at power ON will shorten the life of the converter circuit (switching life is about 1,000,000 times.),
frequent starts and stops of the MC must be avoided. Turn ON/OFF the inverter start controlling terminals (STF, STR) to run/stop
the inverter.
 Inverter start/stop circuit example

Inverter
MCCB MC As shown on the left, always use the start signal
Three-phase AC R/L1 U
power supply S/L2 V Motor (ON or OFF of STF(STR) signal) to make a start
T/L3 W
or stop.
T *1  When the power supply is 400V class, install a step-down
Operation preparation C transformer.
OFF ON MC B
A
RA
MC STF(STR)
PC
Start/Stop
MC Start RA
Stop RA
(2) Handling of inverter output side magnetic contactor

Switch the magnetic contactor between the inverter and motor only when both the inverter and motor are at a stop. When the
magnetic contactor is turned ON while the inverter is operating, overcurrent protection of the inverter and such will activate.
When an MC is provided for switching to the commercial power supply, for example, switch it ON/OFF after the inverter and
motor have stopped.
48
Inverter-driven 400V class motor
3.4 Inverter-driven 400V class motor
In the PWM type inverter, a surge voltage attributable to wiring constants is generated at the motor terminals. Especially for a
400V class motor, the surge voltage may deteriorate the insulation. When the 400V class motor is driven by the inverter,
consider the following measures:
Measures
It is recommended to take either of the following measures:
(1) Rectifying the motor insulation and limiting the PWM carrier frequency according to the wiring
length
For the 400V class motor, use an insulation-enhanced motor.
Specifically,
1) Specify the "400V class inverter-driven insulation-enhanced motor".
2) For the dedicated motor such as the constant-torque motor and low-vibration motor, use the "inverter-driven, dedicated
motor".
3) Set Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection as indicated below according to the wiring length.
Wiring Length
50m or less 50m to 100m exceeding 100m
Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection 15 (14.5kHz) or less 8 (8kHz) or less 2 (2kHz) or less
(2) Suppressing the surge voltage on the inverter side

Connect the surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H/FR-BMF-H) on the inverter output side.
NOTE
 For details of Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection, refer to page 151.
 For explanation of surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H/FR-BMF-H), refer to the manual of each option.
3
49
Precautions for use of the inverter
3.5 Precautions for use of the inverter
The FR-D700 series is a highly reliable product, but using incorrect peripheral circuits or incorrect operation/handling methods
may shorten the product life or damage the product.
Before starting operation, always recheck the following items.
(1) Use crimping terminals with insulation sleeve to wire the power supply and motor.
(2) Application of power to the output terminals (U, V, W) of the inverter will damage the inverter. Never perform
such wiring.
(3) After wiring, wire offcuts must not be left in the inverter.
Wire offcuts can cause an alarm, failure or malfunction. Always keep the inverter clean.
When drilling mounting holes in an enclosure etc., take care not to allow chips and other foreign matter to enter the
inverter.
(4) Use cables of the size to make a voltage drop 2% or less.

If the wiring distance is long between the inverter and motor, a main circuit cable voltage drop will cause the motor torque
to decrease especially at the output of a low frequency. Refer to page 17 for the recommended wire sizes.
(5) The total wiring length should be within the prescribed length.
Especially for long distance wiring, the fast-response current limit function may decrease, or the equipment connected to
the output side may malfunction. This is caused by a charging current due to the stray capacity of the wiring. Therefore,
note the overall wiring length. (Refer to page 19)
(6) Electromagnetic wave interference

The input/output (main circuit) of the inverter includes high frequency components, which may interfere with the
communication devices (such as AM radios) used near the inverter. In this case, install the FR-BIF optional capacitor
type filter (for use in the input side only) or FR-BSF01 or FR-BLF common mode filter to minimize interference.
(7) Do not install a power factor correction capacitor, surge suppressor or capacitor type filter on the inverter
output side.
This will cause the inverter to trip or the capacitor and surge suppressor to be damaged. If any of the above devices are
connected, immediately remove them. (When using capacitor type filter (FR-BIF) for a single-phase power input model,
make sure of secure insulation of T/L3-phase, and connect to the input side of the inverter.)
(8) For some short time after the power is switched OFF, a high voltage remains in the smoothing capacitor.
When accessing the inverter for inspection, wait for at least 10 minutes after the power supply has been switched OFF,
and then make sure that the voltage across the main circuit terminals P/+ and N/- of the inverter is not more than 30VDC
using a tester.
(9) A short circuit or earth (ground) fault on the inverter output side may damage the inverter modules.
 Fully check the insulation resistance of the circuit prior to inverter operation since repeated short circuits may damage
the inverter modules. These short circuits may be caused by peripheral circuit inadequacy, an earth (ground) fault
caused by wiring inadequacy, or reduced motor insulation resistance.
 Fully check the to-earth (ground) insulation and phase to phase insulation of the inverter output side before power-on.
Especially for an old motor or use in a hostile atmosphere, securely check the motor insulation resistance etc.
(10) Do not use the inverter input side magnetic contactor to start/stop the inverter.
Since repeated inrush currents at power ON will shorten the life of the converter circuit (switching life is about 1,000,000
times), frequent starts and stops of the MC must be avoided. Turn ON/OFF the inverter start controlling terminals (STF,
STR) to run/stop the inverter. (Refer to page 48)
(11) Across terminals P/+ and PR, connect only an external regenerative brake discharging resistor.
Do not connect a mechanical brake.
The brake resistor can not be connected to the FR-D720S-008(SC) and 014(SC). Do not connect anything to terminals
P/+ and PR.
Also, never short between these terminals.
50
Precautions for use of the inverter
(12) Do not apply a voltage higher than the permissible voltage to the inverter I/O signal circuits.
Application of a voltage higher than the permissible voltage to the inverter I/O signal circuits or opposite polarity may
damage the I/O devices. Especially check the wiring to prevent the speed setting potentiometer from being connected
incorrectly to short terminals 10 and 5.
(13) Provide electrical and mechanical interlocks for MC1 and

MC2 which are used for bypass operation. MC1
Interlock
When the wiring is incorrect and if there is a bypass operation Power R/L1 U
circuit as shown right, the inverter will be damaged due to arcs supply IM
S/L2 V MC2
generated at the time of switch-over or chattering caused by a T/L3 W
Undesirable current
sequence error. Inverter
(14) If the machine must not be restarted when power is restored after a power failure, provide a magnetic contactor
in the inverter's input side and also make up a sequence which will not switch ON the start signal.
If the start signal (start switch) remains ON after a power failure, the inverter will automatically restart as soon as the
power is restored.
(15) Inverter input side magnetic contactor (MC)

On the inverter input side, connect a MC for the following purposes. (Refer to page 4 for selection.)
1)To release the inverter from the power supply when a fault occurs or when the drive is not functioning (e.g. emergency
stop operation). For example, MC avoids overheat or burnout of the brake resistor when heat capacity of the resistor is
insufficient or brake regenerative transistor is damaged with short while connecting an optional brake resistor.
2)To prevent any accident due to an automatic restart at restoration of power after an inverter stop made by a power
failure
3)To separate the inverter from the power supply to ensure safe maintenance and inspection work.
If using an MC for emergency stop during operation, select an MC regarding the inverter input side current as JEM1038-
AC-3 class rated current.
(16) Handling of inverter output side magnetic contactor

Switch the magnetic contactor between the inverter and motor only when both the inverter and motor are at a stop. When
the magnetic contactor is turned ON while the inverter is operating, overcurrent protection of the inverter and such will
activate. When MC is provided for switching to the commercial power supply, for example, switch it ON/OFF after the
inverter and motor have stopped.
(17) Countermeasures against inverter-generated EMI

If electromagnetic noise generated from the inverter causes frequency setting signal to fluctuate and motor rotation
speed to be unstable when changing motor speed with analog signal, the following countermeasures are effective. 3
 Run signal cables as far away as possible from power cables (inverter I/O cables).
 Use shield cables as signal cables.

 Install a ferrite core on the signal cable (Example: ZCAT3035-1330 TDK).
(18) Instructions for overload operation

When performing operation of frequent start/stop of the inverter, rise/fall in the temperature of the transistor element of
the inverter will repeat due to a repeated flow of large current, shortening the life from thermal fatigue. Since thermal
fatigue is related to the amount of current, the life can be increased by reducing current at locked condition, starting
current, etc. Decreasing current may increase the life. However, decreasing current will result in insufficient torque and
the inverter may not start. Therefore, choose the inverter which has enough allowance for current (up to 2 rank larger in
capacity).
(19) Make sure that the specifications and rating match the system requirements.
51
Failsafe of the system which uses the inverter
3.6 Failsafe of the system which uses the inverter
When a fault occurs, the inverter trips to output a fault signal. However, a fault output signal may not be output at an inverter
fault occurrence when the detection circuit or output circuit fails, etc. Although Mitsubishi assures best quality products,
provide an interlock which uses inverter status output signals to prevent accidents such as damage to machine when the
inverter fails for some reason and at the same time consider the system configuration where failsafe from outside the inverter,
without using the inverter, is enabled even if the inverter fails.
(1) Interlock method which uses the inverter status output signals
By combining the inverter status output signals to provide an interlock as shown below, an inverter alarm can be
detected.
No. Interlock Method Check Method Used Signals Refer to Page

Inverter protective function Operation check of an alarm contact Fault output signal
1) 125
operation Circuit error detection by negative logic (ALM signal)
Operation ready signal
2) Inverter operating status Operation ready signal check 124
(RY signal)
Start signal
Logic check of the start signal and
3) Inverter running status (STF signal, STR signal) 120, 124
running signal
Running signal (RUN signal)
Start signal
Logic check of the start signal and output (STF signal, STR signal)
4) Inverter running status 120, 127
current Output current detection signal
(Y12 signal)
1)Check by the inverter fault output signal

Inverter fault occurrence
Output frequency
When the fault occurs and the inverter trips, the fault output (trip)
signal (ALM signal) is output (ALM signal is assigned to
terminal ABC in the initial setting).
Check that the inverter functions properly.
In addition, negative logic can be set (ON when the inverter Time
ALM
is normal, OFF when the fault occurs). (when output
ON OFF
at NC contact)
ON OFF
RES Reset processing
(about 1s)
Reset ON
2)Checking the inverter operating status by the inverter
Power
operation ready completion signal ON OFF
supply
Operation ready signal (RY signal) is output when the ON OFF
STF
inverter power is ON and the inverter becomes operative. ON
Check if the RY signal is output after powering ON the RH
inverter.
Output frequency
DC injection brake
operation point
DC injection
3) Checking the inverter operating status by the start signal
brake operation
input to the inverter and inverter running signal.
The inverter running signal (RUN signal) is output when the Pr. 13 Starting frequency
Reset
inverter is running (RUN signal is assigned to terminal RUN Time
processing
in the initial setting).
ON OFF
Check if RUN signal is output when inputting the start signal RY
to the inverter (forward signal is STF signal and reverse RUN ON OFF
signal is STR signal). For logic check, note that RUN signal
is output for the period from the inverter decelerates until
output to the motor is stopped, configure a sequence
considering the inverter deceleration time.
52
Failsafe of the system which uses the inverter
4)Checking the motor operating status by the start signal input to the inverter and inverter output current detection signal.
The output current detection signal (Y12 signal) is output when the inverter operates and currents flows in the motor.
Check if Y12 signal is output when inputting the start signal to the inverter (forward signal is STF signal and reverse
signal is STR signal). Note that the current level at which Y12 signal is output is set to 150% of the inverter rated current
in the initial setting, it is necessary to adjust the level to around 20% using no load current of the motor as reference with
Pr.150 Output current detection level.
For logic check, as same as the inverter running signal (RUN signal), the inverter outputs for the period from the inverter
decelerates until output to the motor is stopped, configure a sequence considering the inverter deceleration time.
Output Pr. 190, Pr. 192, Pr. 197 Setting

Signal Positive logic Negative logic  When using various signals, assign functions to Pr.190,
ALM 99 199 Pr.192, and Pr.197 (output terminal function selection) referring to
RY 11 111 the table on the left.
RUN 0 100
Y12 12 112
NOTE
(2) Backup method outside the inverter

Even if the interlock is provided by the inverter status signal, enough failsafe is not ensured depending on the failure
status of the inverter itself. For example, when the inverter CPU fails, even if the interlock is provided using the inverter
fault signal, start signal and RUN signal, there is a case where a fault signal is not output and RUN signal is kept output
even if an inverter fault occurs.
Provide a speed detector to detect the motor speed and current detector to detect the motor current and consider the
backup system such as checking up as below according to the level of importance of the system.
1)Start signal and actual operation check

Check the motor running and motor current while the start signal is input to the inverter by comparing the start signal to
the inverter and detected speed of the speed detector or detected current of the current detector. Note that the motor
current runs as the motor is running for the period until the motor stops since the inverter starts decelerating even if the
start signal turns OFF. For the logic check, configure a sequence considering the inverter deceleration time. In addition, it
is recommended to check the three-phase current when using the current detector.
2)Command speed and actual operation check

3
Check if there is no gap between the actual speed and commanded speed by comparing the inverter speed command
and detected speed of the speed detector.
Controller
System failure
Inverter Sensor
(speed, temperature,
air volume, etc.)
To the alarm detection sensor
53
MEMO
54
4 PARAMETERS
This chapter explains the "PARAMETERS" for use of this

product.
The following marks are used to indicate the controls as

below.
V/F ......V/F control 2
GP MFVC ......General-purpose magnetic flux vector control
(Parameters without any mark are valid for both controls.)
55
Operation panel
4.1 Operation panel
4.1.1 Names and functions of the operation panel
The operation panel cannot be removed from the inverter.
Operation mode indicator Operating status indication

PU: Lit to indicate PU operation mode. Lit or flicker during inverter operation. 
EXT: Lit to indicate External operation mode. * Lit: When the forward rotation operation
(Lit at power-ON at initial setting.) is being performed.
NET: Lit to indicate Network operation mode. Slow flickering (1.4s cycle):
PU, EXT: Lit to indicate External/PU When the reverse rotation operation
combined operation mode 1, 2. is being performed.
These turn OFF when command source is Fast flickering (0.2s cycle):
not on operation panel (Refer to page 179).
When was pressed or the
Unit indicator start command was given, but the

Hz: Lit to indicate frequency. operation cannot be made.
(Flickers when the set frequency When the frequency command is less
monitor is displayed.) than the starting frequency.
A: Lit to indicate current. When the MRS signal is input.
(Both "Hz" and "A" turn OFF when other
than the above is displayed.) Parameter setting mode indication
Lit to indicate parameter setting mode.
Monitor (4-digit LED)
Shows the frequency, parameter number, Monitor indicator
etc. Lit to indicate monitoring mode.
Setting dial Stop operation

(Setting dial: Mitsubishi inverter dial) Used to stop Run command.
Used to change the frequency setting Fault can be reset when protective
and parameter settings. function is activated (fault).
Press to display the following.
 Displays the set frequency in the Operation mode switchover
monitor mode Used to switch between the PU and
 Present set value is displayed during External operation mode.
calibration When using the External operation mode
 Displays the order in the faults history (operation using a separately connected
mode frequency setting potentiometer and start
signal), press this key to light up the EXT
Mode switchover indication.
Used to change each setting mode.
(Press simultaneously (0.5s) (Refer to
Pressing simultaneously changes page 58), or change Pr. 79 setting to change
the operation mode. (Refer to page 58) to combined mode .)
Pressing for a while (2s) can lock PU: PU operation mode
operation. (Refer to page 243) EXT: External operation mode
Cancels PU stop also.
Determination of each setting
If pressed during operation, monitor Start command
changes as below; The rotation direction can be selected by
setting Pr. 40.
Running frequency
Output current
Output voltage
56
Operation panel
4.1.2 Basic operation (factory setting)
Operation mode switchover
At power-ON (External operation mode)
PU Jog operation mode

Monitor/frequency setting
(Example)
PU operation mode
Value change and frequency flicker.
(output frequency monitor)
Frequency setting has been
written and completed!!
STOP
Output current monitor Output voltage monitor
Parameter setting
Display the
Parameter setting mode (Refer to page 59) present setting
(Example)
Value change Parameter and a setting value

flicker alternately.
Parameter write is completed!!
Parameter clear All parameter Faults history clear

clear
4
Initial value
change list
PARAMETERS
Faults history
[Operation for displaying faults history] (Refer to page 249)

Past eight faults can be displayed.
(The latest fault is ended by ".".)
When no fault history exists, is displayed.
57
Operation panel
4.1.3 Easy operation mode setting (easy setting mode)
Setting of Pr. 79 Operation mode selection according to combination of the start command and speed command can be
easily made.
Changing
example Start command: external (STF/STR), frequency command: operate with
Operation Display
1. Screen at power-ON
The monitor display appears.
2. Press and for 0.5s. Flickering
3. Turn until appears. Flickering
(Refer to the table below for other settings.)
Flickering
Operation Method
Operation Panel Indication
Start command Frequency command
Flickering
Flickering
Flickering
External Analog
(STF, STR) voltage input
Flickering
Flickering
External
(STF, STR)
Flickering
Flickering
Analog
voltage input
Flickering
4. Press to set.
Flicker ··· Parameter setting complete!!

The monitor display appears after 3s.
REMARKS
is displayed ... Why?
Parameter write is disabled with "1" set in Pr. 77.
is displayed ... Why?
Setting can not be made during operation. Turn the start switch ( , STF or STR) OFF.
 Press before pressing to return to the monitor display without setting. In this case, the mode changes to External
operation mode when performed in the PU operation mode (PU JOG operation mode) and to PU operation mode when
performed in the External operation mode.
 Reset can be made with .
 The priorities of the frequency commands when Pr. 79 = "3" are "Multi-speed operation (RL/RM/RH/REX) > PID control (X14) >
terminal 4 analog input (AU) > digital input from the operation panel".
58
4.1.4 Changing the parameter setting value
Changing
Change the Pr. 1 Maximum frequency setting.
example
Operation Display
PU indicator is lit.
2. Press to choose the PU operation mode.
PRM indicator is lit.

3. Press to choose the parameter setting
mode.
(The parameter number read previously
appears.)
4. Turn until (Pr. 1) appears.
5. Press to read the present set value.
" "(120.0Hz (initial value)) appears.
6. Turn to change the set value to
" " (50.00Hz).
7. Press to set.
Flicker...Parameter setting complete!!

 Turn to read another parameter.
 Press to show the setting again.
 Press twice to show the next parameter.
 Press twice to return to frequency monitor.
REMARKS
to is displayed...Why?
appears .................... Write disable error

appears .................... Write error during operation 4
appears .................... Calibration error
appears .................... Mode designation error
PARAMETERS
(For details, refer to the Instruction Manual (Applied).)

 The number of digits displayed on the operation panel is four. Only the upper four digits of values can be displayed and set. If the
values to be displayed have five digits or more including decimal places, the fifth or later numerals cannot be displayed nor set.
(Example) For Pr. 1
When 50Hz is set, 50.00 is displayed.
When 120Hz is set, 120.0 is displayed and second decimal place is not displayed nor set.
4.1.5 Setting dial push
Push the setting dial ( ) to display the set frequency* currently set.
* Appears when PU operation mode or External/PU combined operation mode 1 is selected (Pr. 79 = "3").
59
Parameter list Parameter list
4.2 Parameter list
4.2.1 Parameter list
Parameter List
For simple variable-speed operation of the inverter, the initial setting of the parameters may be used. Set the necessary
parameters to meet the load and operational specifications. Parameter setting, change and check can be made from the
operation panel.  Symbol in the Remarks column
...Specifications differ according to the date assembled. Refer to page 292 to check the SERIAL number.
REMARKS  These instruction codes are used for parameter read and write by using Mitsubishi inverter protocol with the RS-485 communication.
  indicates simple mode parameters. (Refer to page 186 for RS-485 communication)
 "" indicates valid and "" indicates invalid of "control mode-based correspondence table", "parameter copy", "parameter clear", and "all parameter clear".
 The parameters surrounded by a black border in the table allow its setting to be changed during operation even if "0" (initial
value) is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write selection.
Control Mode-based
Minimum Refer Instruction Code Parameter
Func- Initial Customer Correspondence Table
Parameter Name Setting Range Setting to Parameter Remarks
tion Value Setting
Increments Page Read Write Extended V/F GP MFVC Copy Clear All clear
0 Torque boost 0 to 30% 0.1% 6/4/3%  77 0 00 80 0     
1 Maximum frequency 0 to 120Hz 0.01Hz 120Hz 86 1 01 81 0     
2 Minimum frequency 0 to 120Hz 0.01Hz 0Hz 86 2 02 82 0     
3 Base frequency 0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 50Hz 88 3 03 83 0     
Basic functions
4 Multi-speed setting (high speed) 0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 50Hz 92 4 04 84 0     

5 Multi-speed setting (middle speed) 0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 30Hz 92 5 05 85 0     
6 Multi-speed setting (low speed) 0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 10Hz 92 6 06 86 0     
7 Acceleration time 0 to 3600s 0.1s 5/10s  99 7 07 87 0     
8 Deceleration time 0 to 3600s 0.1s 5/10s  99 8 08 88 0     
Rated
9 Electronic thermal O/L relay 0 to 500A 0.01A inverter 103 9 09 89 0     
current
10 DC injection brake operation frequency 0 to 120Hz 0.01Hz 3Hz 112 10 0A 8A 0     
DC injection
brake
11 DC injection brake operation time 0 to 10s 0.1s 0.5s 112 11 0B 8B 0     
12 DC injection brake operation voltage 0 to 30% 0.1% 6/4%  112 12 0C 8C 0     

— 13 Starting frequency 0 to 60Hz 0.01Hz 0.5Hz 101 13 0D 8D 0     
— 14 Load pattern selection 0 to 3 1 0 90 14 0E 8E 0     
operation
15 Jog frequency 0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 5Hz 94 15 0F 8F 0     

JOG
16 Jog acceleration/deceleration time 0 to 3600s 0.1s 0.5s 94 16 10 90 0     
— 17 MRS input selection 0, 2, 4 1 0 118 17 11 91 0     

— 18 High speed maximum frequency 120 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 120Hz 86 18 12 92 0      4
— 19 Base frequency voltage 0 to 1000V, 8888, 9999 0.1V 8888 88 19 13 93 0     
deceleration time
Acceleration/
PARAMETERS
Acceleration/deceleration reference
20 1 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 50Hz 99 20 14 94 0     
frequency
prevention
22 Stall prevention operation level 0 to 200% 0.1% 150% 82 22 16 96 0     

Stall
Stall prevention operation level

23 0 to 200%, 9999 0.1% 9999 82 23 17 97 0     
compensation factor at double speed
24 Multi-speed setting (speed 4) 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 92 24 18 98 0     
Multi-speed
25 Multi-speed setting (speed 5) 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 92 25 19 99 0     

setting
26 Multi-speed setting (speed 6) 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 92 26 1A 9A 0     

27 Multi-speed setting (speed 7) 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 92 27 1B 9B 0     
Acceleration/deceleration pattern
— 29 0, 1, 2 1 0 102 29 1D 9D 0     
selection
60
Control Mode-based
tion Value Setting
113,
— 30 Regenerative function selection 0, 1, 2 1 0 30 1E 9E 0     
139
31 Frequency jump 1A 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 87 31 1F 9F 0     
Frequency jump
Parameter List
32 Frequency jump 1B 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 87 32 20 A0 0     
33 Frequency jump 2A 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 87 33 21 A1 0     
35 Frequency jump 3A 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 87 35 23 A3 0     
— 37 Speed display 0, 0.01 to 9998 0.001 0 130 37 25 A5 0     
— 40 RUN key rotation direction selection 0, 1 1 0 242 40 28 A8 0     
41 Up-to-frequency sensitivity 0 to 100% 0.1% 10% 126 41 29 A9 0     
Frequency
detection
42 Output frequency detection 0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 6Hz 126 42 2A AA 0     

Output frequency detection for reverse
43 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 126 43 2B AB 0     
rotation
44 Second acceleration/deceleration time 0 to 3600s 0.1s 5/10s  99, 223 44 2C AC 0     
Second functions
45 Second deceleration time 0 to 3600s, 9999 0.1s 9999 99, 223 45 2D AD 0     

46 Second torque boost 0 to 30%, 9999 0.1% 9999 77 46 2E AE 0     
47 Second V/F (base frequency) 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 88 47 2F AF 0     
Second stall prevention operation
48 0 to 200%, 9999 0.1% 9999 82 48 30 B0 0     
current
51 Second electronic thermal O/L relay 0 to 500A, 9999 0.01A 9999 103 51 33 B3 0     
0, 5, 8 to 12, 14, 20,
52 DU/PU main display data selection 23 to 25, 52 to 55, 61, 1 0 131 52 34 B4 0     
Monitor functions
62, 64, 100

55 Frequency monitoring reference 0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 50Hz 136 55 37 B7 0     
Rated
56 Current monitoring reference 0 to 500A 0.01A inverter 136 56 38 B8 0     
current
Automatic
57 Restart coasting time 0, 0.1 to 5s, 9999 0.1s 9999 139 57 39 B9 0     

functions
restart
58 Restart cushion time 0 to 60s 0.1s 1s 139 58 3A BA 0     

— 59 Remote function selection 0, 1, 2, 3 1 0 96 59 3B BB 0     
— 60 Energy saving control selection 0, 9 1 0 150 60 3C BC 0     
— 65 Retry selection 0 to 5 1 0 147 65 41 C1 0     
Stall prevention operation reduction
— 66 0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 50Hz 82 66 42 C2 0     
starting frequency
67 Number of retries at fault occurrence 0 to 10, 101 to 110 1 0 147 67 43 C3 0     
Retry
68 Retry waiting time 0.1 to 600s 0.1s 1s 147 68 44 C4 0     

69 Retry count display erase 0 1 0 147 69 45 C5 0     
— 70 Special regenerative brake duty 0 to 30% 0.1% 0% 113 70 46 C6 0     
4
78,
0, 1, 3, 13, 23, 40, 43,
— 71 Applied motor 1 0 106, 71 47 C7 0     
50, 53
108,
— 72 PWM frequency selection 0 to 15 1 1 151 72 48 C8 0     
PARAMETERS
— 73 Analog input selection 0, 1, 10, 11 1 1 153 73 49 C9 0     
— 74 Input filter time constant 0 to 8 1 1 155 74 4A CA 0     
Reset selection/disconnected PU
— 75 0 to 3, 14 to 17 1 14 161 75 4B CB 0     
detection/PU stop selection
— 77 Parameter write selection 0, 1, 2 1 0 164 77 4D CD  0     
— 78 Reverse rotation prevention selection 0, 1, 2 1 0 165 78 4E CE 0     
168,
—  79 Operation mode selection 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7 1 0  79 4F CF  0     
178
62
Control Mode-based
tion Value Setting
80 Motor capacity 0.1 to 7.5kW, 9999 0.01kW 9999 78, 108 80 50 D0 0     
82 Motor excitation current 0 to 500A, 9999 0.01A 9999 108 82 52 D2 0     
Motor constants
83 Rated motor voltage 0 to 1000V 0.1V 200V/400V 108 83 53 D3 0     
Parameter List

84 Rated motor frequency 10 to 120Hz 0.01Hz 50Hz 108 84 54 D4 0     
90 Motor constant (R1) 0 to 50 , 9999 0.001 9999 108 90 5A DA 0     
108,
96 Auto tuning setting/status 0, 11, 21 1 0 96 60 E0 0     
139
186,
117 PU communication station number 0 to 31 (0 to 247) 1 0 117 11 91 1     
203
PU connector communication
186,
118 PU communication speed 48, 96, 192, 384 1 192 118 12 92 1     
203
119 PU communication stop bit length 0, 1, 10, 11 1 1 186 119 13 93 1     
186,
120 PU communication parity check 0, 1, 2 1 2 120 14 94 1     
203
121 Number of PU communication retries 0 to 10, 9999 1 1 187 121 15 95 1     
187,
122 PU communication check time interval 0, 0.1 to 999.8s, 9999 0.1s 9999 122 16 96 1     
203
123 PU communication waiting time setting 0 to 150ms, 9999 1 9999 186 123 17 97 1     
124 PU communication CR/LF selection 0, 1, 2 1 1 186 124 18 98 1     
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain
—  125 0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 50Hz 156  125 19 99 1     
frequency
— 126 0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 50Hz 156  126 1A 9A 1     
frequency
PID control automatic switchover
127 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 215 127 1B 9B 1     
frequency
215,
128 PID action selection 0, 20, 21, 40 to 43 1 0 128 1C 9C 1     
223
215,
129 PID proportional band 0.1 to 1000%, 9999 0.1% 100% 129 1D 9D 1     
223
PID operation
215,
130 PID integral time 0.1 to 3600s, 9999 0.1s 1s 130 1E 9E 1     
223
215,
131 PID upper limit 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 131 1F 9F 1     
223
215,
132 PID lower limit 0 to 100%, 9999 0.1% 9999 132 20 A0 1     
223
215,
133 PID action set point 0 to 100%, 9999 0.01% 9999 133 21 A1 1     
223
215,
134 PID differential time 0.01 to 10s, 9999 0.01s 9999 134 22 A2 1     
223
 
PU
145 PU display language selection 0 to 7 1 1 242 145 2D AD 1   

— 146 Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set. 146 Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
150 Output current detection level 0 to 200% 0.1% 150% 127 150 32 B2 1     
4
detection
Output current detection signal delay

Current
151 0 to 10s 0.1s 0s 127 151 33 B3 1     

time
PARAMETERS
152 Zero current detection level 0 to 200% 0.1% 5% 127 152 34 B4 1     
153 Zero current detection time 0 to 1s 0.01s 0.5s 127 153 35 B5 1     
— 156 Stall prevention operation selection 0 to 31, 100, 101 1 0 82 156 38 B8 1     
— 157 OL signal output timer 0 to 25s, 9999 0.1s 0s 82 157 39 B9 1     
1 to 3, 5, 8 to 12, 14, 21,
— 158 AM terminal function selection 1 1 131 158 3A BA 1     
24, 52, 53, 61, 62
—  160 Extended function display selection 0, 9999 1 0 165  160 00 80 2     
Frequency setting/key lock operation
— 161 0, 1, 10, 11 1 0 243 161 01 81 2     
selection
Automatic restart
Automatic restart after instantaneous

162 0, 1, 10, 11 1 1 139 162 02 82 2     
power failure selection
functions
Stall prevention operation level for

165 0 to 200% 0.1% 150% 139 165 05 85 2     
restart
64
Control Mode-based
tion Value Setting
Current detection
Output current detection signal
166 0 to 10s, 9999 0.1s 0.1s 127 166 06 86 2     
retention time
Parameter List
Output current detection operation
167 0, 1 1 0 127 167 07 87 2     
selection
— 168 168
Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set. Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
— 169 169
monitor clear

Cumulative
170 Watt-hour meter clear 0, 10, 9999 1 9999 131 170 0A 8A 2    
171 Operation hour meter clear 0, 9999 1 9999 131 171 0B 8B 2     
0 to 5, 7, 8, 10, 12,

Input terminal function
178 STF terminal function selection 14, 16, 18, 24, 25, 37, 1 60 116 178 12 92 2    
60, 62, 65 to 67, 9999
assignment
0 to 5, 7, 8, 10, 12,
179 STR terminal function selection 14, 16, 18, 24, 25, 37, 1 61 116 179 13 93 2     
61, 62, 65 to 67, 9999
180 RL terminal function selection 0 to 5, 7, 8, 10, 12, 1 0 116 180 14 94 2     
181 RM terminal function selection 14, 16, 18, 24, 25, 37, 1 1 116 181 15 95 2     
182 RH terminal function selection 62, 65 to 67, 9999 1 2 116 182 16 96 2     
0, 1, 3, 4, 7, 8, 11 to 16,
25, 26, 46, 47, 64, 70,
80, 81, 90, 91, 93, 95,
96, 98, 99, 100, 101,
190 RUN terminal function selection 103, 104, 107, 108, 1 0 122 190 1E 9E 2     
111 to 116, 125, 126,
146, 147, 164, 170, 180,
Output terminal function assignment
181, 190, 191, 193, 195,

196, 198, 199, 9999
0, 1, 3, 4, 7, 8, 11 to 16,
25, 26, 46, 47, 64, 70,
80, 81, 90, 91, 95, 96,
98, 99, 100, 101, 103,
192 A,B,C terminal function selection 104, 107, 108, 1 99 122 192 20 A0 2     
111 to 116, 125, 126,
146, 147, 164, 170, 180,
181, 190, 191, 195, 196,
198, 199, 9999
0, 1, 3, 4, 7, 8, 11 to 16,
25, 26, 46, 47, 64, 70,
80, 81, 90, 91, 93, 95,
96, 98, 99, 100, 101,
197 SO terminal function selection 103, 104, 107, 108, 1 80 122 197 25 A5 2     
111 to 116, 125, 126,
146, 147, 164, 170, 180, 4
181, 190, 191, 193, 195,
196, 198, 199
232 Multi-speed setting (speed 8) 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 92 232 28 A8 2     
PARAMETERS
Multi-speed setting
233 Multi-speed setting (speed 9) 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 92 233 29 A9 2     

234 Multi-speed setting (speed 10) 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 92 234 2A AA 2     
235 Multi-speed setting (speed 11) 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 92 235 2B AB 2     
236 Multi-speed setting (speed 12) 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 92 236 2C AC 2     
237 Multi-speed setting (speed 13) 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 92 237 2D AD 2     
238 Multi-speed setting (speed 14) 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 92 238 2E AE 2     
239 Multi-speed setting (speed 15) 0 to 400Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 9999 92 239 2F AF 2     
— 240 Soft-PWM operation selection 0, 1 1 1 151 240 30 B0 2     
— 241 Analog input display unit switchover 0, 1 1 0 156 241 31 B1 2     
— 244 Cooling fan operation selection 0, 1 1 1 233 244 34 B4 2     
245 Rated slip 0 to 50%, 9999 0.01% 9999 81 245 35 B5 2     
compensation
Slip
246 Slip compensation time constant 0.01 to 10s 0.01s 0.5s 81 246 36 B6 2     
Constant-power range slip
247 0, 9999 1 9999 81 247 37 B7 2     
compensation selection
66
Control Mode-based
tion Value Setting
— 249 Earth (ground) fault detection at start 0, 1 1 1 149 249 39 B9 2     
0 to 100s, 115,
— 250 Stop selection 1000 to 1100s, 0.1s 9999 250 3A BA 2     
8888, 9999 120
Parameter List
— 251 Output phase loss protection selection 0, 1 1 1 149 251 3B BB 2     
255 Life alarm status display (0 to 15) 1 0 234 255 3F BF 2     
Life diagnosis
256 Inrush current limit circuit life display (0 to 100%) 1% 100% 234 256 40 C0 2     
257 Control circuit capacitor life display (0 to 100%) 1% 100% 234 257 41 C1 2     
258 Main circuit capacitor life display (0 to 100%) 1% 100% 234 258 42 C2 2     
259 Main circuit capacitor life measuring 0, 1 (2, 3, 8, 9) 1 0 234 259 43 C3 2     
— 260 PWM frequency automatic switchover 0, 1 1 0 151 260 44 C4 2     
Power failure
stop
261 Power failure stop selection 0, 1, 2 1 0 145 261 45 C5 2     
— 267 Terminal 4 input selection 0, 1, 2 1 0 153 267 4B CB 2     

— 268 Monitor decimal digits selection 0, 1, 9999 1 9999 131 268 4C CC 2     
— 269 Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set. 269 Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
0, 0.01, 0.10, 1.00,
— 295 Magnitude of frequency change setting 0.01 0 245 295 67 E7 2     
10.00

Password
296 Password lock level 1 to 6, 101 to 106, 9999 1 9999 166 296 68 E8 2    
function
1000 to 9998 (0 to 5,
297 Password lock/unlock 1 9999 166 297 69 E9 2     
9999)
— 298 Frequency search gain 0 to 32767, 9999 1 9999 139 298 6A EA 2     
Rotation direction detection selection
— 299 0, 1, 9999 1 0 139 299 6B EB 2     
at restarting
Communication operation command
RS-485 communication
338 0, 1 1 0 179 338 26 A6 3     

source
Communication speed command
339 0, 1, 2 1 0 179 339 27 A7 3     
source
340 Communication startup mode selection 0, 1, 10 1 0 178 340 28 A8 3     
Communication EEPROM write
342 0, 1 1 0 190 342 2A AA 3     
selection
343 Communication error count — 1 0 203 343 2B AB 3     
Second motor
constant
450 Second applied motor 0, 1, 9999 1 9999 106 450 32 B2 4     
495 Remote output selection 0, 1, 10, 11 1 0 129 495 5F DF 4     

Remote
Output
4
496 Remote output data 1 0 to 4095 1 0 129 496 60 E0 4     
187,
— 502 Stop mode selection at communication error 0, 1, 2 1 0 502 02 82 5     
203
PARAMETERS
Maintenance
503 Maintenance timer 0 (1 to 9998) 1 0 238 503 03 83 5     
504 Maintenance timer alarm output set time 0 to 9998, 9999 1 9999 238 504 04 84 5     
549 Protocol selection 0, 1 1 0 203 549 31 B1 5     

Communication
PU mode operation command source

551 2, 4, 9999 1 9999 179 551 33 B3 5     
selection
68
Control Mode-based
tion Value Setting
555 Current average time 0.1 to 1s 0.1s 1s 239 555 37 B7 5     

Current average
time monitor
556 Data output mask time 0 to 20s 0.1s 0s 239 556 38 B8 5     
Parameter List
Rated
Current average value monitor signal
557 0 to 500A 0.01A inverter 239 557 39 B9 5     
output reference current
current
— 561 PTC thermistor protection level 0.5 to 30k , 9999 0.01k 9999 103 561 3D BD 5     
— 563 Energization time carrying-over times (0 to 65535) 1 0 131 563 3F BF 5     
— 564 Operating time carrying-over times (0 to 65535) 1 0 131 564 40 C0 5     
— 571 Holding time at a start 0 to 10s, 9999 0.1s 9999 101 571 47 C7 5     
575 Output interruption detection time 0 to 3600s, 9999 0.1s 1s 215 575 4B CB 5     
operation
PID
576 Output interruption detection level 0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 0Hz 215 576 4C CC 5     
577 Output interruption cancel level 900 to 1100% 0.1% 1000% 215 577 4D CD 5     
592 Traverse function selection 0, 1, 2 1 0 229 592 5C DC 5     
593 Maximum amplitude amount 0 to 25% 0.1% 10% 229 593 5D DD 5     
Amplitude compensation amount
594 0 to 50% 0.1% 10% 594 5E DE 5
Traverse
229     
during deceleration
Amplitude compensation amount
595 0 to 50% 0.1% 10% 229 595 5F DF 5     
during acceleration
596 Amplitude acceleration time 0.1 to 3600s 0.1s 5s 229 596 60 E0 5     
597 Amplitude deceleration time 0.1 to 3600s 0.1s 5s 229 597 61 E1 5     
— 611 Acceleration time at a restart 0 to 3600s, 9999 0.1s 9999 139 611 0B 8B 6     
— 653 Speed smoothing control 0 to 200% 0.1% 0 152 653 35 B5 6     
— 665 Regeneration avoidance frequency gain 0 to 200% 0.1% 100 231 665 41 C1 6     
Protective
functions
872 Input phase loss protection selection 0, 1 1 1 149 872 48 C8 8     
Regeneration avoidance operation

avoidance function
882 0, 1, 2 1 0 231 882 52 D2 8     

selection
Regeneration
Regeneration avoidance operation 400VDC/

883 300 to 800V 0.1V 231 883 53 D3 8     
level 780VDC 
Regeneration avoidance compensation
885 0 to 10Hz, 9999 0.01Hz 6Hz 231 885 55 D5 8     
frequency limit value
886 Regeneration avoidance voltage gain 0 to 200% 0.1% 100% 231 886 56 D6 8     
parameter
888 Free parameter 1 0 to 9999 1 9999 241 888 58 D8 8     

Free
889 Free parameter 2 0 to 9999 1 9999 241 889 59 D9 8     
— 891 Cumulative power monitor digit shifted times 0 to 4, 9999 1 9999 131 891 5B D8 8     
C1 C1
AM terminal calibration — — — 137 5D DD 1     
(901)  (901)
C2 Terminal 2 frequency setting bias C2 4
0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 0Hz 156 5E DE 1     
(902)  frequency (902)
C3 C3
Terminal 2 frequency setting bias 0 to 300% 0.1% 0% 156 5E DE 1     
PARAMETERS
(902)  (902)
Calibration parameters
125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain 125

0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 50Hz 156 5F DF 1     
(903)  frequency (903)
C4 C4
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain 0 to 300% 0.1% 100% 156 5F DF 1     
(903)  (903)
C5 Terminal 4 frequency setting bias C5
0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 0Hz 156 60 E0 1     
(904)  frequency (904)
C6 C6
Terminal 4 frequency setting bias 0 to 300% 0.1% 20% 156 60 E0 1     
(904)  (904)
126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain 126
0 to 400Hz 0.01Hz 50Hz 156 61 E1 1     
(905)  frequency (905)
C7 C7
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain 0 to 300% 0.1% 100% 156 61 E1 1     
(905)  (905)
C22 to C25 C22 to C25
— Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set. Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
(922 to 923) (922 to 923)
70
Control Mode-based
tion Value Setting
PU 990 PU buzzer control 0, 1 1 1 246 990 5A DA 9     
991 PU contrast adjustment 0 to 63 1 58 246 991 5B DB 9     
Initial value change list
Pr.CL Parameter clear 0, 1 1 0 247 Pr.CL — FC — — — — — —
Parameter List
Clear parameters
ALLC All parameter clear 0, 1 1 0 247 ALLC — FC — — — — — —
Er.CL Faults history clear 0, 1 1 0 249 Er.CL — F4 — — — — — —
Pr.CH Initial value change list — — — 248 Pr.CH — — — — — — — —
 Differ according to capacities.

6%: FR-D740-022(SC) or lower, FR-D720S-042(SC) or lower
4%: FR-D740-036(SC) to 080(SC), FR-D720S-070(SC) and 100(SC)
3%: FR-D740-120(SC) and 160(SC)
 Differ according to capacities.
5s: FR-D740-080(SC) or lower, FR-D720S-008(SC) to 100(SC)
10s: FR-D740-120(SC) and 160(SC)
 Differ according to capacities.
6%: FR-D720S-008(SC) and 014(SC)
4%: FR-D740-012(SC) and 160(SC), FR-D720S-025(SC) or higher
 Write is disabled in the communication mode (Network operation mode) from the PU connector.
 The initial value differs according to the voltage class. (200V class / 400V class)
 The parameter number in parentheses is the one for use with the operation panel (PA02) for the FR-E500 series or parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07).
 These parameters are communication parameters that are not cleared when parameter clear (all clear) is executed from RS-485 communication. (Refer to
page 183 for RS-485 communication)
 Available only for the three-phase power input model.
PARAMETERS
72
Parameters according to purposes
4.3 Adjustment of the output torque (current) of the motor 77
4.3.1 Manual torque boost (Pr. 0, Pr. 46) .............................................................................................. 77
flux vector control (Pr. 71, Pr. 80))................................................................................................ 78
4.3.3 Slip compensation (Pr. 245 to Pr. 247)......................................................................................... 81
4.3.4 Stall prevention operation (Pr. 22, Pr. 23, Pr. 48, Pr. 66, Pr. 156, Pr. 157) .................................. 82
4.4 Limiting the output frequency 86
4.4.1 Maximum/minimum frequency (Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Pr. 18)...................................................................... 86
4.4.2 Avoiding mechanical resonance points (frequency jumps) (Pr. 31 to Pr. 36) ............................... 87
4.5 V/F pattern 88
4.5.1 Base frequency, voltage (Pr. 3, Pr. 19, Pr. 47) ............................................................................. 88
4.5.2 Load pattern selection (Pr. 14) ..................................................................................................... 90
4.6 Frequency setting by external terminals 92
4.6.1 Operation by multi-speed operation (Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27, Pr. 232 to Pr. 239).............. 92
4.6.2 Jog operation (Pr. 15, Pr. 16) ....................................................................................................... 94
4.6.3 Remote setting function (Pr. 59) ................................................................................................... 96
deceleration pattern 99
(Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 20, Pr. 44, Pr. 45) .............................................................................................. 99
4.7.2 Starting frequency and start-time hold function (Pr. 13, Pr. 571)................................................ 101
4.7.3 Acceleration/deceleration pattern (Pr. 29) .................................................................................. 102
4.8 Selection and protection of a motor 103
4.8.1 Motor overheat protection (Electronic thermal O/L relay, PTC thermistor protection) (Pr. 9, Pr. 51,
Pr. 561) ....................................................................................................................................... 103
4.8.2 Applied motor (Pr. 71, Pr. 450) ................................................................................................... 106
(Pr. 71, Pr. 80, Pr. 82 to Pr. 84, Pr. 90, Pr. 96)........................................................................... 108
4.9 Motor brake and stop operation 112
4.9.1 DC injection brake (Pr. 10 to Pr. 12)........................................................................................... 112

4.9.2 Selection of a regenerative brake (Pr. 30, Pr. 70) ...................................................................... 113
4.9.3 Stop selection (Pr. 250) .............................................................................................................. 115
4.10 Function assignment of external terminal and control 116
4.10.1 Input terminal function selection (Pr. 178 to Pr. 182).................................................................. 116
4.10.2 Inverter output shutoff signal (MRS signal, Pr. 17) ..................................................................... 118
4.10.3 Condition selection of function validity by second function selection signal (RT) ....................... 119
4.10.4 Start signal operation selection (STF, STR, STOP signal, Pr. 250) ........................................... 120
4.10.5 Output terminal function selection (Pr. 190, Pr. 192, Pr. 197) .................................................... 122
4.10.6 Detection of output frequency (SU, FU signal, Pr. 41 to Pr. 43) ................................................. 126
(Y12 signal, Y13 signal, Pr. 150 to Pr. 153, Pr. 166, Pr. 167) .................................................... 127
74
4.10.8 Remote output selection (REM signal, Pr. 495, Pr. 496) ............................................................ 129
4.11 Monitor display and monitor output signal 130
4.11.1 Speed display and speed setting (Pr. 37)................................................................................... 130
(Pr. 52, Pr.158, Pr. 170, Pr. 171, Pr. 268, Pr. 563, Pr. 564, Pr. 891) ......................................... 131
4.11.3 Reference of the terminal AM (analog voltage output) (Pr. 55, Pr. 56) ...................................... 136
4.11.4 Terminal AM calibration (calibration parameter C1 (Pr.901)) ..................................................... 137
failure 139

(Pr. 30, Pr. 57, Pr. 58, Pr. 96, Pr. 162, Pr. 165, Pr. 298, Pr. 299, Pr. 611) ................................. 139
4.12.2 Power-failure deceleration stop function (Pr. 261) ..................................................................... 145
4.13 Operation setting at fault occurrence 147
Parameters according to purposes

4.13.1 Retry function (Pr. 65, Pr. 67 to Pr. 69) ...................................................................................... 147
4.13.2 Input/output phase loss protection selection (Pr. 251, Pr. 872) .................................................. 149
4.13.3 Earth (ground) fault detection at start (Pr. 249) .......................................................................... 149
4.14 Energy saving operation 150
4.14.1 Optimum excitation control (Pr. 60) ............................................................................................ 150
4.15 Motor noise, EMI measures, mechanical resonance 151
4.15.1 PWM carrier frequency and Soft-PWM control (Pr. 72, Pr. 240, Pr. 260)................................... 151
4.15.2 Speed smoothing control (Pr. 653) ............................................................................................. 152
4.16 Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 2, 4) 153
4.16.1 Analog input selection (Pr. 73, Pr. 267) ...................................................................................... 153
4.16.2 Response level of analog input and noise elimination (Pr. 74)................................................... 155
(Pr. 125, Pr. 126, Pr. 241, C2 (Pr. 902) to C7 (Pr. 905)) ............................................................ 156
4.17 Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction 161
4.17.1 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection (Pr. 75) ..................................... 161
4.17.2 Parameter write disable selection (Pr. 77).................................................................................. 164 4
4.17.3 Reverse rotation prevention selection (Pr. 78) ........................................................................... 165
4.17.4 Extended parameter display (Pr. 160) ........................................................................................ 165
PARAMETERS
4.17.5 Password function (Pr. 296, Pr. 297).......................................................................................... 166

4.18 Selection of operation mode and operation location 168
4.18.1 Operation mode selection (Pr. 79).............................................................................................. 168
4.18.2 Operation mode at power-ON (Pr. 79, Pr. 340) .......................................................................... 178
operation (Pr. 338, Pr. 339, Pr. 551) .......................................................................................... 179
4.19 Communication operation and setting 183
4.19.1 Wiring and configuration of PU connector .................................................................................. 183

(Pr. 117 to Pr. 120, Pr. 123, Pr. 124, Pr. 549) ............................................................................ 186
75
4.19.3 Operation selection at communication error occurrence (Pr. 121, Pr. 122, Pr. 502) .................. 187
4.19.4 Communication EEPROM write selection (Pr. 342) ................................................................... 190
4.19.5 Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link communication) ....................................................... 191
(Pr. 117, Pr. 118, Pr. 120, Pr. 122, Pr. 343, Pr. 502, Pr. 549) .................................................... 203
4.20 Special operation and frequency control 215
4.20.1 PID control (Pr. 127 to Pr. 134, Pr. 575 to Pr. 577) .................................................................... 215
4.20.2 Dancer control (Pr. 44, Pr. 45, Pr. 128 to Pr. 134)...................................................................... 223
4.20.3 Traverse function (Pr. 592 to Pr. 597) ........................................................................................ 229
4.20.4 Regeneration avoidance function (Pr. 665, Pr. 882, Pr. 883, Pr. 885, Pr. 886).......................... 231
4.21 Useful functions 233
4.21.1 Cooling fan operation selection (Pr. 244) ................................................................................... 233
4.21.2 Display of the lives of the inverter parts (Pr. 255 to Pr. 259) ...................................................... 234
4.21.3 Maintenance timer alarm (Pr. 503, Pr. 504)................................................................................ 238
4.21.4 Current average value monitor signal (Pr. 555 to Pr. 557) ......................................................... 239
4.21.5 Free parameter (Pr. 888, Pr. 889) .............................................................................................. 241
4.22 Setting the parameter unit and operation panel 242
4.22.1 RUN key rotation direction selection (Pr. 40).............................................................................. 242
4.22.2 PU display language selection (Pr.145)...................................................................................... 242
4.22.3 Operation panel frequency setting/key lock selection (Pr. 161).................................................. 243
4.22.4 Magnitude of frequency change setting (Pr. 295)....................................................................... 245
4.22.5 Buzzer control (Pr. 990).............................................................................................................. 246
4.22.6 PU contrast adjustment (Pr. 991) ............................................................................................... 246
4.23 Parameter clear/ All parameter clear 247
4.24 Initial value change list 248
4.25 Check and clear of the faults history 249
76
Adjustment of the output torque (current) of the motor
4.3 Adjustment of the output torque (current) of the motor

Purpose Parameter that should be Set Refer to Page
Set starting torque manually Manual torque boost Pr. 0, Pr. 46 77
Automatically control output current General-purpose magnetic
Pr. 71, Pr. 80 78
according to load flux vector control
Compensate for motor slip to secure
Slip compensation Pr. 245 to Pr. 247 81
low-speed torque
Limit output current to prevent Pr. 22, Pr. 23, Pr. 66, Pr. 156,
Stall prevention operation 82
inverter trip Pr. 157
4.3.1 Manual torque boost (Pr. 0, Pr. 46) V/F
Motor torque reduction in the low-speed range can be improved by compensating a voltage drop in the low-frequency range.
Motor torque in the low-frequency range can be adjusted to the load to increase the starting motor torque.
Two kinds of start torque boosts can be changed by switching between terminals.
Parameter Setting
Name Initial Value Description
Number Range
6%
FR-D720S-008(SC) to 042(SC)
0 Torque boost FR-D740-036(SC) to 080(SC) 0 to 30% Set the output voltage at 0Hz as %.
4%
FR-D720S-070(SC) and 100(SC)
FR-D740-120(SC) and 160(SC) 3%
Second torque 0 to 30% Set the torque boost when the RT signal is ON.
46  9999
boost 9999 Without second torque boost
* The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 165)
(1) Starting torque adjustment

On the assumption that Pr. 19 Base frequency voltage is 100%, set 100%
Output voltage
the output voltage at 0Hz in % to Pr. 0 (Pr. 46).

Adjust the parameter little by little (about 0.5%), and check the
motor status each time. If the setting is too large, the motor will
overheat. The guideline is about 10% at the greatest. Pr. 0 Setting range
Pr. 46
0 Base frequency
(2) Set two kinds of torque boosts (RT signal, Pr. 46) Output frequency (Hz)
When you want to change torque boost according to applications,

switch multiple motors with one inverter, etc., use Second torque boost.
Pr. 46 Second torque boost is valid when the RT signal is ON.
For the terminal used for RT signal input, set "3" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection) to assign the function.
REMARKS
 The RT signal acts as the second function selection signal and makes the other second functions valid. (Refer to page 119)
4
NOTE
 The amount of current flows in the motor may become large according to the conditions such as the motor
characteristics, load, acceleration/deceleration time, wiring length, etc., resulting in an overcurrent trip (OL (overcurrent
PARAMETERS
alarm) then E.OC1 (overcurrent trip during acceleration), overload trip (E.THM (motor overload trip), or E.THT (inverter
overload trip).
(When a fault occurs, release the start command, and decrease the Pr. 0 setting 1% by 1% to reset.) (Refer to page 252.)
 The Pr. 0, Pr. 46 settings are valid only when V/F control is selected.
 When using the inverter dedicated motor (constant-torque motor) with the FR-D740-120(SC) and 160(SC), set torque boost
value to 2%.
When Pr. 0 = "3%"(initial value), if Pr. 71 value is changed to the setting for use with a constant-torque motor, the Pr. 0 setting
changes to 2%.
 Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
Parameters referred to
Pr. 3 Base frequency, Pr. 19 Base frequency voltage Refer to page 88
Pr. 71 Applied motor Refer to page 106
Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection) Refer to page 116
77
flux vector control (Pr. 71, Pr. 80)) GP MFVC
General-purpose magnetic flux vector control is available.

Large starting torque and low speed torque are available with General-purpose magnetic flux vector control.
 What is General-purpose magnetic flux vector control ?
The low speed torque can be improved by providing voltage compensation to flow a motor current which meets the
load torque. With setting slip compensation (Pr. 245 to Pr. 247), output frequency compensation (slip compensation) is
made so that the actual motor speed goes closer to a speed command value. Effective when load fluctuates
drastically, etc.
General-purpose magnetic flux vector control is the same function as the FR-E500 series.
Parameter Initial
Name Setting Range Description
Number Value
0, 1, 3, By selecting a standard motor or constant-torque motor,
71 Applied motor 0 13, 23, 40, 43 thermal characteristic and motor constants of each motor
50, 53 are set.
Applied motor capacity. (General-purpose magnetic flux
0.1 to 7.5kW
80 Motor capacity 9999 vector control)
9999 V/F control
The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 165)
POINT
If the following conditions are not satisfied, select V/F control since malfunction such as insufficient torque and
uneven rotation may occur.
 The motor capacity should be equal to or one rank lower than the inverter capacity. (note that the capacity
should be 0.1kW or more)
 Motor to be used is any of Mitsubishi standard motor, high efficiency motor (SF-JR, SF-HR 0.2kW or more) or
Mitsubishi constant-torque motor (SF-JRCA 4P, SF-HRCA 0.2kW to 7.5kW). When using a motor other than the
above (other manufacturer's motor), perform offline auto tuning without fail.
 Single-motor operation (one motor run by one inverter) should be performed.
 The wiring length from inverter to motor should be within 30m. (Perform offline auto tuning in the state where
wiring work is performed when the wiring length exceeds 30m.)
Permissible wiring length between inverter and motor differs according to the inverter capacity and setting value
of Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection (carrier frequency). Refer to page 19 for the permissible wiring length.
(1) Control mode

 V/F control (initial setting) and General-purpose magnetic flux vector control are available with this inverter.
 V/F control is for controlling frequency and voltage so that the ratio of frequency (F) to voltage (V) is constant when
changing frequency.
 General-purpose magnetic flux vector control divides the inverter output current into an excitation current and a torque
current by vector calculation, and makes voltage compensation to flow a motor current which meets the load torque.
(General-purpose magnetic flux vector control is the same function as the FR-E500 series.)
78
(2) Selection method of General-purpose magnetic flux vector control
Perform secure wiring.

(Refer to page 14)
Display the extended function parameters.

(Pr. 160) (Refer to page 165)
Set "0" in Pr. 160 to display the extended function parameters.
Set the motor. (Pr. 71)
Motor Pr. 71 Setting  Remarks

Mitsubishi standard SF-JR 0 (initial value)
motor SF-HR 40
Mitsubishi high
Others 3 Offline auto tuning is necessary. 
efficiency motor
SF-JRCA 4P 1
Mitsubishi constant-
SF-HRCA 50
torque motor
Others (SF-JRC, etc.) 13 Offline auto tuning is necessary. 
Other standard motor — 3 Offline auto tuning is necessary. 
Other constant-
— 13 Offline auto tuning is necessary. 
torque motor
 Refer to page 106 for other settings of Pr. 71.
 Refer to page 108 for offline auto tuning.
Set the motor capacity.

(Pr. 80) (Refer to page 78)
Set motor capacity (kW) in Pr. 80 Motor capacity.

(V/F control is performed when the setting is "9999" (initial value).
Set the operation command. (Refer to page 168)

Select the start command and speed command.
(1)Start command
1)Operation panel: Setting by pressing of the operation panel

2)External command: Setting by forward rotation or reverse rotation
command (terminal STF or STR)
(2)Speed command
1)Operation panel: Setting by turning of the operation panel

2)External analog command (terminal 2 or 4):
Give a speed command using the analog signal input to terminal 2 (or
terminal 4).
3)Multi-speed command:
The external signals (RH, RM, RL) may also be used to give speed
command.
Test run
4
As required
 Perform offline auto tuning. (Pr. 96) (Refer to page 108)
 Set motor excitation current. (Pr. 82) (Refer to page 108)
PARAMETERS
 Set slip compensation. (Pr. 245, Pr. 246, Pr. 247) (Refer to page 81)
NOTE
 Uneven rotation slightly increases as compared to the V/F control. (It is not suitable for machines such as grinding
machine and wrapping machine which requires less uneven rotation at low speed.)
 When a surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H/FR-BMF-H) is connected between the inverter and motor, output
torque may decrease.
79
(3) Control method switching by external terminals (X18 signal)

Use the V/F switchover signal (X18) to change the control method (V/F control and General-purpose magnetic flux vector
control) with external terminal.
Turn the X18 signal ON to change the currently selected control method (General-purpose magnetic flux vector control) to
V/F control.
For the terminal used for X18 signal input, set "18" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection) to assign the
function.
REMARKS
Switch the control method using external terminal (X18 signal) during an inverter stop. If control method between V/F control and
General-purpose magnetic flux vector control is switched during the operation, the actual switchover does not take place until the
inverter stops. In addition, if control method is switched to V/F control during the operation, only second function becomes valid as
V/F control and second functions are selected simultaneously in V/F control.
NOTE
Pr.3 Base frequency, Pr.19 Base frequency voltage Refer to page 88
Pr.71 Applied motor Refer to page 106
Pr.77 Parameter write selection Refer to page 164
80
4.3.3 Slip compensation (Pr. 245 to Pr. 247)
Inverter output current may be used to assume motor slip to keep the motor speed constant.
Parameter
Name Initial Value Setting Range Description
Number
0.01 to 50% Rated motor slip
245 Rated slip 9999
0, 9999 No slip compensation
Slip compensation response time. When the
value is made smaller, response will be faster.
Slip compensation time
246 0.5s 0.01 to 10s However, as load inertia is greater, a
constant
regenerative overvoltage fault (E.OV) is more
liable to occur.
Slip compensation is not made in the constant
Constant-power range 0 power range. (frequency range above the
247 slip compensation 9999 frequency set in Pr. 3)
selection Slip compensation is made in the constant power
9999
range.
 Slip compensation is validated when the motor rated slip calculated by the following formula is set in Pr. 245. Slip
compensation is not made when Pr. 245 = "0" or "9999".
Synchronous speed at base frequency - rated speed
Rated slip =  100[%]
Synchronous speed at base frequency
REMARKS
 When performing slip compensation, the output frequency may become greater than the set frequency. Set the Pr. 1 Maximum
frequency value a little higher than the set frequency.
Pr. 1 Maximum frequency Refer to page 86
Pr. 3 Base frequency Refer to page 88
4
PARAMETERS
81
4.3.4 Stall prevention operation (Pr. 22, Pr. 23, Pr. 48, Pr. 66, Pr. 156, Pr. 157)
This function monitors the output current and automatically changes the output frequency to prevent the inverter from
coming to trip due to overcurrent, overvoltage, etc.
It can also limit stall prevention and fast-response current limit operation during acceleration/deceleration, driving or
regeneration.
Stall prevention
If the output current exceeds the stall prevention operation level, the output frequency of the inverter is
automatically changed to reduce the output current.
Fast-response current limit
If the current exceeds the limit value, the output of the inverter is shut off to prevent an overcurrent.
Parameter
Number
0 Stall prevention operation invalid
Stall prevention operation
22 * 150% Set the current value to start the stall
level 0.1 to 200%
prevention operation.
Stall prevention The stall operation level can be reduced
operation level 0 to 200% when operating at a high speed above the
23 9999 rated frequency.
compensation factor
at double speed 9999 Constant according to Pr. 22.
0 Stall prevention operation invalid
Second stall prevention
48 9999 0.1 to 200% Second stall prevention operation level
operation current 9999 Same level as Pr. 22.
Stall prevention
Set the frequency at which the stall
66 operation reduction 50Hz 0 to 400Hz
operation level is started to reduce.
starting frequency
Select whether stall prevention operation
156 0 0 to 31, 100, 101 and fast-response current limit operation
selection
will be performed or not.
Output start time of the OL signal output
0 to 25s
157 OL signal output timer 0s when stall prevention is activated.
9999 Without the OL signal output
* The parameters in the table allow its setting to be changed during operation even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write selection.
(1) Block diagram
RT =0
Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation invalid
RT +
Pr. 48 0 Stall prevention operation level
-
Output frequency
Pr. 23, Pr. 66
82
(2) Setting of stall prevention operation level (Pr. 22)
Set in Pr. 22 the percentage of the output current to the rated

Output current inverter current at which stall prevention operation will be
Pr. 22 performed. Normally set this parameter to 150% (initial value).
Stall prevention operation stops acceleration (makes
Output frequency deceleration) during acceleration, makes deceleration during
constant speed, and stops deceleration (makes acceleration)
n
tio
De
ra
ce
ele
Constant during deceleration.

ler
c
ati
Ac
speed
on
Time When stall prevention operation is performed, the OL signal is

OL output.
Stall prevention operation example
NOTE
 If an overload status lasts long, an inverter trip (e.g. electronic thermal O/L relay (E.THM)) may occur.
(3) Stall prevention operation signal output and output timing adjustment (OL signal, Pr. 157)
When the output current exceeds the stall prevention operation level and stall prevention is activated, the stall prevention
operation signal (OL signal) turns ON for longer than 100ms. When the output current falls to or below the stall prevention
operation level, the output signal turns OFF.
Use Pr. 157 OL signal output timer to set whether the OL signal is output immediately or after a preset period of time.
This operation is also performed when the regeneration avoidance function or (overvoltage stall) is executed.
For the OL signal, set "3 (positive logic) or 103 (negative logic)" in Pr. 190, Pr. 192 or Pr. 197 (output terminal function
selection) and assign functions to the output terminal.
Pr. 157 Setting Description

0 Overload state (OL operation)
Output immediately.
(initial value)
OL output signal
0.1 to 25 Output after the set time (s) has elapsed.
9999 Not output.
Pr. 157 set time(s)
NOTE
 If the frequency has fallen to 1Hz by stall prevention operation and remains for 3s, a fault (E.OLT) appears to trip the
inverter output.
 Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 190, Pr. 192, and Pr. 197 (output terminal function selection) may affect the other
4
PARAMETERS
83
(4) Setting of stall prevention operation in high frequency range (Pr. 22, Pr. 23, Pr. 66)
Setting example Pr. 22 = 150%

Pr. 22 Pr. 23 = 100%
When Pr. 23 = 9999 Pr. 66 = 50Hz
150
operation level (%)

When Pr. 23 = "9999", the stall prevention
Stall prevention
operation level is as set in Pr. 22 to 400Hz.
75
37.5
25
level (%)
18.75
Stall prevention operation level
as set in Pr. 23 0 50 100 200 300 400
400Hz Output frequency (Hz)

Pr. 66
Output frequency (Hz)
During high-speed operation above the rated motor frequency, acceleration may not be made because the motor current
does not increase. If operation is performed in a high frequency range, the current at motor lockup becomes smaller than
the rated output current of the inverter, and the protective function (OL) is not executed even if the motor is at a stop.
To improve the operating characteristics of the motor in this case, the stall prevention level can be reduced in the high
frequency range. This function is effective for performing operation up to the high-speed range on a centrifugal separator,
etc. Normally, set 50Hz in Pr. 66 and 100% in Pr. 23.
Formula for stall prevention operation level
Stall prevention operation level Pr. 22 - A Pr. 23 - 100

= A+B  [ ][ ]
in high frequency range (%) Pr. 22 - B 100
Pr. 66 (Hz) Pr. 22 (%) Pr. 66 (Hz) Pr. 22 (%)
However, A = , B =
Output frequency (Hz) 400Hz
By setting "9999" (initial value) in Pr. 23 Stall prevention operation level compensation factor at double speed, the stall
prevention operation level is constant at the Pr. 22 setting up to 400Hz.
(5) Set two types of stall prevention operation levels (Pr. 48)
Turning RT signal ON makes Pr. 48 Second stall prevention operation current valid.
For the terminal used for RT signal input, set "3" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection) to assign the
function.
NOTE
 The RT signal acts as the second function selection signal and makes the other second functions valid.
(Refer to page 119)
84
(6) Limit the stall prevention operation and fast-response current limit operation according to the
operating status (Pr. 156)
Refer to the following table and select whether stall prevention operation and fast-response current limit operation will be
performed or not and the operation to be performed at OL signal output.
Stall Prevention Stall Prevention
Operation Selection OL Signal Operation Selection OL Signal
: Activated Output : Activated Output
Fast-Response : Not activated Fast-Response : Not activated
Pr. 156 :Operation Pr. 156 :Operation
Current Limit Current Limit
continued continued
Acceleration
Deceleration
Acceleration
Deceleration
Setting : Activated Setting : Activated
Constant
Constant
: Operation : Operation
speed
speed
: Not activated : Not activated
not continued not continued
 
0
(initial      16     
value)
1      17     
2      18     
3      19     
4      20     
5      21     
6      22     
7      23     
8      24     
9      25     
10      26     
11      27     
12      28     
13      29     
14     —  30     — 
15     —  31     —
Power driving
Power driving
         
100 101
 
Regeneration
Regeneration
    —     —
 When "Operation not continued for OL signal output" is selected, the fault (stopped by stall prevention) is displayed and operation is stopped.
 Since stall prevention is not activated, OL signal and E.OLT are not output.
 The settings "100" and "101" allow operations to be performed in the driving and regeneration modes, respectively. The setting "101" disables the fast-
response current limit in the driving mode.
 OL signal is not output at fast-response current limit operation.
NOTE
 When the load is heavy or the acceleration/deceleration time is short, stall prevention is activated and acceleration/
deceleration may not be made according to the preset acceleration/deceleration time. Set Pr. 156 and stall prevention 4
operation level to the optimum values.
 In vertical lift applications, make setting so that the fast-response current limit is not activated. Torque may not be
produced, causing a load drop due to gravity.
PARAMETERS
CAUTION
Do not set a small value as the stall prevention operation current.
Otherwise, torque generated will reduce.
Test operation must be performed.
Stall prevention operation during acceleration may increase the acceleration time.
Stall prevention operation performed during constant speed may cause sudden speed changes.
Stall prevention operation during deceleration may increase the deceleration time, increasing the deceleration
distance.
 Pr. 3 Base frequency Refer to page 88
 Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection) Refer to page 116
 Pr. 190, Pr. 192, Pr. 197 (output terminal function selection) Refer to page 122
85
Limiting the output frequency
4.4 Limiting the output frequency

Set upper limit and lower limit of Maximum/minimum
Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Pr. 18 86
output frequency frequency
Perform operation by avoiding
Frequency jump Pr. 31 to Pr. 36 87
mechanical resonance points
4.4.1 Maximum/minimum frequency (Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Pr. 18)
Motor speed can be limited.

Clamp the upper and lower limits of the output frequency.
Parameter
Number
1 Maximum frequency 120Hz 0 to 120Hz Upper limit of the output frequency.
2 Minimum frequency 0Hz 0 to 120Hz Lower limit of the output frequency.
High speed maximum Set when performing the operation at 120Hz
18 120Hz 120 to 400Hz
frequency or more.
* The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 165)
(1) Set maximum frequency

Clamped at the
Output frequency maximum frequency  Use Pr. 1 Maximum frequency to set the maximum frequency. If the
(Hz)
value of the frequency command entered is higher than the setting,
the output frequency is clamped at the maximum frequency.
Pr. 1
Pr. 18  To perform operation above 120Hz, set the upper limit of the output
frequency to Pr. 18 High speed maximum frequency.
Pr. 2 Frequency setting
(When Pr. 18 is set, Pr. 1 automatically switches to the frequency of
0 5, 10V
(4mA) (20mA) Pr. 18. Also, when Pr. 1 is set, Pr. 18 is automatically changed to the
Clamped at the
minimum frequency frequency set in Pr. 1.
REMARKS
 When performing operation above 50Hz using the frequency setting analog signal, change Pr. 125 (Pr. 126) (frequency setting
gain).
(2) Set minimum frequency

 Use Pr. 2 Minimum frequency to set the minimum frequency.
 If the set frequency is less than Pr. 2, the output frequency is clamped at Pr. 2 (will not fall below Pr. 2 ).
REMARKS
 When Pr. 15 Jog frequency is equal to or less than Pr. 2, the Pr. 15 setting has precedence over the Pr. 2 setting.
 When stall prevention is activated to decrease the output frequency, the output frequency may drop to Pr. 2 or below.
CAUTION
Note that when Pr. 2 is set to any value equal to or more than Pr. 13 Starting frequency, simply turning ON the start
signal will run the motor at the preset frequency according to the set acceleration time even if the command
frequency is not input.
Pr. 13 Starting frequency Refer to page 101
Pr. 15 Jog frequency Refer to page 94
Pr. 125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency, Pr. 126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency Refer to page 156
86
Limiting the output frequency
4.4.2 Avoiding mechanical resonance points (frequency jumps) (Pr. 31 to Pr. 36)
When it is desired to avoid resonance attributable to the natural frequency of a mechanical system, these parameters
allow resonant frequencies to be jumped.
Parameter
Number
31 Frequency jump 1A 9999 0 to 400Hz, 9999
32 Frequency jump 1B 9999 0 to 400Hz, 9999
1A to 1B, 2A to 2B, 3A to 3B are
frequency jumps
9999: Function invalid
 Up to three areas may be set, with the jump frequencies set to

Set frequency (Hz)
Frequency jump either the top or bottom point of each area.

Pr. 36
Pr. 35  The value set to 1A, 2A or 3A is a jump point, and operation in
Pr. 34
the jump zone is performed at these frequencies.
Pr. 33
Pr. 32
Pr. 31
Example 1 To fix the frequency to 30Hz in the range of 30Hz to 35Hz, set 35Hz in Pr. 34
Pr. 34: 35Hz
Pr. 33: 30Hz and 30Hz in Pr. 33.
Example 2 To jump the frequency to 35Hz in the range of 30Hz to 35Hz, set 35Hz in Pr.
Pr. 33: 35Hz
Pr. 34: 30Hz 33 and 30Hz in Pr. 34.
NOTE
During acceleration/deceleration, the running frequency within the set area is valid.
4
PARAMETERS
87
V/F pattern
4.5 V/F pattern

Base frequency,
Set motor ratings Pr. 3, Pr. 19, Pr. 47 88
Base frequency voltage
Select a V/F pattern according to
Load pattern selection Pr. 14 90
applications
4.5.1 Base frequency, voltage (Pr. 3, Pr. 19, Pr. 47) V/F
Used to adjust the inverter outputs (voltage, frequency) to the motor rating.
Parameter
Number
3 Base frequency 50Hz 0 to 400Hz Rated motor frequency (50Hz/60Hz)
0 to 1000V Base voltage
19 Base frequency voltage 8888 8888 95% of power supply voltage
9999 Same as power supply voltage
Second V/F (base 0 to 400Hz Base frequency when the RT signal is ON
47 9999
frequency) 9999 Second V/F invalid
* These parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 165)
(1) Base frequency setting (Pr. 3)

 When operating a standard motor, generally set the rated
frequency of the motor to Pr. 3 Base frequency. When running the
motor using commercial power supply-inverter switch-over
Output voltage (V)
operation, set Pr. 3 to the same value as the power supply

frequency.
Pr. 19
 If the frequency given on the motor rating plate is "60Hz" only,
Output frequency
(Hz) always set to "60Hz". It may result in an inverter trip due to
Pr. 3 overload.
Pr. 47
Special care must be taken when "1" (variable torque load) is set in
Pr. 14 Load pattern selection .
 When using the Mitsubishi constant-torque motor, set Pr. 3 to
60Hz.
(2) Set two kinds of base frequencies (Pr. 47)
 To change the base frequency when switching two types of motors with one inverter, use the Pr. 47 Second V/F (base
frequency).
 Pr. 47 Second V/F (base frequency) is valid when the RT signal is ON. Set "3" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function
selection) and assign the RT signal.
REMARKS
88
V/F pattern
(3) Base frequency voltage setting (Pr. 19)

 Use Pr. 19 Base frequency voltage to set the base voltage (e.g. rated motor voltage).
 If the setting is less than the power supply voltage, the maximum output voltage of the inverter is as set in Pr. 19.
 Pr. 19 can be utilized in the following cases.
(a) When regeneration is high (e.g. continuous regeneration)
During regeneration, the output voltage becomes higher than the reference and may cause an overcurrent trip
(E.OC) due to an increased motor current.
(b) When power supply voltage variation is large
When the power supply voltage exceeds the rated voltage of the motor, speed variation or motor overheat may be
caused by excessive torque or increased motor current.
NOTE
 When General-purpose magnetic flux vector control is selected, Pr. 3, Pr. 47 and Pr. 19 are invalid and Pr. 83 and Pr. 84
are valid.
Note that Pr. 3 or Pr. 47 value is valid as an inflection point of S-pattern when Pr. 29 Acceleration/deceleration pattern
selection = "1" (S-pattern acceleration/deceleration A).
Pr. 14 Load pattern selection Refer to page 90
Pr. 29 Acceleration/deceleration pattern selection Refer to page 102
Pr. 83 Rated motor voltage, Pr. 84 Rated motor frequency Refer to page 108
General-purpose magnetic flux vector control Refer to page 78
4
PARAMETERS
89
V/F pattern
4.5.2 Load pattern selection (Pr. 14) V/F
Optimum output characteristic (V/F characteristic) for the application and load characteristics can be selected.
Parameter
Number
0 For constant-torque load
1 For variable-torque load
For constant-torque elevators
14 Load pattern selection 0 2
(at reverse rotation boost of 0%)
For constant-torque elevators
3
(at forward rotation boost of 0%)
(1) Constant-torque load application (setting "0", initial value)

Pr. 14 = 0
 At or less than the base frequency, the output voltage varies linearly with the output
100% frequency.
Output voltage
 Set this value when driving the load whose load torque is constant even if the speed
varies, e.g. conveyor, cart or roll drive.
Pr. 3 Base frequency

POINT
If the load is a fan or pump, select for constant-torque load (setting "0") in any of the following cases.
 When a blower of large inertia moment (J) is accelerated in a short time
 For constant-torque load such as rotary pump or gear pump
 When load torque increases at low speed, e.g. screw pump
(2) Variable-torque load application (setting "1")

Pr. 14 = 1
 At or less than the base frequency, the output voltage varies with the output frequency
100% in a square curve.
Output voltage
 Set this value when driving the load whose load torque varies in proportion to the
square of the speed, e.g. fan or pump.
Pr. 3 Base frequency

90
V/F pattern
(3) Constant-torque load application

Pr. 14 = 2 Pr. 14 = 3
(setting "2, 3")
For vertical lift loads For vertical lift loads
At forward rotation boost...Pr. 0 (Pr. 46) At forward rotation boost...0%  Set "2" when a vertical lift load is fixed as power
setting At reverse rotation boost...Pr. 0 (Pr. 46)
At reverse rotation boost...0% setting
driving load at forward rotation and
regenerative load at reverse rotation.
Output voltage
100%
100%  Pr. 0 Torque boost is valid during forward rotation
Output voltage
Reverse
Forward rotation and torque boost is automatically changed to
rotation
"0%" during reverse rotation. Pr. 46 Second
Forward torque boost is valid when the RT signal turns
Reverse Pr. 0 rotation
Pr. 0 rotation Pr. 46
Base frequency
ON.
Pr. 46
Base frequency
Output frequency (Hz)  Set "3" for an elevated load that is in the driving
mode during reverse rotation and in the
regenerative load mode during forward rotation
according to the load weight, e.g. counterweight
system.
 For the RT signal, set "3" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr.
182 (input terminal function selection) to assign
the function.
REMARKS
 When torque is continuously regenerated as vertical lift load, it is effective to set the rated voltage in Pr. 19 Base frequency voltage
to prevent trip due to current at regeneration.
 When the RT signal is ON, the other second functions are also valid.
NOTE
 Load pattern selection does not function under General-purpose magnetic flux vector control.
Pr. 0, Pr. 46 (Torque boost) Refer to page 77
4
PARAMETERS
91
Frequency setting by external terminals
4.6 Frequency setting by external terminals

Make frequency setting by Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27,
Multi-speed operation 92
combination of terminals Pr. 232 to Pr. 239
Perform Jog operation Jog operation Pr. 15, Pr. 16 94
Infinitely variable speed setting by
Remote setting function Pr. 59 96
terminals
4.6.1 Operation by multi-speed operation (Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27, Pr. 232 to Pr. 239)
Can be used to change the preset speed in the parameter with the contact signals.
Any speed can be selected by merely turning ON-OFF the contact signals (RH, RM, RL, REX signals).
Parameter
Number
Multi-speed setting (high
4 50Hz 0 to 400Hz Frequency when RH turns ON
speed)
Multi-speed setting (middle
5 30Hz 0 to 400Hz Frequency when RM turns ON
speed)
Multi-speed setting (low
6 10Hz 0 to 400Hz Frequency when RL turns ON
speed)
24 Multi-speed setting (speed 4) 9999 0 to 400Hz, 9999
Frequency from 4 speed to 15 speed can
232  Multi-speed setting (speed 8) 9999 0 to 400Hz, 9999
be set according to the combination of
234 Multi-speed setting (speed 10) 9999 0 to 400Hz, 9999 the RH, RM, RL and REX signals.
235 Multi-speed setting (speed 11) 9999 0 to 400Hz, 9999 9999: not selected
The above parameters allow their settings to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write selection.
* These parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 165)
(1) 3-Speed setting (Pr. 4 to Pr. 6)

Speed 1
The inverter operates at frequencies set in Pr. 4 when RH signal
(High speed)
is ON, Pr. 5 when RM signal is ON and Pr. 6 when RL signal is
Speed 2 ON.
(Middle speed)
Speed 3
(Low speed)
Time
ON
RH
ON
RM
ON
RL
REMARKS
 In the initial setting, if two or three of multi-speed settings are simultaneously selected, priority is given to the set frequency of
the lower signal.
For example, when the RH and RM signals turn ON, the RM signal (Pr. 5) has a higher priority.
 The RH, RM, RL signals are assigned to the terminal RH, RM, RL in the initial setting. By setting "0 (RL)", "1 (RM)", "2 (RH)" in
any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection), you can assign the signals to other terminals.
92
(2) Multi-speed setting for 4th speed or more (Pr. 24 to Pr. 27, Pr. 232 to Pr. 239)
Frequency from 4th speed to 15th speed can be set according to the combination of the RH, RM, RL and REX signals. Set the
running frequencies in Pr. 24 to Pr. 27, Pr. 232 to Pr. 239 (In the initial value setting, 4th speed to 15th speed are invalid).
For the terminal used for REX signal input, set "8" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection) to assign the
function.
Inverter
Speed 10 Forward STF

Speed 5 Speed 11 rotation
REX 10
Speed 6 Speed 9 Speed 12 Frequency
Speed 13
RH 2 setting
Speed 4 Multi-speed
Speed 8 potentiometer
Speed 14 selection RM
5
Speed 7 Speed 15 RL
PC
Time
RH
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON Multi-speed operation connection example
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
RM
ON ON ON ON ON ON
RL
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
REX
*1
 When "9999" is set in Pr. 232 Multi-speed setting (speed 8), operation is performed at
frequency set in Pr. 6 when RH, RM and RL are turned OFF and REX is turned ON.
REMARKS
 The priorities of the frequency commands by the external signals are "Jog operation > multi-speed operation > terminal 4 analog
input > terminal 2 analog input".
(Refer to page 156 for the frequency command by analog input)
 Valid in the External operation mode or PU/External combined operation mode (Pr. 79 = "3" or "4").
 Multi-speed parameters can also be set in the PU or External operation mode.
 Pr. 24 to Pr. 27 and Pr. 232 to Pr. 239 settings have no priority between them.
 When Pr. 59 Remote function selection "0", multi-speed setting is invalid as RH, RM and RL signals are remote setting signals.
NOTE
Pr. 59 Remote function selection Refer to page 96
Pr. 79 Operation mode selection Refer to page 168
4
PARAMETERS
93
4.6.2 Jog operation (Pr. 15, Pr. 16)

The frequency and acceleration/deceleration time for Jog operation can be set. Jog operation can be performed in either
of the external and the PU operation mode.
This operation can be used for conveyor positioning, test operation, etc.
Parameter Initial
Number Value
15 Jog frequency 5Hz 0 to 400Hz Frequency for Jog operation.
Acceleration/deceleration time for Jog operation. Acceleration/
Jog acceleration/ deceleration time is the time taken to reach the frequency set in Pr. 20
16 0.5s 0 to 3600s
deceleration time Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency (initial value is 50Hz).
Acceleration/deceleration time can not be set separately.
These parameters are displayed as simple mode parameter only when the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) is connected. When the parameter unit is not
connected, the above parameters can be set by setting Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 165)
(1) Jog operation from outside

When the JOG signal is ON, a start and stop can be made by the start signal (STF, STR).
For the terminal used for Jog operation selection, set "5" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.182 (input terminal function selection) to assign
the function.
Output frequency (Hz) Inverter
power supply S/L2 V Motor
Pr. 20
Forward rotation T/L3 W
Pr. 15 Jog frequency Forward start STF
setting range rotation Reverse rotation STR
Reverse start
Time RH (JOG)*
rotation JOG signal
Pr. 16 PC
10
2
JOG signal ON 5
* When assigning the JOG signal to
the terminal RH
Forward rotation STF ON
Connection diagram
Reverse rotation STR ON for external Jog operation
Operation Display
 Confirm that the External operation mode is
selected. ([EXT] lit)
If not displayed, press to change to the

External (EXT) operation mode. If the
operation mode still does not change, set Pr. 79
to change to the External operation mode.
2. Turn ON the JOG switch.
JOG
ON
3. Turn the start switch (STF or STR) ON. Forward

 The motor runs while the start switch (STF rotation
or STR) is ON. Reverse
ON rotation Rotates while ON
 The motor runs at 5Hz. (initial value of Pr.
15)
4. Turn the start switch (STF or STR) OFF. Forward Stop
rotation Reverse
OFF rotation
REMARKS
 When you want to change the running frequency, change Pr. 15 Jog frequency. (initial value "5Hz")
 When you want to change the acceleration/deceleration time, change Pr. 16 Jog acceleration/deceleration time. (initial value "0.5s")
The acceleration time and deceleration time cannot be set separately for Jog operation.
94
(2) Jog operation from PU

Select Jog operation mode from the operation panel and PU (FR-PU04/FR-PU07). Operation is performed only while the
start button is pressed.
Inverter
power supply S/L2 V Motor
T/L3 W
Operation panel
Operation Display
1. Confirmation of the RUN indicator and
operation mode indicator
 The monitor mode should have been
selected.
 The inverter should be at a stop.
2. Press to choose the PU Jog operation
mode.
3. Press .
 While is pressed, the motor rotates.

Press
 The motor runs at 5Hz. (Pr. 15 initial value)
4. Release Stop
Release
[When changing the frequency of PU Jog operation]
mode.
appears.)
6. Turn until Pr. 15 Jog frequency appears.
7. Press to show the present set value. 4

(5Hz)
8. Turn to set the value to " ".

PARAMETERS
(10Hz)
9. Press to set.

10. Perform the operations in steps 1 to 4.
The motor rotates at 10Hz.
95
NOTE
 When Pr. 29 Acceleration/deceleration pattern selection = "1" (S-pattern acceleration/deceleration A), the acceleration/
deceleration time is the period of time required to reach Pr. 3 Base frequency.
 The Pr. 15 setting should be equal to or higher than the Pr. 13 Starting frequency.
 The JOG signal can be assigned to the input terminal using any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection).
When terminal assignment is changed, the other functions may be affected. Set parameters after confirming the
function of each terminal.
 During Jog operation, the second acceleration/deceleration via the RT signal cannot be selected. (The other second
functions are valid. (Refer to page 227))
 When Pr. 79 Operation mode selection = "4", pressing of the operation panel and / of the parameter unit
(FR-PU04/FR-PU07) starts the inverter and pressing stops the inverter.

 This function is invalid when Pr. 79 = "3".
 Pr. 13 Starting frequency Refer to page 101
 Pr. 29 Acceleration/deceleration pattern selection Refer to page 102
 Pr. 20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency, Pr. 21 Acceleration/deceleration time increments Refer to page 99
 Pr. 79 Operation mode selection Refer to page 168
 Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection) Refer to page 116
4.6.3 Remote setting function (Pr. 59)

Even if the operation panel is located away from the enclosure, you can use contact signals to perform continuous
variable-speed operation, without using analog signals.
Description
Parameter Setting
Name Initial Value RH, RM, RL signal Frequency setting
Number Range
function storage function
0 Multi-speed setting —
1 Remote setting With
2 Remote setting Not used
59 Remote function selection 0 Not used
(Turning STF/STR OFF
3 Remote setting
clears remotely-set
frequency.)
The above parameter can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 156)
Inverter When Pr. 59 = 1, 2 When Pr. 59 = 1

Forward rotation
STF When Pr. 59 = 3
Acceleration
When Pr. 59 = 2, 3
RH ∗
Deceleration
RM 10
Clear
RL 2
PC 5 0 0Hz Time
Acceleration
(RH) ON ON ON
Deceleration
Connection diagram (RM) ON
for remote setting
Clear (RL) ON
Forward rotation
(STF) ON ON ON ON
Power supply ON ON
* External running frequency (other than multi-speed) or PU running frequency
96
(1) Remote setting function

Use Pr. 59 to select whether the remote setting function is used or not and whether the frequency setting storage function
in the remote setting mode is used or not.
When Pr. 59 is set to any of "1 to 3" (remote setting function valid), the functions of the RH, RM and RL signals are
changed to acceleration (RH), deceleration (RM) and clear (RL).
When using the remote setting function, following frequencies can be compensated to the frequency set by RH and RM
operation according to the operation mode.
During External operation (including Pr. 79 = "4") ................................. external frequency command other than multi-speed
settings
During External operation and PU combined operation (Pr. 79 = "3") .... PU frequency command or terminal 4 input
During PU operation .............................................................................. PU frequency command
(2) Frequency setting storage
The frequency setting storage function stores the remotely-set frequency (frequency set by RH/RM operation) into the
memory (EEPROM). When power is switched OFF once, then ON, operation is resumed with that output frequency value.
(Pr. 59 = 1)
<Frequency setting storage conditions>
 Frequency at the point when the start signal (STF or STR) turns OFF
 Remotely-set frequency is stored every minute after turning OFF (ON) the RH (acceleration) and RM(deceleration)
signals together. (The frequency is overwritten if the latest frequency is different from the previous frequency when
comparing the two. The state of the RL signal does not affect writing.)
NOTE
 The range of frequency changeable by RH
(acceleration) and RM (deceleration) is 0 to (Hz) The set frequency is clamped
maximum frequency (Pr. 1 or Pr. 18 setting). at (main speed + Pr. 1)
Note that the maximum value of set frequency

Output frequency is Set frequency
is (main speed + maximum frequency). clamped at Pr. 1
Pr. 1
Output frequency
Main speed setting
0Hz Time
ON
Acceleration (RH)
Deceleration (RM) ON
Forward rotation (STF) ON
 When the acceleration or deceleration signal switches ON, acceleration/deceleration time is as set in Pr. 44 Second
acceleration/deceleration time and Pr. 45 Second deceleration time. Note that when the time set in Pr. 7 or Pr. 8 is longer than
the time set in Pr. 44 or Pr. 45, the acceleration/deceleration time is as set in Pr. 7 or Pr. 8. (when RT signal is OFF)
When the RT signal is ON, acceleration/deceleration is made in the time set in Pr. 44 and Pr. 45, regardless of the Pr. 7
or Pr. 8 setting. 4
 Even if the start signal (STF or STR) is OFF, turning ON the acceleration (RH) or deceleration (RM) signal varies the
preset frequency. (When Pr. 59 = "1" or "2")
PARAMETERS
 When switching the start signal from ON to OFF, or changing frequency by the RH or RM signal frequently, set the
frequency setting value storage function (write to EEPROM) invalid (Pr. 59 = "2, 3"). If set valid (Pr. 59 = "1"), frequency
is written to EEPROM frequently, this will shorten the life of the EEPROM.
 The RH, RM, and RL signals can be assigned to the input terminal using any Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function
selection). When terminal assignment is changed, the other functions may be affected. Set parameters after confirming
the function of each terminal.
 Also available for the Network operation mode.
97
REMARKS
During Jog operation or PID control operation, the remote setting function is invalid.
Setting frequency is "0"
 Even when the remotely-set

frequency is cleared by turning
ON the RL (clear) signal after turn Remotely-set frequency stored last time
OFF (ON) of both the RH and RM
signals, the inverter operates at Within 1 minute
Remotely-set frequency
the remotely-set frequency stored
stored last time
in the last operation if power is
reapplied before one minute has
elapsed since turn OFF (ON) of Time
both the RH and RM signals
Acceleration (RH) ON
Deceleration (RM) OFF
ON
Clear (RL)
Forward rotation (STF) ON ON

Power supply ON ON
 When the remotely-set frequency
is cleared by turning ON the RL Remotely-set frequency

(clear) signal after turn OFF (ON) stored last time 1 minute
of both the RH and RM signals,
More than 1 minute Operation is performed
the inverter operates at the
at the set frequency 0Hz.
frequency in the remotely-set
frequency cleared state if power is
reapplied after one minute has
elapsed since turn OFF (ON) of Time
both the RH and RM signals.
Acceleration (RH) ON
Deceleration (RM) OFF
ON
Clear (RL)
Forward rotation (STF) ON ON

Power supply ON ON
CAUTION
When selecting this function, re-set the maximum frequency according to the machine.
Pr. 1 Maximum frequency, Pr. 18 High speed maximum frequency Refer to page 86
Pr. 7 Acceleration time, Pr. 8 Deceleration time, Pr. 44 Second acceleration/deceleration time, Pr. 45 Second deceleration time Refer to page 99
98
Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/ deceleration pattern

deceleration pattern
Motor acceleration/deceleration time Acceleration/deceleration
Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 20, Pr. 44, Pr. 45 99
setting times
Starting frequency and start-
Starting frequency Pr. 13, Pr. 571 101
time hold
Set acceleration/deceleration pattern Acceleration/deceleration
Pr. 29 102
suitable for application pattern

(Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 20, Pr. 44, Pr. 45)
Used to set motor acceleration/deceleration time.
Set a larger value for a slower speed increase/decrease or a smaller value for a faster speed increase/decrease.
For the acceleration time at automatic restart after instantaneous power failure, refer to Pr. 611 Acceleration time at a
restart (page 139).
Parameter Setting
Number Range
FR-D720S-008(SC) to 5s
7 Acceleration time 100(SC) 0 to 3600s Motor acceleration time.
FR-D740-120(SC) and
10s
160(SC)
8 Deceleration time 100(SC) 0 to 3600s Motor deceleration time.
FR-D740-120(SC) and
10s
160(SC)
Frequency that will be the basis of
Acceleration/
acceleration/deceleration time.
20 deceleration 50Hz 1 to 400Hz
As acceleration/deceleration time, set the
reference frequency
frequency change time from stop to Pr. 20.
Second acceleration/ Acceleration/deceleration time when the RT
44 100(SC) 0 to 3600s
deceleration time FR-D740-120(SC) and
signal is ON.
10s
160(SC)
Second deceleration 0 to 3600s Deceleration time when the RT signal is ON.
45 9999
time 9999 Acceleration time = deceleration time
 The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 165)
(1) Acceleration time setting (Pr. 7, Pr. 20)
Pr. 20
Running
Use Pr. 7 Acceleration time to set the acceleration time required to reach Pr. 20
4
(50Hz) Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency from 0Hz.
frequency
frequency (Hz)
Set the acceleration time according to the following formula.

PARAMETERS
Output
Acceleration Pr. 20 Acceleration time from stop to maximum

Time = 
time setting Maximum operating operating frequency
Acceleration time Deceleration time frequency - Pr. 13
Pr. 7, Pr. 44 Pr. 8, Pr. 45
Example) How to find the setting value for Pr.7 when increasing the output 50Hz
Pr. 7 =  10s 12.7s
frequency to the maximum frequency of 40Hz in 10s with Pr.20 = 50Hz 40Hz - 0.5Hz
(initial setting) and Pr.13 = 0.5Hz.
99
(2) Deceleration time setting (Pr. 8, Pr. 20)

Use Pr. 8 Deceleration time to set the deceleration time required to reach 0Hz from Pr. 20 Acceleration/deceleration reference
frequency.
Set the deceleration time according to the following formula.
Deceleration Pr. 20
=  Deceleration time from maximum operating frequency to stop
time setting Maximum operating frequency - Pr. 10
Example) How to find the setting value for Pr.8 when decreasing the output 120Hz
Pr. 8 =  10s 32.4s
frequency from the maximum frequency of 40Hz in 10s with Pr.20 = 40Hz - 3Hz
120Hz and Pr.10 = 3Hz.
(3) Set two kinds of acceleration/deceleration times (RT signal, Pr. 44, Pr. 45 )
Pr. 44 and Pr. 45 are valid when the RT signal is ON.
When "9999" is set to Pr. 45, the deceleration time becomes equal to the acceleration time (Pr. 44).
For the RT signal, set "3" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection) to assign the function.
NOTE
 When the acceleration/deceleration pattern is S-pattern acceleration/deceleration A (refer to page 102), the acceleration/
deceleration time is the time required to reach Pr. 3 Base frequency.
 Acceleration/deceleration time formula when the set frequency is the base frequency or higher
4 T 5 T: Acceleration/deceleration time setting (s)
t=  2  f 2+ T
9 (Pr. 3) 9 f: Set frequency (Hz)
 Guideline for acceleration/deceleration time at the Pr. 3 Base frequency of 50Hz (0Hz to set frequency)
Frequency setting (Hz)
Acceleration/ 50 120 200 400
deceleration time (s)
5 5 16 38 145
15 15 47 115 429
 Changing terminal assignment may affect the other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each
terminal.
REMARKS
 If the Pr. 20 setting is changed, the Pr. 125 and Pr. 126 (frequency setting signal gain frequency) settings do not change.
Set Pr. 125 and Pr. 126 to adjust the gains.
 When the Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. 44 and Pr. 45 settings are 0.03s or less, the acceleration/deceleration time is 0.04s. At that time, set Pr.
20 to "120Hz" or less.
 Any value can be set to the acceleration/deceleration time, but the actual motor acceleration/deceleration time cannot be made
shorter than the shortest acceleration/deceleration time determined by the mechanical system J (moment of inertia) and motor torque.
Pr. 10 DC injection brake operation frequency Refer to page 112
Pr. 125, Pr. 126 (frequency setting gain frequency) Refer to page 156
100
4.7.2 Starting frequency and start-time hold function (Pr. 13, Pr. 571)
You can set the starting frequency and hold the set starting frequency for a certain period of time.
Set these functions when you need the starting torque or want to smooth motor drive at a start.
Parameter
Number
Frequency at start can be set in the range
of 0 to 60Hz.
13 Starting frequency 0.5Hz 0 to 60Hz
Starting frequency at which the start
signal is turned ON.
0 to 10s Holding time of Pr. 13 Starting frequency.
571 Restart coasting time 9999
9999 Holding function at a start is invalid
Output
(1) Starting frequency setting (Pr. 13)
frequency
(Hz)
Frequency at start can be set in the range of 0 to 60Hz.
You can set the starting frequency at which the start signal is turned
60
ON.
Setting
range
Pr. 13
0
Time
STF ON
NOTE
The inverter will not start if the frequency setting signal is less than the value set in Pr. 13.
For example, when 5Hz is set in Pr. 13, the motor will not start running until the frequency setting signal reaches 5Hz.
(2) Start-time hold function (Pr. 571)

Output
frequency (Hz) This function holds during the period set in Pr. 571 and the output
frequency set in Pr. 13 Starting frequency.
60
This function performs initial excitation to smooth the motor drive at a
Setting
range start.
Pr. 13
0
Time
REMARKS
Pr. 571 setting time When Pr. 13 = "0Hz", the starting frequency is held at 0.01Hz.
STF ON
4
NOTE
 When the start signal was turned OFF during start-time hold, deceleration is started at that point.
PARAMETERS
 At switching between forward rotation and reverse rotation, the starting frequency is valid but the start-time hold
function is invalid.
CAUTION
Note that when Pr. 13 is set to any value equal to or lower than Pr. 2 Minimum frequency, simply turning ON the
start signal will run the motor at the preset frequency even if the command frequency is not input.
Pr. 2 Minimum frequency Refer to page 86
101
4.7.3 Acceleration/deceleration pattern (Pr. 29)
You can set the acceleration/deceleration pattern suitable for application.
Parameter
Number
0 Linear acceleration/ deceleration
Acceleration/deceleration
29 0 1 S-pattern acceleration/deceleration A
pattern selection
2 S-pattern acceleration/deceleration B
(1) Linear acceleration/deceleration (Pr. 29 setting "0", initial value)

Setting value "0"
[Linear acceleration/ For the inverter operation, the output frequency is made to change linearly (linear
deceleration]
acceleration/deceleration) to prevent the motor and inverter from getting
excessive stress to reach the set frequency during acceleration, deceleration, etc.
when frequency changes. Linear acceleration/deceleration has a uniform
frequency/time slope.
Time
(2) S-pattern acceleration/deceleration A (Pr. 29 = "1")
Setting value "1"
[S-pattern acceleration/ For machine tool spindle applications, etc.
deceleration A]
Use this pattern when acceleration/deceleration is required in a short time to a
high-speed range higher than the base frequency.
In this acceleration/deceleration pattern, Pr. 3 Base frequency (fb) is the inflection
fb point of the S pattern, and you can set the acceleration/deceleration time
appropriate for motor torque reduction in a constant-power operation range of
base frequency (fb) or higher.
Time
NOTE
 As the acceleration/deceleration time of S-pattern acceleration/deceleration A, set the time taken until Pr. 3 Base
frequency is reached, not Pr. 20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency.
(3) S-pattern acceleration/deceleration B (Pr. 29 = "2")

Setting value "2"
[S-pattern acceleration/ For prevention of load shifting in conveyor and other applications.
Set frequency (Hz)
deceleration B]
Since acceleration/deceleration is always made in an S shape from current
frequency (f2) to target frequency (f1), this function eases shock produced at
acceleration/deceleration and is effective for load collapse prevention, etc.
f1
f2
Time
Pr. 7 Acceleration time, Pr. 8 Deceleration time, Pr. 20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency Refer to page 99
102
Selection and protection of a motor
4.8 Selection and protection of a motor

Electronic thermal O/L relay
Motor protection from overheat Pr. 9, Pr. 51, Pr. 561 103
PTC thermistor protection
Use the constant-torque motor Applied motor Pr. 71 106
The motor performance can be
Pr. 71, Pr. 80, Pr. 82 to Pr.
maximized for operation in magnetic Offline auto tuning 108
84, Pr. 90, Pr. 96
flux vector control method.
4.8.1 Motor overheat protection (Electronic thermal O/L relay, PTC thermistor protection)
(Pr. 9, Pr. 51, Pr. 561)
Set the current of the electronic thermal relay function to protect the motor from overheat. This feature provides the
optimum protective characteristics, including reduced motor cooling capability, at low speed.
Parameter
Number
Electronic thermal O/L Inverter
9 0 to 500A Set the rated motor current.
relay rated current
Valid when the RT signal is ON.
Second electronic thermal 0 to 500A
51 9999 Set the rated motor current.
O/L relay
9999 Second electronic thermal O/L relay invalid
Set the level (resistance value) for PTC
PTC thermistor protection 0.5 to 30k
561 9999 thermistor protection activates.
level
9999 PTC thermistor protection is inactive.
 These parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 165)
 When parameter is read using the FR-PU04, a parameter name different from an actual parameter is displayed.
(1) Electronic thermal O/L relay (Pr. 9)
Electronic thermal O/L relay operation characteristic This function detects the overload (overheat) of the
motor and trips. (The operation characteristic is shown
(min) unit display in this range
Pr. 9 = 100% setting of inverter rating*2

Pr. 9 = 50% setting of inverter rating*1, 2 on the left)
Operation time (min)
70 30Hz 30Hz or more *3  Set the rated current (A) of the motor in Pr. 9.
or more *3 20Hz Operation range (If the motor has both 50Hz and 60Hz rating and the
20Hz 10Hz Range on the right of characteristic curve
60
10Hz 6Hz Non-operation range
Pr. 3 Base frequency is set to 60Hz, set the 1.1 times of
6Hz
0.5Hz Range on the left of characteristic curve the 60Hz rated motor current.)
50 0.5Hz
Characteristic when electronic thermal
 Set "0" in Pr. 9 when you do not want to operate the
240
relay function for motor protection is turned OFF electronic thermal O/L relay, e.g. when using an external
(when Pr. 9 setting is 0(A))
thermal relay with the motor. (Note that the output
(s) unit display in this range
Operation time (s)
180 transistor protection of the inverter functions (E.THT).)

Range for
 When using a Mitsubishi constant-torque motor
120 transistor 1) Set "1" or "13", "50", "53" in any of Pr. 71. (This
protection 4
60 provides a 100% continuous torque
52.5% 105% characteristic in the low-speed range.)
2) Set the rated current of the motor in Pr. 9.
PARAMETERS
50 100 150 200

Inverter output current(%)
(% to the rated inverter current)
 When 50% of the inverter rated output current (current value) is set to Pr. 9
 The % value denotes the percentage to the inverter rated output current. It is not the percentage to the motor rated current.
 When you set the electronic thermal O/L relay dedicated to the Mitsubishi constant-torque motor, this characteristic curve applies to operation at 6Hz or higher.
NOTE
 The protective function performed by the electronic thermal O/L relay is reset by inverter power reset and reset signal
input. Avoid unnecessary reset and power-OFF.
 Install an external thermal relay (OCR) between the inverter and a motor when operating several motors by one
inverter, or when using a multi-pole motor or specialized motor. In this case, set 0A to the electronic thermal O/L relay
setting of the inverter. For the external thermal relay, determine the setting value in consideration of the current
indicated on the motor's rating plate and the line-to-line leakage current. Self-cooling ability of a motor is reduced at
low speed operation. Use a motor with a built-in thermal protector.
 When the difference between the inverter and motor capacities is large and the setting is small, the protective
characteristics of the electronic thermal relay function will be deteriorated. In this case, use an external thermal relay.
 The operation time of the transistor protection thermal shortens when the Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection setting value
increases.
103
(2) Set two different electronic thermal O/L relays (Pr. 51)
Use this function when running two motors of different rated currents individually by a single inverter. (When running two
motors together, use external thermal relays.)
Set the rated current of the second motor to Pr. 51.
When the RT signal is ON, thermal protection is provided based on the Pr. 51 setting.
For the terminal used for RT signal input, set "3" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection) to assign the function.
MC Pr. 450 Pr. 9 Pr.51 RT = OFF RT = ON
IM Second applied Electronic Second electronic First Second First Second
motor thermal O/L relay thermal O/L relay motor motor motor motor
9999    
MC
U 9999 0 0    
V IM
W 0.01 to 500    
9999    
RT 9999 Other than 0 0    
PC 0.01 to 500    
9999    
Other than 9999 0 0    
0.01 to 500    
9999    
Other than 9999 Other than 0 0    
0.01 to 500    
... Output current value is used to perform integration processing.
... Output current is assumed as 0A to perform integration processing. (cooling processing)
... Electronic thermal relay function is not activated.
REMARKS
(3) Electronic thermal relay function prealarm (TH) and alarm signal (THP signal)
 The alarm signal (THP) is output and electronic thermal
relay function prealarm (TH) is displayed when the
100%: Electronic thermal O/L relay alarm operation value electronic thermal O/L relay cumulative value reaches
85% of the level set in Pr. 9 or Pr. 51. If it reaches 100%
Electronic thermal 100% of the Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay setting
relay function 85% electronic-thermal relay protection (E.THM/E.THT)
operation level occurs.
 The inverter does not trip even when the alarm signal
Electronic thermal (THP) is output.
O/L relay alarm OFF ON ON Time  For the terminal used for the THP signal output, assign
(THP) the function by setting "8 (positive logic) or 108
(negative logic)" in Pr. 190, Pr. 192 or Pr. 197 (output
terminal function selection) .
NOTE
 Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190, Pr.192, and Pr.197 (output terminal function selection) may affect the other
(4) External thermal relay input (OH signal)
 To protect the motor against overheat, use the OH signal when using an external
Thermal relay
protector
thermal relay or the built-in thermal protector of the motor.
Inverter
U
Motor  When the thermal relay operates, the inverter trips and outputs the fault signal
V IM (E.OHT).
W
OH  For the terminal used for OH signal input, assign the function by setting "7" in any of
PC Pr. 178 to Pr.182 (input terminal function selection) .
External thermal relay input
connection example
NOTE
104
(5) PTC thermistor protection (Pr. 561)
Inverter
Motor
U
V
W  Terminal 2 and terminal 10 are available for inputting of motor
built-in PTC thermistor output. When the PTC thermistor input
10
2 reaches to the resistance value set in Pr. 561 PTC thermistor
protection level, inverter outputs PTC thermistor operation error
PTC thermistor input connection
signal (E.PTC) and trips.
 Check the characteristics of the using PTC thermistor, and set
Thermistor
resistance the resistance value within a protection providing temperature
TN, just around the center of R1 and R2 in a left figure. If the Pr.
561 setting is closer to R1 or R2, the working temperature of
Thermistor curve
protection goes higher (protection works later), or lower
R2
(protection works earlier).
Pr. 561
 PTC thermistor resistance can be displayed in operation panel,
R1 parameter unit (FR-PU07) (Refer to page 131), or RS-485
Thermistor communication (Refer to page 183) when PTC thermistor
Temperature-resistance
TN-ΔT TN+ΔT
temperature protection is active (Pr. 561  "9999").
existing range TN
TN: Rated operational temperature
PTC thermistor characteristics
REMARKS
 When using terminal 2 as PTC thermistor input (Pr. 561  "9999"), terminal 2 is not available for analog frequency command.
Also unavailable when using terminal 2 for PID control and Dancer control. When PID control and Dancer control is not active
(Pr. 128 PID action selection = "0"), terminal 4 functions as follows.
When Pr. 79 = "4" or in External operation mode................Terminal 4 is active whether AU signal is ON/OFF
When Pr. 79 = "3" ................................................................Terminal 4 is active for frequency command when AU signal is ON
 For the power supply terminal of PTC thermistor input, do not use power supply other than terminal 10 (external power supply,
etc). PTC thermistor does not work properly.
Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection Refer to page 151
Pr. 128 PID action selection Refer to page 215
Pr. 190, Pr. 192, Pr. 197 (output terminal function selection) Refer to page 122
4
PARAMETERS
105
4.8.2 Applied motor (Pr. 71, Pr. 450)

Setting of the used motor selects the thermal characteristic appropriate for the motor.
Setting is required to use a constant-torque motor. Thermal characteristic of the electronic thermal relay function
suitable for the motor is set.
When General-purpose magnetic flux vector is selected, the motor constants (SF-JR, SF-HR, SF-JRCA, SF-HRCA,
etc.) necessary for control are selected as well.
Parameter Initial
Number Value
Selecting the standard motor or constant-torque
0, 1, 3, 13,
71 Applied motor 0 motor sets the corresponding motor thermal
23, 40, 43, 50, 53
characteristic.
0, 1 Set when using the second motor.
Second motor is invalid.
450 Second applied motor 9999
9999 (thermal characteristic of the first motor
(Pr. 71))
(1) Set the motor to be used

Refer to the following list and set the parameter according to the motor used.
Pr. 71 (Pr. 450)

Motor (: Used motor)
Setting
Thermal Characteristic of the Electronic Thermal Relay Function
Standard Constant-torque
Pr. 71 Pr. 450
(SF-JR, etc.) (SF-JRCA, etc.)
0
Thermal characteristics of a standard motor 
(Pr. 71 initial value)
1 Thermal characteristics of the Mitsubishi constant-torque motor 
40 — Thermal characteristic of Mitsubishi high efficiency motor (SF-HR) 
50 — Thermal characteristic of Mitsubishi constant-torque motor (SF-HRCA) 
3 — Standard motor 
13 — Constant-torque motor 
Mitsubishi standard motor Select "Offline auto tuning
23 — 
(SF-JR 4P 1.5kW or less) setting"
43 — Mitsubishi high efficiency motor (SF-HR) 
53 — Mitsubishi constant-torque motor (SF-HRCA) 
9999
— (initial Without second applied motor
value)
 Motor constants of Mitsubishi high efficiency motor SF-HR.
 Motor constants of Mitsubishi constant-torque motor SF-HRCA.
REMARKS
 When performing offline auto tuning, set any of "3, 13, 23, 43, 53" in Pr. 71.
(Refer to page 108 for offline auto tuning.)
 For the FR-D740-120(SC) and 160(SC), the Pr. 0 Torque boost and Pr. 12 DC injection brake operation voltage settings are
automatically changed according to the Pr. 71 setting as follows.
Automatic Change Standard Motor Constant-torque Motor
Parameter Setting Setting
Pr. 0 3% 2%
Pr. 12 4% 2%
 Pr. 71 setting: 0, 3, 23, 40, 43
 Pr. 71 setting: 1, 13, 50, 53
NOTE
 Set the electronic thermal relay function to the thermal characteristic for the constant-torque motor when using a
geared motor (GM-S, GM-D, GM-SY, GM-HY2 series) to perform General-purpose magnetic flux vector control.
106
(2) Use two motors (Pr. 450)

 Set Pr. 450 Second applied motor to use two different motors with one inverter.
 When "9999" (initial value) is set, no function is selected.
 When a value other than 9999 is set in Pr. 450, the second motor is valid with the RT signal ON.
 For the RT signal, set "3" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection) to assign the function.
REMARKS
NOTE
 Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection) may affect other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
CAUTION
Set this parameter correctly according to the motor used.
Incorrect setting may cause the motor to overheat and burn.
Pr. 0 Torque boost Refer to page 77
Pr. 12 DC injection brake operation voltage Refer to page 112
Pr. 80 Motor capacity Refer to page 108
4
PARAMETERS
107
(Pr. 71, Pr. 80, Pr. 82 to Pr. 84, Pr. 90, Pr. 96)
The motor performance can be maximized with offline auto tuning.

What is offline auto tuning?
When performing General-purpose magnetic flux vector control, the motor can be run with the optimum operating
characteristics by automatically measuring the motor constants (offline auto tuning) even when each motor constants
differs, other manufacturer's motor is used, or the wiring length is long.
Parameter
Number
By selecting a standard motor or constant-
0, 1, 3, 13, 23, 40,
71 Applied motor 0 torque motor, thermal characteristic and motor
43, 50, 53
constants of each motor are set.
0.1 to 7.5kW Applied motor capacity.
80 Motor capacity 9999
9999 V/F control
0 to 500A Set motor excitation current (no load current)
82 Motor excitation current 9999 Uses the Mitsubishi motor (SF-JR, SF-HR,
9999
SF-JRCA, SF-HRCA) constants.
200V class 200V
83 Rated motor voltage 0 to 1000V Rated motor voltage (V).
400V class 400V
84 Rated motor frequency 50Hz 10 to 120Hz Rated motor frequency (Hz).
Tuning data
(The value measured by offline auto tuning is
90 Motor constant (R1) 9999 0 to 50, 9999 automatically set.)
9999: Uses the Mitsubishi motor (SF-JR, SF-
HR, SF-JRCA, SF-HRCA) constants.
0 Offline auto tuning is not performed.
For General-purpose magnetic flux vector
control
11 Offline auto tuning is performed without motor
Auto tuning setting/
96 0 running.
status
(motor constant (R1) only)
Offline auto tuning for V/F control (automatic
21 restart after instantaneous power failure (with
frequency search)) (Refer to page 142)
POINT
 This function is valid only when a value other than "9999" is set in Pr. 80 and General-purpose magnetic flux
vector control is selected.
 You can copy the offline auto tuning data (motor constants) to another inverter with the PU (FR-PU07).
 Even when motors (other manufacturer's motor, SF-JRC, etc.) other than Mitsubishi standard motor, high
efficiency motor (SF-JR, SF-HR 0.2kW or more), and Mitsubishi constant-torque motor (SF-JRCA 4P, SF-
HRCA 0.2kW to 7.5kW) are used or the wiring length is long (30m or longer as a reference), using the offline
auto tuning function runs the motor with the optimum operating characteristics.
 Tuning is enabled even when a load is connected to the motor.
As the motor may run slightly, fix the motor securely with a mechanical brake or make sure that there will be no
problem in safety if the motor runs (caution is required especially in elevator). Note that tuning performance is
unaffected even if the motor runs slightly.
 Reading/writing/copy of motor constants (Pr. 90) tuned by offline auto tuning are enabled.
 The offline auto tuning status can be monitored with the operation panel and PU (FR-PU04/FR-PU07).
 Do not connect a surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H/FR-BMF-H) between the inverter and motor.
108
(1) Before performing offline auto tuning

Check the following before performing offline auto tuning.
 Make sure General-purpose magnetic flux vector control (Pr. 80) is selected. (Tuning can be performed even under V/F
control selected by turning ON X18.)
 A motor should be connected. Note that the motor should be at a stop at a tuning start.
 The motor capacity should be equal to or one rank lower than the inverter capacity. (note that the capacity should be
0.1kW or more)
 A high-slip motor, high-speed motor and special motor cannot be tuned. (The maximum frequency is 120Hz.)
 As the motor may run slightly, fix the motor securely with a mechanical brake or make sure that there will be no problem
in safety if the motor runs (caution is required especially in elevator). Note that tuning performance is unaffected even if
the motor runs slightly.
 Offline auto tuning will not be performed properly if it is performed with a reactor or surge voltage suppression filter (FR-
ASF-H/FR-BMF-H) connected between the inverter and motor. Remove it before start tuning.
(2) Setting
1) Select General-purpose magnetic flux vector control (Refer to page 78).
2) Set "11" in Pr. 96 Auto tuning setting/status.
Tuning motor constants (R1) only without running the motor. (It takes approximately 9s until tuning is completed.)
3) Set the rated motor current (initial value is rated inverter current) in Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay. (Refer to page 103)
4) Set the rated voltage of motor (initial value is 200V/400V) in Pr. 83 Rated motor voltage and rated motor frequency (initial
value is 50Hz) in Pr. 84 Rated motor frequency.
(For a Japanese standard motor, etc. which has both 50Hz and 60Hz rated values, use it with an initial value (200V/60Hz
or 400V/60Hz).
5) Set Pr. 71 Applied motor according to the motor used.
Motor Pr. 71 Setting
SF-JR 3
Mitsubishi standard motor SF-JR 4P 1.5kW or less 23
Mitsubishi high efficiency motor SF-HR 43
Others 3
SF-JRCA 4P 13
Mitsubishi constant-torque motor SF-HRCA 53
Others (SF-JRC, etc.) 13
Other standard motor — 3
Other constant-torque motor — 13
4
PARAMETERS
109
(3) Execution of tuning
POINT
Before performing tuning, check the monitor display of the operation panel or parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07)
if the inverter is in the status for tuning. (Refer to 2) below) When the start command is turned ON under V/F
control, the motor starts.
1) When performing tuning for PU operation, press of the operation panel or or of the parameter unit
(FR-PU04/FR-PU07).
For External operation, turn ON the run command (STF signal or STR signal). Tuning starts.
(Excitation noise is produced during tuning.)
NOTE
 To force tuning to end, use the MRS or RES signal or press of the operation panel. (Turning the start signal (STF
signal or STR signal) OFF also ends tuning.)

 During offline auto tuning, only the following I/O signals are valid: (initial value)
 Input terminal <valid signal> STF, STR
 Output terminal RUN, SO, AM, A, B, C
Note that the progress status of offline auto tuning is output in five steps from AM when speed and output frequency
are selected.
 Since the RUN signal turns ON when tuning is started, caution is required especially when a sequence which
releases a mechanical brake by the RUN signal has been designed.
 When executing offline auto tuning, input the run command after switching ON the main circuit power (R/L1, S/L2, T/
L3) of the inverter.
 Do not perform ON/OFF switching of the second function selection signal (RT) during execution of offline auto
tuning. Auto tuning is not executed properly.
2) Monitor is displayed on the operation panel and parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) during tuning as below.
Parameter Unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07)

Display
Pr. 96 setting 11 11
READ:List
(1) Setting
11
STOP PU
(2)Tuning in progress TUNE

12
STF FWD PU
Flickering
(3)Normal end TUNE 13
COMPETION
STF STOP PU
(4)Error end
(when inverter protective TUNE
ERROR 9
function operation is STF STOP PU
activated)
REMARKS
 It takes approximately 9s until tuning is completed.
 The set frequency monitor displayed during the offline auto tuning is 0Hz.
110
3) When offline auto tuning ends, press of the operation panel during PU operation. For External operation, turn
OFF the start signal (STF signal or STR signal) once.
This operation resets the offline auto tuning and the PU's monitor display returns to the normal indication.
(Without this operation, next operation cannot be started.)
4) If offline auto tuning ended in error (see the table below), motor constants are not set.
Perform an inverter reset and restart tuning.
Error
Error Cause Remedy
Display
8 Forced end Set "11" in Pr. 96 and perform tuning again.
9 Inverter protective function operation Make setting again.
91 Current limit (stall prevention) function was activated. Set "1" in Pr. 156.
92 Converter output voltage reached 75% of rated value. Check for fluctuation of power supply voltage.
Calculation error Check the motor wiring and make setting again.
93
A motor is not connected. Set the rated current of the motor in Pr. 9.
5) When tuning is ended forcibly by pressing or turning OFF the start signal (STF or STR) during tuning, offline
auto tuning does not end properly. (The motor constants have not been set.)
6) When using the motor corresponding to the following specifications and conditions, reset Pr.9 Electronic thermal O/L
relay as below after tuning is completed.
a) When the rated power specifications of the motor is 200/220V (400/440V) 60Hz, set 1.1 times rated motor current
value in Pr.9.
b) When performing motor protection from overheat using a PTC thermistor or motor with temperature detector such
as Klixon, set "0" (motor overheat protection by the inverter is invalid) in Pr.9.
7) When you know motor excitation current (no load current), set the value in Pr. 82 Motor excitation current.
NOTE
 The motor constants measured once in the offline auto tuning are stored as parameters, and their data are held until
the offline auto tuning is performed again.
 An instantaneous power failure occurring during tuning will result in a tuning error.
After power is restored, the inverter goes into the normal operation mode. Therefore, when STF (STR) signal is ON,
the motor runs in the forward (reverse) rotation.
 Any alarm occurring during tuning is handled as in the ordinary mode. Note that if a fault retry has been set, retry is
ignored.
CAUTION
As the motor may run slightly during offline auto tuning, fix the motor securely with a mechanical brake or
make sure that there will be no problem in safety if the motor runs. Note that if the motor runs slightly, tuning 4
performance is unaffected.
PARAMETERS
Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay Refer to page 103
Pr. 80 Motor capacity Refer to page 78
Pr. 156 Stall prevention operation selection Refer to page 82
111
Motor brake and stop operation
4.9 Motor brake and stop operation

Motor braking torque adjustment DC Injection brake Pr. 10 to Pr. 12 112
Improve the motor braking torque with Selection of a
Pr. 30, Pr. 70 113
an option regenerative brake
Selection of motor
Coast the motor to a stop Pr. 250 115
stopping method
4.9.1 DC injection brake (Pr. 10 to Pr. 12)

The DC injection brake can be operated at a motor stop to adjust the stop timing and braking torque.
In DC injection brake operation, DC voltage is directly applied to the motor to prevent the motor shaft from rotating. The
motor will not return to the original position if the motor shaft rotates due to external force.
Parameter Setting
Number Range
DC injection brake 0 to Operation frequency of the DC injection
10 3Hz
operation frequency 120Hz brake.
0 DC injection brake disabled
DC injection brake
11 0.5s Operation time of the DC injection
operation time 0.1 to 10s
brake.
FR-D720S-008(SC) and 014(SC) 6% DC injection brake voltage (torque).
DC injection brake
12 FR-D740-012(SC) to 160(SC) 0 to 30% When "0" is set, DC injection brake is
operation voltage 4%
FR-D720S-025(SC) to 100(SC) disabled.
The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection ="0". (Refer to page 165)
(1) Operation frequency setting (Pr. 10)

 When the frequency at which the DC injection brake will be operated is

set to Pr. 10, the DC voltage is applied to the motor upon reaching to
the set frequency during deceleration.
Pr. 10
Operation frequency (2) Operation time setting (Pr. 11)
Time In Pr. 11, set the time of the DC injection brake.
Pr. 12
DC injection Operation When the motor does not stop due to large load moment (J), increasing
brake voltage voltage
Time the setting produces an effect.
When Pr. 11 = "0s", the DC injection brake is disabled. (At a stop, the
Pr. 11 Operation time motor coasts.)
(3) Operation voltage (torque) setting (Pr. 12)
Use Pr. 12 to set the percentage to the power supply voltage.
When Pr. 12 = "0%", the DC injection brake is disabled. (At a stop, the motor coasts.)
When using the constant-torque motor (SF-JRCA) and energy saving motor (SF-HR, SF-HRCA), change the Pr. 12 setting
as follows:
SF-JRCA:
FR-D740-080(SC) or lower, FR-D720S-100(SC) or lower...4%
FR-D740-120(SC) or higher...2%
SF-HR, SF-HRCA:
FR-D740-080(SC) or lower, FR-D720S-100(SC) or lower...4%
FR-D740-120(SC) and 160(SC)...3%
112
REMARKS
 For the FR-D740-120(SC) and 160(SC), when the Pr. 12 setting is the following, changing the Pr. 71 Applied motor setting
automatically changes the Pr. 12 setting. Therefore, it is not necessary to change the Pr. 12 setting.
(a) When 4% (initial value) is set in Pr. 12
The Pr. 12 setting is automatically changed to 2% if the Pr. 71 value is changed from the value selecting the standard motor
(0, 3, 23, 40, 43) to the value selecting the constant-torque motor (1, 13, 50, 53).
(b) When 2% is set in Pr. 12
The Pr. 12 setting is automatically changed to 4% (initial value) if the Pr. 71 value is changed from the value selecting the
constant-torque motor (1, 13, 50, 53) to the value selecting the standard motor (0, 3, 23, 40, 43).
 Even if the value of Pr. 12 setting is increased, braking torque is limited so that the output current is within the rated inverter
current.
CAUTION
As stop holding torque is not produced, install a mechanical brake.
4.9.2 Selection of a regenerative brake (Pr. 30, Pr. 70)

 When making frequent starts/stops, use the optional brake resistor (MRS type), high-duty brake resistor (FR-ABR)
and brake unit (FR-BU2) to increase the regenerative brake duty.
 Use a power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) for continuous operation in regeneration status.
Use the high power factor converter (FR-HC) to reduce harmonics, improve the power factor, or continuously use the
regenerative status.
Parameter Initial Setting

Name Description
Number Value Range
Inverter without regenerative function,
Brake resistor (MRS type),
0 Brake unit (FR-BU2)
Regenerative function Power regeneration common converter (FR-CV)
30 0
selection High power factor converter (FR-HC)
1 High-duty brake resistor (FR-ABR)
High power factor converter (FR-HC) when automatic
2
restart after instantaneous power failure is selected
Special regenerative Brake duty when using the high-duty brake resistor
70 0% 0 to 30%
brake duty (FR-ABR)
(1) When using the brake resistor (MRS type), brake unit (FR-BU2), power regeneration common 4
converter (FR-CV), and high power factor converter (FR-HC).
Set Pr. 30 to "0" (initial value). The Pr. 70 setting is invalid.
PARAMETERS
At this time, the regenerative brake duty is as follows.

Type Regenerative brake duty
FR-D720S-025(SC) or higher 3%
FR-D740-012(SC) or higher 2%
Assign the inverter operation enable signal (X10) to the contact input terminal. To make protective coordination with the
FR-HC and FR-CV, use the inverter operation enable signal to shut off the inverter output.
Input the RDY signal of the FR-HC (RDYB signal of the FR-CV).
For the terminal used for X10 signal input, assign its function by setting "10" (X10) to any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 182.
(2) When using the high-duty brake resistor (FR-ABR) (FR-D740-012(SC) or higher, FR-D720S-025(SC)
or higher)
Set "1" in Pr. 30.
Set "10%" in Pr. 70.
113
(3) When a high power factor converter (FR-HC) is used and automatic restart after instantaneous
power failure function is valid.
When automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function of both the FR-HC and inverter is valid (when a value
other than "9999" is set in Pr. 57 Restart coasting time), set "2" in Pr. 30 .
Set Pr. 70 to "0%" (initial value).
When the FR-HC detects power failure during inverter operation, the RDY signal turns ON, resulting in the motor coasting.
Turning the RDY signal OFF after power restoration, the inverter detects the motor speed (depends on the Pr.162
Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure selection) and restarts automatically after instantaneous power failure.
(4) Regenerative brake duty alarm output and alarm signal (RBP signal)
100%: regenerative overvoltage protection operation value [RB] appears on the operation panel and an alarm
signal (RBP) is output when 85% of the regenerative
brake duty set in Pr. 70 is reached. If the regenerative
Ratio of the brake
brake duty reaches 100% of the Pr. 70 setting, a
duty to the Pr. 70 regenerative overvoltage (E.OV1 to E.OV3) occurs.
setting (%) Note that [RB] is not displayed when Pr. 30 = "0".
The inverter does not trip even when the alarm (RBP)
100
85 signal is output.
For the terminal used for the RBP signal output, assign
Time the function by setting "7 (positive logic) or 107
Regenerative brake (negative logic)" in Pr. 190, Pr. 192 or Pr. 197 (output
pre-alarm (RBP) OFF ON ON
terminal function selection) .
REMARKS
 The MRS signal can also be used instead of the X10 signal. (Refer to page 118)
 Refer to page 35 to 39 for connecting the brake resistor (MRS type), high-duty brake resistor (FR-ABR), brake unit (FR-BU2),
high power factor converter (FR-HC), and power regeneration common converter (FR-CV).
NOTE
 When terminal assignment is changed using Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection) and Pr. 190, Pr. 192, and Pr.
197 (output terminal function selection), the other functions may be affected. Set parameters after confirming the function
of each terminal. (Refer to page 116)
WARNING
The value set in Pr. 70 must not exceed the setting of the brake resistor used.
Otherwise, the resistor can overheat.
Pr. 57 Restart coasting time Refer to page 139
114
4.9.3 Stop selection (Pr. 250)

Used to select the stopping method (deceleration to a stop or coasting) when the start signal turns OFF.
Used to stop the motor with a mechanical brake, etc. together with switching OFF of the start signal.
You can also select the operations of the start signals (STF/STR). (Refer to page 120 for start signal selection)
Description
Parameter
Name Initial Value Setting Range Start signal (STF/STR)
Number Stop operation
(Refer to page 120)
The motor is coasted to a stop
STF signal: Forward rotation start when the preset time elapses
0 to 100s
STR signal: Reverse rotation start after the start signal is turned
OFF.
STF signal: Start signal
250 Stop selection 9999 1000s to 1100s (Pr. 250 - 1000)s after the start
STR signal: Forward/reverse signal
signal is turned OFF.
STF signal: Forward rotation start
9999 When the start signal is turned
STR signal: Reverse rotation start
OFF, the motor decelerates to
8888 stop.
(1) Decelerate the motor to a stop

Output Deceleration starts
frequency when start signal turns OFF Set Pr. 250 to "9999" (initial value) or "8888".
(Hz)
The motor decelerates to a stop when the start signal
Deceleration time
(Time set in Pr. 8, etc.) (STF/STR) turns OFF.
DC brake
Time
Start signal ON OFF
RUN signal ON OFF

(2) Coast the motor to a stop
Output is shut off when set
Output
frequency
time elapses after start Use Pr. 250 to set the time from when the start signal
signal turned OFF
(Hz)
Pr. 250
turns OFF until the output is shut off. When any of "1000
to 1100" is set, the output is shut off in (Pr. 250 - 1000)s.
The motor coasts to stop
Time
The output is shut off when the time set in Pr. 250 has
elapsed after the start signal had turned OFF. The motor
Start signal ON OFF
coasts to a stop.
RUN signal ON OFF The RUN signal turns OFF when the output stops.
REMARKS
 Stop selection is invalid when the following functions are activated. 4
 Power failure stop function (Pr. 261)
 PU stop (Pr. 75)
PARAMETERS
 Deceleration stop because of communication error (Pr. 502)

 Jog operation mode
 When setting of Pr. 250 is not 9999 nor 8888, acceleration/deceleration is performed according to the frequency command, until
start signal is OFF and output is shut off.
NOTE
 When the start signal is turned ON again during motor coasting, the motor starts at Pr. 13 Starting frequency.
Pr. 7 Acceleration time, Pr. 8 Deceleration time Refer to page 99
115
Function assignment of external terminal and control
4.10 Function assignment of external terminal and control

Input terminal function
Assign function to input terminal Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 116
selection
Set MRS signal (output shutoff) to
MRS input selection Pr. 17 118
NC contact specification
Assign start signal and forward/ Start signal (STF/STR)
Pr. 250 120
reverse command to other signals operation selection
Output terminal function
Assign function to output terminal Pr. 190, Pr. 192, Pr. 197 122
assignment
Up-to-frequency
sensitivity
Detect output frequency Pr. 41 to Pr. 43 126
Output frequency
detection
Output current detection
Detect output current Pr. 150 to Pr. 153, Pr. 166, Pr. 167 127
Zero current detection
Remote output function Remote output Pr. 495, Pr. 496 129
4.10.1 Input terminal function selection (Pr. 178 to Pr. 182)
Use these parameters to select/change the input terminal functions.
Parameter Initial
Name Initial Signal Setting Range
Number Value
STF terminal function 0 to 5, 7, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 24,
178 60 STF (forward rotation command)
25, 37, 60, 62, 65 to 67, 9999
selection
STR terminal function 0 to 5, 7, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 24,
179 61 STR (reverse rotation command)
selection 25, 37, 61, 62, 65 to 67, 9999
RL terminal function
180 0 RL (low-speed operation command)
selection
RM terminal function RM (middle speed operation 0 to 5, 7, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 24,
181 1
25, 37, 62, 65 to 67, 9999
selection command)
RH terminal function RH (high-speed operation
182 2
selection command)
116
(1) Input terminal function assignment

Using Pr. 178 to Pr. 182, set the functions of the input terminals.
Refer to the following table and set the parameters:
Refer to
Setting Signal Function Related Parameters
Page
Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27
Pr. 59 = 0 (initial value) Low-speed operation command 92
0 RL Pr.232 to Pr.239
Pr. 59  0 Remote setting (setting clear) Pr. 59 96
Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27,
Pr. 59 = 0 (initial value) Middle-speed operation command 92
1 RM Pr. 232 to Pr. 239
Pr. 59  0 Remote setting (deceleration) Pr. 59 96
Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27,
Pr. 59 = 0 (initial value) High-speed operation command 92
2 RH Pr. 232 to Pr. 239
Pr. 59  0 Remote setting (acceleration) Pr. 59 96
3 RT Second function selection Pr. 44 to Pr. 51 119
4 AU Terminal 4 input selection Pr. 267 153
5 JOG Jog operation selection Pr. 15, Pr. 16 94
7 OH External thermal relay input Pr. 9 103
Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Pr. 27,
8 REX 15-speed selection (combination with three speeds RL, RM, RH) 92
Pr. 232 to Pr. 239
10 X10 Inverter run enable signal (FR-HC, FR-CV connection) Pr. 30, Pr. 70 113
12 X12 PU operation external interlock Pr. 79 168
14 X14 PID control valid terminal Pr. 127 to Pr. 134 215
PU/External operation switchover (turning ON X16 selects External
16 X16 Pr. 79, Pr. 340 175
operation)
18 X18 V/F switchover (V/F control is performed when X18 is ON) Pr. 80 78, 108
24 MRS Output stop Pr. 17 118
25 STOP Start self-holding selection — 120
37 X37 Traverse function selection Pr. 592 to Pr. 597 229
60 STF Forward rotation command (assigned to STF terminal (Pr. 178) only) — 120
61 STR Reverse rotation command (assigned to STR terminal (Pr. 179) only) — 120
62 RES Inverter reset — —
PU/NET operation switchover (turning ON X65 selects PU
65 X65 Pr. 79, Pr. 340 176
operation)
External/NET operation switchover (turning ON X66 selects NET
66 X66 Pr. 79, Pr. 340 176
operation)
Command source switchover (turning ON X67 makes Pr. 338 and Pr.
67 X67 Pr. 338, Pr. 339 179
339 commands valid)
9999 — No function — —
 When Pr. 59 Remote function selection  "0", the functions of the RL, RM and RH signals are changed as given in the table.
 The OH signal turns ON when the relay contact "opens".
NOTE
 Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.182 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal. 4
 Same function can be assigned to two or more terminals. In this case, the logic of terminal input is OR.
 The priorities of the speed commands are in order of jog > multi-speed setting (RH, RM, RL, REX) > PID (X14).
 When the X10 signal (FR-HC, FR-CV connection-inverter operation enable signal) is not set or when the PU operation
PARAMETERS
external interlock (X12) signal is not assigned with Pr.79 Operation mode selection set to "7", the MRS signal shares this
function.
 Same signal is used to assign multi-speed (7 speeds) and remote setting. These cannot be set individually.
(Same signal is used since multi-speed (7 speeds) setting and remote setting are not used to set speed at the same
time.)
 When V/F control is selected by V/F switchover (X18 signal), second function is also selected at the same time.
Control between V/F and General-purpose magnetic flux can not be switched during operation. In case control is
switched between V/F and General-purpose magnetic flux, only second function is selected.
 Turning the AU signal ON makes terminal 2 (voltage input) invalid.
(2) Response time of each signal

The response time of the X10 signal and MRS signal is within 2ms.
The response time of other signals is within 20ms.
117
4.10.2 Inverter output shutoff signal (MRS signal, Pr. 17)
The inverter output can be shut off by the MRS signal. Also, logic for the MRS signal can be selected.
Parameter
Number
0 Normally open input
Normally closed input
2
(NC contact input specifications)
17 MRS input selection 0
External terminal: Normally closed input
4 (NC contact input specifications)
Communication: Normally open input
(1) Output shutoff signal (MRS signal)

Turning ON the output shutoff signal (MRS) during inverter running
The motor coasts to stop shuts off the output immediately.
Set "24" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection) to
assign a function to the MRS signal.
MRS signal may be used as described below.
(a) When mechanical brake (e.g. electromagnetic brake) is used to stop
Time motor
The inverter output is shut off when the mechanical brake operates.
MRS signal ON (b) To provide interlock to disable operation by the inverter
STF (STR) ON With the MRS signal ON, the inverter cannot be operated if the start
signal signal is entered into the inverter.
(c) Coast the motor to a stop.
Setting value "0" (initial value) Setting value "2"
When the start signal is turned OFF, the inverter decelerates the
Inverter Inverter
motor to a stop in the preset deceleration time, but when the MRS
Output stop Output stop
MRS MRS signal is turned ON, the motor coasts to a stop.
PC PC
(2) MRS signal logic inversion (Pr. 17)
 When Pr. 17 is set to "2", the MRS signal (output stop) can be changed
to the normally closed (NC contact) input specification. When the MRS
signal turns ON (opens), the inverter shuts off the output.
(3) Assign a different action for each MRS signal input from communication and external terminal
(Pr. 17 = "4")
When Pr. 17 is set to "4", the MRS signal from external terminal (output stop) can be changed to the normally closed (NC
contact) input, and the MRS signal from communication can be changed to the normally open (NO contact) input.
This function is useful to perform operation by communication with MRS signal from external terminal remained ON.
Pr. 17 Setting
External MRS Communication MRS
0 2 4
OFF OFF Operation enabled Output shutoff Output shutoff
OFF ON Output shutoff Output shutoff Output shutoff
ON OFF Output shutoff Output shutoff Operation enabled
ON ON Output shutoff Operation enabled Output shutoff
REMARKS
 When using an external terminal to input the MRS signal, the MRS signal shuts off the output in any of the operation modes.
NOTE
118
4.10.3 Condition selection of function validity by second function selection signal (RT)
You can select the second function using the RT signal.
 When the RT signal turns ON, the second function becomes valid.
 For the RT signal, set "3" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection) to assign the function.
 The second function has the following applications.
(a) Switching between normal use and emergency use
(b) Switching between heavy load and light load
(c) Changing of acceleration/deceleration time by broken line acceleration/deceleration
(d) Switching of characteristic between the main motor and sub motor
Second function connection diagram Second acceleration/deceleration time
Output frequency
Inverter
Start STF(STR)
Second function
RT
selection
High speed RH Acceleration time
is reflected
Middle speed RM
Time
PC
RT
RH
RM
 When the RT signal is ON, the following second functions are selected at the same time.
First Function Second Function Refer to
Function
Parameter Number Parameter Number Page
Torque boost Pr. 0 Pr. 46 77
Base frequency Pr. 3 Pr. 47 88
Acceleration time Pr. 7 Pr. 44 99
Deceleration time Pr. 8 Pr. 44, Pr. 45 99
Electronic thermal O/L relay Pr. 9 Pr. 51 103
Stall prevention Pr. 22 Pr. 48 82
Applied motor Pr. 71 Pr. 450 106
NOTE
Parameters referred to 4
PARAMETERS
119
4.10.4 Start signal operation selection (STF, STR, STOP signal, Pr. 250)
You can select the operation of the start signal (STF/STR).

Used to select the stopping method (deceleration to a stop or coasting) when the start signal turns OFF.
Used to stop the motor with a mechanical brake, etc. together with switching OFF of the start signal.
(Refer to page 115 for stop selection)
Description
Parameter Initial
Name Setting Range Start signal Stop operation
Number Value
(STF/STR) Refer to page 115
0 to 100s when the preset time elapses after
the start signal is turned OFF.
When the setting is any of 1000s to
Stop 1000s to 1100s 1100s, the inverter coasts to a stop in
250 9999 STR signal: Forward/reverse signal
selection (Pr. 250 - 1000)s.
9999 When the start signal is turned
OFF, the motor decelerates to
8888 stop.
(1) Two-wire type connection (STF, STR signal)

The two-wire connection is shown below.
In the initial setting, the forward/reverse rotation signals (STF/STR) are used as start and stop signals. Turn ON either of
the forward and reverse rotation signals to start the motor in the corresponding direction. Switch both OFF (or both ON)
the start signal during operation to decelerate the inverter to a stop.
The speed setting signal may either be given by entering 0 to 10VDC across the speed setting input terminal 2-5, or by
setting the required values in Pr. 4 to Pr. 6 Multi-speed setting (high, middle, low speeds), etc.
(For multi-speed operation, refer to page 92.)
When Pr. 250 is set to any of "1000 to 1100, 8888", the STF signal becomes a start command and the STR signal a
forward/reverse command.
Forward rotation start STF Start signal STF

Reverse rotation start STR Inverter Forward/reverse STR Inverter
PC signal PC
10 10
2 2
5 5
Output frequency
Forward
Output frequency
Forward
rotation
rotation
Time Time
Reverse Reverse
rotation rotation
ON ON
STF STF
ON STR
ON
STR
2-wire connection example (Pr. 250 = "9999") 2-wire connection example (Pr. 250 = "8888")
REMARKS
 When Pr. 250 is set to any of "0 to 100, 1000 to 1100", turning OFF the start command coasts the inverter to a stop. (Refer to page
115)
 The STF and STR signals are assigned to the STF and STR terminals in the initial setting. The STF signal can be assigned to
Pr. 178 STF terminal function selection, and the STR signal to Pr. 179 STR terminal function selection only.
120
(2) Three-wire type (STF, STR, STOP signal)

The three-wire connection is shown below.
Turning the STOP signal ON makes start self-holding function valid. In this case, the forward/reverse rotation signal
functions only as a start signal.
If the start signal (STF or STR) is turned ON and then OFF, the start signal is held and makes a start. When changing the
direction of rotation, turn STR (STF) ON once and then OFF.
To stop the inverter, turning OFF the STOP signal once decelerates it to a stop.
When using the STOP signal, set "25" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.182 to assign function.
Forward
Stop rotation start Stop Start
STF STF
Inverter Inverter
Reverse
rotation start
STR STOP
STOP STR
Forward rotation
/reverse rotation
PC PC
Output frequency
Output frequency
Forward Forward
rotation rotation
Time Time
Reverse
Reverse
rotation
rotation
ON ON ON
STF STF
ON
STR STR ON
STOP ON STOP ON
OFF OFF OFF OFF
3-wire connection example (Pr. 250 = "9999") 3-wire connection example (Pr. 250 = "8888")
REMARKS
 When the JOG signal is turned ON to enable Jog operation, the STOP signal becomes invalid.
 If the MRS signal is turned ON to stop the output, the self-holding function is not canceled.
(3) Start signal selection
Pr. 250 Setting Inverter Status 4

STF STR
0 to 100s, 9999 1000s to 1100s 8888
OFF OFF Stop
Stop
PARAMETERS
OFF ON Reverse rotation

ON OFF Forward rotation Forward rotation
ON ON Stop Reverse rotation
Pr. 4 to Pr. 6 (multi-speed setting) Refer to page 92
121
4.10.5 Output terminal function selection (Pr. 190, Pr. 192, Pr. 197)
You can change the functions of the open collector output terminal and relay output terminal.
Parameter Initial
Name Initial Signal Setting Range
Number Value
190 RUN terminal Open collector 0, 1, 3, 4, 7, 8, 11 to 16, 25, 26,
0 RUN (inverter running)
function selection output terminal 46, 47, 64, 70, 80, 81, 90, 91,
93 *1, 95, 96, 98, 99, 100, 101,
192 A,B,C terminal Relay 103, 104, 107, 108, 111 to 116,
99 ALM (fault output)
function selection output terminal 125, 126, 146, 147, 164, 170,
197 SO terminal Open collector SAFE (safety monitor 180, 181, 190, 191, 193 *1, 195,
80 196, 198, 199, 9999 *2
function selection output terminal output)
 "93" and "193" cannot be set in Pr. 192.
 "9999" cannot be set in Pr. 197.
.... Specifications differ according to the date assembled. Refer to page 292 to check the SERIAL number.
(1) Output signal list

You can set the functions of the output terminals.
Refer to the following table and set the parameters: (0 to 99: positive logic, 100 to 199: negative logic)
Setting Refer
Related
Positive Negative Signal Function Operation to
Parameter
logic logic Page
Output during operation when the inverter output frequency
0 100 RUN Inverter running — 124
rises to or above Pr. 13 Starting frequency.
1 101 SU Up to frequency Output when the output frequency is reached to the set frequency. Pr. 41 126
Pr. 22, Pr. 23,
3 103 OL Overload alarm Output while stall prevention function is activated. 82
Pr. 66
Output frequency Output when the output frequency reaches the frequency
4 104 FU Pr. 42, Pr. 43 126
detection set in Pr. 42 (Pr. 43 for reverse rotation).
Regenerative brake Output when 85% of the regenerative brake duty set in Pr.
7 107 RBP Pr. 70 113
pre-alarm 70 is reached.
Output when the electronic thermal value reaches 85% of
Electronic thermal O/L
8 108 THP the trip level. (Electronic thermal relay function protection Pr. 9, Pr. 51 103
relay pre-alarm
(E.THT/E.THM) activates, when the value reached 100%.
Output when reset process is completed (when the inverter
Inverter operation
11 111 RY can be started by switching the start signal ON or while it is — 124
ready
running) after powering ON inverter.
Output current Output when the output current is higher than the Pr. 150 Pr. 150,
12 112 Y12 127
detection setting for longer than the time set in Pr. 151 . Pr. 151
Output when the output power is lower than the Pr. 152 Pr. 152,
13 113 Y13 Zero current detection 127
setting for longer than the time set in Pr. 153 . Pr. 153
Output when the feedback value falls below the lower limit
14 114 FDN PID lower limit
of PID control. Pr. 127 to
Output when the feedback value rises above the upper limit Pr. 134,
15 115 FUP PID upper limit 215
of PID control Pr. 575 to Pr.
PID forward/reverse 577
16 116 RL Output when forward rotation is performed in PID control.
rotation output
25 125 FAN Fan fault output Output at the time of a fan fault. Pr. 244 233
Heatsink overheat Output when the heatsink temperature reaches about 85%
26 126 FIN — 259
pre-alarm of the heatsink overheat protection providing temperature.
During deceleration at Output when the power failure-time deceleration function is
46 146 Y46 occurrence of power executed. Pr. 261 145
failure (retained until release)
Pr. 127 to
During PID control Pr. 134,
47 147 PID Output during PID control. 215
activated Pr. 575 to Pr.
577
Pr. 65 to
64 164 Y64 During retry Output during retry processing. 147
Pr. 69
122
Setting Refer
Related
Positive Negative Signal Function Operation to
Parameter
logic logic Page
Pr. 127 to Pr.
Output when the PID output interruption function is 134,
70 170 SLEEP PID output interruption 215
executed. Pr. 575 to Pr.
577
80 180 SAFE Safety monitor output Output while safety stop function is activated. — 29
81 181 SAFE2 Safety monitor output 2 Output while safety circuit fault (E.SAF) is not activated. — 29
Output when any of the control circuit capacitor, main
Pr. 255 to
90 190 Y90 Life alarm circuit capacitor and inrush current limit circuit or the 234
Pr. 259
cooling fan approaches the end of its service life.
Fault output 3 Output when a fault occurs due to the internal circuit failure
91 191 Y91 — 125
(power-off signal) or the inverter wiring mistake, etc.
Average current value and maintenance timer value are
Current average value output as pulses. Pr. 555 to
93 193 Y93 239
monitor signal The signal can not be set in Pr. 192 A,B,C terminal function Pr. 557
selection .
Maintenance timer Pr. 503,
95 195 Y95 Output when Pr. 503 rises to or above the Pr. 504 setting. 238
signal Pr. 504
Pr. 495, Pr.
96 196 REM Remote output Output to the terminal when a value is set to the parameter. 129
496
Output when an alarm (fan failure or communication error Pr. 121, 186,
98 198 LF Alarm output
warning) occurs. Pr. 244 233
Output when a fault occurs.
99 199 ALM Fault output — 125
The signal output is stopped when the fault is reset.
9999 — No function — — —
 Note that when the frequency setting is varied using an analog signal or of the operation panel, the output of the SU (up to frequency) signal may
alternate ON and OFF depending on that varying speed and the timing of the varying speed due to acceleration/deceleration time setting.
(The output will not alternate ON and OFF when the acceleration/deceleration time setting is "0s".)
REMARKS
 The same function may be set to more than one terminal.
 When the function is executed, the terminal conducts at the setting of any of "0 to 99", and does not conduct at the setting of
any of "100 to 199".
NOTE
 Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190, Pr.192, and Pr. 197 (output terminal function selection) may affect the other
 Do not assign signals which repeat frequent ON/OFF to A, B, and C. Otherwise, the life of the relay contact decreases.
 Refer to pages 21, 23 for the common terminal of each terminal.
4
PARAMETERS
123
(2) Inverter operation ready signal (RY signal) and inverter running signal (RUN signal)
ON OFF
Power supply
ON OFF
STF
ON
RH
Output frequency
DC injection brake operation point
DC injection brake operation
Pr. 13 Starting frequency
Time
Reset processing
ON OFF
RY
RUN ON OFF
 When the inverter is ready to operate, the output of the operation ready signal (RY) is ON. (It is also ON during inverter running.)
 When the output frequency of the inverter rises to or above Pr. 13 Starting frequency , the output of the inverter running signal
(RUN) is turned ON. During an inverter stop or DC injection brake operation, the output is OFF.
 When using the RY and RUN signals, assign functions to Pr.190, Pr.192 or Pr.197 (output terminal selection function) referring
to the table below.
Output Pr. 190, Pr. 192, Pr. 197 Setting
Signal Positive logic Negative logic
RY 11 111
RUN 0 100
Inverter Automatic Restart after

Start
Status Start Start Instantaneous Power Failure
Signal
Signal ON Signal ON Under DC Coasting
OFF Output shutoff
(during (during Injection Brake Start Start
Output (during Restarting
stop) operation) signal signal
signal stop)
ON OFF
RY ON ON ON ON OFF ON ON
RUN OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON
 This signal turns OFF during power failure or undervoltage.
 Output is shutoff under conditions such as a fault occurrence, MRS signal ON, and the safety stop operation.
REMARKS
 The RUN signal (positive logic) is assigned to the terminal RUN in the initial setting.
124
(3) Fault output signal (ALM signal)
Inverter fault occurrence

(Trip)  If the inverter comes to trip, the ALM signal is output.
Output
frequency
Time
ALM ON OFF
RES ON OFF
Reset processing
(about 1s)
Reset ON
REMARKS
 The ALM signal is assigned to the ABC contact in the initial setting. By setting "99 (positive logic) or 199 (negative logic) in
Pr.190, Pr.192 or Pr.197 (output terminal function selection), the ALM signal can be assigned to the other signal.
 Refer to page 254 for the inverter fault description.
(4) Fault output 3 (power-off signal) (Y91 signal)

 The Y91 signal is output at occurrence of a fault attributable to the failure of the inverter circuit or a fault caused by a wiring
mistake.
 When using the Y91 signal, set "91 (positive logic)" or "191 (negative logic)" to Pr.190, Pr.192 or Pr.197 (output terminal
function selection) to assign the function to the output terminal.
 The following table indicates the faults that will output the Y91 signal. (Refer to page 253 for the fault description.)
Operation Panel
Name
Indication
E. BE Brake transistor alarm detection
Output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent at
E.GF
start
E.LF Output phase loss
E.PE Parameter storage device fault
E.CPU CPU fault
E.IOH Inrush current limit circuit fault
REMARKS
 At occurrence of output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent (E.GF), overcurrent trip during acceleration(E.OC1) may be
displayed. At this time, the Y91 signal is output.
Parameters referred to 4
PARAMETERS
125
4.10.6 Detection of output frequency (SU, FU signal, Pr. 41 to Pr. 43)
The inverter output frequency is detected and output at the output signals.
Parameter
Number
Up-to-frequency
41 10% 0 to 100% Level where the SU signal turns ON.
sensitivity
Output frequency
42 6Hz 0 to 400Hz Frequency where the FU signal turns ON.
detection
Output frequency Frequency where the FU signal turns ON in reverse
0 to 400Hz
43 detection for reverse 9999 rotation.
rotation 9999 Same as Pr. 42 setting

(1) Up-to-frequency sensitivity (SU signal, Pr. 41)

Set frequency Adjustment When the output frequency reaches the set frequency, the
Output frequency
range Pr.41 up-to-frequency signal (SU) is output.

The Pr. 41 value can be adjusted within the range 0% to
100% on the assumption that the set frequency is 100%.
This parameter can be used to ensure that the running
(Hz)
Time frequency has been reached to provide the operation start

signal etc. for related equipment.
OFF ON OFF When using the SU signal, set "1 (positive logic) or 101
SU
(negative logic)" in Pr.190, Pr.192 or Pr.197 (output terminal
function selection) to assign function to the output terminal.
(2) Output frequency detection

(FU signal, Pr. 42, Pr. 43)

The output frequency detection signal (FU) is output when
Forward the output frequency reaches or exceeds the Pr. 42 setting.
rotation Pr.42 Time This function can be used for electromagnetic brake
Reverse Pr.43 operation, open signal, etc.
rotation Frequency detection that is dedicated to the reverse
operation can be set by setting detection frequency to Pr. 43.
Output signal OFF OFF OFF This function is effective for switching the timing of
FU ON ON
electromagnetic brake operation between forward rotation
(rise) and reverse rotation (fall) during vertical lift operation,
etc.
When Pr. 43  "9999", the Pr. 42 setting is used for forward
rotation and the Pr. 43 setting is used for reverse rotation.
When using the FU signal, set "4 (positive logic)" or "104
(negative logic)" to Pr.190, Pr.192 or Pr.197 (output terminal
function selection) to assign the function to the output
terminal.
REMARKS
 All signals are OFF during DC injection brake.
 The output frequency to be compared with the set frequency is the output frequency before slip compensation is performed.
NOTE
 Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190, Pr.192 and Pr.197 (output terminal function selection) may affect the other
Pr. 190, Pr. 192, Pr. 197 (output terminal function selection) (Refer to page 122)
126

(Y12 signal, Y13 signal, Pr. 150 to Pr. 153, Pr. 166, Pr. 167)
The output current during inverter running can be detected and output to the output terminal.
Parameter Setting
Number Range
150 150% 0 to 200% 100% is the rated inverter current.
level
Output current detection period.
Output current detection The time from when the output current has risen
151 0s 0 to 10s
signal delay time above the setting until the output current detection
signal (Y12) is output.
152 5% 0 to 200% The rated inverter current is assumed to be 100%.
level
Period from when the output current drops below the
153 0.5s 0 to 1s Pr. 152 value until the zero current detection signal
time
(Y13) is output.
0 to 10s Set the retention time when the Y12 signal is ON.
166 0.1s The Y12 signal ON status is retained. The signal is
signal retention time 9999
turned OFF at the next start.
0 Operation continues when the Y12 signal is ON
167 0 The inverter is brought to trip when the Y12 signal is
operation selection 1
ON. (E.CDO)
(1) Output current detection

Pr. 166 9999, Pr. 167 = 0
(Y12 signal, Pr. 150, Pr. 151, Pr. 166, Pr. 167 )
The output current detection function can be used for
excessive torque detection, etc.
Pr. 150 If the output current remains higher than the Pr. 150 setting
during inverter operation for longer than the time set in Pr.
Output current
151, the output current detection signal (Y12) is output from

Pr. 151
the inverter's open collector or relay output terminal.
When the Y12 signal turns ON, the ON state is held for the
Pr. 166 Time
Min. 0.1s (initial value) time set in Pr. 166.
When Pr. 166 = "9999", the ON state is held until a next start.
Output current OFF
OFF ON At the Pr. 167 setting of "1", the inverter trips, and the output
detection signal
(Y12) current detection fault (E.CDO) is displayed when the Y12
signal turns ON. When fault occurs, the Y12 signal is ON for
the time set in Pr. 166 at the Pr. 166 setting of other than
4
9999, and remains ON until a reset is made at the Pr. 166
setting of 9999. E.CDO does not occur even if "1" is set in Pr.
PARAMETERS
167 while Y12 is ON. The Pr. 167 setting is valid after Y12
turns OFF.
For the Y12 signal, set "12 (positive logic) or 112 (negative
logic)" in Pr.190, Pr.192 or Pr.197 (output terminal function
selection) and assign functions to the output terminal.
127
(2) Zero current detection (Y13 signal, Pr. 152, Pr. 153)
If the output current remains lower than the Pr. 152 setting
Output current
during inverter operation for longer than the time set in Pr.
153, the zero current detection (Y13) signal is output from the
inverter's open collector or relay output terminal.
When the inverter's output current falls to "0", torque will not
Pr. 152
Pr. 152 be generated. This may cause a drop due to gravity when
0[A]
0.1s* Time
the inverter is used in vertical lift application.
Start signal
OFF ON To prevent this, the Y13 signal can be output from the
Zero current inverter to close the mechanical brake when the output
detection time OFF ON OFF ON
current has fallen to "zero".
(Y13)
Pr. 153 Pr. 153 For the Y13 signal, set "13 (positive logic) or 113 (negative
Detection time Detection time
logic)" in Pr.190, Pr.192 or Pr.197 (output terminal function
* The zero current detection signal (Y13) holds the
signal for approximately 0.1s once turned ON. selection) and assign functions to the output terminal.
REMARKS
 This function is also valid during execution of the offline auto tuning.
 The response time of Y12 and Y13 signals is approximately 0.1s. Note that the response time changes according to the load
condition.
 When Pr. 152 = "0", detection is disabled.
NOTE
CAUTION
The zero current detection level setting should not be too low, and the zero current detection time setting not
too long. Otherwise, the detection signal may not be output when torque is not generated at a low output
current.
To prevent the machine and equipment from resulting in hazardous conditions detection signal, install a
safety backup such as an emergency brake even the zero current detection function is set valid.
Offline auto tuning Refer to page 108
128
4.10.8 Remote output selection (REM signal, Pr. 495, Pr. 496)
You can utilize the ON/OFF of the inverter's output signals instead of the remote output terminal of the programmable
logic controller.

Name Description
Number Value Range
0 Remote output data clear at powering OFF Remote output data is
Remote output data retention at powering cleared during an
1
Remote output OFF inverter reset
495 0
selection 10 Remote output data clear at powering OFF Remote output data is
Remote output data retention at powering retained during an
11
OFF inverter reset
496* Remote output data 1 0 0 to 4095 Refer to the following diagram.
* The above parameters allow their settings to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write selection.
Remote output data  The output terminal can be turned ON/OFF depending on
Pr. 496 the Pr. 496 setting. The remote output selection can be
b11 b0 controlled ON/OFF by computer link communication from
the PU connector.
RUN
ABC
SO

 Set "96 (positive logic) or 196 (negative logic)" to Pr.190,

 Any
Pr.192 or Pr.197 (output terminal function selection), and
...Specifications differ according to the date assembled. Refer to page assign the remote output (REM) signal to the terminal
292 to check the SERIAL number. used for remote output.
 When you refer to the diagram on the left and set 1 to the
terminal bit (terminal where the REM signal has been
assigned) of Pr. 496, the output terminal turns ON (OFF
for negative logic). By setting 0, the output terminal turns
OFF (ON for negative logic).
Example: When "96 (positive logic)" is set in Pr. 190 RUN terminal function selection and "1" (H01) is set in Pr. 496, the
terminal RUN turns ON.
ON/OFF example for positive logic
Pr. 495 = 0, 10 Pr. 495 = 1, 11

Power Power  When Pr. 495 = "0 (initial value), 10", performing a power ON
OFF OFF
supply supply Inverter reset (including a power failure) clears the REM signal
reset time
(about 1s) output. (The ON/OFF status of the terminals are as set in Pr.
REM OFF REM ON 190, Pr. 192, Pr.197 ) The Pr. 496 setting becomes also "0".
When Pr. 495 = "1, 11", the remote output data before power
REM signal held
REM signal clear REM signal is saved OFF is stored into the EEPROM, so the signal output at
Signal condition during a reset power recovery is the same as before power OFF. However, 4
Pr. 495 = 0, 1 Pr. 495 = 10, 11 it is not stored when the inverter is reset (terminal reset,
reset request through communication).
PARAMETERS
Reset ON Reset ON
(See the chart on the left.)
 When Pr. 495 = "10 or 11," the signal before the reset is held
REM ON OFF REM ON even during an inverter reset.
∗
 When Pr. 495 = "1," the signal condition saved in EEPROM (condition of the
last power OFF) is applied.
REMARKS
 The output terminal where the REM signal is not assigned using Pr.190, Pr.192 or Pr.197 does not turn ON/OFF if 0/1 is set to the
terminal bit of Pr. 496 or Pr. 497. (It turns ON/OFF with the assigned function.)
129
Monitor display and monitor output signal
4.11 Monitor display and monitor output signal

Refer to
Purpose Parameter that should be Set
Page
Display motor speed
Speed display and speed setting Pr. 37 130
Set speed
Monitor display/PU main display
Pr. 52, Pr. 158, Pr. 170, Pr. 171,
Change PU monitor display data data selection 131
Pr. 268, Pr. 563, Pr. 564, Pr. 891
Cumulative monitor clear
Change the monitor output from
Terminal AM function selection Pr. 158 131
terminal AM
Set the reference of the monitor
Terminal AM standard setting Pr. 55, Pr. 56 136
output from terminal AM
Adjust terminal AM outputs Terminal AM calibration Pr. 901 137
4.11.1 Speed display and speed setting (Pr. 37)

The monitor display and frequency setting of the PU (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) can be changed to the machine speed.
Parameter Initial
Number Value
0 Frequency display, setting
37 Speed display 0
0.01 to 9998 Machine speed at 60Hz.
* The maximum value of the setting range differs according to the Pr. 1 Maximum frequency (Pr. 18 High speed maximum frequency), and it can be calculated from the
following formula.
16777.215  60 (Hz)
Maximum setting value of Pr. 37 <
Setting value of Pr. 1 (Pr. 18) (Hz)
Note that the maximum setting value of Pr. 37 is 9998 if the result of the above formula exceeds 9998.
 To display the machine speed, set in Pr. 37 the machine speed for 60Hz operation.
For example, when Pr. 37 = "1000", "1000" is displayed on the output frequency and set frequency monitor when the
running frequency is 60Hz. When running frequency is 30Hz, "500" is displayed.
Output Frequency Set Frequency
Pr. 37 Setting Frequency Setting Parameter Setting
Monitor Monitor
0 (initial value) Hz Hz Hz
Hz
0.01 to 9998 Machine speed Machine speed Machine speed
 Machine speed conversion formula ..........Pr. 37  frequency/60Hz
 Hz is displayed in 0.01Hz increments and machine speed is in 0.001.
NOTE
 Under V/F control, the output frequency of the inverter is displayed in terms of synchronous speed, and therefore,
displayed value = actual speed + motor slip. The display changes to the actual speed (estimated value calculated
based on the motor slip) when slip compensation was valid.
 Refer to Pr. 52 when you want to change the PU main monitor (PU main display).
 Since the panel display of the operation panel is 4 digits in length, the monitor value of more than "9999" is displayed as "----".
 When the machine speed is displayed on the FR-PU04/FR-PU07, do not change the speed by using an up/down key in
the state where the set speed exceeding 65535 is displayed. The set speed may become arbitrary value.
 While the machine speed is displayed on the monitor, values of other parameters related to speed (Pr. 1, etc.) are in
frequency increments. Set other parameters (Pr.1, etc.) related to speed in increments of frequency.
 Due to the limitations on the resolution of the set frequency, the indication in the second decimal place may differ
from the setting.
CAUTION
Make sure that the running speed setting is correct.
Otherwise, the motor might run at extremely high speed, damaging the machine.
Pr. 1 Maximum frequency, Pr. 18 High speed maximum frequency Refer to page 86
Pr. 52 DU/PU main display data selection Refer to page 131
130

(Pr. 52, Pr.158, Pr. 170, Pr. 171, Pr. 268, Pr. 563, Pr. 564, Pr. 891)
The monitor to be displayed on the main screen of the operation panel and parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) can be
selected.
In addition, signal to be output from the terminal AM (analog voltage output) can be selected.
Parameter
Number
Select the monitor to be displayed on the
0 0, 5, 8 to 12, 14, 20,
DU/PU main display data operation panel and parameter unit.
52 (output 23 to 25, 52 to 55,
selection Refer to the following table for monitor
frequency) 61, 62, 64, 100
description.
1 1 to 3, 5, 8 to 12,
AM terminal function
158 (output 14, 21, 24, 52, 53, Select the monitor output to terminal AM.
selection
frequency) 61, 62
0 Set "0" to clear the watt-hour meter monitor.
Sets the maximum value for monitoring from
10
170 Watt-hour meter clear 9999 communication to 9999kWh.
Sets the maximum value for monitoring from
9999
communication to 65535kWh.
Set "0" in the parameter to clear the operation
171 Operation hour meter clear 9999 0, 9999 time monitor.
Setting 9999 does not clear.
0 Displayed as integral value
Monitor decimal digits
268 9999 1 Displayed in 0.1 increments
selection
9999 No function
The numbers of cumulative energization time
Energization time carrying- 0 to 65535
563 0 monitor exceeded 65535h is displayed.
over times (reading only)
(Reading only)
Operating time carrying- 0 to 65535 The numbers of operation time monitor
564 0
over times (reading only) exceeded 65535h is displayed. (Reading only)
Set the number of times to shift the cumulative
0 to 4 power monitor digit.
Cumulative power monitor Clamp the monitoring value at maximum.
891 9999
digit shifted times No shift
9999 Clear the monitor value when it exceeds the
maximum value.
* The above parameters allow their settings to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write
selection.
(1) Monitor description list (Pr. 52)
Set the monitor to be displayed on the operation panel and parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) in Pr. 52 DU/PU main 4
display data selection .
Set the monitor to be output to the terminal AM (analog voltage output) in Pr. 158 AM terminal function selection .
PARAMETERS
Refer to the following table and set the monitor to be displayed. (The monitor marked with  cannot be selected.)
Pr. 52 Setting
Operation PU Pr.158 (AM) Terminal AM
Types of Monitor Unit Description
panel main Setting Full Scale Value
LED monitor
Output frequency 0.01Hz 0/100 1 Pr. 55 Displays the inverter output frequency.
Displays the inverter output current
Output current 0.01A 0/100 2 Pr. 56
effective value.
200V class 400V
Output voltage 0.1V 0/100 3 Displays the inverter output voltage.
400V class 800V
Fault display — 0/100  — Displays past 8 faults individually.
Frequency setting
0.01Hz 5  5 Pr. 55 Displays the set frequency.
value
131
Pr. 52 Setting
Operation PU Pr.158 (AM) Terminal AM
Types of Monitor Unit Description
panel main Setting Full Scale Value
LED monitor
Converter output 200V class 400V
0.1V 8  8 Displays the DC bus voltage value.
voltage 400V class 800V
Regenerative brake
0.1% 9  9 Pr. 70 Brake duty set in Pr. 30, Pr. 70
duty
Displays the thermal cumulative value on
Electronic thermal
the assumption that the thermal operation
relay function load 0.1% 10  10 100%
level is 100% (Larger thermal between the
factor
motor thermal and transistor thermal). 
Holds and displays the peak value of the
Output current peak
0.01A 11  11 Pr. 56 output power monitor.
value
(Cleared at every start)
Converter output 200V class 400V Holds and displays the peak value of the
0.1V 12  12 DC bus voltage value.
voltage peak value 400V class 800V (Cleared at every start)
Rated inverter Displays the power on the inverter output
Output power 0.01kW 14  14
power  2 side
Displays the input terminal ON/OFF status
Input terminal status —   — on the operation panel.
(Refer to page 134)
—
Displays the output terminal ON/OFF
Output terminal
—   — status on the operation panel.
status
(Refer to page 134)
Adds up and displays the energization time
Cumulative after inverter shipment.
1h 20  —
energization time  You can check the numbers of the monitor
value exceeded 65535h with Pr. 563.
Reference voltage Terminal AM:
— — 21 —
output Output 10V
Adds up and displays the inverter operation
time.
Actual operation time You can check the numbers of the monitor
1h 23  —
,  value exceeded 65535h with Pr. 564.
Can be cleared by Pr. 171. (Refer to page
135)
Displays the output current value on the
assumption that the inverter rated current
Motor load factor 0.1% 24 24 200% value is 100%.
Monitor value = output power monitor
value/rated inverter current 100 [%]
Adds up and displays the power amount
based on the output power monitor.
Cumulative power  0.01kWh  25  —
Can be cleared by Pr. 170. (Refer to page
134)
PID set point 0.1% 52 52 100% Displays the set point, measured value and
PID measured value 0.1% 53 53 100% deviation during PID control (Refer to page
PID deviation 0.1% 54  — 220 for details)
Displays the ON/OFF status of the inverter
Inverter I/O terminal input terminal and output terminal on the
— 55   —
monitor operation panel (Refer to page 134 for
details)
Thermal relay Motor thermal heat cumulative value is
Motor thermal load
0.1% 61 61 operation level displayed.
factor
(100%) (Motor overload trip (E.THM) at 100%)
Thermal relay Transistor thermal heat cumulative value is
Inverter thermal load
0.1% 62 62 operation level displayed.
factor
(100%) (Inverter overload trip (E.THT) at 100%)
Displays the PTC thermistor resistance at
PTC thermistor terminal 2 when PTC thermistor protection
0.01k 64  —
resistance is active.
(0.10k to 31.5k(Refer to page 103)
132
 Frequency setting to output terminal status on the PU main monitor are selected by "other monitor selection" of the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07).
 The cumulative energization time and actual operation time are accumulated from 0 to 65535 hours, then cleared, and accumulated again from 0.
When the operation panel is used, the time is displayed up to 65.53 (65530h) in the indication of 1h = 0.001, and thereafter, it is added up from 0.
 Actual operation time is not accumulated when the cumulative operation time is less than 1h until turning OFF of the power supply.
 When using the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07), "kW" is displayed.
 Since the panel display of the operation panel is 4 digits in length, the monitor value of more than "9999" is displayed as "----".
 Larger thermal value between the motor thermal and transistor thermal is displayed.
A value other than 0% is displayed if the surrounding air temperature (heatsink temperature) is high even when the inverter is at a stop.
REMARKS
 By setting "0" in Pr. 52, the monitoring of output speed to fault display can be selected in sequence by .
 When the operation panel is used, the displayed units are Hz and A only, and the others are not displayed.
 The monitor set in Pr. 52 is displayed in the third monitor position. However, change the output current monitor for the motor
load factor.
Initial Value
The monitor displayed at powering ON is the first monitor. Display the monitor you want to display on the first monitor and hold
down for 1s. (To return to the output frequency monitor, hold down for 1s after displaying the output frequency
monitor.)
Power-on monitor (first monitor) Second monitor Third monitor Fault monitor
With fault
Output frequency monitor Output current monitor Output voltage monitor
Example)When Pr. 52 is set to "20" (cumulative energization time), the monitor is displayed on the operation panel as described
below.
Power-on monitor (first monitor) Second monitor Third monitor Fault monitor
With fault
Output frequency monitor Output current monitor Cumulative energization time monitor
(2) Display set frequency during stop (Pr. 52) Pr. 52

0 100
 When "100" is set in Pr. 52, the set frequency and
During During
output frequency are displayed during stop and During stop
running/stop running
operation respectively. (LED of Hz flickers during Output Output Set Output
stop and is lit during operation.) frequency frequency frequency frequency
Output current Output current
Output voltage Output voltage
4
Fault display Fault display
 The set frequency displayed indicates the frequency to be output when the start
command is ON. Different from the frequency setting displayed when Pr. 52 = "5",
the value based on maximum/minimum frequency and frequency jump is
PARAMETERS
displayed.
REMARKS
 During an error, the output frequency at error occurrence appears.
 During MRS signal is ON, the values displayed are the same as during a stop.
 During offline auto tuning, the tuning status monitor has priority.
133
(3) Operation panel I/O terminal monitor (Pr. 52)

When Pr. 52 = "55", the I/O terminal status can be monitored on the operation panel.
The I/O terminal monitor is displayed on the third monitor.
The LED is ON when the terminal is ON, and the LED is OFF when the terminal is OFF. The center line of LED is always
ON.
On the I/O terminal monitor (Pr. 52 = "55"), the upper LEDs denote the input terminal status and the lower the output
terminal status.
- Display example -
RM When signals STF, RH and
RH STF
Input terminal RUN are ON
RL STR Hz
A
V
Center line is always ON
RUN
ABC SO Output terminal
....Specifications differ according to the date assembled. Refer to page 292 to check the SERIAL number.
(4) Cumulative power monitor and clear (Pr. 170, Pr. 891)
On the cumulative power monitor (Pr. 52 = "25"), the output power monitor value is added up and is updated in 1h
increments.
The operation panel, parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) and communication (RS-485 communication) display
increments and display ranges are as indicated below.
Operation Panel Parameter Unit Communication

Range
Range Unit Range Unit Unit
Pr. 170 = 10 Pr. 170 = 9999
0 to 99.99kWh 0.01kWh 0 to 999.99kWh 0.01kWh 1kWh/
0 to 65535kWh
100.0 to 999.9kWh 0.1kWh 1000.0 to 9999.9kWh 0.1kWh 0 to 9999kWh 0.01kWh
(initial value)
1000 to 9999kWh 1kWh 10000 to 99999kWh 1kWh 
 Power is measured in the range of 0 to 9999.99kWh, and displayed in 4 digits.
When the monitor value exceeds "99.99", a carry occurs, e.g. "100.0", so the value is displayed in 0.1kWh increments.
 Power is measured in the range of 0 to 99999.99kWh, and displayed in 5 digits.
When the monitor value exceeds "999.99", a carry occurs, e.g. "1000.0", so the value is displayed in 0.1kWh increments.
 In monitoring with communication, cumulative power is displayed in 1kWh increments. And cumulative power 2 is displayed in 0.01kWh. (Refer to page 191
for communication)
The monitor data digit can be shifted to the right by the number of Pr. 891 settings.
For example, if the cumulative power value is 1278.56kWh when Pr. 891 = "2", the operation panel display or parameter
unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) display is 12.78 (display in 100kWh increments) and the communication data is 12.
If the maximum value is exceeded at Pr. 891 = "0 to 4", the power is clamped at the maximum value, indicating that a digit
shift is necessary. If the maximum value is exceeded at Pr. 891 = "9999", the power returns to 0 and is recounted.
If the maximum value is exceeded at Pr. 891 = "9999", the power returns to 0 and is recounted.
Writing "0" in Pr. 170 clears the cumulative power monitor.
REMARKS
 If "0" is written to Pr. 170 and Pr. 170 is read again, "9999" or "10" is displayed.
134
(5) Cumulative energization time and actual operation time monitor (Pr. 171, Pr. 563, Pr. 564)
Cumulative energization time monitor (Pr. 52 = "20") accumulates energization time from shipment of the inverter every
one hour.
On the actual operation time monitor (Pr. 52 = "23"), the inverter running time is added up every hour. (Time is not added
up during a stop.)
If the monitored value exceeds 65535, it is added up from 0. You can check the numbers of cumulative energization time
monitor exceeded 65535h with Pr. 563 and the numbers of actual operation time monitor exceeded 65535h with Pr. 564.
Writing "0" to Pr. 171 clears the cumulative energization power monitor. (The cumulative time monitor can not be cleared.)
REMARKS
 The cumulative energization time does not increase if the power is ON for less than an hour.
 The actual operation time does not increase if the cumulative running time during power-ON status is less than an hour.
 If "0" is written to Pr. 171 and Pr. 171 is read again, "9999" is always displayed. Setting "9999" does not clear the actual operation
time meter.
(6) You can select the decimal digits of the monitor (Pr. 268)
As the operation panel display is 4 digits long, the decimal places may vary at analog input, etc. The decimal places can
be hidden by selecting the decimal digits.
In such a case, the decimal digits can be selected by Pr. 268.
Pr. 268 Setting Description

9999 (initial value) No function
For the first or second decimal places (0.1 increments or 0.01 increments) of the monitor, numbers in the first
0 decimal place and smaller are rounded to display an integral value (1 increments).The monitor value smaller than
0.99 is displayed as 0.
When 2 decimal places (0.01 increments) are monitored, the 0.01 decimal place is dropped and the monitor
1
displays the first decimal place (0.1 increments). The monitored digits in 1 increments are displayed.
REMARKS
 The number of display digits on the cumulative energization time (Pr. 52 = "20"), actual operation time (Pr. 52 = "23") and
cumulative power (Pr. 52 = "25") does not change.
Pr. 30 Regenerative function selection, Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake duty Refer to page 113
Pr. 37 Speed display Refer to page 130
Pr. 55 Frequency monitoring reference, Pr. 56 Current monitoring reference Refer to page 136
4
PARAMETERS
135
4.11.3 Reference of the terminal AM (analog voltage output) (Pr. 55, Pr. 56)
Analog voltage output from the terminal AM is available.

Set the reference of the signal output from terminal AM.
Parameter
Number
Frequency monitoring Full-scale value when frequency monitor value is
55* 50Hz 0 to 400Hz
reference output to terminal AM.
Current monitoring Inverter Full-scale value when current monitor value is
56* 0 to 500A
reference rated current output to terminal AM.
* The above parameters allow their settings to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write selection.
(1) Frequency monitoring reference (Pr. 55)

• Set the full scale value when outputting the frequency monitor from
Output voltage
terminal AM.
• Set the frequency when the optional frequency meter (DC voltmeter
10VDC) shows 50Hz or 120Hz (shows full scale) which is connected
10VDC to the terminal AM.
• Set the frequency (output frequency/set frequency) when the voltage
output at terminal AM is 10VDC.
• The analog voltage output and frequency at terminal AM are
proportional. (The maximum output voltage is 10VDC.)
1Hz 50Hz 400Hz
(initial value)
Setting range of Pr. 55
(2) Current monitoring reference (Pr. 56)

• Set the full scale value when outputting the current monitor from
terminal AM.
• Set the current to be referenced when the current monitor (inverter
output current, etc.) is selected for terminal AM display.
(10VDC) • Set the current value when the voltage output at terminal AM is
output voltage
10VDC.
Terminal AM
• The analog voltage output and current value at terminal AM are

proportional. (The maximum output voltage is 10VDC.)
Rated current 500A

(initial value)
Setting range of Pr. 56
136
4.11.4 Terminal AM calibration (calibration parameter C1 (Pr.901))
By using the operation panel or parameter unit, you can calibrate terminal AM to full scale deflection.
Parameter
Number
Calibrates the scale of the meter
C1 (901) AM terminal calibration — —
connected to terminal AM.
 The above parameter can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 165)
 The parameter number in parentheses is the one for use with the operation panel (PA02) for the FR-E500 series or parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07).
 The above parameter allow its setting to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write
selection.
(1) Terminal AM gain calibration (C1 (Pr. 901))
 Terminal AM is factory-set to provide a 10VDC output in the full-scale status of the corresponding monitor item.
Calibration parameter C1 (Pr. 901) allows the output voltage ratios (gains) to be adjusted according to the meter
scale. Note that the maximum output voltage is 10VDC.
Inverter Terminal AM
output
AM
Gain calibration of output
10VDC siganl (Pr. 901)
5
Output
0 signal
Calibrate the terminal AM gain in the following procedure.

1)Connect a 0-10VDC meter (frequency meter) to across inverter terminals AM-5. (Note the polarity. The terminal
AM is positive.)
2)Refer to the monitor description list (page 131) and set Pr. 158.
When you selected the running frequency, inverter output current, etc. as monitor, preset in Pr. 55 or Pr. 56 the
running frequency or current value at which the output signal will be 10V.
3) When outputting the item that cannot achieve a 100% value easily by operation, e.g. output current, set "21"
(reference voltage output) in Pr. 158 and perform the following operation. After that, set "2" (output current, for
example) in Pr. 158.
REMARKS
 When outputting such an item as the output current, which cannot reach a 100% value easily by operation, set Pr. 158 to "21"
(reference voltage output) and make calibration. 10VDC is output from the terminal AM.
4
PARAMETERS
137
(2) How to calibrate the terminal AM when using the operation panel
Operation Display
1. Confirm the RUN indicator and operation mode (When Pr. 158 = 1)
indicator

mode.
(The parameter number read previously appears.)
3. Turn until appears.

C1 to C7 settings
are enabled.
Set to C1 AM terminal calibration.
6. Press to enable setting. The monitor set to Pr. 158

AM terminal function selection
is displayed.
7. If the inverter is at a stop, press the key
to start the inverter.

(Motor needs not be connected.)
8. Turn to adjust the indicator needle to the

Analog indicator
desired position.
9. Press .
Setting is complete.

Turn to read another parameter.
Press to return to the indication (step 4).
Press twice to show the next parameter ( ).
REMARKS
 Calibration can also be made for External operation. Set the frequency in the External operation mode, and make calibration in
the above procedure.
 Calibration can be made even during operation.
 For operation from the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07), refer to the Instruction Manual of the parameter unit.
Pr. 55 Frequency monitoring reference Refer to page 136
Pr. 56 Current monitoring reference Refer to page 136
Pr. 158 AM terminal function selection Refer to page 131
138
Operation selection at power failure and instantaneous power failure

failure
At instantaneous power failure Automatic restart operation Pr. 30, Pr. 57, Pr. 58, Pr. 96,
occurrence, restart inverter without after instantaneous power Pr. 162, Pr. 165, Pr. 298, Pr. 299, 139
stopping motor failure/flying start Pr. 611
When undervoltage or a power Power failure-time
failure occurs, the inverter can be deceleration-to-stop Pr. 261 145
decelerated to a stop. function

(Pr. 30, Pr. 57, Pr. 58, Pr. 96, Pr. 162, Pr. 165, Pr. 298, Pr. 299, Pr. 611)
You can restart the inverter without stopping the motor in the following cases:
 When power comes back ON after an instantaneous power failure
 When motor is coasting at start
Parameter
Number
The motor starts at the starting frequency when MRS (X10)
Regenerative function 0, 1
turns ON then OFF
30 0
selection Restart operation is performed when MRS (X10) turns ON
2
then OFF
FR-D740-036(SC) or lower,
FR-D720S-070(SC) or lower........................................... 1s
0
FR-D740-050(SC) to 160(SC), FR-D720S-100(SC) ....... 2s
57 Restart coasting time 9999 The above times are coasting time.
Waiting time for inverter-triggered restart after an
0.1 to 5s
instantaneous power failure.
9999 No restart
58 Restart cushion time 1s 0 to 60s Voltage starting time at restart.
0 Offline auto tuning is not performed
For General-purpose magnetic flux vector control
11 Offline auto tuning is performed without motor running (motor
96 Auto tuning setting/status 0 constants (R1) only) (Refer to page 78)
Offline auto tuning (tuning performed without motor running)
21 for V/F control and automatic restart after instantaneous
power failure (with frequency search)
Automatic restart after 0 With frequency search
1 Without frequency search (reduced voltage system)
162 instantaneous power 1
10 Frequency search at every start
failure selection 11 Reduced voltage at every start
Stall prevention operation Considers the rated inverter current as 100% and sets the
165 150% 0 to 200%
level for restart stall prevention operation level during restart operation.
When offline auto tuning is performed under V/F control,
0 to 32767
frequency search gain necessary for frequency search for 4
automatic restart after instantaneous power failure is set as
298 Frequency search gain 9999
well as the motor constants (R1).
Uses the Mitsubishi motor (SF-JR, SF-HR, SF-JRCA, SF-
PARAMETERS
9999
HRCA) constants
0 Without rotation direction detection
Rotation direction 1 With rotation direction detection
When Pr. 78 = 0,
299 detection selection at 0
With rotation direction detection
restarting 9999
When Pr. 78 = 1, 2
Without rotation direction detection
Acceleration time to reach Pr.20 Acceleration/deceleration
Acceleration time at a 0 to 3600s
reference frequency at a restart.
611 9999
Acceleration time for restart is the normal acceleration time
restart 9999
(e.g. Pr. 7)
139
When Pr. 162 = 1, 11 (without frequency search) (1) Automatic restart operation selection
(Pr. 30, Pr. 162, Pr. 299)
Instantaneous (power failure) time
 Without frequency search
Power supply
(R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) When Pr. 162 = "1 (initial value) or 11", automatic restart
operation is performed in a reduced voltage system,
where the voltage is gradually risen with the output
Motor speed N
(r/min)
frequency unchanged from prior to an instantaneous
power failure independently of the coasting speed of the
Inverter output motor.
*
frequency f (Hz)
REMARKS
Inverter output  This system stores the output frequency and
voltage E (V) rotation direction prior to an instantaneous power
failure and restart using the stored value.
Therefore, if the instantaneous power failure time
Coasting time exceeds 0.2s and the stored value cannot be
Pr. 57 setting Restart cushion time retained, the inverter starts at Pr. 13 Starting
(Pr. 58 setting) frequency (initial value = 0.5Hz) in the starting
* The output shut off timing differs according to the load condition. direction upon power restoration.
When Pr. 162 = 0, 10 (with frequency search)  With frequency search

When "0 or 10" is set in Pr. 162, the inverter smoothly starts
Instantaneous (power failure) time after detecting the motor speed upon power restoration.
Power supply (The motor capacity should be equal to or one rank lower
(R/L1, S/L2, T/L3)
than the inverter capacity)
When using the frequency search, perform offline auto
Motor speed N
(r/min) tuning.
(Refer to page 108 for General-purpose magnetic flux
Inverter output *
frequency f (Hz) vector control and page 142 for V/F control.)
During reverse rotation, the inverter can be restarted
Inverter output smoothly as the direction of rotation is detected.
voltage E (V) You can select whether to make rotation direction
Restart cushion time detection or not with Pr. 299 Rotation direction detection
Coasting time Speed (Pr. 58 setting) selection at restarting.
+
(Pr. 57 ) detection time
When capacities of the motor and inverter differ, set "0"
Acceleration time
(without rotation direction detection) in Pr. 299.
* The output shut off timing differs
at a restart
according to the load condition. Pr. 78 Setting
(Pr. 611 setting) Pr. 299 Setting
0 1 2
9999   
0 (initial value)   
1   
: the rotation direction is detected.
: the rotation direction is not detected.
REMARKS
 Speed detection time (frequency search) changes according to the motor speed. (maximum 100ms)
 When the inverter capacity is two rank or more larger than the motor capacity, the inverter may not start due to overcurrent trip (E.OC).
 If two or more motors are connected to one inverter, the function does not operate properly. (The inverter does not start
smoothly.)
 When reverse rotation is detected under the condition of Pr. 78 = "1" (reverse rotation disabled), the rotation direction is
changed to forward rotation after decelerates in reverse rotation when the start command is forward rotation. The inverter will
not start when the start command is reverse rotation.
140
NOTE
 When automatic restart operation after instantaneous power failure is activated while the motor is running at a low speed (less
than 10Hz), the motor restarts in the direction prior to instantaneous power failure without detecting the rotation direction (Pr.
299 Rotation direction detection selection at restarting = "1").
 If the frequency search result exceeds the set frequency, the output frequency is limited at the set frequency.
 When the wiring length exceeds below, select without frequency search (Pr. 162 = "1, 11").
Motor capacity 0.1kW 0.2kW 0.4kW or higher

Wiring length 20m 50m 100m
 Restart operation at every start

When Pr. 162 = "10 or 11", automatic restart operation is also performed every start, in addition to the automatic restart
after instantaneous power failure. When Pr. 162 = "0", automatic restart operation is performed at the first start after power
supply ON, but not performed at the second time or later.
 Automatic restart operation selection of MRS (X10) signal (When Pr. 162 = "0, 1")
Restart operation after turning MRS (X10) signal ON then OFF using Pr. 30 can be selected as in the table below. When
automatic restart after instantaneous power failure is selected while using the high power factor converter (FR-HC),
normally set "2" in Pr. 30.
Pr. 30 Setting Operation after MRS and X10 Signal Turns OFF, ON, then OFF
0, 1 Start at the Pr. 13 Starting frequency.
2 Restart operation (Starts at the coasting speed)
REMARKS
When output is shut off using terminal S1 and S2, the inverter restarts in the same way as when output is shut off by MRS (X10)
signal.
(2) Restart coasting time (Pr. 57)
Coasting time is the time from when the motor speed is detected until automatic restart control is started.
Set Pr. 57 to "0" to perform automatic restart operation.
The coasting time is automatically set to the value below. Generally this setting will pose no problems.
FR-D740-036(SC) or lower, FR-D720S-070(SC) or lower .............................................................. 1s
FR-D740-050(SC) to 160(SC), FR-D720S-100(SC) ....................................................................... 2s
Operation may not be performed well depending on the magnitude of the moment of inertia (J) of the load or running
frequency. Adjust the coasting time between 0.1s and 5s according to the load specifications.
(3) Restart cushion time (Pr. 58)

Cushion time is the length of time taken to raise the voltage appropriate to detected motor speed (output frequency prior to
instantaneous power failure when Pr. 162 = "1, 11") from 0V.
Normally the initial value need not be changed for operation, but adjust it according to the magnitude of the moment of
inertia (J) of the load or torque.
Voltage 4
100%
PARAMETERS
Pr. 58 Time
(4) Automatic restart operation adjustment (Pr. 165, Pr. 611)

Using Pr. 165, you can set the stall prevention operation level at a restart.
Using Pr. 611, you can set the acceleration time until Pr. 20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency is reached when
automatic restart operation is performed besides the normal acceleration time.
141
(5) Frequency search gain (Pr. 298), offline auto tuning (Pr. 96)
When automatic restart after instantaneous power failure operation (with frequency search) is valid at V/F control, perform
offline auto tuning.
Perform offline auto tuning during V/F control in the following order to set Pr. 298 Frequency search gain automatically.
(Refer to page 108 during General-purpose magnetic flux vector control.)
Before performing offline auto tuning

Check the following before performing offline auto tuning.
The inverter is under V/F control
A motor should be connected. Note that the motor should be at a stop at a tuning start.
The motor capacity should be equal to or one rank lower than the inverter capacity. (note that the capacity is 0.1kW or
more)
A high-slip motor, high-speed motor and special motor cannot be tuned. (The maximum frequency is 120Hz.)
The motor may run slightly. Therefore, fix the motor securely with a mechanical brake, or before tuning, make sure that
there will be no problem in safety if the motor runs (caution is required especially in vertical lift applications). Note that
tuning performance is unaffected even if the motor runs slightly.
Offline auto tuning will not be performed properly if it is performed with a surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H, FR-
BMF-H) connected between the inverter and motor. Remove it before starting tuning.
Setting
1) Set "21" in Pr. 96 Auto tuning setting/status.
Tuning is performed without motor running.
2) Set the rated motor current (initial value is rated inverter current) in Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay. (Refer to page 103)
3) Set Pr. 71 Applied motor according to the motor used.
Motor Pr.71 Setting 
SF-JR 3
Mitsubishi standard motor SF-JR 4P 1.5kW or less 23
Mitsubishi high efficiency motor SF-HR 43
Others 3
SF-JRCA 4P 13
Mitsubishi constant-torque
SF-HRCA 53
motor
Others (SF-JRC, etc.) 13
Other manufacturer's standard
— 3
motor
Other manufacturer's constant-
— 13
torque motor
 Refer to page 106, for other settings of Pr. 71.
142
Execution of tuning
POINT
Before performing tuning, check the monitor display of the operation panel or parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) if the
inverter is in the status for tuning. (Refer to 2) below)
1) When performing PU operation, press of the operation panel.

For External operation, turn ON the start command (STF signal or STR signal). Tuning starts.
(Excitation noise is produced during tuning.)
NOTE
 To force tuning to end, use the MRS or RES signal or press of the operation panel. (Turning the start signal (STF
signal or STR signal) OFF also ends tuning.)
 During offline auto tuning, only the following I/O signals are valid: (initial value)
Input terminal Valid signalSTF, STR
Output terminal RUN, SO, AM, A, B, C
Note that the progress status of offline auto tuning is output in five steps from AM when speed and output frequency
are selected.
 Since the RUN signal turns ON when tuning is started, caution is required especially when a sequence which
releases a mechanical brake by the RUN signal has been designed.
 When executing offline auto tuning, input the run command after switching ON the main circuit power (R/L1, S/L2, T/
L3) of the inverter.
 Do not perform ON/OFF switching of the second function selection signal (RT) during execution of offline auto
tuning. Auto tuning is not executed properly.
2) Monitor is displayed on the operation panel and parameter unit (FR-PU04, FR-PU07) during tuning as below.
Parameter Unit
(FR-PU04, FR-PU07)
Pr. 96 setting 21 21
READ:List
(1) Setting 21
STOP PU
(2) Tuning in progress TUNE 22

STF FWD PU
Flickering
(3) Normal end TUNE 23
COMPLETION
STF STOP PU
(4) Error end

(when inverter protective function TUNE
9
ERROR
operation is activated) STF STOP PU
4
REMARKS
PARAMETERS
It takes approximately 9s until tuning is completed.
3) When offline auto tuning ends, press of the operation panel during PU operation. For External operation, turn
OFF the start signal (STF signal or STR signal) once.
This operation resets the offline auto tuning and the PU's monitor display returns to the normal indication.
(Without this operation, next operation cannot be started.)
143
4) If offline auto tuning ended in error (see the table below), frequency search gain are not set.
Error
Error Cause Remedy
Display
8 Forced end Set "21" in Pr. 96 and perform tuning again.
9 Inverter protective function operation Make setting again.
Current limit (stall prevention) function was
91 Set "1" in Pr. 156.
activated.
Converter output voltage reached 75% of rated
92 Check for fluctuation of power supply voltage.
value.
Calculation error Check the motor wiring and make setting again.
93
A motor is not connected. Set the rated current of the motor in Pr. 9.
5) When tuning is ended forcibly by pressing or turning OFF the start signal (STF or STR) during tuning, offline
auto tuning does not end properly. (The frequency search gain have not been set.)
6) When using the motor corresponding to the following specifications and conditions, reset Pr.9 Electronic thermal O/L
relay as below after tuning is completed.
a) When the rated power specifications of the motor is 200/220V(400/440V) 60Hz, set 1.1 times rated motor current
value in Pr.9.
b) When performing motor protection from overheat using a PTC thermistor or motor with temperature detector such
as Klixon, set "0" (motor overheat protection by the inverter is invalid) in Pr.9.
NOTE
 The frequency search gain measured once in the offline auto tuning are stored as parameters and their data are held
until the offline auto tuning is performed again.
 An instantaneous power failure occurring during tuning will result in a tuning error.
After power is restored, the inverter goes into the normal operation mode. Therefore, when STF (STR) signal is ON,
the motor runs in the forward (reverse) rotation.
 Any alarm occurring during tuning is handled as in the ordinary mode. Note that if a fault retry has been set, retry is
ignored.
 The set frequency monitor displayed during the offline auto tuning is 0Hz.
 Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.178 to Pr.182 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other functions.
 The SU and FU signals are not output during a restart. These are output after the restart cushion time has elapsed.
 Automatic restart operation will also be performed after a reset or when a retry is made by the retry function.
CAUTION
When automatic restart after instantaneous power failure has been selected, the motor and machine will start
suddenly (after the reset time has elapsed) after occurrence of an instantaneous power failure.
Stay away from the motor and machine.
When you have selected automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function, apply in easily visible
places the CAUTION stickers supplied to the Installation Guideline.
When the start signal is turned OFF or is pressed during the restart cushion time after instantaneous
power failure, deceleration starts after Pr. 58 Restart cushion time has elapsed.
Pr. 7 Acceleration time Refer to page 99
Pr. 65, Pr. 67 to Pr. 69 Retry function Refer to page 147
Pr. 78 Reverse rotation prevention selection Refer to page 165
144
4.12.2 Power-failure deceleration stop function (Pr. 261)

When a power failure or undervoltage occurs, the inverter can be decelerated to a stop or can be decelerated and re-
accelerated to the set frequency.
Name Description
Number Value Range
Coasts to stop.
0 When undervoltage or power failure occurs, the inverter output
is shut off.
When undervoltage or a power failure occurs, the inverter can
Power failure stop 1
261 0 be decelerated to a stop.
selection When undervoltage or a power failure occurs, the inverter can
be decelerated to a stop.
2
If power is restored during a power failure, the inverter
accelerates again.
Power (1) Parameter setting

ON OFF
When Pr. 261 is set to "1 or 2", the inverter decelerates to a stop
Output frequency
Pr. 261 = 0 if an undervoltage or power failure occurs.

Pr. 261 = 1, 2
(2) Operation outline of deceleration to stop at power
failure
When undervoltage or power failure occurs, the output
Time
frequency is decreased and controlled so that the converter
circuit (DC bus) voltage is constant and decreased to 0Hz to
stop.
Pr. 261 = 1 (3) Power failure stop function (Pr. 261 = "1")
Power
If power is restored during power failure deceleration,
During deceleration deceleration to a stop is continued and the inverter remains
Output frequency
at occurrence of power failure

stopped. To restart, turn OFF the start signal once, then turn it
During stop
at occurrence ON again.
of power failure
Time
STF
Y46
Turn OFF STF once to make acceleration again
REMARKS 4
 When automatic restart after instantaneous power failure is selected (Pr. 57  "9999"), power failure stop function is made
invalid and automatic restart operation after instantaneous power failure is valid.
PARAMETERS
 When the power failure deceleration stop function is active (Pr. 261  "1"), the inverter will not start even if the power is turned
ON with the start signal (STF/STR) ON. After switching ON the power, turn OFF the start signal once and then ON again to
make a start.
Power ON
Not started as inverter Output frequency
is stopped due to
power failure
Time
STF OFF ON
Y46 ON
145
(4) Operation continuation at instantaneous power failure function (Pr. 261 = "2")
When power is restored during deceleration after a power failure, acceleration is made again up to the set frequency.
When this function is used in combination with the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function(Pr.57 
"9999"), deceleration can be made at a power failure and acceleration can be made again after power restoration.
Pr. 261 = 2 Pr. 261 = 2, Pr. 57 9999

When power is restored during deceleration When used with automatic restart
at occurrence of power failure after instantaneous power failure
IPF During power failure

Power
Power
Output
frequency Output
 Automatic restart
Reacceleration frequency
During deceleration at During deceleration at after instantaneous
occurrence of power failure Time occurrence of power failure power failure
Time
Y46
* Acceleration time depends on Pr. 7 (Pr. 44). Reset time + Pr. 57
Y46
NOTE
 When operation continuation at instantaneous power failure function is used, keep the starting signal (STF/STR) ON
even during instantaneous power failure. If the starting signal turns OFF during instantaneous power failure, the
inverter decelerates according to the deceleration time setting, causing the motor to coast if enough regenerative
energy is not obtained.
(5) Power failure deceleration signal (Y46 signal)
The Y46 signal is ON during deceleration at an instantaneous power failure or during a stop after deceleration at an
instantaneous power failure.
After a power failure stop, the inverter can not start even if power is restored and the start command is given. In this case,
check the power failure deceleration signal (Y46 signal). (at occurrence of input phase loss (E.ILF), etc.)
For the Y46 signal, set "46 (forward operation)" or "146 (reverse operation)" to Pr. 190, Pr. 192 or Pr. 197 (output terminal
function selection) to assign the function.
REMARKS
 During a stop or trip, the power failure stop selection is not performed.
NOTE
CAUTION
Even if the power failure stop function is valid, some loads may cause the inverter to trip and the motor to
coast.
The motor will coast if enough regenerative energy is not given from the motor to the inverter.
146
Operation setting at fault occurrence
4.13 Operation setting at fault occurrence

Recover by retry operation at fault
Retry operation Pr. 65, Pr. 67 to Pr. 69 147
occurrence
Do not output input/output phase Input/output phase failure
Pr. 251, Pr. 872 149
failure alarm protection selection
Detect an earth (ground) fault at Earth (ground) fault
Pr. 249 149
start detection at start
4.13.1 Retry function (Pr. 65, Pr. 67 to Pr. 69)
If a fault occurs, the inverter resets itself automatically to restart. You can also select the fault for a retry.
When you have selected automatic restart after instantaneous power failure (Pr. 57 Restart coasting time  9999), restart
operation is performed at the retry operation time which is the same of that of a power failure. (Refer to page 139 for the
restart function.)

Name Description
Number Value Range
65 Retry selection 0 0 to 5 A fault for retry can be selected. (Refer to the next page)
0 No retry function
Set the number of retries at fault occurrence.
1 to 10
Number of retries at fault A fault output is not provided during retry operation.
67 0
occurrence Set the number of retries at fault occurrence. (The setting
101 to 110 value of minus 100 is the number of retries.)
A fault output is provided during retry operation.
Set the waiting time from when an inverter fault occurs
68 Retry waiting time 1s 0.1 to 600s
until a retry is made.
69 Retry count display erase 0 0 Clear the number of restarts succeeded by retry.
Retry success example  Retry operation automatically resets a fault and restarts
Retry success
the inverter at the starting frequency when the time set in
Pr. 68 5 Pr. 68 elapses after the inverter is tripped.
 Retry operation is performed by setting Pr.67 to any value
Pr. 68 other than "0". Set the number of retries at fault
Inverter output
frequency occurrence in Pr. 67.
 When retries fail consecutively equal to or more than the
0
Time number of times set in Pr. 67, a retry count excess fault
Retry start Success count + 1 (E.RET) occurs, resulting in inverter trip. (Refer to retry
Fault occurrence
failure example)
Retry success count  Use Pr. 68 to set the waiting time from when the inverter 4
Y64 ON trips until a retry is made in the range of 0.1 to 600s.
 Reading the Pr. 69 value provides the cumulative number
Retry failure example
PARAMETERS
of successful restart times made by retry.

The cumulative count in Pr. 69 is increased by 1 when a
retry is regarded as successful after normal operation
continues without faults occurring for more than four times
Pr. 68 Pr. 68 Pr. 68
Inverter output longer than the time set in Pr. 68 after a retry start.
frequency (When retry is successful, cumulative number of retry
0
failure is cleared.)
Time
 Writing "0" to Pr. 69 clears the cumulative count.
First retry Second retry Third retry
Retry failure  During a retry, the Y64 signal is ON. For the Y64 signal,
Fault Fault Fault (E.RET)
assign the function by setting "64 (positive operation)" or
Fault signal occurrence occurrence occurrence
(ALM)
ON "164 (negative operation)" to Pr. 190, Pr. 192 or Pr. 197
Y64 ON ON ON (output terminal function selection) .
147
 Using Pr. 65, you can select the fault that will cause a retry to be executed. No retry will be made for the fault not indicated.
(Refer to page 254 for the fault description.)
 indicates the faults selected for retry.
Fault for Pr. 65 Setting Fault for Pr. 65 Setting

Retry 0 1 2 3 4 5 Retry 0 1 2 3 4 5
E.OC1      E.PTC 
E.OC2     E.OLT  
E.OC3      E. PE  
E.OV1     E.ILF  
E.OV2     E.CDO  
E.OV3    
E.THM 
E.THT 
E. BE  
E. GF  
E.OHT 
NOTE
 The data stored as the error reset for retry is only that of the fault which occurred the first time.
 When an inverter fault is reset by the retry function at the retry time, the accumulated data of the electronic thermal
relay function, regeneration brake duty etc. are not cleared. (Different from the power-ON reset.)
 Retry is not performed if E.PE (Parameter storage device fault) occurred at power ON.
 If a fault that is not selected for a retry occurs during retry operation (retry waiting time), the retry operation stops
while the fault indication is still displayed.
CAUTION
When you have selected the retry function, stay away from the motor and machine in the case of the inverter is
tripped. The motor and machine will start suddenly (after the reset time has elapsed) after the inverter trip.
When you have selected the retry function, apply in easily visible places the CAUTION stickers supplied to the
Installation Guideline.
Pr. 57 Restart coasting time (Refer to page 139)
148
4.13.2 Input/output phase loss protection selection (Pr. 251, Pr. 872)
You can choose whether to make Input/output phase loss protection valid or invalid.
 Output phase loss protection is a function to stop the inverter output if one of the three phases (U, V, W) on the
inverter's output side is lost.
 Input phase loss protection is a function to stop the inverter output if one of the three phases (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) on the
inverter's input side is lost.
Parameter
Number
Output phase loss 0 Without output phase loss protection
251 1
protection selection 1 With output phase loss protection
Input phase loss protection 0 Without input phase loss protection
872  1
selection 1 With input phase loss protection
 Available only for the three-phase power input specification model.
(1) Output phase loss protection selection (Pr. 251)

 If phase loss occurs during inverter operation (except for during DC brake operation, or output frequency is 1Hz or less),
output phase loss protection (E.LF) activates, and inverter trips.
 When Pr. 251 is set to "0", output phase loss protection (E.LF) becomes invalid.
(2) Input phase loss protection selection (Pr. 872)

 When Pr. 872 is set to "1" (initial value), input phase loss protection (E.ILF) is provided if a phase loss of one phase among
the three phases is detected for 1s continuously.
NOTE
 If an input phase loss continues for a long time, the converter section and capacitor lives of the inverter will be
shorter.
 If the load is light or during a stop, lost phase cannot be detected because detection is performed based on the
fluctuation of bus voltage. Large unbalanced phase-to-phase voltage of the three-phase power supply may also
cause input phase loss protection (E.ILF).
 Phase loss can not be detected during regeneration load operation.
 If parameter copy is performed from single-phase power input model to three-phase power input model, Pr. 872
setting may be changed. Check Pr. 872 setting after parameter copy.
4.13.3 Earth (ground) fault detection at start (Pr. 249)
You can choose whether to make earth (ground) fault detection at start valid or invalid. Earth (Ground) fault detection is
executed only right after the start signal is input to the inverter.
Protective function will not activate if an earth (ground) fault occurs during operation.
4
Parameter
Number
PARAMETERS
Earth (ground) fault 0 Without earth (ground) fault detection

249 1
detection at start 1 With earth (ground) fault detection
NOTE
 As detection is executed at start, output is delayed for approx. 20ms every start.
 If an earth (ground) fault is detected with "1" set in Pr. 249, output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent (E.GF) is detected and
the inverter trips. (Refer to page 260)
 If the motor capacity is smaller than the inverter capacity when using the FR-D740-120(SC) or higher, earth (ground) fault
detection may not be provided.
149
Energy saving operation
4.14 Energy saving operation

Energy saving operation Optimum excitation control Pr. 60 150
4.14.1 Optimum excitation control (Pr. 60) V/F
Without a fine parameter setting, the inverter automatically performs energy saving operation.
This operation is optimum for fan and pump applications
Parameter
Number
Energy saving control 0 Normal operation mode
60 0
selection * 9 Optimum excitation control mode
* When parameter is read using the FR-PU04, a parameter name different from an actual parameter is displayed.
 When "9" is set in Pr. 60, the inverter operates in the Optimum excitation control mode.
 The Optimum excitation control mode is a control system which controls excitation current to improve the motor efficiency
to maximum and determines output voltage as an energy saving method.
REMARKS
 When the motor capacity is too small as compared to the inverter capacity or two or more motors are connected to one inverter,
the energy saving effect is not expected.
NOTE
 When the Optimum excitation control mode is selected, deceleration time may be longer than the setting value. Since
overvoltage alarm tends to occur as compared to the constant-torque load characteristics, set a longer deceleration
time.
 Optimum excitation control functions only under V/F control. Optimum excitation control does not function under
General-purpose magnetic flux vector control.
 Optimum excitation control will not be performed during an automatic restart after instantaneous power failure.
 Since output voltage is controlled by Optimum excitation control, output current may slightly increase.
150
Motor noise, EMI measures, mechanical resonance
4.15 Motor noise, EMI measures, mechanical resonance
Purpose of Use Parameter that should be Set Refer to Page

Reduction of the motor noise
Carrier frequency and
Measures against EMI and leakage Pr. 72, Pr. 240, Pr. 260 151
Soft-PWM selection
currents
Reduce mechanical resonance Speed smoothing control Pr. 653 152
4.15.1 PWM carrier frequency and Soft-PWM control (Pr. 72, Pr. 240, Pr. 260)
You can change the motor sound.
Parameter
Number
You can change the PWM carrier frequency.
The setting is in [kHz].
72 * PWM frequency selection 1 0 to 15
Note that 0 indicates 0.7kHz and 15
indicates 14.5kHz.
Soft-PWM operation 0 Soft-PWM is invalid
240 * 1
selection 1 When Pr. 72 = "0 to 5", Soft-PWM is valid.
PWM carrier frequency is constant
0
PWM frequency independently of load.
260 0
automatic switchover Decreases PWM carrier frequency
1
automatically when load increases.
The above parameters can be set when Pr.160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 165)
* The parameters in the table allow its setting to be changed during operation even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write selection.
(1) PWM carrier frequency changing (Pr. 72)

You can change the PWM carrier frequency of the inverter.
Changing the PWM carrier frequency produces an effect on avoiding the resonance frequency of a mechanical system or
motor or on EMI measures or on leakage current reduction caused by the PWM switching.
(2) Soft-PWM control (Pr. 240)

Soft-PWM control is a control method that changes the motor noise from a metallic tone into an unoffending complex tone.
(3) PWM carrier frequency automatic reduction function (Pr. 260)

When Pr. 260 = "0" (initial value), the carrier frequency becomes constant (Pr. 72 setting) independently of the load,
making the motor sound uniform.
When continuous operation is performed at 85% or more of the inverter rated current with the carrier frequency of the 4
inverter set to 3kHz or more (Pr.72  "3") while Pr.260 = "1", the carrier frequency is automatically reduced to 2kHz to avoid
E.THT (inverter overload shutoff). (Motor noise increases, but it is not a failure.)
PARAMETERS
NOTE
 Decreasing the PWM carrier frequency affects on EMI measures and on leakage current reduction, but increases
motor noise.
 When PWM carrier frequency is set to 1kHz or less (Pr.72  1), fast response current limit may function prior to stall
prevention operation due to increase in ripple currents, resulting in insufficient torque. In such case, set fast-
response current limit operation invalid using Pr. 156 Stall prevention operation selection .
Pr. 156 Stall prevention operation selection Refer to page 82
151
Motor noise, EMI measures, mechanical resonance
4.15.2 Speed smoothing control (Pr. 653)

Vibration due to mechanical resonance influences the inverter control, causing the output current (torque) unstable. In this
case, the output current (torque) fluctuation can be reduced to ease vibration by changing the output frequency.
Parameter
Number
Increase or decrease the value using
653 Speed smoothing control 0 0 to 200%
100% as reference to check an effect.
The above parameter can be set when Pr.160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 165)
(1) Control block diagram
processing
Speed
command + Output frequency
Frequency output
V/F control
Voltage output
-
Speed smoothing control

Torque current
Pr.653
(2) Setting method

If vibration due to mechanical resonance occurs, set 100% in Pr. 653, run the inverter at the frequency which generates
maximum vibration and check if the vibration will be reduced or not after several seconds.
If effect is not produced, gradually increase the Pr. 653 setting and check the effect repeatedly until the most effective
value is set in Pr. 653.
If vibration becomes large by increasing the Pr. 653 setting, gradually decrease the Pr. 653 setting than 100% to check the
effect in a similar manner.
NOTE
Depending on the machine, vibration may not be reduced enough or an effect may not be produced.
152
Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 2, 4)
4.16 Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 2, 4)

Selection of voltage/current input
(terminal 2, 4)
Analog input selection Pr. 73, Pr. 267 153
Perform forward/reverse rotation by
analog input.
Adjustment (calibration) of analog Bias and gain of frequency Pr. 125, Pr. 126, Pr. 241,
156
input frequency and voltage (current) setting voltage (current) C2 to C7 (Pr. 902 to Pr. 905)
4.16.1 Analog input selection (Pr. 73, Pr. 267)

You can select the function that switches between forward rotation and reverse rotation according to the analog input
terminal specifications and input signal.
Parameter Setting
Number Range
0 Terminal 2 input 0 to 10V
Without reversible operation
73 Analog input selection 1
With reversible operation
Voltage/current input
Description
switch
Terminal 4 input 0 Terminal 4 input 4 to 20mA

267 0
selection
(1) Selection of analog input specifications

For the terminal 2 for analog voltage input, 0 to 5V (initial value) or 0 to 10V can be selected.
Either voltage input (0 to 5V, 0 to 10V) or current input (4 to 20mA initial value) can be selected for terminal 4 used for
analog input.
Change the input specifications to change Pr. 267 and voltage/current input switch.
Rated specifications of terminal 4 change according
to the voltage/current input switch setting.
Voltage input: Input resistance 10k1k
Maximum permissible input voltage
20VDC
Current input: Input resistance 2495 4
Maximum permissible input voltage
Current input (initial setting)
30mA
PARAMETERS
Voltage input
153
NOTE
 Set Pr. 267 and a voltage/current input switch correctly, then input an analog signal in accordance with the setting.
Incorrect setting as in the table below could cause component damage. Incorrect settings other than below can
cause abnormal operation.
Setting Causing Component Damage
Operation
Switch setting Terminal input
This could cause component damage to the analog signal output circuit of
I (current input) Voltage input signal output devices.
(electrical load in the analog signal output circuit of signal output devices increases)
This could cause component damage of the inverter signal input circuit.
V (voltage input) Current input
(output power in the analog signal output circuit of signal output devices increases)
Refer to the following table and set Pr. 73 and Pr. 267.
( indicates main speed setting)
Pr.73 Terminal 2 Terminal 4 Input Reversible
Setting Input AU signal Operation
0 0 to 10V
1 Not function
0 to 5V
(initial value) OFF —
10 0 to 10V
Yes
11 0 to 5V
0 According to the Pr. 267 setting
1 — Not function
0:4 to 20mA (initial value)
(initial value) ON
1:0 to 5V
10
— 2:0 to 10V Yes
11
- : invalid
The terminal used for the AU signal input, set "4" in Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection) to assign functions.
NOTE
 Turn the AU signal ON to make terminal 4 valid.
 Make sure that the parameter and switch settings are the same. Different setting may cause a fault, failure or
malfunction.
 Use Pr. 125 (Pr. 126) (frequency setting gain) to change the maximum output frequency at input of the maximum output
frequency command voltage (current). At this time, the command voltage (current) need not be input.
Also, the acceleration/deceleration time, which is a slope up/down to the acceleration/deceleration reference
frequency, is not affected by the change in Pr. 73 setting.
 When Pr. 561 PTC thermistor protection level "9999", terminal 2 is not available for analog frequency command.
(2) Perform operation by analog input selection

Inverter The frequency setting signal inputs 0 to 5VDC (or 0 to 10VDC) across
Forward rotation STF
the terminals 2-5. The 5V (10V) input is the maximum output.
PC
The power supply 5V can be input by either using the internal power
0 to 5VDC
10 supply or preparing an external power supply. Prepare an external
Frequency setting 2 power supply to input the power supply 10V. For the built-in power
5 supply, terminals 10-5 provide 5VDC output.
Connection diagram using terminal 2 (0 to 5VDC) Inverter Built-in Frequency Pr.73

Terminal Power Supply Setting (terminal 2 input
Inverter Voltage Resolution power)
Forward rotation STF 10 5VDC 0.1Hz/50Hz 0 to 5VDC input
PC When inputting 10VDC to the terminal 2, set "0" or "10" in Pr. 73. (The
0 to 10VDC initial value is 0 to 5V)
Frequency Voltage input 2
Setting "1 (0 to 5VDC)" or "2 (0 to 10VDC)" in Pr. 267 and a voltage/
setting equipment 5 current input switch in the "V" position changes the terminal 4 to the
voltage input specification. When the AU signal turns ON, the terminal
Connection diagram using terminal 2 (0 to 10VDC) 4 input becomes valid.
REMARKS
The wiring length of the terminal 10, 2, 5 should be 30m at maximum.
154
(3) Perform operation by analog input selection

Inverter
When the pressure or temperature is controlled constantly by a fan,
pump, etc., automatic operation can be performed by inputting the
AU
output signal 4 to 20mADC of the adjuster across the terminals 4-5.
PC
4 to 20mADC The AU signal must be turned ON to use the terminal 4.
Current input 4
Frequency setting equipment
5
Connection diagram using terminal 4 (4 to 20mADC)

(4) Perform forward/reverse rotation by analog input
Reverse Forward
Set frequency (Hz)
rotation rotation
(polarity reversible operation)
Pr. 125 Setting "10" or "11" in Pr. 73 and adjusting Pr. 125 (Pr. 126) Terminal 2
Reversible
frequency setting gain frequency (Terminal 4 frequency setting gain
frequency) and C2 (Pr. 902) Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency to
Not
reversible
C7 (Pr.905) Terminal 4 frequency setting gain makes reverse operation
by terminal 2 (terminal 4) valid.
C2(Pr. 902) Terminal 2
0 2.5V 5V input (V)
Example)When performing reversible operation by terminal 2 (0 to 5V)
C3(Pr.902) C4(Pr.903)
input
Frequency setting signal
1) Set "11" in Pr. 73 to make reversible operation valid.
Reversible operation example
Set frequency at maximum analog input in Pr. 125 (Pr. 903)
2) Set 1/2 of the value set in C4 (Pr. 903) in C3 (Pr. 902).
3) Reversible operation is performed when 0 to 2.5VDC is input and
forward rotation when 2.5 to 5VDC.
NOTE
 When reversible operation is set, be aware of reverse rotation operation when analog input stops (only the start
signal is input).
 When reversible operation is valid, reversible operation (0 to 4mA: reverse operation, 4mA to 20mA: forward
operation) is performed by terminal 4 in the initial setting.
Pr. 125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency, Pr. 126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency Refer to page 156
Pr. 561 PTC thermistor protection level Refer to page 103
C2 (Pr. 902) Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency to C7 (Pr. 905) Terminal 4 frequency setting gain Refer to page 156
4.16.2 Response level of analog input and noise elimination (Pr. 74)
4
The time constant of the primary delay filter can be set for the external frequency command (analog input (terminal 2, 4)
signal).
PARAMETERS
Parameter
Number
Primary delay filter time constant for the
74 Input filter time constant 1 0 to 8 analog input.
A larger setting results in a larger filter.
 Valid for eliminating noise of the frequency setting circuit.

 Increase the filter time constant if steady operation cannot be performed due to noise.
A larger setting results in slower response. (The time constant can be set between approximately 5ms to 1s with the setting
of 0 to 8.)
155

(Pr. 125, Pr. 126, Pr. 241, C2 (Pr. 902) to C7 (Pr. 905))
You can set the magnitude (slope) of the output frequency as desired in relation to the frequency setting signal (0 to
5VDC, 0 to 10VDC or 4 to 20mADC).
Set Pr. 267 and voltage/current input switch to switch among 0 to 5VDC, 0 to 10VDC, and 0 to 20mADC input using
terminal 4. (Refer to page 153)
[Frequency setting bias/gain parameter]

Name Description
Number Value Range
Terminal 2 frequency setting
125 50Hz 0 to 400Hz Frequency of terminal 2 input gain (maximum).
gain frequency
126 50Hz 0 to 400Hz Frequency of terminal 4 input gain (maximum).
gain frequency
Analog input display unit 0 Displayed in %
241 0 Unit for analog input display.
switchover 1 Displayed in V/mA
C2 (902) Terminal 2 frequency setting
0Hz 0 to 400Hz Frequency on the bias side of terminal 2 input.
 bias frequency
C3 (902) Terminal 2 frequency setting Converted % of the bias side voltage of terminal 2
0% 0 to 300%
 bias input.
C4 (903) Terminal 2 frequency setting Converted % of the gain side voltage of terminal 2
100% 0 to 300%
 gain input.
C5 (904) Terminal 4 frequency setting
0Hz 0 to 400Hz Frequency on the bias side of terminal 4 input.
 bias frequency
C6 (904) Terminal 4 frequency setting Converted % of the bias side current (voltage) of
20% 0 to 300%
 bias terminal 4 input.
C7 (905) Terminal 4 frequency setting Converted % of the gain side current (voltage) of
100% 0 to 300%
 gain terminal 4 input.
 The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 165)
 The parameter number in parentheses is the one for use with the operation panel (PA02) for the FR-E500 series or parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07).
 These parameters allow their settings to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write selection.
156
(1) Change the frequency at maximum

analog input (Pr. 125, Pr. 126)
Initial value
50Hz
Set Pr. 125 (Pr. 126) when changing frequency
setting (gain) of the maximum analog input voltage
(current) only. (C2 (Pr. 902) to C7 (Pr.905) setting
Gain need not be changed)
Pr. 125
Bias
(2) Analog input bias/gain calibration
C2(Pr. 902)
(C2 (Pr. 902) to C7 (Pr. 905))
0 100%
0
5V The "bias" and "gain" functions are used to adjust
0 10V
the relationship between the input signal entered
C3(Pr. 902) C4(Pr. 903)
from outside the inverter to set the output frequency,
e.g. 0 to 5VDC, 0 to 10VDC or 4 to 20mADC, and
the output frequency.
Set the bias frequency of the terminal 2 input using
C2 (Pr. 902).
(It is initially set to the frequency at 0V)
Set the output frequency in Pr. 125 for the frequency
command voltage set with Pr. 73 Analog input
selection.
Initial value
50Hz Set the bias frequency of the terminal 4 input using C5
(Pr. 904).
(It is initially set to the frequency at 4mA)
Using Pr. 126, set the output frequency relative to
Gain 20mA of the frequency command current (4 to
Bias Pr. 126 20mA).
C5(Pr. 904) There are three methods to adjust the frequency
0 20 100% setting voltage (current) bias/gain.
Frequency setting
0 4
signal
20mA a) Method to adjust any point by application of a
C6(Pr. 904) C7(Pr. 905)
voltage (current) across terminals 2-5 (4-5)
page 158
b) Method to adjust any point without application of
a voltage (current) across terminals 2-5 (4-5)
page 159
c) Method to adjust frequency only without
adjustment of voltage (current) page 160
NOTE
 When voltage/current input signal for terminal 4 was switched using Pr. 267 and voltage/current input switch, perform
4
calibration without fail.
PARAMETERS
(3) Analog input display unit changing (Pr. 241)

 You can change the analog input display unit (%/V/mA) for analog input bias/gain calibration.
 Depending on the terminal input specification set to Pr. 73, Pr. 267, and voltage/current switch, the display units of C3 (Pr.
902), C4 (Pr. 903), C6 (Pr. 904), C7 (Pr. 905) change as shown below.
Analog Command (terminal 2, 4)

(depending on Pr. 73, Pr. 267, and Pr. 241 = 0 (initial value) Pr. 241 = 1
voltage/current input switch)
0 to 5V input 0 to 5V  0 to 100% (0.1%) display 0 to 100%  0 to 5V (0.01V) display
0 to 10V input 0 to 10V  0 to 100% (0.1%) display 0 to 100%  0 to 10V (0.01V) display
0 to 20mA input 0 to 20mA  0 to 100%(0.1%) display 0 to 100%  0 to 20mA (0.01mA) display
157
(4) Frequency setting signal (current) bias/gain adjustment method

(a) Method to adjust any point by application of a voltage (current) across terminals 2 and 5 (4 and 5).
Operation Display
1. Confirm the RUN indicator and operation mode
indicator
 The inverter should be in the PU operation
mode.
(Using )
mode.

C1 to C7 settings
are enabled.
5. Turn until ( ) appears.
Set to C4 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain. Terminal 2 input is Terminal 4 input is

selected selected
Analog voltage (current)
6. Press to display the analog voltage
value (%) across terminals 2
(current) value (%). and 5 (across terminals 4
and 5)
7. Apply a 5V (20mA) voltage (current).

(Turn the external potentiometer connected
across terminals 2-5 (across terminals 4-5) to
* The value is nearly 100 (%) in the maximum position of
maximum (any position).) the potentiometer.
NOTE
After performing operation in step 6, do not touch until completion of calibration.
 Terminal 2 input is Terminal 4 input is

8. Press to set. selected selected

* The value is nearly 100 (%) in the maximum position of
the potentiometer.
REMARKS
 If the frequency meter (display meter) connected across the terminals AM does not indicate exactly 50Hz, set the calibration
parameter C1 AM terminal calibration. (Refer to page 137)
 If the gain and bias of frequency setting voltage (current) are too close, an error ( ) may be displayed at setting.
158
(b) Method to adjust any point without application of a voltage (current) across terminals 2 and 5 (4 and 5)
(To change from 4V (80%) to 5V (100%))
Operation Display
1. Confirm the RUN indicator and operation mode
indicator
 The inverter should be in the PU operation mode.
(Use )
mode.

C1 to C7 settings
are enabled.
Set to C4 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain. Terminal 2 input is Terminal 4 input

selected is selected
Analog voltage (current) value (%)

6. Press to display the analog voltage
across terminals 2 and 5 (across
(current) value (%). terminals 4 and 5)
7. Turn to set gain voltage (%). The gain frequency is reached

when the analog voltage (current)
"0V(0mA) is 0%, 10V(5V, 20mA) is 100%" value across terminals 2 and 5
(across terminals 4 and 5) is 100%.
REMARKS
The current setting at the instant of turning is
displayed.
You can not check after performing operation in step 7. A
Terminal 2 input Terminal 4 input

8. Press to set. is selected is selected

(Adjustment completed) 4
PARAMETERS
REMARKS
By pressing after step 6, you can confirm the current frequency setting bias/gain setting.
You can not check after performing operation in step 7.
159
(c) Adjusting only the frequency without adjusting the gain voltage (current).
(When changing the gain frequency from 50Hz to 40Hz)
Operation Display
1. Turn until (Pr. 125) or or
Terminal 2 input Terminal 4 input is
(Pr. 126) appears is selected selected
2. Press to show the currently set value.
(50.00Hz)
3. Turn to change the set value to
" ". (40.00Hz)

Terminal 2 input is Terminal 4 input is
4. Press to set. selected selected

5. Mode/monitor check
Press twice to choose the monitor/
frequency monitor.
6. Apply a voltage across the inverter terminals 2
and 5 (across 4 and 5) and turn ON the start
command (STF, STR).
Operation starts at 40Hz.
REMARKS
 Changing C4 (Pr. 903) or C7 (Pr. 905) (gain adjustment) value will not change the Pr. 20 value.
 For operation from the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07), refer to the Instruction Manual of the FR-PU04/FR-PU07.
 When setting the value to 120Hz or more, it is necessary to set Pr. 18 High speed maximum frequency to 120Hz or more. (Refer to
page 86)
 Make the bias frequency setting using the calibration parameter C2 (Pr. 902) or C5 (Pr. 904). (Refer to page 157)
CAUTION
Be cautious when setting any value other than "0" as the bias frequency at 0V (0mA). Even if a speed
command is not given, merely turning ON the start signal will start the motor at the preset frequency.
Pr. 20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency Refer to page 99
Pr. 73 Analog input selection, Pr. 267 Terminal 4 input selection Refer to page 153
160
Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction
4.17 Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction

Limits reset function
Reset selection/disconnected PU
Trips when PU is disconnected Pr. 75 161
detection/PU stop selection
Stops from PU
Prevention of parameter rewrite Parameter write disable selection Pr. 77 164
Prevention of reverse rotation of the motor Reverse rotation prevention selection Pr. 78 165
Displays necessary parameters Display of applied parameters Pr. 160 165
Parameter restriction with using
Password function Pr. 296, Pr. 297 166
password
Control of parameter write by
EEPROM write selection Pr. 342 190
communication
4.17.1 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection (Pr. 75)

You can select the reset input acceptance, disconnected PU (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) connector detection function and PU
stop function.
Parameter
Number
Reset selection/ For the initial value, reset always enabled,
75 disconnected PU detection/ 14 0 to 3, 14 to 17 without disconnected PU detection, and
PU stop selection with PU stop function.
The above parameter can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 165)
The Pr. 75 value can be set any time. Also, if parameter (all) clear is executed, this setting will not return to the initial value.
The above parameters allow its setting to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write
selection.
Pr. 75
Reset Selection Disconnected PU Detection PU Stop Selection
Setting
0 Reset input normally enabled When the PU is disconnected,
1 Reset input is enabled only when the fault occurs. operation is continued. Pressing decelerates the
2 Reset input normally enabled When the PU is disconnected, the motor to a stop only in the PU
3 Reset input is enabled only when the fault occurs. inverter trips. operation mode.
14
Reset input normally enabled When the PU is disconnected, Pressing decelerates the
(initial value)
operation is continued.
15 Reset input is enabled only when the fault occurs. motor to a stop in any of the PU,
16 Reset input normally enabled When the PU is disconnected, the external and communication
17 Reset input is enabled only when the fault occurs. inverter trips. operation modes.
(1) Reset selection

You can select the enable condition of reset function (RES signal, reset command through communication) input.
When Pr. 75 is set to any of "1, 3, 15, 17", a reset can be input only when the inverter is tripped.
NOTE 4
 When the reset signal (RES) is input during operation, the motor coasts since the inverter being reset shuts off the output.
 When reset is performed, cumulative values of electronic thermal O/L relay, and regenerative brake duty are cleared.
 The reset key of the PU is only valid when the inverter is tripped, independently of the Pr. 75 setting.
PARAMETERS
(2) Disconnected PU detection

This function detects that the PU (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) has been disconnected from the inverter for longer than 1s and
causes the inverter to provide a fault output (E.PUE) and come to trip.
When Pr. 75 is set to any of "0, 1, 14, 15", operation is continued even if the PU is disconnected.
REMARKS
 When the PU has been disconnected since before power-ON, it is not judged as a fault.
 To make a restart, confirm that the PU is connected and then reset the inverter.
 The motor decelerates to a stop when the PU is disconnected during PU Jog operation with Pr. 75 set to any of "0, 1, 14, 15"
(which selects operation to be continued if the PU is disconnected).
 When RS-485 communication operation is performed through the PU connector, the reset selection/PU stop selection function
is valid but the disconnected PU detection function is invalid.
161
(3) PU stop selection

In any of the PU operation, External operation and Network operation modes, the motor can be stopped by pressing STOP
key of the operation panel or parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07, operation panel for FR-E500 (PA02)).
When the inverter is stopped by the PU stop function, " " (PS) is displayed. A fault output is not provided.
After the motor is stopped from the PU, it is necessary to perform PU stop (PS) reset to restart. PS reset can be made from
the unit from which PU stop is made (operation panel, parameter unit (FR-PU04/PU07, operation panel for FR-E500
(PA02)).
The motor can be restarted by making PS cancel using a power supply reset or RES signal.
When Pr. 75 is set to any of "0 to 3", PU stop (PS display) is invalid, and deceleration to a stop by is valid only in the
PU operation mode.
REMARKS
During operation in the PU operation mode through RS-485 communication from the PU connector, the motor decelerates to stop
(PU stop) when entered from the operation panel .
(4) How to restart the motor stopped by input from the PU in External operation mode (PU stop
(PS) reset method)
a) Operation panel
Speed 1)After completion of deceleration to a stop, switch OFF the
STF or STR signal.
Time
Key 2)Press to display ............... ( reset)
Operation panel
Key 3)Press to return to .
STF ON
(STR) OFF
4)Switch ON the STF or STR signal.
Stop/restart example for External operation
b) Parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07)

1)After completion of deceleration to a stop, switch OFF the
STF or STR signal.
2)Press EXT ........................................ ( reset)

3)Switch ON the STF or STR signal.
The motor can be restarted by making a reset using a power supply reset or RES signal.
REMARKS
 If Pr. 250 Stop selection is set to other than "9999" to select coasting to a stop, the motor will not be coasted to a stop but
decelerated to a stop by the PU stop function during External operation.
162
(5) Restart (PS reset) method when PU stop (PS display) is made during PU operation
PU stop (PS display) is made when the motor is stopped from the unit where control command source is not selected
(operation panel, parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07, operation panel for FR-E500 (PA02)) in the PU operation mode.
For example, when Pr. 551 PU mode operation command source selection = "9999" (initial value), the motor is stopped from
the PU (PS display) if entered from the operation panel in PU operation mode with the parameter unit mounted.
When the motor is stopped from the PU while the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) is selected as
control command source.
1) After the motor has decelerated to a stop, press of the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07).
2) Press to display .( reset )
3) Press of the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) to select the PU operation mode.
4) Press or of the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07).
REMARKS
 When Pr. 551 = "9999", the priorities of the PU control source is parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07)  operation panel.
CAUTION
Do not reset the inverter while the start signal is being input.
Otherwise, the motor will start instantly after resetting, leading to potentially hazardous conditions.
Pr. 250 Stop selection Refer to page 115
Pr. 551 PU mode operation command source selection Refer to page 179
4
PARAMETERS
163
4.17.2 Parameter write disable selection (Pr. 77)

You can select whether write to various parameters can be performed or not. Use this function to prevent parameter
values from being rewritten by misoperation.
Parameter
Number
0 Write is enabled only during stop.
1 Parameter can not be written.
77 Parameter write selection 0
Parameter write is enabled in any operation
2
mode regardless of operation status.
Pr. 77 can be always set independently of the operation mode and operation status.
(1) Write parameters only during stop (setting "0" initial value)
Parameters can be written only during a stop in the PU operation mode.
The shaded parameters in the parameter list (page 60) can always be written regardless of the operation mode and
operating status. However, Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection and Pr. 240 Soft-PWM operation selection can be written when the
inverter is running in the PU operation mode, but cannot be written in the External operation mode.
(2) Inhibit parameter write (setting "1")
Parameter
Name
Number
Parameter write is not enabled. 22 Stall prevention operation level
(Read is enabled.) Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/
75
Parameter clear and all parameter clear cannot be PU stop selection
performed, either. 77 Parameter write selection
The parameters given on the right can be written even if Pr. 79 Operation mode selection
77 = "1". 160 Extended function display selection
296 Password lock level
297 Password lock/unlock
(3) Write parameters during operation (setting "2")
Parameters can always be written.
The following parameters cannot be written when the inverter is running even if Pr. 77 = "2". Stop the inverter when
changing their parameter settings.
Parameter Parameter
Name Name
Number Number
Stall prevention operation level compensation 83 Rated motor voltage
23
factor at double speed 84 Rated motor frequency
40 RUN key rotation direction selection 90 Motor constant (R1)
48 Second stall prevention operation current 96 Auto tuning setting/status
60 Energy saving control selection 178 to 182 (input terminal function selection)
Stall prevention operation reduction starting 190, 192, 197 (output terminal function selection)
66
frequency 261 Power failure stop selection
71 Applied motor 298 Frequency search gain
79 Operation mode selection 450 Second applied motor
80 Motor capacity 561 PTC thermistor protection level
82 Motor excitation current
164
4.17.3 Reverse rotation prevention selection (Pr. 78)
This function can prevent reverse rotation fault resulting from the incorrect input of the start signal.
Parameter Initial
Number Value
0 Both forward and reverse rotations allowed
Reverse rotation prevention
78 0 1 Reverse rotation disabled
selection
2 Forward rotation disabled
 Set this parameter when you want to limit the motor rotation to only one direction.
 This parameter is valid for all of the reverse rotation and forward rotation keys of the enclosure surface operation panel and
of parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07), the start signals (STF, STR signals) via external terminals, and the forward and
reverse rotation commands through communication.
4.17.4 Extended parameter display (Pr. 160)
Parameter which can be read from the operation panel and parameter unit can be restricted.
In the initial setting, only the simple mode parameters are displayed.
Parameter Initial
Number Value
160 Extended function display 9999 Displays only the simple mode parameters
0
selection 0 Displays simple mode + extended parameters
The above parameters allow its setting to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write selection.
(1) Display of simple mode parameters and extended parameters (Pr. 160)
When Pr. 160 = "9999", only the simple mode parameters can be displayed on the operation panel and parameter unit (FR-
PU04/FR-PU07). (Refer to the parameter list , page 60, for the simple mode parameters.)
When Pr. 160 = "0" (initial value), simple mode parameters and extended parameters can be displayed.
REMARKS
 When RS-485 communication is used to read the parameters with Pr. 551 PU mode operation command source selection  "2", all
parameters can be read regardless of the Pr. 160 setting.
 Pr. 15 Jog frequency, Pr. 16 Jog acceleration/deceleration time, and Pr. 991 PU contrast adjustment are displayed as simple mode
parameter when the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) is fitted.
Pr. 16 Jog acceleration/deceleration time Refer to page 94
Pr. 551 PU mode operation command source selection Refer to page 179 4
Pr. 991 PU contrast adjustment Refer to page 246
PARAMETERS
165
4.17.5 Password function (Pr. 296, Pr. 297)
Registering a 4-digit password can restrict parameter reading/writing.
Parameter
Number
Select restriction level of parameter reading/
1 to 6, 101 to 106
writing when a password is registered.
296 Password lock level 9999
9999 No password lock
1000 to 9998 Register a 4-digit password

Displays password unlock error count. (Reading
297 Password lock/unlock 9999 (0 to 5) only)
(Valid when Pr. 296 = "101" to "106")
(9999) No password lock (Reading only)
The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0".
When Pr. 296  "9999" (with password lock), note that Pr. 297 is always available for setting regardless of Pr. 160 setting.
(1) Parameter reading/writing restriction level (Pr. 296 )

Level of reading/writing restriction by PU/NET mode operation command can be selected by Pr. 296.
PU Mode Operation Command  NET Mode Operation Command 
Pr. 296 Setting
Read  Write  Read  Write 
9999    
1, 101    
2, 102    
3, 103    
4, 104    
5, 105    
6, 106    
: enabled, : restricted
 If the parameter reading is restricted by the Pr. 160 setting, those parameters are unavailable for reading even when "" is indicated.
 If the parameter writing is restricted by the Pr. 77 setting, those parameters are unavailable for writing even when "" is indicated.
 Parameter access from unit where parameter is written in PU operation mode (initially set to operation panel, parameter unit) is restricted. (Refer to page 179
for PU mode operation command source selection)
 Parameter access in NET operation mode with RS-485 communication is restricted.
166
(2) Password lock/unlock (Pr.296, Pr.297 )

<Lock>
1) Set parameter reading/writing restriction level.(Pr. 296 9999)
Pr.296 Setting Restriction of Password
Pr.297 Display
Value Unlock Error
1 to 6 No restriction Always 0
Displays error count
101 to 106 Restricted at fifth error
(0 to 5)
* During [Pr. 296 = "101 to 106"], if password unlock error has occurred 5 times, correct password will not unlock the
restriction. All parameter clear can unlock the restriction.
(In this case, parameter settings are cleared.)
2) Write four-digit numbers (1000 to 9998) in Pr. 297 as a password.
(When Pr. 296 = "9999", Pr. 297 cannot be written.)
When password is registered, parameter reading/writing is restricted with the restriction set level in Pr. 296 until
unlocking.
REMARKS
 After registering a password, a read value of Pr. 297 is always "0" to "5".
 When a password restricted parameter is read/written, is displayed.
 Even if a password is registered, parameters which the inverter itself writes, such as inverter parts life, are overwritten as
needed.
 Even if a password is registered, Pr. 991 PU contrast adjustment can be read/written when a parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07)
is connected.
<Unlock>
There are two ways of unlocking the password.
 Enter a password in Pr. 297.
Unlocked when a password is correct. If a password is incorrect, an error occurs and not unlocked.
During [Pr. 296 = "101 to 106"], if password unlock error has occurred 5 times, correct password will not unlock the
restriction. (During password lock)
 Perform All parameter clear.
Password lock is unlocked. However, other parameter settings are cleared also.
NOTE
 If the password has been forgotten, perform All parameter clear to unlock the parameter restriction. In that case,
other parameters are also cleared.
 All parameter clear can not be performed during the operation.
 Do not use the FR Configurator under the conditions that parameter read is restricted (Pr. 296 = "4, 5, 104, 105").
FR Configurator may not function properly.
(3) Parameter operation during password lock/unlock

Unlocked Password registered Locked
Parameter operation Pr. 296  9999 Pr. 296 = 101 to 106
Pr. 296 = 9999 Pr. 296  9999
Pr. 297 = 0 to 4 Pr. 297 = 5
Pr. 297 = 9999 Pr. 297 = 9999
(Read value) (Read value)
Read     
Pr. 296
Write      
Read     
Pr. 297
Write     
4
Performing parameter clear    
Performing parameter all clear      
Performing parameter copy    
PARAMETERS
: enabled, : restricted
 Reading/writing is unavailable when there is restriction to reading by the Pr. 160 setting.
 Unavailable during the operation.
 Correct password will not unlock the restriction.
REMARKS
 When Pr. 296 = "4, 5, 104, 105" and using the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07), PUJOG operation is unavailable.
 When writing is restricted from PU mode operation command (Pr. 296 = 1, 2, 4, 5, 101, 102, 104, 105), switching of operation
mode by easy setting mode is unavailable.
 During password lock, parameter copy of the parameter unit (FR-PU07) cannot be performed.
Pr. 77 Parameter write selection Refer to page 164
Pr. 160 Extended function display selection Refer to page 165
Pr. 551 PU mode operation command source selection Refer to page 179
167
Selection of operation mode and operation location
4.18 Selection of operation mode and operation location

Operation mode selection Operation mode selection Pr. 79 168
Started in Network operation mode Operation mode at power-on Pr. 79, Pr. 340 178
Operation command source and
speed command source during Pr. 338, Pr. 339
Selection of operation location 179
communication operation, selection Pr. 551
of operation location
4.18.1 Operation mode selection (Pr. 79)

Used to select the operation mode of the inverter.
Mode can be changed as desired among operation using external command signals (External operation), operation
from the operation panel and PU (FR-PU07/FR-PU04) (PU operation), combined operation of PU operation and
External operation (External/PU combined operation), and Network operation (when RS-485 communication is used).
LED Indication
Name Description :OFF
Number Value Range
:ON
External operation
mode
Use External/PU switchover mode ( ) to switch between the
0
PU and External operation mode. PU operation mode
At power ON, the inverter is in the External operation mode.
1 Fixed to PU operation mode

External operation
Fixed to External operation mode mode
2 Operation can be performed by switching between the external

and NET operation mode. NET operation mode
External/PU combined operation mode 1

Frequency command Start command
Operation panel and PU (FR-
3 PU04/FR-PU07) setting or
External signal input
external signal input (multi-speed
(terminal STF, STR)
setting, across terminals 4-5 (valid
Operation when AU signal turns ON)). 
79 mode 0 External/PU combined operation mode 2
Frequency command Start command
selection
4 External signal input Enter from of the operation
(terminal 2, 4, JOG, multi-speed
panel and and of the
selection, etc.)
PU (FR-PU04/FR-PU07)
PU operation mode
Switchover mode External operation

6 Switchover among PU operation, External operation, and NET mode
operation is available while keeping the same operation status.

NET operation mode
External operation mode (PU operation interlock)

PU operation mode
X12 signal ON
Operation mode can be switched to the PU operation mode.
7 External operation
(output stop during External operation) mode
X12 signal OFF
Operation mode can not be switched to the PU operation mode.
The above parameter can be changed during a stop in any operation mode.
 The priorities of the frequency commands when Pr. 79 = "3" are "Multi-speed operation (RL/RM/RH/REX) > PID control (X14) > terminal 4 analog input (AU)
> digital input from the operation panel".
168
(1) Operation mode basics
 The operation mode specifies the source of the start command and the frequency command for the inverter.
 Basically, there are following operation modes.
 External operation mode: For inputting start command and frequency command with an external potentiometer and
switches which are connected to the control circuit terminal.
 PU operation mode: For inputting start command and frequency command with the operation panel or parameter unit
(FR-PU04 / FR-PU07).
 Network operation mode (NET operation mode): For inputting start command and frequency command with RS-485
communication through PU connector.
 The operation mode can be selected from the operation panel or with the communication instruction code.
Inverter
PU operation mode
PU operation mode
Operation panel
Personal computer FR-PU07
PU connector
Personal computer
Network 3
4
5 6
7
2
GOT operation mode 1
8
9
10
Potentiometer
Control terminal
Programmable controller
External
operation mode
Switch
REMARKS
 Either "3" or "4" may be set to select the PU/External combined mode. Refer to page 168 for details.
 The stop function (PU stop selection) activated by pressing of the operation panel and parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-
PU07) is valid even in other than the PU operation mode in the initial setting.
(Refer to Pr. 75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection (page 161))
4
PARAMETERS
169
(2) Operation mode switching method
External operation
When "0 or 1" is set in Pr. 340
Switching from the network Switching from the PU

Switch to the External Press of
operation mode from the PU to light
Press of
the network. Switch to Network operation
the PU to light
mode from the network.
Network operation PU operation
When "10" is set in Pr. 340

Press of the PU to light
Network operation PU operation
Press of the PU to light
REMARKS
 Refer to the following for switching by the external terminal.
PU operation external interlock signal (X12) Refer to page 174
PU-External operation switch-over signal (X16) Refer to page 175
External-NET operation switchover signal (X65), NET-PU operation switchover signal (X66) Refer to page 176
Pr. 340 Communication startup mode selection Refer to page 178
170
(3) Operation mode selection flow

In the following flowchart, select the basic parameter setting and terminal connection related to the operation mode.
START Connection Parameter setting Operation
Where is the start command

source?
From outside (STF/STR terminal)
Where is the frequency
command source?
From outside (Terminal 2, 4, JOG, STF (forward rotation)
multi-speed, etc.) /STR (reverse rotation) Frequency setting terminal ON
(Refer to page 116.)
STF(STR)-ON
Terminal 2, 4 (analog), RL, RM,
RH, JOG, etc.
From the operation panel STF (forward rotation) Pr. 79 = "3" Operation panel, PU digital setting
(digital setting) /STR (reverse rotation) (External/PU combined
(Refer to page 116) operation 1) STF(STR)-ON
From communication
(PU connector (RS-485 communication) STF (forward rotation) Communication frequency setting
Pr. 338 = "1"
/STR (reverse rotation) command sending
(Refer to page 116) Pr. 340 = "1"
STF(STR)-ON
From the operation panel (RUN/FWD/

REV key)
command source?
From outside (terminal 2, 4, JOG, Pr. 79 = "4"
multi-speed, etc.) Terminal 2, 4 (analog), RL, RM, Frequency setting terminal ON
RH, JOG, etc. (External/PU combined
RUN/FWD/REV key-ON
operation 2)
From the operation panel

(digital setting) Pr. 79 = "1" Digital setting
(fixed to PU operation) RUN/FWD/REV key-ON
From communication
(PU connector (RS-485 communication)
Disabled
From communication (PU connector (RS-

485 communication))
command source?
From outside (terminal 2, 4, JOG,
multi-speed, etc.) Terminal 2, 4 (analog), RL, RM, Pr. 339 = "1" Frequency setting terminal ON
Communication start command
RH, JOG, etc. Pr. 340 = "1" sending
From the operation panel
(digital setting) Disabled
From communication Communication frequency setting

(PU connector (RS-485 communication) Pr. 340 = "1" command sending
Communication start command 4
sending
PARAMETERS
171
(4) External operation mode (setting "0" (initial value), "2")

Select the External operation mode when the start
command and the frequency command are applied
from a frequency setting potentiometer, start switch, etc.
which are provided externally and connected to the
control circuit terminals of the inverter.
Generally, parameter change cannot be performed from
the operation panel in the External operation mode.
(Some parameters can be changed. Refer to the
detailed description of each parameter.)
 When "0 or 2" is selected for Pr. 79, the inverter enters
the External operation mode at power-ON. (When using
the Network operation mode, refer to page 178.)
When parameter changing is seldom necessary, setting
Inverter
"2" fixes the operation mode to the External operation
Forward rotation start STF mode.
Reverse rotation start STR When frequent parameter changing is necessary,
PC setting "0" (initial value) allows the operation mode to be
10 changed easily to the PU operation mode by pressing
Frequency setting 2
potentiometer
5 of the operation panel. After you switched to the
PU operation mode, always return to the External
operation mode.
The STF and STR signal are used as a start command,
and the voltage or current signal to terminal 2, 4, multi-
speed signal, JOG signal, etc. are used as a frequency
commands.
(5) PU operation mode (setting "1")

Select the PU operation mode when applying start and
frequency command by only the key operation of the
operation panel (FR-PU04/FR-PU07). Also select the PU
operation mode when making communication using the PU
connector.
When "1" is selected for Pr. 79, the inverter enters the PU
operation mode at power-ON. You cannot change to the
other operation mode.
The setting dial of the operation panel can be used for
setting like a potentiometer. (Refer to Pr. 161 Frequency
Operation panel
setting/key lock operation selection (page 243))
172
(6) PU/External combined operation mode 1 (setting "3")

Select the PU/External combined operation mode 1
when applying frequency command from the
operation panel or parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-
PU07) and inputting the start command with the
external start switch.
Select "3" for Pr. 79. You cannot change to the other
operation mode.
When a frequency is applied from the external signal
by multi-speed setting, it has a higher priority than
the frequency command from the PU. When AU is
Inverter
ON, the command signal to terminal 4 is used.
Operation
Forward rotation start panel
STF
Reverse rotation start STR
PC
(7) PU/External combined operation mode 2 (setting "4")

Select the PU/External combined operation mode 2 when
3
4
5 6
7
8
applying frequency command from the external
potentiometer, multi-speed or JOG signal and inputting the
9
10
Hz
start command by key operation of the operation panel or
parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07).
Select "4" for Pr. 79. You cannot change to the other
operation mode.
Inverter
Operation
panel
Frequency 10
setting 2
potentiometer 5
4
PARAMETERS
173
(8) Switchover mode (setting "6")

While continuing operation, you can switch among the PU operation, External operation and Network operation (NET
operation).
Operation Mode Switching Switching Operation/Operating Status

Select the PU operation mode with the operation panel or parameter unit.
Rotation direction is the same as that of External operation.
External operation  PU operation
The frequency set with the potentiometer (frequency command) or like is used unchanged. (Note
that the setting will disappear when power is switched OFF or the inverter is reset.)
Send the mode change command to the Network operation mode through communication.
Rotation direction is the same as that of External operation.
External operation  NET operation
The value set with the setting potentiometer (frequency command) or like is used unchanged.
(Note that the setting will disappear when power is switched OFF or the inverter is reset.)
Press the external operation key of the operation panel or parameter unit.
PU operation  External operation The rotation direction is determined by the input signal of the External operation.
The set frequency is determined by the external frequency command signal.
Send the mode change command to the Network operation mode through communication.
PU operation  NET operation
Rotation direction and set frequency are the same as those of PU operation.
Send the mode change command to the External operation mode through communication.
NET operation  External operation The rotation direction is determined by the input signal of the External operation.
The set frequency is determined by the external frequency command signal.
Select the PU operation mode with the operation panel or parameter unit.
NET operation  PU operation The rotation direction and frequency command in the Network operation mode are used
unchanged.
(9) PU operation interlock (setting "7")

The PU operation interlock function is designed to forcibly change the operation mode to the External operation mode
when the PU operation interlock signal (X12) input turns OFF.
This function prevents the inverter from being inoperative by the external command if the mode is accidentally left
unswitched from PU operation mode.
Set "7" (PU operation interlock) in Pr. 79.
For the terminal used for X12 signal (PU operation interlock signal) input, set "12" to any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal
function selection) to assign the function. (Refer to page 116 for Pr.178 to Pr.182.)
When the X12 signal is not assigned while MRS signal is assigned, function of the MRS signal switches from output stop
to PU operation interlock signal.
X12 (MRS) Function/Operation

Signal Operation Mode Parameter Write
Operation mode (External, PU, NET) switching Parameter write enabled (depending on Pr. 77 Parameter
ON enabled write selection and each parameter write conditions
Output stop during External operation (Refer to page 60 for the parameter list))
Forcibly switched to External operation mode
External operation allowed
OFF Parameter write disabled with exception of Pr. 79
Switching between the PU and Network operation
mode is enabled
<Function/operation changed by switching ON/OFF the X12 (MRS) signal>
Operating Condition Switching to PU,
Operation
Operation X12 (MRS) Signal Operating Status NET Operation
Status Mode
Mode Mode
During If external operation frequency setting and
ON  OFF Not allowed
PU/NET stop External start signal are entered, operation is
Running ON  OFF performed in that status. Not allowed
During OFF  ON Allowed
During stop
stop ON  OFF Not allowed
External External
OFF  ON During operation  output stop Not allowed
Running
ON  OFF Output stop  operation Not allowed
 The operation mode switches to the External operation mode independently of whether the start signal (STF, STR) is ON or OFF. Therefore, the
motor is run in External operation mode when the X12 (MRS) signal is turned OFF with either of STF and STR ON.
 At fault occurrence, pressing of the operation panel resets the inverter.
174
NOTE
 If the X12 (MRS) signal is ON, the operation mode cannot be switched to the PU operation mode when the start signal
(STF, STR) is ON.
 When the MRS signal is used as the PU interlock signal, the MRS signal serves as the normal MRS function (output
stop) by turning ON the MRS signal and then changing the Pr. 79 value to other than "7" in the PU operation mode. As
soon as "7" is set to Pr. 79 , the MRS signal acts as the PU interlock signal.
 When the MRS signal is used as the PU interlock signal, the logic of the signal is as set in Pr. 17. When Pr. 17 = "2",
read ON as OFF and OFF as ON in the above explanation.
(10) Switching of operation mode by external signal (X16 signal)

When External operation and operation from the operation panel are used together, use of the PU-External operation
switching signal (X16) allows switching between the PU operation mode and External operation mode during a stop
(during a motor stop, start command OFF).
When Pr. 79 = any of "0, 6, 7", the operation mode can be switched between the PU operation mode and External
operation mode. (Pr. 79 = "6" At Switchover mode, operation mode can be changed during operation)
For the terminal used for X16 signal input, set "16" to any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection) to assign the
function.
Pr. 79 X16 Signal State Operation Mode

Remarks
Setting ON (External) OFF (PU)
External operation
0 (initial value) PU operation mode Can be switched to External, PU or NET operation mode
mode
1 PU operation mode Fixed to PU operation mode
Fixed to External operation mode (can be switched to NET operation
2 External operation mode
mode)
3, 4 External/PU combined operation mode External/PU combined mode fixed
External operation Switching among the External, PU, and NET operation mode is
6 PU operation mode
mode enabled while running.
X12 (MRS) External operation Can be switched to External, PU or NET operation mode (output stop
PU operation mode
ON mode in External operation mode)
7
X12 (MRS) Fixed to External operation mode (forcibly switched to External
External operation mode
OFF operation mode)
REMARKS
 The operation mode status changes depending on the setting of Pr. 340 Communication startup mode selection and the ON/OFF
status of the X65 and X66 signals. (For details, refer to page 176 )
 The priorities of Pr. 79 , Pr. 340 and signals are Pr. 79  X12  X66  X65  X16  Pr. 340.
NOTE
 Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection) may affect the other 4
PARAMETERS
175
(11) Switching of operation mode by external signals (X65, X66 signals)

When Pr. 79 = any of "0, 2, 6", the operation mode switching signals (X65, X66) can be used to change the PU or External
operation mode to the Network operation mode during a stop (during a motor stop or start command OFF). (Pr. 79 = "6"
Switchover mode can be changed during operation)
When switching between the Network operation mode and PU operation mode
1)Set Pr. 79 to "0" (initial value) or "6".
2)Set "10" in Pr. 340 Communication startup mode selection.
3)Set "65" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 to assign the NET-PU operation switching signal (X65) to the terminal.
4)The operation mode changes to the PU operation mode when the X65 signal turns ON, or to the Network operation
mode when the X65 signal turns OFF.
Pr. 340 Pr. 79 X65 Signal State
Remarks
Setting Setting ON (PU) OFF (NET)
NET operation mode
0 (initial value) PU operation mode

2 NET operation mode Fixed to NET operation mode
3, 4 External/PU combined operation mode External/PU combined mode fixed
10 NET operation mode
6 PU operation mode Operation mode can be switched with operation continued

X12 (MRS) Switching among the External and PU
Output stop in External operation mode
ON operation mode is enabled
7
X12 (MRS)
External operation mode Forcibly switched to External operation mode
OFF
 NET operation mode when the X66 signal is ON.
 PU operation mode when the X16 signal is OFF.
External operation mode when the X16 signal is ON.
When switching between the Network operation mode and External operation mode
1) Set Pr. 79 to "0 (initial value), 2, 6 or 7". (At the Pr. 79 setting of "7", the operation mode can be switched when the X12
(MRS) signal is ON.)
2) Set "0 (initial value) or 1" in Pr. 340 Communication startup mode selection.
3) Set "66" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 to assign the NET-PU operation switching signal (X66) to the terminal.
4) The operation mode changes to the Network operation mode when the X66 signal turns ON, or to the External
operation mode when the X66 signal turns OFF.
Pr. 340 Pr. 79 X66 Signal State
Remarks
Setting Setting ON (NET) OFF (external)
External operation
0 (initial value) NET operation mode
mode
External operation
2 NET operation mode Cannot be switched to PU operation mode
mode
0 (initial 3, 4 External/PU combined operation mode External/PU combined mode fixed
value), 1 External operation Operation mode can be switched with
6 NET operation mode
mode operation continued
X12 (MRS) External operation
NET operation mode Output stop in External operation mode
ON mode
7
X12 (MRS)
External operation mode Forcibly switched to External operation mode
OFF
 PU operation mode when the X16 signal is OFF. When the X65 signal has been assigned, the operation mode changes with the ON/OFF state
of the X65 signal.
REMARKS
 The priorities of Pr. 79 , Pr. 340 and signals are Pr. 79  X12 X66  X65  X16  Pr. 340.
NOTE
176
Pr. 4 to 6, Pr. 24 to 27, Pr. 232 to Pr. 239 Multi-speed operation Refer to page 92
Pr. 75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection Refer to page 161
Pr. 161 Frequency setting/key lock operation selection Refer to page 243
Pr. 340 Communication startup mode selection Refer to page 178
4
PARAMETERS
177
4.18.2 Operation mode at power-ON (Pr. 79, Pr. 340)
When power is switched ON or when power comes back ON after instantaneous power failure, the inverter can be
started up in the Network operation mode.
After the inverter has started up in the Network operation mode, parameter write and operation can be performed from
a program.
Set this mode for communication operation using PU connector.
Parameter
Number
Operation mode selection
79 Operation mode selection 0 0 to 4, 6, 7
(Refer to page 171)
0 As set in Pr. 79.
1 Network operation mode
Communication startup Network operation mode
340 0
mode selection Operation mode can be changed between
10
the PU operation mode and Network
operation mode from the operation panel.
The above parameters can be changed during a stop in any operation mode.
* This parameter can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 165)
(1) Specify operation mode at power-ON (Pr. 340)
Depending on the Pr. 79 and Pr. 340 settings, the operation mode at power-ON (reset) changes as described below.
Pr. 340 Pr. 79 Operation Mode at Power-ON, Power

Operation Mode Switching
Setting Setting Restoration, Reset
0
Switching among the External, PU and NET operation mode is
(initial External operation mode
enabled
value)
Switching between the External and NET operation mode is
2 External operation mode enabled
0
Switching to PU operation mode disabled
(initial
3, 4 External/PU combined mode Operation mode switching disabled
value)
Switching among the External, PU, and NET operation mode
6 External operation mode
is enabled while running.
External operation mode when X12 (MRS) signal Switching among the External, PU and Net operation mode is
ON enabled
7
External operation mode when X12 (MRS) signal Fixed to External operation mode (Forcibly switched to
OFF External operation mode.)
0 NET operation mode
1 PU operation mode
3, 4 External/PU combined mode
1 Same as when Pr. 340 = "0"
NET operation mode when X12 (MRS) signal ON
7 External operation mode when X12(MRS) signal
OFF
Switching between the PU and NET operation mode is
enabled
1 PU operation mode Same as when Pr. 340 = "0"
2 NET operation mode Fixed to NET operation mode
10
3, 4 External/PU combined mode Same as when Pr. 340 = "0"
Switching between the PU and NET operation mode is
enabled while running
7 External operation mode Same as when Pr. 340 = "0"
 Operation mode can not be directly changed between the PU operation mode and Network operation mode
 Operation mode can be changed between the PU operation mode and Network operation mode with key of the operation panel and X65 signal.
178
operation (Pr. 338, Pr. 339, Pr. 551)
When the RS-485 communication with the PU connector is used, the external start command and frequency command
can be valid. Command source in the PU operation mode can be selected.
From the communication device, parameter unit, etc. which have command source, parameter write or start command
can be executed. Parameter read or monitoring can be performed in any operation mode.
Name Description
Number Value Range
Communication operation 0 Start command source communication
338 0
command source 1 Start command source external
0 Frequency command source communication
1 Frequency command source external
Communication speed
339 0 Frequency command source external (Frequency command from
command source 2 communication is valid, frequency command from terminal 2 is
invalid)
2 PU connector is the command source when PU operation mode.
4 Operation panel is the command source when PU operation mode.
PU mode operation
Parameter unit automatic recognition
551 command source 9999
Normally, operation panel is the command source. When the
selection 9999
parameter unit is connected to the PU connector, PU is the
command source.
* Pr. 551 is always write-enabled.
(1) Selects the command source of the PU operation mode (Pr. 551)
Any of the operation panel, PU connector can be specified as the command source in the PU operation mode.
In the PU operation mode, set Pr. 551 to "2" when executing parameter write, start command or frequency command
during the RS-485 communication with PU connector.
PU...PU operation mode, NET...Network operation mode, —...without command source
Command Source
Pr. 551
Operation Parameter RS-485 Remarks
Setting
panel unit communication
Switching to NET operation mode
2 — PU PU
disabled
4 PU — NET
9999
PU PU NET
(initial value)
 The Modbus-RTU protocol cannot be used in the PU operation mode. When using the Modbus-RTU protocol, set Pr. 551  "2".
 When Pr. 551 = "9999", the priorities of the PU control source is parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07)  operation panel.
4
NOTE
 When performing the RS-485 communication with the PU connector when Pr. 551 = "9999", PU mode command
source does not automatically change to the PU connector.
PARAMETERS
 When Pr. 551 = "2" (PU mode PU connector), the operation mode cannot be switched to the Network operation mode.
 Changed setting value is valid when powering ON or resetting the inverter.
 The Modbus-RTU protocol cannot be used in the PU operation mode. Select Network operation mode (NET mode
command source).
 All of the operation mode indicator ( ) of the operation panel turns OFF when command source is not
operation panel.
179
(2) Controllability through communication

Controllability through communication in each operation mode is shown below.
Monitoring and parameter read can be performed from any operation regardless of operation mode.
Operation
External/PU External/PU
Operation Condition Mode PU External Combined Combined
NET Operation
Location (Pr. 551 Setting) Operation Operation Operation Mode 1 Operation Mode 2
(Pr. 79 = 3) (Pr. 79 = 4)
Item
Run command (start)     
Run command (stop)     
2 Running frequency
    
(PU connector) setting
Control by
Parameter write     
RS-485
Inverter reset     
communication
Run command (start)     
from PU
Run command (stop)     
connector
Other than the Running frequency
    
above setting
Parameter write     
Inverter reset     
Inverter reset     
Control circuit
Run command
external —     
(start, stop)
terminals
Frequency setting     
: Enabled, : Disabled, : Some are enabled
 As set in Pr.338 Communication operation command source and Pr. 339 Communication speed command source (Refer to page 179)
 At occurrence of RS-485 communication error, the inverter cannot be reset from the computer.
 Enabled only when stopped by the PU. At a PU stop, PS is displayed on the operation panel. As set in Pr. 75 PU stop selection. (Refer to page 161)
 Some parameters may be write-disabled according to the Pr. 77 Parameter write selection setting and operating status. (Refer to page 164)
 Some parameters are write-enabled independently of the operation mode and command source presence/absence. When Pr. 77 = "2", write is enabled.
(Refer to the parameter list on page 60) Parameter clear is disabled.
 Available with multi-speed setting and terminal 4-5 (valid when AU signal is ON).
(3) Operation at error occurrence
Operation External/PU External/PU

Mode Combined Combined
External
Error Definition PU Operation Operation Mode Operation Mode NET Operation
Condition Operation
1 2
(Pr. 551 setting) (Pr. 79 = 3) (Pr. 79 = 4)
Inverter
— Stop
fault
2 (PU connector)
PU 9999 (automatic Stop/continued 
disconnection of recognition)
the PU Other than the
Stop/continued
above
RS-485 Stop/
2 (PU connector) Continued Stop/continued —
communication continued
error of the PU Other than the
Continued Stop/continued
connector above
 Can be selected using Pr. 75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection.

 Can be selected using Pr. 122 PU communication check time interval.
 In the PU JOG operation mode, operation is always stopped when the PU is disconnected. Whether fault (E.PUE) occurrence is allowed or not is as set in
Pr. 75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection.
180
(4) Selection of control source in Network operation mode (Pr. 338, Pr. 339)
There are two control sources: operation command source, which controls the signals related to the inverter start
command and function selection, and speed command source, which controls signals related to frequency setting.
In Network operation mode, the commands from the external terminals and communication are as listed below.
Pr. 338 Communication operation
Operation 0: NET 1: External
command source
Location Remarks
Pr. 339 Communication speed
Selection 0: NET 1: External 2: External 0: NET 1: External 2: External
command source
Fixed Running frequency from
NET — NET NET — NET
function communication
(terminal- Terminal 2 — External — — External —
equivalent
Terminal 4 — External — External
function)
Low-speed operation
0 RL command/remote setting NET External NET External
clear
Pr. 59 = "0"
Middle-speed operation
(multi-speed)
1 RM command/remote setting NET External NET External
Pr. 59  "0"
function
(remote)
High-speed operation
2 RH command/remote setting NET External NET External
function
3 RT Second function selection NET External
4 AU Terminal 4 input selection — Combined — Combined
5 JOG Jog operation selection — External
7 OH External thermal relay input External
Pr. 59 = "0"
8 REX 15-speed selection NET External NET External
(multi-speed)
Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 setting
10 X10 Inverter run enable signal External

Selective function
PU operation external
12 X12 External
interlock
14 X14 PID control valid terminal NET External NET External
PU/External operation
16 X16 External
switchover
18 X18 V/F switchover NET External
Output stop Combined External Pr. 79 "7"
Pr. 79 = "7"
24 MRS When the X12
PU operation interlock External
signal is not
assigned
25 STOP Start self-holding selection — External
37 X37 Traverse function selection NET External
60 STF Forward rotation command NET External
61 STR Reverse rotation command NET External
62 RES Inverter reset External
PU/NET operation
65 X65 External
switchover
External/NET operation 4
66 X66 External
switchover
Command source
67 X67 External
switchover
PARAMETERS
[Explanation of table]
External : Command is valid only from control terminal.
NET : Command only from communication is valid.
Combined : Command from both control terminal and communication is valid.
— : Command from either of control terminal and communication is invalid.
REMARKS
 The command source of communication is as set in Pr. 551 .
 The Pr. 338 and Pr. 339 settings can be changed while the inverter is running when Pr. 77 = "2". Note that the setting change is
reflected after the inverter has stopped. Until the inverter has stopped, communication operation command source and
communication speed command source before the setting change are valid.
181
(5) Switching of command source by external signal (X67)

In the Network operation mode, the command source switching signal (X67) can be used to switch the start command
source and speed command source.
 Set "67" to any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection) to assign the X67 signal to the control terminal.
When the X67 signal is OFF, the start command source and speed command source are control terminal.
Speed Command
X67 Signal State Start Command Source
Source
No signal
assignment According to Pr. 338 According to Pr. 339
ON
OFF Command is valid only from control terminal.
REMARKS
 The ON/OFF state of the X67 signal is reflected only during a stop. It is reflected after a stop when the terminal is switched
while the inverter is running.
 When the X67 signal is OFF, a reset via communication is disabled.
NOTE
182
Communication operation and setting
4.19 Communication operation and setting

Initial setting of computer link
Pr. 117 to Pr. 124 186
Communication operation from PU communication (PU connector)
connector Modbus-RTU communication Pr. 117, Pr. 118, Pr. 120, Pr.
203
specifications 122, Pr. 343, Pr. 502, Pr. 549
Restrictions on parameter write Communication EEPROM write
Pr. 342 190
through communication selection
4.19.1 Wiring and configuration of PU connector

Using the PU connector, you can perform communication operation from a personal computer, etc.
When the PU connector is connected with a personal, FA or other computer by a communication cable, a user program can
run and monitor the inverter or read and write to parameters.
(1) PU connector pin-outs
Pin Number Name Description
Earth (ground)
1) SG
3) RDA Inverter receive+
Inverter 4) SDB Inverter send-
(receptacle side)
5) SDA Inverter send+
viewed from bottom
6) RDB Inverter receive-
8) to 1) Earth (ground)
7) SG
NOTE
 Pins No. 2 and 8 provide power to the parameter unit. Do not use these pins for RS-485 communication.
 When making RS-485 communication between the FR-D700 series, FR-E500 series and FR-S500 series, incorrect
connection of pins No.2 and No.8 (parameter unit power supply) of the above PU connector may result in the inverter
malfunction or failure.
 When multiple inverters are connected using pins No.2 When pins No.2 and No.8 are connected
and No.8, power is provided from the inverter which is
powered ON to the inverters which are powered OFF in ON Protective OFF OFF
case inverters which are powered ON and OFF are mixed. circuit
Inverter operation Inverter Inverter
In such case, a protective circuit of the inverter, which is PU PU PU
(shut-off)
ON, functions to stop communication. connector connector connector
When connecting multiple inverters for RS-485
communication, make sure to disconnect cables from Communication
No.2 and No.8 so that pins No.2 and No.8 are not stop
connected between inverters. 4
Power supply
 When using the RS-485 converter which receives power
from the inverter, make sure that power is provided from one inverter only. (Refer to the figure below.)
PARAMETERS
Computer Station 1 Station 2 Station n

RS-232C Inverter Inverter Inverter
connector PU PU PU
connector connector connector
RS-232C RS-485
converter
Distributor
Terminating resistor
Connect pins No.2 and No.8 Do not connect pins No.2 and No.8
of one inverter and a converter only. of the other inverters.
Power supply
 Do not connect the PU connector to the computer's LAN board, FAX modem socket or telephone modular connector.
The product could be damaged due to differences in electrical specifications.
183
(2) PU connector communication system configuration

Connection of a computer to the inverter (1:1 connection)
Station 0 Computer Station 0
Inverter Computer
Inverter RS-232C Inverter
PU connector
PU
FR-PU07 PU
connector RS-485 RS-232C Maximum connector
interface/terminals connector cable 15m
RS-232C RS-485
RJ-45 connector converter
RJ-45 RJ-45
Communication cable 1) connector connector
Communication cable 1) Communication cable 1)
Combination of computer and multiple inverters (1:n connection)

Station n
Computer Station 0 Station 1 (max. 32 inverters)
PU PU PU
RS-485
interface/terminals
Distributor
Terminating resistor *
Communication cable 1) RJ-45 connector
Computer
RS-232C
Connector Station 1 Station 2 Station n
RS-232C Maximum Inverter Inverter Inverter
cable 15m PU PU PU
RS-232C RS-485
converter
Distributor
Terminating resistor *
Communication cable 1) RJ-45 connector
* The inverters may be affected by reflection depending on the transmission speed or transmission distance. If this reflection hinders communication, provide a
terminating resistor. If the PU connector is used to make a connection, use a distributor since a terminating resistor cannot be fitted. Connect the terminating
resistor to only the inverter remotest from the computer. (Terminating resistor: 100)
REMARKS
 Refer to the following when fabricating the cable on the user side.
Examples of products available on the market (as of January 2010)
Product Type Maker
SGLPEV-T (Cat5e/300m)
1) Communication cable Mitsubishi Cable Industries, Ltd.
24AWG 4P
2) RJ-45 connector 5-554720-3 Tyco Electronics Corporation
 Do not use pins No. 2, 8 of the communication cable. (Refer to page 183)
184
(3) Connection with RS-485 computer

Wiring of one RS-485 computer and one inverter
Cable connection and signal direction Inverter

Computer side terminals *1 Communication cable PU connector
Receive data SDA
Receive data SDB
Send data RDA
Send data RDB
0.2mm2 or more
Signal ground SG
Wiring of one RS-485 computer and "n" (multiple) inverters

Cable connection and signal direction
Computer *1
Communication cable
Receive
Send Terminating
resistor*2
RDB
RDA
RDB
RDA
RDB
RDA
SDB
SDA
SDB
SDA
SDB
SDA
SG SG SG SG
Station 1 Station 2 Station n
 Make connection in accordance with the Instruction Manual of the computer to be used with.
Fully check the terminal numbers of the computer since these vary with the model.
 The inverters may be affected by reflection depending on the transmission speed or transmission distance. If this reflection hinders
communication, provide a terminating resistor. If the PU connector is used to make a connection, use a distributor since a terminating
resistor cannot be fitted. Connect the terminating resistor to only the inverter remotest from the computer. (Terminating resistor: 100)
NOTE
 Do not use pins No. 2, 8 of the communication cable. (Refer to page 183)
 When making RS-485 communication among the FR-D700 series, FR-E500 series and FR-S500 series, incorrect
connection of pins No.2 and 8 (parameter unit power supply) of the above PU connector may result in the inverter
malfunction or failure. (Refer to page 183)
(4) Two-wire type connection

If the computer is 2-wire type, a connection from the inverter can be changed to 2-wire type by passing wires across
4
reception terminals and transmission terminals of the PU connector pin.
Computer Inverter
PARAMETERS
SDA
SDB
Transmission enable
RDA
RDB
Reception enable Pass a wire
SG SG
REMARKS
 A program should be created so that transmission is disabled (receiving state) when the computer is not sending and reception
is disabled (sending state) during sending to prevent the computer from receiving its own data.
 The passed wiring length should be as short as possible.
185

(Pr. 117 to Pr. 120, Pr. 123, Pr. 124, Pr. 549)
Used to perform required settings for RS-485 communication between the inverter and personal computer.
 Use PU connector of the inverter for communication.
 You can perform parameter setting, monitoring, etc. using Mitsubishi inverter protocol or Modbus-RTU protocol.
 To make communication between the personal computer and inverter, setting of the communication specifications
must be made to the inverter in advance.
Data communication cannot be made if the initial settings are not made or there is any setting error.
Parameter Initial
Number Value
Inverter station number specification
PU communication 0 to 31 (0 to 247)
117 0 Set the inverter station numbers when two or more
station number 
inverters are connected to one personal computer.
Communication speed
The setting value X 100 equals to the
118 PU communication speed 192 48, 96, 192, 384
communication speed.
Example)19200bps if 192
Stop bit length Data length
0 1 bit
PU communication stop 8 bits
119 1 1 2 bits
bit length
10 1 bit
7 bits
11 2 bits
0 Without parity check
PU communication parity
120 2 1 With odd parity check
check
2 With even parity check
Set the waiting time between data transmission to
PU communication 0 to 150ms
123 9999 the inverter and response.
waiting time setting
9999 Set with communication data.
0 Without CR/LF
PU communication CR/LF
124 1 1 With CR
selection
2 With CR/LF
0 Mitsubishi inverter (computer link operation) protocol
549 Protocol selection 0
1 Modbus-RTU protocol
 When "1" (Modbus-RTU protocol) is set in Pr. 549, the setting range within parenthesis is applied.
NOTE
 Always reset the inverter after making the initial settings of the parameters. After you have changed the
communication-related parameters, communication cannot be made until the inverter is reset.
186
4.19.3 Operation selection at communication error occurrence (Pr. 121, Pr. 122, Pr. 502)
You can select the inverter operation when a communication line error occurs during RS-485 communication from the
PU connector.

Name Description
Number Value Range
Number of retries at data receive error occurrence. If the number of
consecutive errors exceeds the permissible value, the inverter will
Number of PU 0 to 10
come to trip (depends on Pr. 502).
121 communication 1
Valid only Mitsubishi inverter (computer link operation) protocol
retries If a communication error occurs, the inverter will not come to trip.
9999
(NET operation mode at initial value)
RS-485 communication can be made. Note that a communication
fault (E.PUE) occurs as soon as the inverter is switched to the
0
operation mode with command source. (NET operation mode at
PU communication initial value)
122
9999 Communication check (signal loss detection) time interval
check time interval 0.1 to
If a no-communication state persists for longer than the permissible
999.8s
time, the inverter will come to trip (depends on Pr. 502).
9999 No communication check (signal loss detection)
At fault At fault
Indication Fault output
occurrence removal
Stop
Stop mode selection 0 Coasts to stop E.PUE Output
(E.PUE)
502 at communication 0 Decelerates to After stop Output after Stop
1
error stop E.PUE stop (E.PUE)
Automatic
Decelerates to After stop
2 Without output restart
stop E.PUE
functions
(1) Retry count setting (Pr.121)

Set the permissible number of retries at data receive error occurrence. (Refer to page 195 for data receive error for retry)
When data receive errors occur consecutively and exceed the permissible number of retries set, an inverter trips (E.PUE)
and a motor stops (as set in Pr. 502).
When "9999" is set, an inverter fault is not provided even if data receive error occurs but an alarm signal (LF) is output.
For the terminal used for the LF signal output, assign the function by setting "98 (positive logic) or 198 (negative logic)" in
Pr. 190, Pr. 192 or Pr. 197 (output terminal function selection).
Example: PU connector communication, Pr. 121 = "1" (initial value)
Computer
4
Fault (E. PUE)
ENQ
ENQ
Wrong Wrong
Inverter
ACK
NAK
NAK
Inverter
Computer
PARAMETERS
Reception error Reception error
Example: PU connector communication, Pr. 121 = "9999"

Computer
ENQ
ENQ
ENQ
Inverter Wrong Wrong Normal

ACK
NAK
NAK
ACK
Inverter
Computer
Reception Reception
error error
LF OFF ON OFF ON OFF
REMARKS
 Pr. 121 is valid only when Mitsubishi inverter (computer link operation) protocol is selected. Pr. 121 is not valid when Modbus-
RTU communication protocol is selected.
187
(2) Signal loss detection (Pr.122)

If a signal loss (communication stop) is detected between the inverter and computer as a result of a signal loss detection,
a communication fault (E.PUE) occurs and the inverter trips. (as set in Pr. 502).
When the setting is "9999" (initial value), communication check (signal loss detection) is not made.
When the setting value is "0", RS-485 communication can be made. However, a communication fault (E.PUE) occurs as
soon as the inverter is switched to the operation mode (Network operation mode in the initial setting) with the control.
A signal loss detection is made when the setting is any of "0.1s to 999.8s". To make a signal loss detection, it is necessary
to send data (refer to Mitsubishi inverter protocol control code (page 194), Modbus-RTU communication protocol (page
204)) from the computer within the communication check time interval. (The inverter makes communication check
(clearing of communication check counter) regardless of the station number setting of the data sent from the master).
Communication check is made from the first communication in the operation mode with control source valid (Network
operation mode in the initial setting).
Example: PU connector communication, Pr. 122 = "0.1 to 999.8s"
Operation mode External PU
Computer
ENQ
Inverter
Inverter
Computer
Fault (E.PUE)
Check start
Pr. 122
Communication
check counter
Time
CAUTION
Always set the communication check time interval before starting operation to prevent hazardous conditions.
Data communication is not started automatically but is made only once when the computer provides a
communication request. If communication is disabled during operation due to signal cable breakage etc., the
inverter cannot be stopped. When the communication check time interval has elapsed, the inverter trips
(E.PUE).
The inverter can be coasted to a stop by turning ON its RES signal or by switching power OFF.
If communication is broken due to signal cable breakage, computer fault, etc, the inverter does not detect
such a fault. This should be fully noted.
188
(3) Stop operation selection at occurrence of communication fault (Pr. 502)

Stop operation when retry count exceeds (Mitsubishi inverter protocol only) or signal loss detection error occurs can be selected.
Operation at fault occurrence
Pr. 502 Setting Operation Indication Fault Output
0 (initial value) Coasts to stop E. PUE lit Provided
1 Provided after stop
Decelerates to stop E. PUE lit after stop
2 Not provided
Operation at fault removal
Pr.502 Setting Operation Indication Fault Output
0 (initial value)
Kept stopped E. PUE Kept provided
1
2 Automatic restart functions Normal display Not provided
Pr. 502 setting "0" (initial value) Pr. 502 setting "1"
Fault occurrence Fault removal Fault occurrence Fault removal
Communication Communication
fault OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF
fault
Output frequency
Output frequency
Motor coasting
Decelerates to stop
Time Time
Fault display Fault display
(E.PUE) Display (E.PUE) Display
Fault output Fault output
(ALM) OFF ON (ALM) OFF ON
Pr. 502 setting "2"
Fault occurrence Fault removal

Communication
fault OFF ON OFF
Output frequency
Decelerates
to stop
Time
Fault display
(E.PUE) Display
Fault output
(ALM) OFF
REMARKS 4
 The fault output indicates fault output signal (ALM signal) or alarm bit output.
 When the setting was made to provide a fault output, the fault description is stored into the faults history. (The fault description
PARAMETERS
is written to the faults history when a fault output is provided.)

When no fault output is provided, the fault record overwrites the fault indication of the faults history temporarily, but is not
stored.
After the fault is removed, the fault indication returns to the ordinary monitor, and the faults history returns to the preceding fault
indication.
 When the Pr. 502 setting is "1 or 2", the deceleration time is the ordinary deceleration time setting (e.g. Pr. 8, Pr. 44, Pr. 45). In
addition, acceleration time for restart is the normal acceleration time (e.g. Pr. 7, Pr. 44).
 When "2" is set in Pr. 502, run command/speed command at restart follows the command before an fault occurrence.
 When "2" is set in Pr. 502 at occurrence of a communication error and the error is removed during deceleration, the inverter
accelerates again at that point.
Pr. 7 Acceleration time, Pr. 8 Deceleration time Refer to page 99
189
4.19.4 Communication EEPROM write selection (Pr. 342)
When parameter write is performed from RS-485 communication with the inverter PU connector, parameters storage
device can be changed from EEPROM + RAM to RAM only. Set when a frequent parameter change is necessary.
Parameter
Number
Parameter values written by communication are
0
Communication EEPROM written to the EEPROM and RAM.
342 0
write selection Parameter values written by communication are
1
written to RAM.
 When changing the parameter values frequently, set "1" in Pr. 342 to write them to the RAM only.
The life of the EEPROM will be shorter if parameter write is performed frequently with the setting unchanged from "0 (initial
value)" (EEPROM write).
REMARKS
 When "1" (write to RAM only) is set in Pr. 342, powering OFF the inverter will erase the changed parameter values. Therefore,
the parameter values available when power is switched ON again are the values stored in EEPROM previously.
190
4.19.5 Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link communication)
You can perform parameter setting, monitoring, etc. from the PU connector of the inverter using the Mitsubishi inverter
protocol (computer link communication).
(1) Communication
The communication specifications are given below.
Related
Item Description
Parameter
Communication protocol Mitsubishi protocol (computer link) Pr. 549
Conforming standard EIA-485 (RS-485) —
Number of connectable devices 1:N (maximum 32 units), setting is 0 to 31 stations Pr. 117
Communication
PU connector Selected among 4800/9600/19200/38400bps Pr. 118
speed
Control procedure Asynchronous —
Communication method Half-duplex —
Character system ASCII (7 bits or 8 bits can be selected) Pr. 119
Start bit 1 bit —
Stop bit length 1 bit or 2 bits can be selected Pr. 119
Communication
Parity check Check (with even or odd parity) or no check can be selected Pr. 120
Error check Sum code check —
Terminator CR/LF (presence/absence selectable) Pr. 124
Waiting time setting Selectable between presence and absence Pr. 123
(2) Communication procedure
 Data communication between the computer and

When data is read
Computer inverter is made in the following procedure.
(Data flow)
*2 1) Request data is sent from the computer to
Inverter 1) 4) 5)
Time the inverter. (The inverter will not send data
Inverter 2) 3) unless requested.)
*1
(Data flow) 2) After waiting for the waiting time
When data is written
Computer
3) The inverter sends reply data to the computer
in response to the computer request.
4) After waiting for the inverter data processing
time
5) Answer from the computer in response to
reply data 3) of the inverter is transmitted.
(Even if 5) is not sent, subsequent
communication is made properly.)
4
 If a data error is detected and a retry must be made, execute retry operation with the user program. The inverter comes to trip if the number of consecutive
retries exceeds the parameter setting.
PARAMETERS
 On receipt of a data error occurrence, the inverter returns reply data 3) to the computer again. The inverter comes to trip if the number of consecutive data
errors reaches or exceeds the parameter setting.
191
(3) Communication operation presence/absence and data format types

Data communication between the computer and inverter is made in ASCII code (hexadecimal code).
Communication operation presence/absence and data format types are as follows:
Run Operation Multi Parameter Inverter Parameter
No. Operation Monitor
Command Frequency command Write Reset Read
Communication request is sent to the
1) inverter in accordance with the user A1 A, A2 A3 A, A2 A B B
program in the computer.
2) Inverter data processing time Present Present Present Present Present Present Present
No error E, E1, E2,
Reply data from the (Request C C C1 C C E, E2
E3
3) inverter (Data 1) is accepted)
With error
checked for error)
(Request D D D D D D D
rejected)
4) Computer processing delay time 10ms or more
Answer from No error
Absent Absent
computer in response (No inverter Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent (C)
(C) (C)
5) to reply data 3). processing)
With error
(Data 3) is checked
(Inverter outputs Absent Absent F Absent Absent F F
for error) 3) again.)
 In the communication request data from the computer to the inverter, 10ms or more is also required after "no data error (ACK)". (Refer to page 194)
 Reply from the inverter to the inverter reset request can be selected. (Refer to page 198)
 When any of "0.01 to 9998" is set in Pr. 37 and "01" in instruction code, HFF sets data format to A2 or E2. In addition, data format is always A2 and E2
for read or write of Pr. 37.
 At mode error, and data range error, C1 data contains an error code. (Refer to page 202) Except for those errors, the error is returned with data format
D.
Data writing format

Communication request data from the computer to the inverter 1)
Number of Characters
Format
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Inverter
ENQ Instruction Sum
A station  Data 
 code check
number
Inverter
ENQ Instruction Sum
A1 station  Data 
number
Inverter
ENQ Instruction Sum
A2 station  Data 
number
Inverter Send Receive
ENQ Instruction Sum
A3 station  data data Data1 Data2 
number type type
Reply data from the inverter to the computer 3) (No data error detected)
Format
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Inverter
ACK
C station 

number
Inverter Send Receive
STX Error Error ETX Sum
C1 station data data Data1 Data2 
 code 1code 2  check
number type type
Reply data from the inverter to the computer 3) (With data error)
Format
1 2 3 4 5
Inverter
NAK Error
D station 
 code
number
 Indicate a control code
 Specify the inverter station numbers between H00 and H1F (stations 0 to 31) in hexadecimal.
 Set waiting time. When the Pr. 123 PU communication waiting time setting is other than "9999", create the communication request data without "waiting time"
in the data format. (The number of characters decreases by 1.)
 CR, LF code
When data is transmitted from the computer to the inverter, codes CR (carriage return) and LF (line feed) are automatically set at the end of a data group
on some computers. In this case, setting must also be made on the inverter according to the computer. Whether the CR and LF codes will be present or
absent can be selected using Pr. 124 PU communication CR/LF selection.
192
Data reading format

Communication request data from the computer to the inverter 1)
Format
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
ENQ Inverter Sum
B Instruction code  
 station number check
Reply data from the inverter to the computer 3) (No data error detected)
Format
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
STX Inverter ETX Sum
E Read data 
 station number  check
E1 Read data 
E2 Read data 
Format
1 2 3 4 to 23 24 25 26 27
E3 Read data (Inverter model information) 
Reply data from the inverter to the computer 3) (With data error)
Format
1 2 3 4 5
NAK Inverter Error
D 
 station number code
Send data from the computer to the inverter 5)

Format
1 2 3 4
C
ACK Inverter
(Without 
 station number
data error)
F
NAK Inverter
(With data 
 station number
error)
 Indicate a control code
 Specify the inverter station numbers between H00 and H1F (stations 0 to 31) in hexadecimal.
 Set waiting time. When the Pr. 123 PU communication waiting time setting is other than 9999, create the communication request data without "waiting time"
in the data format. (The number of characters decreases by 1.)
 CR, LF code
When data is transmitted from the computer to the inverter, codes CR (carriage return) and LF (line feed) are automatically set at the end of a data group
on some computers. In this case, setting must also be made on the inverter according to the computer. Whether the CR and LF codes will be present or
absent can be selected using Pr. 124 PU communication CR/LF selection.
4
PARAMETERS
193
(4) Data definitions

1) Control code
Signal ASCII Code Description

STX H02 Start of Text (Start of data)
ETX H03 End of Text (End of data)
ENQ H05 Enquiry (Communication request)
ACK H06 Acknowledge (No data error detected)
LF H0A Line Feed
CR H0D Carriage Return
NAK H15 Negative Acknowledge (Data error detected)
2) Inverter station number
Specify the station number of the inverter which communicates with the computer.
3) Instruction code
Specify the processing request, for example, operation or monitoring, given by the computer to the inverter. Hence, the
inverter can be run and monitored in various ways by specifying the instruction code as appropriate. (Refer to page 60)
4) Data
Indicates the data such as frequency and parameters transferred to and from the inverter. The definitions and ranges of
set data are determined in accordance with the instruction codes. (Refer to page 60)
5) Waiting time
Specify the waiting time between the receipt of data at the inverter from the computer and the transmission of reply data.
Set the waiting time in accordance with the response time of the computer between 0 and 150ms in 10ms increments.
(example: 1 = 10ms, 2 = 20ms).
Computer Inverter data processing time

= Waiting time + Data check time
Inverter (Setting 10ms) (About 10 to 30ms, which
depends on the instruction code)
Inverter
Computer
REMARKS
 When the Pr. 123 PU communication waiting time setting setting is other than "9999", create the communication request data
without "waiting time" in the data format. (The number of characters decreases by 1.)
 The data check time changes depending on the instruction code. (Refer to page 195)
6) Sum check code

Sum check code is 2-digit ASCII (hexadecimal) representing the lower 1 byte (8 bits) of the sum (binary) derived from
the checked ASCII data.
(Example 1) Sum
*Waiting
ENQ Station Instruction Data check

Computer Inverter
time
number code code

0 1 E 1 1 0 7 A D F 4 Binary code
ASCII Code H05 H30 H31 H45 H31 H31 H30 H37 H41 H44 H46 H34
H30+H31+H45+H31+H31+H30+H37+H41+H44
=H1F4
Sum
∗ When the Pr. 123 Waiting time setting "9999", create the communication request
=
data without "waiting time" in the data format. (The number of characters decreases by 1.)
(Example 2) Sum
STX Station ETX check
Inverter Computer number Data read
code
0 1 1 7 7 0 3 0 Binary code
ASCII Code H02 H30 H31 H31 H37 H37 H30 H03 H33 H30
H30+H31+H31+H37+H37+H30
= H130
Sum
194
7) Error code
If any error is found in the data received by the inverter, its definition is sent back to the computer together with the NAK
code.
Error
Error Item Error Description Inverter Operation
Code
The number of errors detected consecutively in communication request
H0 Computer NAK error
data from the computer is greater than allowed number of retries.
H1 Parity error The parity check result does not match the specified parity
The sum check code in the computer does not match that of the data Brought to trip (E. PUE)
H2 Sum check error
received by the inverter. if error occurs
The data received by the inverter has a grammatical mistake. continuously more than
H3 Protocol error Alternatively, data reception is not completed within the predetermined the allowable number of
time. CR or LF is not as set in the parameter. retry times.
H4 Framing error The stop bit length differs from the initial setting.
New data has been sent by the computer before the inverter completes
H5 Overrun error
receiving the preceding data.
H6 — — —
Does not accept
H7 Character error The character received is invalid (other than 0 to 9, A to F, control code). received data but is not
brought to trip.
H8 — — —
H9 — — —
Parameter write was attempted in other than the computer link operation
HA Mode error mode, when operation command source is not selected or during inverter
operation. Does not accept
Instruction code received data but alarm
HB The specified command does not exist.
error does not occur.
Invalid data has been specified for parameter write, frequency setting,
HC Data range error
etc.
HD — — —
HE — — —
HF — — —
(5) Response time

Data sending time (refer to the following formula)
Inverter data processing time = waiting time + Data check time
Computer (Setting 10ms) (depends on the instruction
Inverter code (see the following table))
Time
Inverter 10ms or more necessary
Computer Data sending time (refer to the following formula)
[Formula for data sending time] 4

1 Communication
Number of data characters
Communication speed (bps)   (Total number of bits) = data sending time (s)
(Refer to page 192)
(Refer to the following.)
PARAMETERS
Communication specifications Data check time

Number of
Name Item Check Time
Bits
1 bits Various monitors, operation command,
Stop bit length < 12ms
2 bits frequency setting (RAM)
7 bits Parameter read/write, frequency setting
Data length < 30ms
8 bits (EEPROM)
Present 1 bits Parameter clear/all clear < 5s
Parity check
Absent 0 Reset command No answer
In addition to the above, 1 start bit is necessary.
Minimum number of total bits ................. 9 bits
Maximum number of total bits ................12 bits
195
(6) Instructions for the program

1) When data from the computer has any error, the inverter does not accept that data. Hence, in the user program, always
insert a retry program for data error.
2) All data communication, for example, run command or monitoring, are started when the computer gives a communication
request. The inverter does not return any data without the computer's request. Hence, design the program so that the
computer gives a data read request for monitoring, etc. as required.
3) Program example
To change the operation mode to computer link operation
Programming example of Microsoft® Visual C++® (Ver.6.0)
#include <stdio.h>
#include <windows.h>
void main(void){
HANDLE hCom; //Communication handle
DCB hDcb; //Structure for communication setting
COMMTIMEOUTS hTim; // Structure for time out setting
char szTx[0x10]; // Send buffer

char szRx[0x10]; // Receive buffer
char szCommand[0x10];// Command
int nTx,nRx; // For buffer size storing
int nSum; // For sum code calculation
BOOL bRet;
int nRet;
int i;
//Opens COM1 port

hCom = CreateFile ("COM1", (GENERIC_READ | GENERIC_WRITE), 0, NULL, OPEN_EXISTING, FILE_ATTRIBUTE_NORMAL, NULL);
if (hCom != NULL) {
//Makes a communication setting of COM1 port
GetCommState(hCom,&hDcb); // Retrieves current communication information
hDcb.DCBlength = sizeof(DCB); // Structure size setting
hDcb.BaudRate = 19200; // Communication speed=19200bps
hDcb.ByteSize = 8; // Data length=8bit
hDcb.Parity = 2; // Even parity
hDcb.StopBits = 2; // Stop bit=2bit
bRet = SetCommState(hCom,&hDcb); // Sets the changed communication data
if (bRet == TRUE) {
// Makes a time out setting of COM1 port
Get CommTimeouts(hCom,&hTim); // Obtains the current time out value
hTim.WriteTotalTimeoutConstant = 1000; // Write time out 1s
hTim.ReadTotalTimeoutConstant = 1000; // Read time out 1s
SetCommTimeouts(hCom,&hTim); // Changed time out value setting
// Sets the command to switch the operation mode of the station 1 inverter to the Network operation mode 
sprintf(szCommand,"01FB10000"); // Send data (NET operation write)
nTx = strlen(szCommand); //Send data size
// Generates sum code
nSum = 0; // Initialization of sum data
for (i = 0;i < nTx;i++) {
nSum += szCommand[i]; // Calculates sum code
nSum &= (0xff); // Masks data
}
// Generates send data

memset(szTx,0,sizeof(szTx)); // Initialization of send buffer
memset(szRx,0,sizeof(szRx)); // Initialization of receive buffer
sprintf(szTx,"\5%s%02X",szCommand,nSum);// ENQ code+send data+sum code
nTx = 1 + nTx + 2; // Number of ENQ code+number of send data+number of sum code
nRet = WriteFile(hCom,szTx,nTx,&nTx,NULL);
// Sending 
if(nRet != 0) {
nRet = ReadFile(hCom,szRx,sizeof(szRx),&nRx,NULL);
// Receiving 
if(nRet != 0) {
// Displays the receive data 
for(i = 0;i < nRx;i++) {
printf("%02X ",(BYTE)szRx[i]);// Consol output of receive data
// Displays ASCII coder in hexadecimal. Displays 30 when "0"
}
printf("\n\r");
}
}
}
CloseHandle(hCom); // Close communication port
}
}
196
General flowchart
Port open
Communication setting
Time out setting
Send data processing

Data setting
Sum code calculation
Data transmission
Receive data waiting
Receive data processing

Data retrieval
Screen display
CAUTION
Always set the communication check time interval before starting operation to prevent hazardous conditions.
Data communication is not started automatically but is made only once when the computer provides a
communication request. If communication is disabled during operation due to signal cable breakage etc., the
inverter cannot be stopped. When the communication check time interval has elapsed, the inverter will come
to trip (E.PUE).
The inverter can be coasted to a stop by switching ON its RES signal or by switching power OFF.
If communication is broken due to signal cable breakage, computer fault etc., the inverter does not detect
such a fault. This should be fully noted.
4
PARAMETERS
197
(7) Setting items and set data

After completion of parameter settings, set the instruction codes and data then start communication from the computer to
allow various types of operation control and monitoring.
Number of
Read/ Instruction
Item Data Definition Data Digits
Write Code
(Format)
4 digits
Read H7B H0000: Network operation
(B, E/D)
Operation mode H0001: External operation
4 digits
Write HFB H0002: PU operation
(A, C/D)
H0000 to HFFFF: Output frequency in 0.01Hz increments
Speed increments 1/0.001 (when Pr. 37 = 0.01 to 9998)
4 digits
Output When "0.01 to 9998" is set in Pr. 37 and "01" in instruction code
(B, E/D),
frequency Read H6F HFF, the increments change to 0.001 and the data format is E2.
6 digits
/speed When "100" is set in Pr. 52, the monitor value is different
(B, E2/D)
depending on whether the inverter is at a stop or running.
(Refer to page 131)
Output H0000 to HFFFF: Output current (hexadecimal) in 0.01A 4 digits
Read H70
current increments (B, E/D)
Output H0000 to HFFFF: Output voltage (hexadecimal) in 0.1V 4 digits
Read H71
voltage increments (B, E/D)
4 digits
H0000 to HFFFF: Monitor data selected in instruction code HF3
Special (B, E/D),
Read H72 When "0.01 to 9998" is set in Pr. 37 and "01" in instruction code
monitor 6 digits
Monitor
HFF, the data format is E2.

(B, E2/D)
2 digits
Special Read H73
H01 to H40: Monitor selection data (B, E1/D)
monitor
Refer to the special monitor No. table (page 200) 2 digits
Selection No. Write HF3
(A1, C/D)
H0000 to HFFFF: Two latest fault records
b15 b8b7 b0
H74 First fault in past Latest fault
Fault H75 Third fault in past Second fault in past 4 digits

Read H74 to H77
description (B, E/D)
H76 Fifth fault in past Fourth fault in past
H77 Seventh fault in past Sixth fault in past
Refer to the alarm data table (page 201)

Run command 4 digits
Write HF9
(expansion) Control input commands such as forward rotation signal (STF) (A, C/D)
and reverse rotation signal (STR). (For details, refer to page 201) 2 digits
Run command Write HFA
(A1, C/D)
Inverter status
4 digits
monitor Read H79 Monitor the states of the output signals such as forward rotation,
(B, E/D)
(expansion) reverse rotation and inverter running (RUN). (For details, refer to
Inverter status page 201) 2 digits
Read H7A
monitor (B, E1/D)
Set frequency Read set frequency/speed from RAM or EEPROM.
H6D 4 digits
(RAM) H0000 to HFFFF: Set frequency in 0.01Hz increments
(B, E/D),
Read Speed increments 1/0.001 (when Pr. 37 = 0.01 to 9998)
Set frequency 6 digits
H6E When "0.01 to 9998" is set in Pr. 37 and "01" in instruction code
(EEPROM) (B, E2/D)
HFF, the increments change to 0.001 and the data format is E2.
Set frequency Write set frequency/speed to RAM or EEPROM.
HED
(RAM) H0000 to H9C40 (0 to 400.00Hz): Frequency increments 0.01Hz
4 digits
Speed increments 1/0.001 (when Pr. 37 = 0.01 to 9998)
(A, C/D),
Write When "0.01 to 9998" is set in Pr. 37 and "01" in instruction code
Set frequency 6 digits
HEE HFF, the increments change to 0.001 and the data format is A2.
(RAM, EEPROM) (A2, C/D)
 To change the set frequency consecutively, write data to the
inverter RAM. (instruction code: HED)
Refer to page 192 for data format (A, A1, A2, A3, B, C, C1, D, E, E1, E2, E3)
198
Number of
Read/ Instruction
Item Data Definition Data Digits
Write Code
(Format)
H9696: resets the inverter
4 digits
 As the inverter is reset at start of communication by the computer,
(A, C/D)
the inverter cannot send reply data back to the computer.
Inverter reset Write HFD
H9966: resets the inverter
4 digits
 When data is sent normally, ACK is returned to the computer
(A, D)
and then the inverter is reset.
Faults history 4 digits
Write HF4 H9696: clears the faults history as a batch
batch clear (A, C/D)
All parameters return to the initial values.
Whether to clear communication parameters or not can be
selected according to data. (: Clear, : Not clear)
Refer to page 60 for parameter clear, all clear, and communication
parameters.
Clear Type Data Communication Pr.
H9696 
Parameter clear
Parameter clear H5A5A  4 digits
Write HFC
All clear H9966  (A, C/D)
All parameter clear
H55AA 
When clear is executed for H9696 or H9966, communication-
related parameter settings also return to the initial values. When
resuming operation, set the parameters again.
Executing clear will clear the instruction code HEC, HF3, and HFF
settings. During password lock, only all parameter clear is
available with H9966 and H55AA.
4 digits
(B, E/D),
Read H00 to H63 Refer to the instruction code (Refer to page 60) and write and/or
6 digits
read parameter values as required.
(B, E2/D)
Parameter When setting Pr. 100 and later, link parameter extended setting
4 digits
must be set.
(A, C/D),
Write H80 to HE3 Data format of Pr. 37 read and write is E2 and A2
6 digits
(A2, C/D)
Parameter description is changed according to the H00 to H09 2 digits
Read H7F
Link parameter setting. (B, E1/D)
extended setting For details of the settings, refer to the parameter instruction code 2 digits
Write HFF
(Refer to page 60). (A1, C/D)
Setting calibration parameter
H00: Frequency  2 digits
Read H6C
Second parameter H01: Parameter-set analog value (B, E1/D)
changing H02: Analog value input from terminal
(instruction code  Refer to the list of calibration parameters on the next page for
2 digits
4
HFF = 1, 9) Write HEC calibration parameters.
 The gain frequency can also be written using Pr. 125 (instruction code: (A1, C/D)
H99) or Pr. 126 (instruction code: H9A).
PARAMETERS
Write/ Available for writing 2 commands, and monitoring 2 items for 10 digits
Multi command HF0
Read reading data (Refer to page 202 for detail) (A3, C1/D)
Reading inverter model in ASCII code.
Inverter "H20" (blank code) is set for blank area 20 digits
Read H7C
model Example of FR-D740 (B, E3/D)
Inverter model monitor
H46, H52, H2D, H44, H37, H34, H30, H20 . H20

Reading inverter capacity in ASCII code.
Data is read in increments of 0.1kW, and rounds down to 0.01kW
increments
6 digits
Capacity Read H7D "H20" (blank code) is set for blank area
(B, E2/D)
Example
0.4K ................." 4" (H20, H20, H20, H20, H20, H34)
0.75K ..............." 7" (H20, H20, H20, H20, H20, H37)
Refer to page 192 for data format (A, A1, A2, A3, B, C, C1, D, E, E1, E2, E3)
199
REMARKS
 Set 65520 (HFFF0) as a parameter value "8888" and 65535 (HFFFF) as "9999".
 For the instruction codes HFF, HEC and HF3, their values are held once written but cleared to zero when an inverter reset or all
clear is performed.
Example) When reading the C3 (Pr. 902) and C6 (Pr. 904) settings from the inverter of station 0
Computer Send Data Inverter Send Data Description
1) ENQ 00 FF 0 01 82 ACK 00 Set "H01" to the expansion link parameter.
2) ENQ 00 EC 0 01 7E ACK 00 Set "H01" to second parameter changing.
3) ENQ 00 5E 0 0F STX 00 0000 ETX 25 C3 (Pr. 902) is read. 0% is read.
4) ENQ 00 60 0 FB STX 00 0000 ETX 25 C6 (Pr. 904) is read. 0% is read.
To read/write C3 (Pr. 902) and C6 (Pr. 904) after inverter reset or parameter clear, execute from 1) again.
 List of calibration parameters
Instruction
Code
Parameter Name
Extended
Read
Write
C2 (902) Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency 5E DE 1

C3 (902) Terminal 2 frequency setting bias 5E DE 1
125 (903) 5F DF 1
frequency
C4 (903) Terminal 2 frequency setting gain 5F DF 1
C5 (904) Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency 60 E0 1
C6 (904) Terminal 4 frequency setting bias 60 E0 1
126 (905) 61 E1 1
frequency
C7 (905) Terminal 4 frequency setting gain 61 E1 1
[Special monitor selection No.]

Refer to page 131 for details of the monitor description.
Data Description Unit Data Description Unit
0.01Hz/ H10 Output terminal status —
H01 Output frequency/speed
0.001 H14 Cumulative energization time 1h
H02 Output current 0.01A H17 Actual operation time 1h
H03 Output voltage 0.1V H18 Motor load factor 0.1%
0.01Hz/ H19 Cumulative power 1kWh
H05 Frequency setting/speed setting H34 PID set point 0.1%
0.001
H08 Converter output voltage 0.1V H35 PID measured value 0.1%
H09 Regenerative brake duty 0.1% H36 PID deviation 0.1%
Electronic thermal relay function H3D Motor thermal load factor 0.1%
H0A 0.1% H3E Inverter thermal load factor 0.1%
load factor
H3F Cumulative power 2 0.01kWh
H0B Output current peak value 0.01A
H40 PTC thermistor resistance 0.01k
H0C Converter output voltage peak value 0.1V
H0E Output power 0.01kW
H0F Input terminal status —
 When "0.01 to 9998" is set in Pr. 37 and "01" in instruction code HFF, the data format is 6 digits (E2).
 Input terminal monitor details (when the terminal is ON: 1, when the terminal is OFF: 0, —: undetermined value)
b15 b0
— — — — — — — — — RH RM RL — — STR STF
 Output terminal monitor details (when the terminal is ON: 1, when the terminal is OFF: 0, —: undetermined value)
b15 b0
— — — — — — — — SO — ABC — — — — RUN
200
[Fault data]
Refer to page 253 for details of fault description
Fault record display example (instruction code H74)
Data Definition Data Definition Data Definition For read data H3010
No fault H31 E.THM HB0 E.PE (Previous fault ...... THT)
H00
present H40 E.FIN HB1 E.PUE (Latest fault...OC1) b15 b8b7 b0
H10 E.OC1 H52 E.ILF HB2 E.RET
0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
H11 E.OC2 H60 E.OLT HC0 E.CPU
H12 E.OC3 H70 E.BE HC4 E.CDO Previous fault Latest fault
H20 E.OV1 H80 E.GF HC5 E.IOH (H30) (H10)
H21 E.OV2 H81 E.LF HC7 E.AIE
H22 E.OV3 H90 E.OHT HC9 E.SAF
H30 E.THT H91 E.PTC HF5 E.5
[Run command]
Instruction Bit
Item Description Example
Code Length
b0: AU (terminal 4 input selection) 
b1: forward rotation command
b2: reverse rotation command [Example 1] H02... Forward rotation
b3: RL (low-speed operation b7 b0
command)
Run 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
HFA 8 bits b4: RM (middle-speed operation
command
command)  [Example 2] H00... Stop
b5: RH (high-speed operation b7 b0
command) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
b6: RT (second function selection)
b7: MRS (output stop)
b0: AU (terminal 4 input selection) 
b1: forward rotation command
b2: reverse rotation command [Example 1] H0002... Forward rotation
b3: RL(low-speed operation b15 b0
command) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
Run
b4: RM (middle-speed operation
command HF9 16 bits [Example 2] H0020... Low speed operation
command) 
(expansion) (When Pr. 182 RH terminal function selection
b5: RH (high-speed operation is set to "0")
command) b15 b0
b6: RT (second function selection) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
b7: MRS (output stop)
b8 to b15: —
 The signal within parentheses is the initial setting. The description changes depending on the setting of Pr. 180 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection) (page 116).
 When Pr. 551 = "2" (PU mode control source is PU connector), only forward rotation and reverse rotation can be used.
[Inverter status monitor]

Instruction Bit
Item Description Example
Code Length
b0: RUN (inverter running) 
b1: Forward rotation [Example 1] H02... During forward rotation
4
b2: Reverse rotation b7 b0
Inverter
b3: SU (up-to-frequency) 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
status H7A 8 bits
b4: OL (overload)
monitor
PARAMETERS
[Example 2] H80... Stop at fault occurrence

b5: —
b7 b0
b6: FU (frequency detection
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
b7: ABC (fault)
b0: RUN (inverter running) 
b1: Forward rotation
b2: Reverse rotation
b3: SU (up-to-frequency) [Example 1] H0002... During forward rotation
Inverter b4: OL (overload) b15 b0
status b5: — 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
H79 16 bits
monitor b6: FU (frequency detection
[Example 2] H8080... Stop at fault occurrence
(expansion) b7: ABC (fault
b15 b0
b8: —
b9: SO (safety monitor output 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
b10 to b14: —
b15: Fault occurrence
 The signal within parentheses is the initial setting. The description changes depending on the Pr. 190, Pr. 192, Pr. 197 (output terminal function selection).
201
[Multi command (HF0)]

Sending data format from computer to inverter
Format
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Inverter Instruction Send Receive
ENQ Waiting Data2 Sum
A3 station Code data data Data13 CR/LF
time 3 check
number (HF0) type1 type2
Reply data format from inverter to computer (No data error detected)
Format
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Inverter Send Receive Error Error
Data2 Sum
C1 STX station data data code 1 code 2 Data1 ETX CR/LF
 check
number type1 type2 5 5
 Specify the data type of sending data (from computer to inverter).
 Specify the data type of reply data (from inverter to computer).
 Combination of data 1 and data 2 for sending
Data Type Data 1 Data 2 Remarks
Run command Set frequency Run command (expansion) is same as instruction code HF9
0
(expansion) (RAM) (Refer to page 201)
Run command Set frequency The unit of set frequency is always by four digits, even when "0.01
1
(expansion) (RAM, EEPROM) to 9998" is set in Pr. 37 and "01" is set in instruction code HFF.
 Combination of data 1 and data 2 for reply
Data Type Data 1 Data 2 Remarks
Inverter status Output frequency Inverter status monitor (expansion) is same as instruction code
0
monitor (expansion) (speed) H79 (Refer to page 201)
The unit of speed monitor is always by four digits (rounds down
after the decimal point), even when "0.01 to 9998" is set in Pr. 37
Inverter status
1 Special monitor and "01" is set in instruction code HFF.
monitor (expansion)
Replies the monitor item specified in instruction code HF3 for
special monitor.(Refer to page 200)
 Error code for sending data 1 is set in error code 1, and error code for sending data 2 is set in error code 2.
Mode error (HA), instruction code error (HB), data range error (HC) or no error (HF) is replied.
202

(Pr. 117, Pr. 118, Pr. 120, Pr. 122, Pr. 343, Pr. 502, Pr. 549)
Using the Modbus-RTU communication protocol, communication operation or parameter setting can be performed from
the PU connector of the inverter.
Parameter Setting
Number Range
0 No reply to the master *

PU communication
117 0 Inverter station number specification
station number 1 to 247 Set the inverter station numbers when two or more inverters are
connected to one personal computer.
Communication speed
PU communication 48, 96, 192,
118 192 The setting value  100 equals the communication speed.
speed 384
Example) 9600bps if 96
Without parity check
0
Stop bit length 2bit
PU communication With odd parity check
120 2 1
parity check Stop bit length 1bit
With even parity check
2
Stop bit length 1bit
RS-485 communication can be made. Note that a communication
0 fault (E.PUE) occurs as soon as the inverter is switched to the
operation mode with command source.
122 PU communication
9999 Communication check (signal loss detection) time interval
check time interval 0.1 to
If a no-communication state persists for longer than the permissible
999.8s
time, the inverter will come to trip (depends on Pr. 502).
9999 No communication check (signal loss detection)
Communication error Displays the number of communication errors during Modbus-RTU
343 0 —
count communication (reading only)
At Fault At Fault
Indication Fault Output
Occurrence Removal
Stop mode selection Stop
0 Coasts to stop. E.PUE Output
(E.PUE)
502 at communication 0
Decelerates to After stop Output after Stop
error 1
stop E.PUE stop (E.PUE)
Decelerates to After stop Automatic
2 Without output
stop E.PUE restart functions
0 Mitsubishi inverter (computer link operation) protocol
549 Protocol selection 0
1 Modbus-RTU protocol
... Specifications differ according to the date assembled. Refer to page 292 to check the SERIAL number.
* When Modbus-RTU communication is performed from the master with address 0 (station number 0) set, broadcast communication is selected and the 4
inverter does not send a response message. When response from the inverter is necessary, set a value other than "0" (initial value is 0) in Pr. 117 PU
communication station number.
Some functions are invalid for broadcast communication. (Refer to page 206 )
PARAMETERS
NOTE
 When "1" (Modbus-RTU protocol) is set in Pr. 549 and "384" (38400bps) in Pr. 118, parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07)
is disabled. When using the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07), change parameter using the operation panel.
REMARKS
 Set Pr. 549 Protocol selection to "1" to use the Modbus-RTU protocol.
 When PU connector is selected as NET mode operation source (when Pr. 551 PU mode operation command source selection "2"),
Modbus-RTU communication operation can be performed. (Refer to page 179)
203
(1) Communication specification

The communication specifications are given below.
Related
Item Description
Parameter
Communication protocol Modbus-RTU protocol Pr. 549
Conforming standard EIA-485(RS-485) —
Number of connectable devices 1:N (maximum 32 units), setting is 0 to 247 stations Pr. 117
Communication speed Selected among 4800/9600/19200 and 38400bps Pr. 118
Control procedure Asynchronous —
Communication method Half-duplex —
Character system Binary (always 8 bits) —
Start bit 1bit —
Select from the following three types
Stop bit length
No parity, stop bit length 2 bits
Communication Pr. 120
No odd parity, stop bit length 1 bit
Parity check
Even parity, stop bit length 1 bit
Error check CRC code check —
Terminator Not used —
Waiting time setting Not used —
(2) Outline
The Modbus protocol is the communication protocol developed by Modicon for PLC.
The Modbus protocol performs serial communication between the master and slave using the dedicated message frame.
The dedicated message frame has the functions that can perform data read and write. Using the functions, you can read
and write the parameter values from the inverter, write the input command of the inverter, and check the operating status. In
this product, the inverter data are classified in the holding register area (register addresses 40001 to 49999). By accessing
the assigned holding register address, the master can communicate with the inverter which is a slave.
REMARKS
There are two different serial transmission modes: ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange) mode and RTU
(Remote Terminal Unit) mode. This product supports only the RTU mode in which 1-byte (8-bit) data is transmitted as it is.
Only the communication protocol is defined by the Modbus protocol, and the physical layer is not stipulated.
204
(3) Message format

Inverter response time
Query communication (Refer to the following table for the data check time)
Programmable controller (master) Query message
Inverter (slave) Response message

Data absence time
(3.5 bytes or more)
Broadcast communication
Programmable controller (master) Query message
Inverter (slave) No Response
Data check time
Item Check Time

Various monitors, operation command,
<20ms
frequency setting (RAM)
Parameter read/write, frequency setting
<50ms
(EEPROM)
Parameter clear/all clear <5s
Reset command No answer
1) Query
The master sends a message to the slave (= inverter) at the specified address.
2) Normal Response
After receiving the query from the master, the slave executes the requested function and returns the corresponding normal
response to the master.
3) Error Response
If an invalid function code, address or data is received, the slave returns it to the master.
When a response description is returned, the error code indicating that the request from the master cannot be executed is
added.
No response is returned for the hardware-detected error, frame error and CRC check error.
4) Broadcast
By specifying address 0, the master can send a message to all slaves. All slaves that received the message from the
master execute the requested function. In this communication, the slaves do not return a response to the master.
REMARKS
The inverter performs the function independently of the inverter station number setting (Pr. 117) during broadcast communication.
4
PARAMETERS
205
(4) Message frame (protocol)

Communication method
Basically, the master sends a query message (question) and the slave returns a response message (response).
When communication is normal, Device Address and Function Code are copied, and when communication is
abnormal (function code or data code is illegal), bit 7 (= 80h) of Function Code is turned ON and the error code is set
to Data Bytes.
Query message from Master

Device Address Device Address
Function Code Function Code
Eight-Bit Eight-Bit
Data Bytes Data Bytes
Error Check Error Check

Response message from slave
The message frame consists of the four message fields as shown above.
By adding the no-data time (T1: Start, End) of 3.5 characters to the beginning and end of the message data, the slave
recognizes it as one message.
Protocol details
The four message fields will be explained below.
Start 1) ADDRESS 2) FUNCTION 3) DATA 4) CRC CHECK End
L H
T1 8 bits 8 bits n8 bits T1
8 bits 8 bits
Message Field Description

The address code is 1 byte long (8 bits) and any of 0 to 247 can be set. Set 0 to send a broadcast
message (all-address instruction) or any of 1 to 247 to send a message to each slave.
1) ADDRESS field
When the slave responds, it returns the address set from the master.
The value set to Pr. 117 PU communication station number is the slave address.
The function code is 1 byte long (8 bits) and any of 1 to 255 can be set. The master sets the function
that it wants to request to the slave, and the slave performs the requested operation. The following
table gives the supported function codes. An error response is returned if the set function code is
other than those in the following table.
When the slave returns a normal response, it returns the function code set by the master. When the
slave returns an error response, it returns H80 + function code.
Broadcast
Code Function Name Outline
Communication
H03 Read Holding Register Reads the holding register data. Not allowed
2) FUNCTION Writes data to the holding
H06 Preset Single Register Allowed
field register.
Function diagnosis
H08 Diagnostics Not allowed
(communication check only)
Writes data to multiple
H10 Preset Multiple Registers Allowed
consecutive holding registers.
Reads the number of registers
Read Holding Register
H46 that succeeded in communication Not allowed
Access Log
last time.
Table 1:Function code list
The format changes depending on the function code (Refer to page 207). Data includes the byte count,
3) DATA field
number of bytes, description of access to the holding register, etc.
The received message frame is checked for error. CRC check is performed, and 2 byte long data is
added to the end of the message. When CRC is added to the message, the low-order byte is added
first and is followed by the high-order byte.
4) CRC CHECK
The CRC value is calculated by the sending side that adds CRC to the message. The receiving side
field
recalculates CRC during message receiving, and compares the result of that calculation and the
actual value received in the CRC CHECK field. If these two values do not match, the result is defined
as error.
206
(5) Message format types

The message formats corresponding to the function codes in Table 1 on page 206 will be explained.
 Read holding register data (H03 or 03)

Can read the description of 1) system environment variables, 2) real-time monitor, 3) faults history, and 4) inverter
parameters assigned to the holding register area (refer to the register list (page 212))
Query message
1) Slave
2) Function Starting Address No. of Points CRC Check
Address
H03 H L H L L H
(8 bits)
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)
Normal response (Response message)

1) Slave
2) Function Byte Count Data CRC Check
Address
H03 H L ... L H
(8 bits) (8 bits)
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (n  16 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)
Query message setting
Message Setting Description

Address to which the message will be sent
1) Slave Address
Broadcast communication cannot be made (0 is invalid).
2) Function Set H03.
Set the address at which holding register data read will be started.
Starting address = Starting register address (decimal)-40001
3) Starting Address
For example, setting of the starting address 0001 reads the data of the holding
register 40002.
Number of holding registers from which data will be read
4) No. of Points
The number of registers from which data can be read is a maximum of 125.
Description of normal response

The setting range is H02 to HFA (2 to 250).
5) Byte Count
Twice greater than the No. of Point specified at 4) is set.
The number of data specified at 4) is set. Data are read in order of Hi byte and Lo
6) Data: Read data byte, and set in order of starting address data, starting address + 1 data, starting
address + 2 data,
Example: To read the register values of 41004 (Pr. 4) to 41006 (Pr. 6) from the slave address 17 (H11)
Query message 4
Slave Address Function Starting Address No. of Points CRC Check
H11 H03 H03 HEB H00 H03 H77 H2B
PARAMETERS
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)

Slave Address Function Byte Count Data CRC Check
H11 H03 H06 H17 H70 H0B HB8 H03 HE8 H2C HE6
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)
Read value
Register 41004(Pr. 4): H1770 (60.00Hz)
Register 41005(Pr. 5): H0BB8 (30.00Hz)
Register 41006(Pr. 6): H03E8 (10.00Hz)
207
 Write holding register data (H06 or 06)

Can write the description of 1) system environment variables and 4) inverter parameters assigned to the holding
register area (refer to the register list ( page 212)).
Query message
1) Slave Address 2) Function 3) Register Address 4) Preset Data CRC Check
H06 H L H L L H
(8 bits)

1) Slave Address 2) Function 3) Register Address 4) Preset Data CRC Check
H06 H L H L L H
(8 bits)

1) Slave Address
Setting of address 0 enables broadcast communication
Address of the holding register to which data will be written
Register address = Holding register address (decimal)-40001
3) Register Address
For example, setting of register address 0001 writes data to the holding register
address 40002.
Data that will be written to the holding register
4) Preset Data
The written data is always 2 bytes.
Description of normal response

1) to 4) (including CRC check) of the normal response are the same as those of the query message.
No response is made for broadcast communication.
Example: To write 60Hz (H1770) to 40014 (running frequency RAM) at slave address 5 (H05).
Query message
Slave Address Function Register Address Preset Data CRC Check
H05 H06 H00 H0D H17 H70 H17 H99

Same data as the query message
NOTE
For broadcast communication, no response is returned in reply to a query. Therefore, the next query must be
made when the inverter processing time has elapsed after the previous query.
208
 Function diagnosis (H08 or 08)

A communication check can be made since the query message sent is returned unchanged as a response message
(function of sub function code H00).
Sub function code H00 (Return Query Data)
Query message
1) Slave Address 2) Function 3) Subfunction 4) Date CRC Check
H08 H00 H00 H L L H
(8 bits)

1) Slave Address 2) Function 3) Subfunction 4) Date CRC Check
H08 H00 H00 H L L H
(8 bits)

1) Slave Address
3) Subfunction Set H0000.
4) Data Any data can be set if it is 2 bytes long. The setting range is H0000 to HFFFF
 Description of normal response

NOTE
For broadcast communication, no response is returned in reply to a query. Therefore, the next query must be
made when the inverter processing time has elapsed after the previous query.
 Write multiple holding register data (H10 or 16)

You can write data to multiple holding registers.
Query message
3) 4)
1)Slave 2) 5) 6)
Starting No. of CRC Check
Address Function ByteCount Data
Address Registers
H10 H L H L H L ... L H
(8 bits) (8 bits)
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (n28 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)

1)Slave Address 2)Function 3)Starting Address 4)No. of Registers CRC Check
H10 H L H L L H
(8 bits)
 Query message setting

4
1) Slave Address
Setting of address 0 enables broadcast communication
PARAMETERS

Address where holding register data write will be started
3) Starting Address
For example, setting of the starting address 0001 reads the data of the holding
register 40002.
Number of holding registers where data will be written
4) No. of Points
The number of registers where data can be written is a maximum of 125.
The setting range is H02 to HFA (2 to 250).
5) Byte Count
Set a value twice greater than the value specified at 4).
Set the data specified by the number specified at 4). The written data are set in
6) Data order of Hi byte and Lo byte, and arranged in order of the starting address data,
starting address + 1 data, starting address + 2 data
209

Example: To write 0.5s (H05) to 41007 (Pr. 7) at the slave address 25 (H19) and 1s (H0A) to 41008 (Pr.8).
Query message
Slave Starting Byte
Function No. of Points Data CRC Check
Address Address Count
H19 H10 H03 HEE H00 H02 H04 H00 H05 H00 H0A H86 H3D
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)

Slave Starting
Function No. of Points CRC Check
Address Address
H19 H10 H03 HEE H00 H02 H22 H61
 Read holding register access log (H46 or 70)

A response can be made to a query made by the function code H03 or H10.
The starting address of the holding registers that succeeded in access during previous communication and the
number of successful registers are returned.
In response to the query for other than the above function code, 0 is returned for the address and number of
registers.
Query message
1) Slave Address 2) Function CRC Check
H46 L H
(8 bits)
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)

1) Slave Address 2) Function 3) Starting Address 4) No. of Points CRC Check
H46 H L H L L H
(8 bits)
 Query message setting

1) Slave Address

The starting address of the holding registers that succeeded in access is returned.
3) Starting Address
For example, when the starting address 0001 is returned, the address of the
holding register that succeeded in access is 40002.
4) No. of Points The number of holding registers that succeeded in access is returned.
Example: To read the successful register starting address and successful count from the slave address 25 (H19).
Query message
Slave Address Function CRC Check
H19 H46 H8B HD2
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)

Slave Address Function Starting Address No. of Points CRC Check
H19 H10 H03 HEE H00 H02 H22 H61
Success of two registers at starting address 41007 (Pr. 7) is returned.
210
 Error response
An error response is returned if the query message received from the master has an illegal function, address or data.
No response is returned for a parity, CRC, overrun, framing or busy error.
NOTE
No response message is sent in the case of broadcast communication also.
Error response (Response message)

1) Slave Address 2) Function 3) Exception Code CRC Check
H80 + Function L H
(8 bits) (8 bits)
(8 bits) (8 bits) (8 bits)

1) Slave Address Address received from the master
2) Function Master-requested function code + H80
3) Exception Code Code in the following table
Error code list
Code Error Item Error Description
The set function code in the query message from the master cannot be
01 ILLEGAL FUNCTION
handled by the slave.
The set register address in the query message from the master cannot be
02 ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS handled by the inverter.
(No parameter, parameter read disabled, parameter write disabled)
The set data in the query message from the master cannot be handled by the
03 ILLEGAL DATA VALUE inverter.
(Out of parameter write range, mode specified, other error)
 An error will not occur in the following cases.
1) Function code H03 (Read holding register data)
When the No. of Points is 1 or more and there is one or more holding registers from which data can be read
2) Function code H10 (Write multiple holding register data)
When the No. of Points is 1 or more and there is 1 or more holding registers to which data can be written
Namely, when the function code H03 or H10 is used to access multiple holding registers, an error will not occur if a non-existing holding register
or read disabled or write disabled holding register is accessed.
REMARKS
An error will occur if all accessed holding registers do not exist.
Data read from a non-existing holding register is 0, and data written there is invalid.
 Message data mistake detection

4
To detect the mistakes of message data from the master, error item are checked for the following errors.
If an error is detected, a trip will not occur.
PARAMETERS
Error check item

Error Item Error Description Inverter Operation
The data received by the inverter differs from the
Parity error
specified parity (Pr.120 setting).
The data received by the inverter differs from the
Framing error
specified stop bit length (Pr.120).
The following data was sent from the master before 1) Pr.343 is increased by 1 at error
Overrun error
the inverter completes data receiving. occurrence.
The message frame data length is checked, and the 2)The terminal LF is output at error
Message frame error received data length of less than 4 bytes is regarded occurrence.
as an error.
A mismatch found by CRC check between the
CRC check error message frame data and calculation result is
regarded as an error.
211
(6) Modbus registers

 System environment variable
Register Definition Read/write Remarks
40002 Inverter reset Write Any value can be written
40003 Parameter clear Write Set H965A as a written value.
40004 All parameter clear Write Set H99AA as a written value.
40006 Parameter clear Write Set H5A96 as a written value.
40007 All parameter clear Write Set HAA99 as a written value.
40009 Inverter status/control input instruction Read/write See below.
40010 Operation mode/inverter setting Read/write See below.
40014 Running frequency (RAM value) Read/write According to the Pr. 37 settings, the frequency
and selectable speed are in 1r/min
40015 Running frequency (EEPROM value) Write increments.
 The communication parameter values are not cleared.
 For write, set the data as a control input instruction.
For read, data is read as an inverter operating status.
 For write, set data as the operation mode setting.
For read, data is read as the operation mode status.
<Inverter status/control input instruction> <Operation mode/inverter setting>

Definition Written
Bit Mode Read Value
Control input instruction Inverter status Value
0 Stop command RUN (inverter running) EXT H0000 H0010
1 Forward rotation command Forward rotation PU H0001 —
2 Reverse rotation command During reverse rotation EXT
RH (high-speed operation H0002 —
3 SU (up-to-frequency) JOG
command) NET H0004 H0014
RM (middle-speed operation
4 OL (overload) PU+EXT H0005 —
command)
RL (low-speed operation The restrictions depending on the operation
5 0
command) mode changes according to the computer
6 0 FU (frequency detection) link specifications.
7 RT (second function selection) ABC (fault)
8 AU (terminal 4 input selection) 0
9 0 SO (safety monitor output)
10 MRS (output stop) 0
11 0 0
12 0 0
13 0 0
14 0 0
15 0 Fault occurrence
 The signal within parentheses is the initial setting. Definitions change according to the Pr. 180 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection) (refer to page 116).
Each assigned signal is valid or invalid depending on NET. (Refer to page 179)
 The signal within parentheses is the initial setting. Definitions change according to the Pr. 190, Pr. 192, and Pr. 197 (output terminal function selection) (refer to
page122).
 Real time monitor
Refer to page 131 for details of the monitor description.
Register Description Unit Register Description Unit
40201 Output frequency/speed 0.01Hz/1 40216 Output terminal status —
40202 Output current 0.01A 40220 Cumulative energization time 1h
40203 Output voltage 0.1V 40223 Actual operation time 1h
Output frequency setting/speed 40224 Motor load factor 0.1%
40205 0.01Hz/1
setting 40225 Cumulative power 1kWh
40208 Converter output voltage 0.1V 40252 PID set point 0.1%
40209 Regenerative brake duty 0.1% 40253 PID measured value 0.1%
Electronic thermal relay function 40254 PID deviation 0.1%
40210 0.1% 40261 Motor thermal load factor 0.1%
load factor
40211 Output current peak value 0.01A 40262 Inverter thermal load factor 0.1%
40212 Converter output voltage peak value 0.1V 40263 Cumulative power 2 0.01kWh
40214 Output power 0.01kW 40264 PTC thermistor resistance 0.01k
40215 Input terminal status —
 When Pr.37 = "0.01 to 9998", displayed in integral number.
 Input terminal monitor details (when the terminal is ON: 1, when the terminal is OFF: 0, —: undetermined value)
b15 b0
— — — — — — — — — RH RM RL — — STR STF
 Output terminal monitor details (when the terminal is ON: 1, when the terminal is OFF: 0, —: undetermined value)
b15 b0
— — — — — — — — SO — ABC — — — — RUN
212
 Parameter
Read/
Parameter Register Parameter Name Remarks
Write
41000 to Refer to the parameter list (page The parameter number + 41000 is the register
0 to 999 Read/write
41999 60) for the parameter names. number.
C2(902) 41902 Read/write
bias frequency
Terminal 2 frequency setting bias
42092 Read/write The analog value (%) set to C3 (902) is read.
(Analog value)
C3(902)
Terminal 2 frequency setting bias The analog value (%) of the voltage applied to the
43902 Read
(Terminal analog value) terminal 2 is read.
125(903) 41903 Read/write
frequency
(Analog value)
C4(903)
Terminal 2 frequency setting gain The analog value (%) of the voltage applied to the
43903 Read
(Terminal analog value) terminal 2 is read.
C5(904) 41904 Read/write
frequency
(Analog value)
C6(904)
Terminal 4 frequency setting bias The analog value (%) of the current (voltage)
43904 Read
(Terminal analog value) applied to the terminal 4 is read.
126(905) 41905 Read/write
gain frequency
(Analog value)
C7(905)
Terminal 4 frequency setting gain The analog value (%) of the current (voltage)
43905 Read
(Terminal analog value) applied to the terminal 4 is read.
 Faults history
Register Definition Read/write Remarks

40501 Fault history 1 Read/write
40502 Fault history 2 Read Being 2 bytes in length, the data is stored as
40503 Fault history 3 Read "H00".
40504 Fault history 4 Read Refer to the lowest 1 byte for the error code.
40505 Fault history 5 Read Performing write using the register 40501 batch-
40506 Fault history 6 Read clears the faults history.
40507 Fault history 7 Read Set any value as data.
40508 Fault history 8 Read
Fault code list
Data Definition Data Definition Data Definition

No fault H31 E.THM HB0 E.PE
H00
present H40 E.FIN HB1 E.PUE
H10 E.OC1 H52 E.ILF HB2 E.RET 4
H11 E.OC2 H60 E.OLT HC0 E.CPU
H12 E.OC3 H70 E.BE HC4 E.CDO
H20 E.OV1 H80 E.GF HC5 E.IOH
PARAMETERS
H21 E.OV2 H81 E.LF HC7 E.AIE

H22 E.OV3 H90 E.OHT HC9 E.SAF
H30 E.THT H91 E.PTC HF5 E.5
* Refer to page 253 for details of fault record.
213
(7) Pr. 343 Communication error count

You can check the cumulative number of communication errors.
Minimum
Parameter Setting Range Initial Value
Setting Range
343 (Reading only) 1 0
NOTE
The number of communication errors is temporarily stored into the RAM. As it is not stored into the EEPROM
performing a power supply reset or inverter reset clears the value to 0.
(8) Output terminal LF "alarm output (communication error warnings)"

During a communication error, the alarm signal (LF signal) is output by open collector output. Assign the used terminal
using Pr. 190, Pr. 192 or Pr. 197 (output terminal function selection).
Master Alarm data Alarm data Normal data Alarm data Normal data
Slave Reply data Reply data
Not increased
Communication
Error count 0 1 2
(Pr. 343)
LF signal OFF ON OFF ON OFF
Turns OFF when normal data is received
Communication error count is increased

Alarm data: Data resulting in communication error.
in synchronization with leading edge
of LF signal
NOTE
The LF signal can be assigned to the output terminal using Pr. 190, Pr. 192 or Pr. 197. Changing the terminal assignment
may affect the other functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
214
Special operation and frequency control
4.20 Special operation and frequency control

Perform process control such as Pr. 127 to Pr. 134, Pr. 575
PID control 215
pump and air volume. to Pr. 577
PID control (dancer control
Dancer control Pr. 44, Pr. 45, Pr. 128 to Pr. 134 223
setting)
Traverse function Traverse function Pr. 592 to Pr. 597 229
Avoid overvoltage alarm due to
Regeneration avoidance
regeneration by automatic Pr. 882, Pr. 883, Pr. 885, Pr. 886 231
function
adjustment of output frequency
4.20.1 PID control (Pr. 127 to Pr. 134, Pr. 575 to Pr. 577)
The inverter can be used to perform process control, e.g. flow rate, air volume or pressure.
The terminal 2 input signal or parameter setting is used as a set point and the terminal 4 input signal used as a
feedback value to constitute a feedback system for PID control.

Name Description
Number Value Range
PID control automatic 0 to 400Hz Frequency at which the control is automatically changed to PID control.
127 9999
switchover frequency 9999 Without PID automatic switchover function
0 PID action is not performed
20 PID reverse action Measured value (terminal 4)
21 PID forward action Set value (terminal 2 or Pr. 133)
128 PID action selection 0 40 PID reverse action Addition For dancer control
41 PID forward action method: fixed set point (Pr. 133),
measured value (terminal 4)
42 PID reverse action Addition main speed (frequency
43 PID forward action method: ratio command of the operation mode)
If the proportional band is narrow (parameter setting is small), the
manipulated variable varies greatly with a slight change of the
0.1 to
measured value. Hence, as the proportional band narrows, the
129 PID proportional band 100% 1000%
response sensitivity (gain) improves but the stability deteriorates, for
example, hunting occurs. Gain Kp= 1/proportional band
9999 No proportional control
When deviation step is input, time (Ti) is the time required for integral (I)
0.1 to action to provide the same manipulated variable as the proportional (P)
130 PID integral time 1s 3600s action. As the integral time decreases, the set point is reached earlier
but hunting occurs more easily.
9999 No integral control.
Maximum value
0 to If the feedback value exceeds the setting, the FUP signal is output. The
131 PID upper limit 9999 100% maximum input (20mA/5V/10V) of the measured value (terminal 4) is
equivalent to 100%.
9999 No function
Minimum frequency 4
0 to If the process value falls below the setting range, the FDN signal is
132 PID lower limit 9999 100% output. The maximum input (20mA/5V/10V) of the measured value
(terminal 4) is equivalent to 100%.
PARAMETERS
9999 No function
0 to 100% Used to set the set point for PID control.
133 PID action set point 9999
9999 Terminal 2 input is the set point.
For deviation ramp input, time (Td) is required for providing only the
0.01 to
manipulated variable for the proportional (P) action. As the differential
134 PID differential time 9999 10s
time increases, greater response is made to a deviation change.
9999 No differential control.
0 to The inverter stops operation if the output frequency after PID operation
Output interruption
575 1s 3600s remains at less than the Pr. 576 setting for longer than the time set in Pr. 575.
detection time
9999 Without output interruption function
Output interruption Set the frequency at which the output interruption processing is
576 0Hz 0 to 400Hz
detection level performed.
Output interruption 900 to Set the level (Pr. 577 minus 1000%) at which the PID output interruption
577 1000%
cancel level 1100% function is canceled.
The above parameters can be set when Pr. 160 Extended function display selection ="0". (Refer to page 165)
 Pr. 129, Pr. 130, Pr. 133 and Pr. 134 can be set during operation. These can also be set independently of the operation mode.
215
(1) PID control basic configuration

Pr. 128 = "20, 21" (measured value input)
Inverter circuit
Pr. 133 Manipulated Motor
PID operation
or terminal 2 variable
+- 1 IM
Set point Kp 1+ +Td S
Ti S
0 to 5VDC
(0 to 10VDC) Terminal 4
Feedback signal (measured value) 4 to 20mADC (0 to 5V, 0 to 10V)
Kp: Proportionality constant Ti: Integral time S: Operator Td: Differential time
(2) PID action overview

1)PI action
A combination of proportional control action (P) and integral control
Deviation Set point
action (I) for providing a manipulated variable in response to deviation
and changes with time. Measured value
P action
[Operation example for stepped changes of process value] Time
(Note) PI action is the sum of P and I actions. I action

Time
PI action
Time
2)PD action
A combination of proportional control action (P) and differential control
Set point
action (D) for providing a manipulated variable in response to
deviation speed to improve the transient characteristic. Deviation
Measured value
P action
[Operation example for proportional changes of process value] Time
(Note) PD action is the sum of P and D actions. D action

Time
PD action
Time
216
3)PID action
The PI action and PD action are combined to utilize the advantages of both
actions for control. Set point
Deviation
(Note) PID action is the sum of P, I and D actions. Measured value
P action
Time
I action
Time
D action
Time
y=at2+bt+c
PID action
Time
4)Reverse operation
Increases the manipulated variable (output frequency) if deviation X = (set point - measured value) is positive, and
decreases the manipulated variable if deviation is negative.
Deviation Set point
[Heating]
+ X>0
Set point Cold Increase
X<0 Hot Decrease
- Measured value
Feedback signal
(measured value)
5)Forward action
Increases the manipulated variable (output frequency) if deviation X = (set point - measured value) is negative, and
decreases the manipulated variable if deviation is positive.
Measured value
[Cooling]
+ X>0 Set point
Set point Too cold Decrease
X<0 Hot Increase
-
Feedback signal
(measured value) Deviation
Relationships between deviation and manipulated variable (output frequency)

Deviation
Positive Negative
Reverse action
Forward action
4
PARAMETERS
217
(3) Connection diagram
Source logic
Pr. 128 = 20 Inverter
Pr. 182 = 14 MCCB Motor Pump

Pr. 190 = 15 R/L1 U
Power supply S/L2 V IM P
T/L3 W

Reverse rotation STR
PID control selection RH(X14)*3

PC 2-wire type
3-wire type
*2(FUP)RUN Upper limit Detector
10
- + + - +
Setting Potentiometer 2
(Set point setting)
5 SE Output signal
common (OUT) (COM) (24V)
4 *4
(measured value) 4 to 20mA

0 24V
Power
supply *1
AC1φ
200/220V 50/60Hz
 The power supply must be selected in accordance with the power specifications of the detector used.
 The used output signal terminal changes depending on the Pr. 190 , Pr. 192, Pr. 197 (output terminal selection) setting.
 The used input signal terminal changes depending on the Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal selection) setting.
 The AU signal need not be input.
218
(4) I/O signals and parameter setting

Set "20, 21" in Pr. 128 to perform PID operation.
Set "14" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection) to assign PID control selection signal (X14) to turn the
X14 signal ON.
When the X14 signal is not assigned, only the Pr. 128 setting makes PID control valid.
Enter the set point using the inverter terminal 2 or Pr. 133 and enter the measured value to terminal 4.
REMARKS
 When Pr. 128 = "0" or X14 signal is OFF, normal inverter operation is performed without PID action.
 Turning ON/OFF of bit of the terminal, to which X14 signal is assigned through network as RS-485 communication, enables
PID control.
Signal Terminal Used Function Description Parameter Setting

Depending on PID control Turn ON X14 signal to perform PID Set 14 in any of Pr. 178 to Pr.
X14
Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 selection control.  182.
You can input the set point for PID Pr. 128 = 20, 21,
control. Pr. 133 = 9999
2 2 Set point input
0 to 5V ............. 0 to 100% Pr. 73 = 1, 11
0 to 10V ........... 0 to 100% Pr. 73 = 0, 10
Input
Set the set point (Pr. 133) from the Pr. 128 = 20, 21
PU — Set point input
operation panel. Pr. 133 = 0 to 100%
Input the signal from the detector
Pr. 128 = 20, 21
(measured value signal).
Measured value
4 4 4 to 20mA ........ 0 to 100% Pr. 267 = 0
input
0 to 5V ............. 0 to 100% Pr. 267 = 1
0 to 10V ........... 0 to 100% Pr. 267 = 2
Pr. 128 = 20, 21
Output to indicate that the process value
Pr. 131  9999
FUP Upper limit output signal exceeded the maximum value (Pr.
Set 15 or 115 in Pr. 190,
131).
Pr. 192, or Pr. 197. 
Pr. 128 = 20, 21
Output when the process value signal Pr. 132  9999
FDN Lower limit output
falls below the minimum value (Pr. 132). Set 14 or 114 in Pr. 190,
Pr. 192, or Pr. 197.
Depending on
"Hi" is output to indicate that the output
Pr. 190, Pr. 192,
Output
Forward (reverse) indication of the parameter unit is

Pr. 197 Set 16 or 116 in Pr. 190,
RL rotation direction forward rotation (FWD) or "Low" to
Pr. 192, or Pr. 197.
output indicate that it is reverse rotation (REV)
or stop (STOP).
During PID control Set 47 or 147 in Pr. 190,
PID Turns ON during PID control.
activated Pr. 192, or Pr. 197.
Pr. 575 9999
PID output Turns ON when the PID output
SLEEP Set 70 or 170 in Pr. 190,
interruption interruption function is performed.
Pr. 192, or Pr. 197. 4
Output terminal Common terminal for open collector
SE SE
common output terminal.
PARAMETERS
 When the X14 signal is not assigned, only the Pr. 128 setting makes PID control valid.
 The shaded area indicates the parameter initial value.
 When 100 or larger value is set in any of Pr.190, Pr.192, and Pr.197 (output terminal function selection), the terminal output has negative logic. (Refer to page 122 for
details)
 When Pr. 561 PTC thermistor protection level "9999", terminal 2 is not available for set point input. Use Pr. 133 for set point input.
NOTE
 Changing the terminal function using any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 182, Pr. 190, Pr. 192, and Pr. 197 may affect the other functions.
 When the Pr. 267 setting was changed, check the voltage/current input switch setting. Different setting may cause a
fault, failure or malfunction. (Refer to page 153 for setting)
219
(5) PID automatic switchover control (Pr. 127)

The system can be started up without PID control only at a start.
When the frequency is set to Pr. 127 PID control automatic switchover frequency within the range 0 to 400Hz, the inverter
starts up without PID control from a start until output frequency is reached to the set frequency of Pr. 127, and then it shifts
to PID control. Once the system has entered PID control operation, it continues PID control even if the output frequency
falls to or below Pr.127.
Without
Output frequency
PID control PID control
Pr. 127
Time
STF
PID
(6) PID output suspension function (SLEEP function) (SLEEP signal, Pr. 575 to Pr. 577 )
The inverter stops operation if the output frequency after PID operation remains at less than the Pr. 576 Output interruption
detection level setting for longer than the time set in Pr. 575 Output interruption detection time. This function can reduce
energy consumption in the low-efficiency, low-speed range.
When the deviation (= set value - measured value) reaches the PID output shutoff cancel level (Pr. 577 setting -1000%)
while the PID output interruption function is ON, the PID output interruption function is canceled and PID control operation
is resumed automatically.
While the PID output interruption function is ON, the PID output interruption signal (SLEEP) is output. At this time, the
inverter running signal (RUN) is OFF, and the PID control operating signal (PID) is ON.
For the terminal used for the SLEEP signal output, assign the function by setting "70" (positive logic) or "170" (negative
logic) in Pr. 190, Pr. 192 or Pr. 197 (output terminal function selection).
Reverse action (Pr.128 10)
Deviation
Pr.577 - 1000% Cancel

level
Output frequency
Pr.576
Less than Pr. 575

Pr. 575 or more SLEEP period
Time
RUN OFF
PID
SLEEP ON
(7) PID monitor function

The PID control set point, measured value and deviation value can be displayed on the operation panel and output from
terminal AM.
Integral value indicating a negative % can be displayed on the deviation monitor. 0% is displayed as 1000. (The deviation
monitor cannot be output from the terminal AM.)
For each monitor, set the following value in Pr. 52 DU/PU main display data selection and Pr. 158 AM terminal function selection.
Minimum Terminal AM
Setting Monitor Description Remarks
Increments Full Scale
52 PID set point 0.1% 100%
—
53 PID measured value 0.1% 100%
Value cannot be set to Pr. 158.
54 PID deviation 0.1% —
Displays 1000 when the PID deviation is 0%.
220
(8) Adjustment procedure
Parameter setting Adjust the PID control parameters, Pr. 127 to Pr. 134.
Terminal setting Set the I/O terminals for PID control (Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal
function selection), Pr. 190 , Pr. 192, Pr. 197 (output terminal function
selection))
When X14 signal is not assigned, setting a value other than "0" in Pr.
Turn ON the X14 signal.
128 activates PID operation.
Operation
(9) Calibration example

(A detector of 4mA at 0C and 20mA at 50C is used to adjust the room temperature to 25C under PID control.
The set point is given to across inverter terminals 2-5 (0 to 5V).)
Start
Determination of set point Set the room temperature to 25 C.

Set Pr. 128 and turn ON the X14 signal to enable PID control.
Determine the set point of
what is desired to be adjusted.
Conversion of set point into % Detector specifications

When 0 4mA and 50 20mA are used, the set point 25 is 50% on
Calculate the ratio of the set
point to the detector output. the assumption that 4mA is 0% and 20mA is 100%.
Make calibration. Make the following calibration* when the target setting input (0 to 5V) and
detector output (4 to 20mA) must be calibrated.
Setting of set point When the set point is 50%

As the terminal 2 specifications are 0% 0V and 100% 5V, input 2.5V
Input a voltage across terminals
to the terminal 2 for the set point of 50%.
2-5 according to the set value %.
Operation When the parameter unit is used for operation, input the set point (0 to
Set the proportional band (Pr. 100%) in Pr. 133.
129 ) to a slightly larger value, When performing operation, first set the proportional band (Pr. 129 ) to a
the integral time (Pr. 130 ) to a slightly larger value, the integral time (Pr. 130 ) to a slightly longer time,
slightly longer time, and the and the differential time (Pr. 134 ) to "9999" (no function), and while looking
differential time (Pr. 134 ) to at the system operation, decrease the proportional band (Pr. 129 ) and
"9999" (no function), and turn increase the integral time (Pr. 130 ). For slow response system where a
ON the start signal.
deadband exists, differential control (Pr. 134 ) should be turned ON and
increased slowly.
4
Yes
Is the set point stable?
PARAMETERS
No
Parameter adjustment Parameter optimization

To stabilize the measured value, While the measured value is stable
change the proportional band (Pr. throughout the operation status, the
129 ) to a larger value, the integral proportional band (Pr. 129 ) may be
time (Pr. 130 ) to a slightly longer decreased, the integral time (Pr. 130 )
time, and the differential time (Pr. decreased, and the differential time
134 ) to a slightly shorter time. (Pr. 134 ) increased.
Adjustment end
* When calibration Using calibration Pr. 902 and Pr. 903 (terminal 2) or Pr. 904 and Pr. 905 (terminal
is required 4), calibrate the detector output and target setting input.
Make calibration in the PU mode during an inverter stop.
221
<Set point input calibration>

1. Apply the input voltage of 0% set point setting (e.g. 0V) across terminals 2-5.
2. Enter in C2 (Pr. 902) the frequency which should be output by the inverter at the deviation of 0% (e.g. 0Hz).
3. In C3 (Pr.902), set the voltage value at 0%.
4. Apply the voltage of 100% set point (e.g. 5V) across terminals 2-5.
5. Enter in Pr.125 the frequency which should be output by the inverter at the deviation of 100% (e.g. 50Hz).
6. In C4 (Pr.903), set the voltage value at 100%.
<Measured value calibration>

1. Apply the input current of 0% measured value (e.g. 4mA) across terminals 4-5.
2. Make calibration using C6 (Pr. 904).
3. Apply the input current of 100% measured value (e.g. 20mA) across terminals 4-5.
4. Make calibration using C7 (Pr. 905).
REMARKS
 The frequency set in C5 (Pr. 904) and Pr. 126 should be the same as set in C2 (Pr. 902) and Pr. 125 .
The results of the above calibration are as shown below:
[Set point setting] [Measured value]

Manipulated [Manipulated variable]
variable (Hz)
(%) (%)
100 100 50
0 0 0
0 5 (V) 0 4 20 (mA) 0 100 Deviation (%)
NOTE
 If the multi-speed (RH, RM, RL, REX signal) or Jog operation (JOG signal) is entered with the X14 signal ON, PID
control is stopped and multi-speed or Jog operation is started.
 If the setting is as follows, PID control becomes invalid.
Pr. 79 Operation mode selection = "6" (Switchover mode)
The inverter is at a stop with Pr. 261 Power failure stop selection selected.
 Changing the terminal function using any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 182, Pr. 190, Pr. 192, Pr. 197 may affect the other functions. Set
parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.
 When PID control is selected, the minimum frequency is the frequency set in Pr. 902 and the maximum frequency is
the frequency set in Pr. 903.
(Pr. 1 Maximum frequency and Pr. 2 Minimum frequency settings are also valid.)
 The remote operation function is invalid during PID operation.
 When the control is switched to PID control during normal
operation, the frequency command value calculated by PID PID set point
operation using 0Hz as standard is used without the
frequency during the operation.
Frequency
command Frequency command
during normal operation
PID action ON
Normal PID operation Normal
operation operation
Operation when control is switched to PID control
during normal operation
Pr. 73 Analog input selection Refer to page 153
Pr. 261 Power failure stop selection Refer to page 145
C2 (Pr. 902) to C7 (Pr. 905) Frequency setting voltage (current) bias/gain Refer to page 156
222
4.20.2 Dancer control (Pr. 44, Pr. 45, Pr. 128 to Pr. 134)
Performs PID control by feedbacking the position detection of the dancer roller, controlling the dancer roller is in the
specified position.
Parameter Setting
Number Range
FR-D740-080(SC) or
Second lower
5s This parameter is the acceleration time of the main
FR-D720S-008(SC) to
44 acceleration/ 100(SC)
0 to 3600s speed during dancer control. It will not function as
deceleration time second acceleration/deceleration time.
FR-D740-120(SC) and
10s
160(SC)
Second 0 to 3600s This parameter is the deceleration time of the main

45 9999 speed during dancer control. It will not function as
deceleration time 9999
second deceleration time.
0 PID action is not performed
PID reverse
20
action Measured value (terminal 4)
PID forward Set value (terminal 2 or Pr. 133)
21
action
PID reverse Addition
PID action 40
128 0 action method: fixed For dancer control
selection Addition
set point (Pr. 133),
PID forward
41 measured value
action method: fixed
(terminal 4)
PID reverse Addition
42 main speed (speed
action method: ratio
command of the
PID forward Addition operation mode)
43
action method: ratio
If the proportional band is narrow (parameter
setting is small), the manipulated variable varies
greatly with a slight change of the measured value.
PID proportional 0.1 to 1000% Hence, as the proportional band narrows, the
129 100%
response sensitivity (gain) improves but the
band
stability deteriorates, e.g. hunting occurs. Gain Kp
= 1/proportional band
9999 No proportional control
When deviation step is input, time (Ti) is the time
required for integral (I) action to provide the same
0.1 to 3600s manipulated variable as the proportional (P) action.
130 PID integral time 1s
As the integral time decreases, the set point is
reached earlier but hunting occurs more easily.
9999 No integral control.
Maximum value
If the feedback value exceeds the setting, the FUP
0 to 100% signal is output. The maximum input (20mA/5V/
131 PID upper limit 9999
10V) of the measured value (terminal 4) is
equivalent to 100%. 4
9999 No function
Minimum value
If the process value falls below the setting range,
PARAMETERS
0 to 100% the FDN signal is output. The maximum input

132 PID lower limit 9999
(20mA/5V/10V) of the measured value (terminal 4)
is equivalent to 100%.
9999 No function
PID action set 0 to 100% Used to set the set point for PID control.
133 9999
point 9999 Always 50%
For deviation ramp input, time (Td) required for
providing only the manipulated variable for the
PID differential 0.01 to 10s proportional (P) action.
134 9999 As the differential time increases, greater response
time
is made to a deviation change.
9999 No differential control.
The above parameters can be set when Pr.160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 165)
 Pr. 129, Pr. 130, Pr. 133 and Pr.134 can be set during operation. These can also be set independently of the operation mode.
223
(1) Dancer control block diagram
of main speed
Main speed command

*1 Target frequency
Ratio
PID deviation
Acceleration/
Limit + deceleration
Pr. 128 = 42, 43
PID control X14 +
Dancer roll +
setting point 1
Kp(1+ + Td S)
Pr. 133 - Ti S
Pr. 128 = 40, 41
PID set point PID feedback IM
Convert to 0 to 100%
Potentiometer
Terminal 4
Dancer roll position detection

 The main speed can be selected from all operation mode such as external (analog voltage input, multi-speed), PU (digital frequency setting), and
communication (RS-485).
Set point and measured value of PID control
Input Input Signal Pr.267 Setting Voltage/Current Input Switch
Set point Pr. 133 0 to 100% — —
When measured value is input as current

4mA ..... 0%, 20mA...100% 0
(4 to 20mA)
Measured
value 0V ......... 0%, 5V......... 100% 1
When measured value is input as voltage
(0 to 5V or 0 to 10V) 0V ......... 0%, 10V ....... 100% 2
NOTE
 Changing the terminal function using any of Pr.178 to Pr.182 may affect the other functions. Set parameters after
confirming the function of each terminal.
224
(2) Dancer control overview

Performs dancer control by setting 40 to 43 in Pr. 128 PID action selection. The main speed command is the speed command of
each operation mode (External, PU, Network). Performs PID control by the position detection signal of the dancer roller, then
the result is added to the main speed command. For acceleration/deceleration of the main speed, set the acceleration time in
Pr. 44 Second acceleration/deceleration time/Pr. 45 Second deceleration time.
* Set 0s normally to Pr. 7 Acceleration time and Pr.8 Deceleration time. When the Pr. 7 and Pr. 8 setting is large, response of dancer control during acceleration/
deceleration is slow.
PID adding value

Output frequency
Output frequency
Main speed
Time
ON
STF
(3) Connection diagram
Source logic
Pr. 128 = 41 Inverter
Pr. 182 = 14 MCCB Motor

Pr. 190 = 15 R/L1 U
Power supply S/L2 V IM
T/L3 W

Reverse rotation STR
PID control selection RH(X14)*3

PC
*2 (FUP)RUN Upper limit
10
Main speed command
2
setting potentiometer*1
5 SE Output signal common
Feedback value of
dancer roll position 4 *4
4
PARAMETERS
 The main speed command differs according to each operation mode (External, PU, Network)
 The used output signal terminal changes depending on the Pr. 190, Pr. 192, Pr. 197 (output terminal selection) setting.
 The used input signal terminal changes depending on the Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal selection) setting.
 The AU signal need not be input.
225
(4) I/O signals and parameter setting

Set "40 to 43" in Pr. 128 to perform dancer control.
Set "14" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection) to assign PID control selection signal (X14) to turn the
X14 signal ON.
When the X14 signal is not assigned, only the Pr. 128 setting makes dancer control valid.
Input the main speed command (External, PU, Network). The main speed command in any operation mode can be input.
(Note that terminal 4 can not be used as the main speed command.)
Input the set point using Pr. 133, then input the measured value signal (dancer roller position detection signal) across
terminal 4 and 5 of the inverter.
REMARKS
 When Pr. 128 = "0" or X14 signal is OFF, normal inverter operation is performed without dancer control.
 Turning ON/OFF of bit of the terminal, to which X14 signal is assigned through network as RS-485 communication, enables
dancer control.
Signal Terminal Used Function Description Parameter Setting

Depending on PID control Turn ON X14 signal to perform dancer
X14 Set 14 in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 182.
Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 selection control. 
Input the signal from the dancer roller
Pr.128 = 40, 41, 42, 43
Input
detector (measured value signal).

Measured value
4 4 4 to 20mA ........ 0 to 100% Pr.267 = 0
input
0 to 5V............. 0 to 100% Pr.267 = 1
0 to 10V........... 0 to 100% Pr.267 = 2
Output to indicate that the measured Pr.128 = 40, 41, 42, 43
value signal exceeded the maximum Pr.131  9999
FUP Upper limit output
value Set 15 or 115 in Pr. 190, Pr. 192, or
(Pr. 131). Pr. 197.
Pr.128 = 40, 41, 42, 43
Output when the measured value signal Pr.132  9999
FDN Depending on Lower limit output
falls below the minimum value (Pr. 132). Set 14 or 114 in Pr. 190, Pr. 192, or
Pr. 190, Pr. 192,
Output
Pr. 197.
Pr. 197
Output is "ON" when the output
Forward (reverse)
indication of the parameter unit is Set 16 or 116 in Pr. 190, Pr. 192, or
RL rotation direction
forward rotation (FWD) and "OFF" when Pr. 197.
output
reverse rotation (REV) or stop (STOP).
During PID control Set 47 or 147 in Pr. 190, Pr. 192, or
PID Turns ON during PID control.
activated Pr. 197.
Output terminal Common terminal for open collector
SE SE
common output terminal
 When the X14 signal is not assigned, only the Pr. 128 setting makes dancer control valid.
 The shaded area indicates the parameter initial value.
 When 100 or larger value is set in any of Pr. 190, Pr. 192, and Pr. 197 (output terminal function selection), the terminal output has negative logic. (Refer to page 122
for details)
NOTE
 Turn OFF PID output suspension function (Pr. 575 = "9999") while using dancer control.
 When Pr. 561 PTC thermistor protection level  "9999", terminal 2 is not available for main speed command. Terminal 2 is
used as PTC thermistor input terminal.
226
(5) Parameter details

Initial value When ratio (Pr. 128 = "42, 43") is selected for addition method, PID
Output frequency
50Hz
control  (ratio of main speed) is added to the main speed. The ratio is
determined by the Pr. 125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency and
Gain C2 (Pr. 902) Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency. The frequency
Pr. 125 setting signal is set to 0 to 50Hz in the range between 0 to 100% in the
Bias
C2(Pr. 902) initial setting. The ratio is (100%) when the main speed is 50Hz and
0
100% (50%) when 25Hz.
NOTE
 Even when C4 (Pr. 903) is set to other than 100%, the frequency setting signal is considered as 100%.
 Even when C3 (Pr. 903) is set to other than 0%, the frequency setting signal is considered as 0%.
 When C2 (Pr .902) is set to other than 0Hz, the frequency setting signal is 0% when C2 (Pr. 902) is less than the set
frequency.
Turning X14 signal ON/OFF during operation by assigning X14 signal results in the following operation.
When X14 signal is ON: Uses output frequency unchanged as the main speed command and continues operation by
dancer control.
When X14 signal is OFF: Ends dancer control and continues operation at the set frequency valid.
Addition Measured
Pr. 128 Setting PID Action Set Point Main Speed Command
Method Value
40 Reverse action
Fixed Speed command for each
41 Forward action
Pr. 133 Terminal 4
42 Reverse action operation mode
Ratio
43 Forward action
Action of Pr. 129 PID proportional band, Pr. 130 PID integral time, Pr. 131 PID upper limit, Pr. 132 PID lower limit, Pr. 134 PID
differential time is the same as PID control. For the relationship of controlled variable (%) of PID control and frequency, 0%
is equivalent to the set frequency of Pr. 902 and 100% to Pr. 903.
For the Pr. 133 PID action set point setting, set frequency of Pr. 902 is equivalent to 0% and Pr. 903 to 100%. When 9999 is
set in Pr. 133, 50% is the set point.
REMARKS
Pr. 127 PID control automatic switchover frequency is invalid.
(6) Output signal
Output terminal assignment during dancer control (PID control) operation
PID signal turns ON during dancer control (PID control) or at a stop by PID control (in the status PID operation being
performed inside) (The signal is OFF during normal operation.)
For the terminal used for PID signal output, assign the function by setting "47 (positive logic) or 147 (negative logic)" in Pr.
190, Pr. 192, or Pr. 197 (output terminal function selection).
NOTE
(7) PID monitor function 4
The PID control set point and measured value can be output to the operation panel monitor display and terminal AM.
For each monitor, set the following value in Pr. 52 DU/PU main display data selection and Pr. 158 AM terminal function selection.
PARAMETERS
Minimum Terminal AM
Setting Monitor Description Remarks
Increments Full Scale
52 PID set point 0.1% 100%
—
53 PID measured value 0.1% 100%
Value cannot be set in Pr. 158.
54 PID deviation 0.1% —
Displays 1000 when the PID deviation is 0%.
(8) Priorities of main speed command
The priorities of the main speed speed command source when the speed command source is external are as follows.
JOGsignal multi-speed setting signal (RL/RM/RH/REX)  terminal 2
The priorities of the main speed speed command source when "3" is set in Pr. 79.
Multi-speed setting signal (RL/RM/RH/REX)  set frequency (digital setting by PU, operation panel)
Terminal 4 can not be selected as the main speed speed command even when AU terminal is turned ON.
Even when a remote operation function is selected by setting a value other than "0" in Pr. 59, compensation of the remote
setting frequency to the main speed is ignored (changes to 0).
227
(9) Adjustment procedure

Dancer roller position detection signal adjustment
When terminal 4 input is voltage input, 0V is the minimum position and 5V(10V) is the maximum position. When current is
input, 4mA is the minimum position and 20mA is the maximum position. (initial value) When 0 to 7V is output from the
potentiometer, it is necessary to calibrate C7 (Pr .905) at 7V.
Upper limit
position
20mA 5V(10V)
4mA 0V Lower limit Potentiometer, etc.

position
0% 100%
Feedback value
(Example) Control at a dancer center position using a 0 to 7V potentiometer

1) After changing the current/voltage input switch to "V", set "2" in Pr. 267 to change terminal 4 input to voltage input.
2) Input 0V to across terminal 4 and 5 to calibrate C6 (Pr. 904). (% display displayed at analog calibration is independent
to % of the feed back value.)
3) By inputting 7V to across terminal 4 to 5, calibrate C7(Pr. 905) (% display displayed at analog calibration is
independent to % of the feed back value.)
4) Set 50% in Pr.133.
NOTE
When the Pr. 267 setting was changed, check the voltage/current input switch setting. Different setting may cause a
REMARKS
 PID control stops when RH, RM, RL, and REX signals (for multi-speed operation) or JOG signal is input during normal PID
control. However, PID control continues when those signals are input during dancer control since these are treated as speed
commands.
 During dancer control, Second acceleration/deceleration time of Pr.44 and Pr.45 are the parameters for acceleration/deceleration
time setting to the main speed command source. These do not function as the second function.
 When switchover mode is set with "6" in Pr. 79, dancer control (PID control) is invalid.
 Speed command to terminal 4 by turning AU signal ON is invalid during dancer control.
 Acceleration/deceleration of the main speed command is the same operation as when frequency command is increased/
decreased by analog input.
 Therefore, SU signal remains ON even if the starting signal is turned ON/OFF.(always in the constant speed state)
 The DC brake operation starting frequency when turning OFF the starting signal is not Pr. 10 but a smaller value of either Pr. 13
or 0.5Hz.
 The set frequency monitor is always variable as "main speed command+PID control".
 The main speed setting frequency accelerates for the acceleration/deceleration time set in Pr. 44 and Pr. 45 and the output
frequency accelerates/decelerates for the acceleration/deceleration time set in Pr. 7 and Pr. 8. Therefore, when the set time of
Pr. 7 and Pr. 8 is longer than Pr. 44 and Pr. 45, the output frequency accelerates/decelerates for the acceleration/deceleration
time set in Pr. 7 and Pr. 8.
 For the integral term limit, a smaller value of either the PID manipulated variable (%) value converted from the linear
interpolated Pr. 1 Maximum frequency with Pr. 902 and Pr. 903 , or 100% is used for limit.
Although the output frequency is limited by the minimum frequency, operation limit of the integral term is not performed.
Pr. 73 Analog input selection Refer to page 153
C2 (Pr. 902) to C7 (Pr. 905) Frequency setting voltage (current) bias/gain Refer to page 156
228
4.20.3 Traverse function (Pr. 592 to Pr. 597)
Traverse operation which varies the amplitude of the frequency in a constant cycle can be performed.

Name Description
Number Value Range
0 Traverse function invalid
Traverse function
592 0 1 Traverse function is valid only in the External operation mode
selection
2 Traverse function is valid independently of operation mode
Maximum amplitude
593 10% 0 to 25% Amplitude amount during traverse operation
amount
Amplitude
Compensation amount at the time of amplitude inversion
594 compensation amount 10% 0 to 50%
(acceleration  deceleration)
during deceleration
Amplitude
Compensation amount during amplitude inversion operation
595 compensation amount 10% 0 to 50%
(deceleration  acceleration)
during acceleration
Amplitude acceleration
596 5s 0.1 to 3600s Acceleration time during traverse operation
time
Amplitude deceleration
597 5s 0.1 to 3600s Deceleration time during traverse operation
time
· When "1" or "2" is set in Pr. 592 Traverse function selection, turning ON the traverse operation signal (X37) makes the
traverse function valid.
· Set "37" in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 Input terminal function selection and assign the X37 signal to the external terminal.
When the X37 signal is not assigned to the input terminal, the traverse function is always valid (X37-ON).
Output frequency(Hz) Traverse operation f0: set frequency

f1: amplitude amount from the set
frequency
f2 (f0  Pr. 593/100)
f1 Pr.7 f2: compensation amount at transition from
f0 acceleration to deceleration
(f1  Pr. 594/100)
f1
f3 f3: compensation amount at transition from
Pr.8 deceleration to acceleration
(f1  Pr. 595/100)
Pr.7 t1: time from acceleration during traverse
t2(Pr.597) t1(Pr.596) operation (Time from (f0  f1) to (f0 + f1)
Time(s)
(Pr. 596)
STF(STR) t2: time from deceleration during traverse
signal ON operation (Time from (f0 + f1) to (f0  f1) 4
X37 signal ON (Pr. 597)
PARAMETERS
1) When the starting command (STF or STR) is switched ON, the output frequency accelerates to the set frequency f0
according to the normal Pr. 7 Acceleration time.
2) When the output frequency reaches f0, traverse operation can be started by switching the X37 signal ON, then the
frequency accelerates to f0 + f1. (The acceleration time at this time depends on the Pr. 596 setting.)
3) After having accelerated to f0 + f1, compensation of f2 (f1  Pr. 594) is made and the frequency decreases to f0-f1.
(The deceleration time at this time depends on the Pr. 597 setting.)
4) After having decelerated to f0  f1, compensation of f3 (f1  Pr. 595) is made and the frequency again accelerates to
f0 + f1.
5) If the X37 signal is turned OFF during traverse operation, the frequency accelerates/decelerates to f0 according to
the normal acceleration/deceleration time (Pr. 7, Pr. 8). If the start command (STF or STR) is turned OFF during
traverse operation, the frequency decelerates to a stop according to the normal deceleration time (Pr. 8).
229
REMARKS
When the second function signal (RT) is ON, normal acceleration/deceleration time (Pr. 7, Pr. 8) is the same as second
acceleration/deceleration time (Pr. 44, Pr. 45).
Output frequency(Hz)
f0 is rewritten at this point.
Reflected on the action
at this point  If the set frequency (f0) and traverse operation parameters (Pr. 593 to Pr.
f1 597) are changed, pattern operation is performed at changed f0 after
f0 f1 the output frequency reached f0 before change.
f1 f0
f1
Time(s)
Clamped by Pr.1  When the output frequency exceeds Pr. 1 Maximum frequency or Pr. 2
Pr.1 f1 Minimum frequency, the output frequency is clamped at maximum/
f0 minimum frequency while the set pattern exceeds the maximum/
Pr.2 f1 minimum frequency.
Clamped by Pr.2
Time(s)
S-pattern acceleration S-pattern
deceleration
f0  When the traverse function and S-pattern acceleration/deceleration (Pr.
f1
29  0) are selected, S-pattern acceleration/deceleration is performed
f1 only in the areas where operation is performed in normal Acceleration
and deceleration time (Pr. 7, Pr. 8). For acceleration/deceleration during
traverse operation, linear acceleration/deceleration is made.
STF(STR) Time(s)
signal ON
RH signal ON
 When stall prevention is activated during traverse operation, traverse
operation is stopped and normal operation is performed. When stall
f1
prevention operation ends, the motor accelerates/decelerates to f0 in
f0
f1 Decelerate as normal acceleration/deceleration time (Pr. 7, Pr. 8). After the output
set in Pr. 8
frequency reaches f0, traverse operation is again performed.
Accelerate as set in Pr. 7
Stall prevention operation Time(s)
NOTE
 When the value of amplitude inversion compensation amount (Pr. 594, Pr. 595) is too large, pattern operation as set is
not performed due to overvoltage shut-off and stall prevention.
functions.
Pr. 7 Acceleration time Refer to page 99
230
4.20.4 Regeneration avoidance function (Pr. 665, Pr. 882, Pr. 883, Pr. 885, Pr. 886)
This function detects a regeneration status and increases the frequency to avoid the regenerative status.
 Possible to avoid regeneration by automatically increasing the frequency to continue operation if the fan happens to
rotate faster than the set speed due to the effect of another fan in the same duct.
Parameter Setting
Number Range
0 Regeneration avoidance function invalid
Regeneration
1 Regeneration avoidance function is always valid
882 avoidance operation 0
Regeneration avoidance function is valid only during a constant
selection 2
speed operation
200V 400 Bus voltage level at which regeneration avoidance operates. When
Regeneration class VDC the bus voltage level is set to low, overvoltage error will be less apt
883 avoidance operation 300 to 800V to occur. However, the actual deceleration time increases.
level 400V 780
class VDC The set value must be higher than the "power supply voltage  2 " .
Regeneration 0 to 10Hz
Limit value of frequency which rises at activation of regeneration
avoidance avoidance function.
885 6Hz
compensation 9999 Frequency limit invalid
frequency limit value
Regeneration
886 avoidance voltage 100% 0 to 200% Responsiveness at activation of regeneration avoidance.
A larger setting will improve responsiveness to the bus voltage
gain
change. However, the output frequency could become unstable.
Regeneration When vibration is not suppressed by decreasing the Pr. 886 setting,
665 avoidance frequency 100% 0 to 200% set a smaller value in Pr. 665.
gain
(1) What is regeneration avoidance function? (Pr. 882, Pr. 883)

When the regeneration load is large, the DC bus voltage rises and an overvoltage fault (E. OV) may occur.
When this bus voltage rise is detected and the bus voltage level reaches or exceeds Pr. 883, increasing the frequency
avoids the regeneration status.
The regeneration avoidance function is always ON when "1" is set in Pr. 882, and activated only during a constant speed
when "2" is set in Pr. 882.
Regeneration avoidance operation example Regeneration avoidance operation example

for acceleration for constant speed
Bus voltage
Bus voltage
Pr. 883
(VDC)
(VDC)
Pr. 883
Time
frequency
Time
4
Output
frequency
(Hz)
Output
(Hz)
During regeneration avoidance Time

During regeneration Time
function operation
PARAMETERS
avoidance function operation
Regeneration avoidance
operation example for deceleration
frequency Bus voltage
Pr. 883
(VDC)
Time
Output
(Hz)
During regeneration Time

avoidance function operation
231
REMARKS
 The acceleration/deceleration ramp while the regeneration avoidance function is operating changes depending on the
regeneration load.
 The DC bus voltage of the inverter is about 2 times of normal input voltage.
When the input voltage is 220VAC, bus voltage is approximately 311VDC.
When the input voltage is 440VAC, bus voltage is approximately 622VDC.
However, it varies with the input power supply waveform.
 The Pr. 883 setting should be kept higher than the DC bus voltage level. Otherwise, the regeneration avoidance function is
always ON even in the non-regeneration status and the frequency increases.
 While overvoltage stall ( ) is activated only during deceleration and stops the output frequency, the regeneration avoidance
function is always ON (Pr. 882 = 1) or activated only during a constant speed (Pr. 882 = 2) and increases the frequency
according to the regeneration amount.
(2) Limit regeneration avoidance operation frequency (Pr. 885)

You can limit the output frequency compensated (increased) by the
regeneration avoidance function.
The frequency is limited to the output frequency (frequency prior to

regeneration avoidance operation) + Pr. 885 Regeneration avoidance
Limit level compensation frequency limit value during acceleration or constant speed.
Pr. 885
If the regeneration avoidance frequency exceeds the limit value during
deceleration, the limit value is held until the output frequency falls to 1/2
of Pr. 885.
Pr. 885/2
When the frequency increased by regeneration avoidance function has
Time
reached Pr. 1 Maximum frequency, it is limited to the maximum frequency.
When Pr. 885 is set to "9999", regeneration avoidance function operation
frequency setting is invalid.
(3) Regeneration avoidance function adjustment (Pr. 665, Pr. 886)

If the frequency becomes instable during regeneration avoidance operation, decrease the setting of Pr. 886 Regeneration
avoidance voltage gain. Reversely, if sudden regeneration causes an overvoltage alarm, increase the setting.
When vibration is not suppressed by decreasing the Pr. 886 setting, set a smaller value in Pr. 665 Regeneration avoidance
frequency gain.
NOTE
 When regeneration avoidance operation is performed, (overvoltage stall) is displayed and the OL signal is
output.
 When regeneration avoidance operation is performed, stall prevention is also activated at the same time.
 The regeneration avoidance function cannot shorten the actual deceleration time taken to stop the motor. The actual
deceleration time depends on the regeneration energy consumption capability. To shorten the deceleration time,
consider using the regeneration unit (FR-BU2, FR-CV, FR-HC) and brake resistor (MRS type, FR-ABR etc.) to consume
regeneration energy at constant speed.
 When using the regeneration unit (FR-BU2, FR-CV, FR-HC) and brake resistor (MRS type, FR-ABR etc.), set Pr. 882 to
"0 (initial value)" (regeneration avoidance function invalid). When using the regeneration unit, etc. to consume
regeneration energy at deceleration, set Pr. 882 to "2" (regeneration avoidance function valid only at a constant
speed).
 When regeneration avoidance operation is performed, the OL signal output item of Pr. 156 also becomes the target of
(overvoltage stall). Pr. 157 OL signal output timer also becomes the target of (overvoltage stall).
Pr. 8 Deceleration time Refer to page 99
Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level Refer to page 82
232
Useful functions
4.21 Useful functions

Cooling fan operation
To increase cooling fan life Pr. 244 233
selection
Inverter part life display Pr. 255 to Pr. 259 234
Maintenance output
To determine the maintenance time Pr. 503, Pr. 504 238
function
of parts
Current average value
Pr. 555 to Pr. 557 239
monitor signal
Freely available parameter Free parameter Pr. 888, Pr. 889 241
4.21.1 Cooling fan operation selection (Pr. 244)
You can control the operation of the cooling fan (FR-D740-036(SC) or higher, FR-D720S-070(SC) or higher) built in the
inverter.
Parameter
Number
Operates in power-ON status.
0 Cooling fan ON/OFF control invalid (the
cooling fan is always ON at power-ON)
Cooling fan operation Cooling fan ON/OFF control valid
244 1
selection The fan is always ON while the inverter is
1 running. During a stop, the inverter status
is monitored and the fan switches ON/
OFF according to the temperature.
The above parameter can be set when Pr.160 Extended function display selection = "0". (Refer to page 165)
 In either of the following cases, fan operation is regarded as faulty as [FN] is shown on the operation panel, and the fan fault
(FAN) and alarm (LF) signals are output.
 Pr. 244 = "0"
When the fan comes to a stop with power ON.
Pr. 244 = "1"
When the inverter is running and the fan stops during fan ON command.
 For the terminal used for FAN signal output, set "25 (positive logic) or 125 (negative logic)" to Pr. 190, Pr. 192 or Pr. 197
(output terminal function selection), and for the LF signal, set "98 (positive logic) or 198 (negative logic)".
NOTE
 Changing the terminal assignment using Pr. 190, Pr. 192, and Pr. 197 (output terminal function selection) may affect the other 4
PARAMETERS
233
Useful functions
4.21.2 Display of the lives of the inverter parts (Pr. 255 to Pr. 259)
Degrees of deterioration of main circuit capacitor, control circuit capacitor, cooling fan and inrush current limit circuit can
be diagnosed by a monitor.
When any part has approached to the end of its life, an alarm can be output by self diagnosis to prevent a fault.
(Use the life check of this function as a guideline since the life except the main circuit capacitor is calculated
theoretically.)
For the life check of the main circuit capacitor, the alarm signal (Y90) will not be output if a measuring method of (4) is
not performed.
Parameter Setting
Number Range
Displays whether the control circuit capacitor,
main circuit capacitor, cooling fan, and each parts
255 Life alarm status display 0 (0 to 15)
of the inrush current limit circuit have reached the
life alarm output level or not. (Reading only)
Displays the deterioration degree of the inrush
Inrush current limit circuit
256 100% (0 to 100%) current limit circuit.
life display
(Reading only)
Displays the deterioration degree of the control
Control circuit capacitor life
257 100% (0 to 100%) circuit capacitor.
display
(Reading only)
Displays the deterioration degree of the main
Main circuit capacitor life circuit capacitor.
258 100% (0 to 100%)
display (Reading only)
The value measured by Pr. 259 is displayed.
Setting "1" and turning the power supply OFF
starts the measurement of the main circuit
Main circuit capacitor life 0, 1 capacitor life.
259 0
measuring (2, 3, 8, 9) When the Pr. 259 value is "3" after powering ON
again, the measuring is completed.
Writes deterioration degree in Pr. 258.
REMARKS
Since repeated inrush currents at power ON will shorten the life of the converter circuit, frequent starts and stops of the magnetic
contactor must be avoided.
234
Useful functions
(1) Life alarm display and signal output (Y90 signal, Pr. 255)
Whether any of the control circuit capacitor, main circuit capacitor, cooling fan and inrush current limit circuit has reached
the life alarm output level or not can be checked by Pr. 255 Life alarm status display and life alarm signal (Y90).
bit 15 7 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1
Pr. 255 read Pr. 255 setting read
bit0 Control circuit capacitor life
bit1 Main circuit capacitor life Bit image is displayed
bit2 Cooling fan life in decimal
bit3 Inrush current limit circuit life
Inrush Current
Pr. 255 Bit Cooling Main Circuit Control Circuit
Suppression
(decimal) (binary) Fan Life Capacitor Life Capacitor Life
Circuit Life
15 1111    
14 1110    
13 1101    
12 1100    
11 1011    
10 1010    
9 1001    
8 1000    
7 0111    
6 0110    
5 0101    
4 0100    
3 0011    
2 0010    
1 0001    
0 0000    
: With warnings, : Without warnings
The life alarm signal (Y90) turns ON when any of the control circuit capacitor, main circuit capacitor, cooling fan and inrush
current limit circuit reaches the life alarm output level.
For the terminal used for the Y90 signal, set "90" (positive logic) or "190" (negative logic) to Pr. 190, Pr. 192 or Pr. 197 (output
terminal function selection).
NOTE
(2) Inrush current limit circuit life display (Pr. 256)

The life of the inrush current limit circuit (relay, contactor and inrush resistor) is displayed in Pr. 256. 4
Activation of inrush current limit resistor circuit is counted. It is counted every 10,000 times (1%) and counts down from
100% (0 time).
PARAMETERS
As soon as 10% (900,000 times) is reached, Pr. 255 bit 3 is turned ON and also an alarm is output to the Y90 signal.
The inrush current limit resistor circuit activates under the following conditions:
At power-ON
At undervoltage occurrence (Refer to page 256)
At inverter reset
(3) Control circuit capacitor life display (Pr. 257)

The deterioration degree of the control circuit capacitor is displayed in Pr. 257 as a life.
In the operating status, the control circuit capacitor life is calculated from the energization time and temperature, and is
counted down from 100%.
As soon as the control circuit capacitor life falls below 10%, Pr. 255 bit 0 is turned ON and also an alarm is output to the
Y90 signal.
235
Useful functions
(4) Main circuit capacitor life display (Pr. 258, Pr. 259)
The deterioration degree of the control circuit capacitor is displayed in Pr. 258 as a life.
On the assumption that the main circuit capacitor capacitance at factory shipment is 100%, the capacitor life is displayed
in Pr. 258 every time measurement is made.
When the measured value falls to or below 85%, Pr. 255 bit 1 is turned ON and also an alarm is output to the Y90 signal.
Measure the capacitor capacity according to the following procedure and check the deterioration level of the capacitor
capacity.
1) Check that the motor is connected and at a stop.
2) Set "1" (measuring start) in Pr. 259.
3) Switch power OFF. The inverter applies DC voltage to the motor to measure the capacitor capacity while the inverter is
OFF.
4) After confirming that the LED of the operation panel is OFF, power ON again.
5) Check that "3" (measuring completion) is set in Pr. 259, read Pr. 258, and check the deterioration degree of the main
circuit capacitor.
Pr. 259 Description Remarks
0 No measurement Initial value
Measurement starts when the power
1 Measurement start
supply is switched OFF.
2 During measurement
3 Measurement complete
Only displayed and cannot be set
8 Forced end
9 Measurement error
REMARKS
 When the main circuit capacitor life is measured under the following conditions, "forced end" (Pr. 259 = "8") or "measuring error"
(Pr. 259 ="9") occurs or it remains in "measuring start" (Pr. 259 = "1"). Therefore, do not measure in such case.
In addition, even when "measurement completion" (Pr. 259 = "3") is confirmed under the following conditions, normal
measurement can not be done.
(a)FR-HC or FR-CV is connected.
(b)DC power supply is connected to the terminal P/+ and N/-.
(c)The power supply switched ON during measurement.
(d)The motor is not connected to the inverter.
(e)The motor is running (coasting)
(f)The motor capacity is two rank smaller as compared to the inverter capacity.
(g)The inverter is tripped or a fault occurred when power is OFF.
(h)The inverter output is shut off with the MRS signal.
(i)The start command is given while measuring.
(j)The parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) is connected.
(k)Use terminal PC as power supply.
(l)I/O terminal of the control terminal block is ON (continuity).
 Turning the power ON during measuring before LED of the operation panel turns OFF, it may remain in "measuring" (Pr. 259 =
"2") status. In such case, carry out operation from step 2.
POINT
For accurate life measurement of the main circuit capacitor, wait 3 hours or longer after turning OFF. The
temperature left in the main circuit capacitor affects measurement.
WARNING
When measuring the main circuit capacitor capacity (Pr. 259 Main circuit capacitor life measuring = "1"), the DC
voltage is applied to the motor for 1s at powering OFF. Never touch the motor terminal, etc. right after
powering OFF to prevent an electric shock.
236
Useful functions
(5) Cooling fan life display

The cooling fan speed of 50% or less is detected and "FN" is displayed on the operation panel and parameter unit (FR-
PU04/FR-PU07). As an alarm display, Pr. 255 bit 2 is turned ON and also an alarm is output to the Y90 signal.
REMARKS
 When the inverter is mounted with two or more cooling fans, "FN" is displayed with one or more fans with speed of 50% or less.
NOTE
 For replacement of each part, contact the nearest Mitsubishi FA center.
4
PARAMETERS
237
Useful functions
4.21.3 Maintenance timer alarm (Pr. 503, Pr. 504)
When the cumulative energization time of the inverter reaches the parameter set time, the maintenance timer output
signal (Y95) is output. (MT) is displayed on the operation panel.
This can be used as a guideline for the maintenance time of peripheral devices.
Parameter
Number
Displays the cumulative energization time of
the inverter in 100h increments.
(Reading only)
503 Maintenance timer 0 0 (1 to 9998)
Writing the setting of "0" clears the
cumulative energization time while Pr. 503
= "1 to 9998".
Time taken until when the maintenance
Maintenance timer alarm 0 to 9998
504 9999 timer alarm output signal (Y95) is output.
output set time
9999 No function
First power
ON
9998
(999800h)
Set "0" in Pr. 503
Maintenance
timer
(Pr. 503) Pr. 504
Time
Y95 signal OFF ON ON
MT display
 The cumulative energization time of the inverter is stored into the EEPROM every hour and is displayed in Pr. 503
Maintenance timer in 100h increments. Pr. 503 is clamped at 9998 (999800h).
 When the Pr. 503 value reaches the time set to Pr. 504 Maintenance timer alarm output set time (100h increments), the
maintenance timer alarm output signal (Y95) is output.
 For the terminal used for the Y95 signal output, assign the function by setting "95" (positive logic) or "195" (negative logic)
to Pr. 190, Pr. 192 or Pr. 197 (output terminal function selection).
NOTE
 The cumulative energization time is counted every hour. The energization time of less than 1h is not counted.
238
Useful functions
4.21.4 Current average value monitor signal (Pr. 555 to Pr. 557)
The average value of the output current during

Programmable controller
constant speed operation and the maintenance timer Output unit Input unit
value are output as a pulse to the current average Inverter
value monitor signal (Y93). Maintenance
The pulse width output to the I/O module of the time
programmable controller or the like can be used as a

guideline to know abrasion of machines, elongation of
belt and the maintenance time for aged deterioration Parts have
of devices. reached their life
The current average value monitor signal (Y93) is
output as pulse for 20s as 1 cycle and repeatedly
output during constant speed operation.
Parameter
Number
Time taken to average the current during start pulse
555 Current average time 1s 0.1 to 1s
output (1s).
556 Data output mask time 0s 0 to 20s Time for not obtaining (mask) transient state data.
Current average value Rated Reference (100%) for outputting the signal of the
557 monitor signal output inverter 0 to 500A
current average value.
reference current current
From acceleration to constant speed operation
Output frequency
Time
1 cycle (20s) Next cycle
Y93 signal
1) Data output mask time

When the speed has changed to 5) End pulse
constant from acceleration/deceleration, Output as low pulse
Y93 signal is not output for Pr. 556 time. shape for 1 to 16.5s
2) Start pulse 4) Maintenance timer pulse

4
Output as Hi pulse shape for 1s (fixed) The maintenance timer value (Pr. 503) is
Output current set in Pr. 555 time is averaged output as Hi pulse shape for 2 to 9s
(16000h to 72000h)
3) Output current average value pulse Pr. 503 100h
The averaged current value is output for 0.5 to 9s Signal output time = 5s
40000h
PARAMETERS
(10 to 180%) during start bit output.

Output current average value (A)
Signal output time = 5s
Pr. 557 (A)
 The pulse output of the current average value monitor signal (Y93) is shown above.
 For the terminal used for the Y93 signal output, assign the function by setting "93" (positive logic) or "193" (negative logic)
to any of Pr. 190 or Pr. 197 (Output terminal function selection). The function can not be assigned to Pr. 192 A,B,C terminal
function selection.
1) Setting of Pr. 556 Data output mask time

The output current is unstable (transient state) right after the operation is changed from the acceleration/deceleration state
to the constant speed operation. Set the time for not obtaining (mask) transient state data in Pr. 556.
239
Useful functions
2) Setting of Pr. 555 Current average time

The average output current is calculated during Hi output of start pulse (1s). Set the time taken to average the current
during start bit output in Pr. 555.
3) Setting of Pr.557 Current average value monitor signal output reference current
Set the reference (100%) for outputting the signal of the current average value. Obtain the time to output the signal from
the following calculation.
Output current average value
 5s (Output current average value 100%/5s)
Pr. 557 setting
Signal output time

Note that the output time range is 0.5 to 9s and the output time is either of the (s)
9
following values when the output current average value is the corresponding
percentage of the Pr. 557 setting.
Less than 10% ... 0.5s, more than 180% ... 9s 0.5
Example) when Pr. 557 = 10A and the average value of output current is 15A 10 180 (%)
As 15A/10A x 5s = 7.5, the current average value monitor signal is Output current average value
output as low pulse shape for 7.5s.
4) Setting of Pr. 503 Maintenance timer
After the output current average value is output as low pulse shape, the
maintenance timer value is output as high pulse shape. The output time of the
Signal output time

(s)
maintenance timer value is obtained from the following calculation. 9
Pr. 503  100
 5s (Maintenance timer value 100%/5s)
40000h 2
Note that the output time range is 2 to 9s, and it is 2s when the Pr. 503 setting is 16000 72000 (h)
Maintenance timer value
less than 16000h and 9s when exceeds 72000h.
REMARKS
 Mask of data output and sampling of output current are not performed during acceleration/deceleration.
 When the speed is changed to acceleration/deceleration from constant speed during start pulse output, the data is judged as
invalid. The start pulse is output as high pulse shape for 3.5s, and the end signal is output as low pulse shape for 16.5s.
The signal is output for at least 1 cycle even when acceleration/deceleration state continues after the start pulse output is
completed.
The speed is changed to deceleration

from the constant speed during start pulse output
Output frequency
Time
Previous cycle Invalid cycle (20s) Next cycle
Y93 signal
2) Start pulse 5) End pulse

Output as high pulse shape for 3.5s Output as low pulse shape for 16.5s
 When the output current value (inverter output current monitor) is 0A on completion of the 1 cycle signal output, the signal is not
output until the speed becomes constant next time.
 The current average value monitor signal (Y93) is output as low pulse shape for 20s (without data output) under the following conditions.
(a) When the motor is in the acceleration/deceleration state on completion of the 1 cycle signal output
(b) When 1-cycle signal output was ended during restart operation with the setting of automatic restart after instantaneous
power failure (Pr. 57  "9999")
(c) When restart operation was being performed at the point of data output mask end with the setting of automatic restart after
instantaneous power failure (Pr. 57  "9999")
NOTE
Pr. 503 Maintenance timer Refer to page 238
240
Useful functions
4.21.5 Free parameter (Pr. 888, Pr. 889)
You can input any number within the setting range of 0 to 9999.
For example, the number can be used:
 As a unit number when multiple units are used.
 As a pattern number for each operation application when multiple units are used.
 As the year and month of introduction or inspection.
Parameter
Number
888 Free parameter 1 9999 0 to 9999 Any values can be set. Data is held even
889 Free parameter 2 9999 0 to 9999 if the inverter power is turned OFF.
The above parameters allow their settings to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr.77 Parameter
write selection.
REMARKS
Pr. 888 and Pr. 889 do not influence the inverter operation.
4
PARAMETERS
241
Setting the parameter unit and operation panel
4.22 Setting the parameter unit and operation panel

Selection of rotation direction by
RUN key rotation
Pr. 40 242
of the operation panel direction selection
Switch the display language of the PU display language

Pr. 145 242
parameter unit selection
Use the setting dial of the operation
panel like a potentiometer for Operation panel
Pr. 161 243
frequency setting operation selection
Key lock of operation panel
Change the magnitude of change of
Magnitude of frequency
frequency setting by the setting dial Pr. 295 245
change setting
of the operation panel
Control of the parameter unit buzzer PU buzzer control Pr. 990 246
Adjust LCD contrast of the
PU contrast adjustment Pr. 991 246
parameter unit
4.22.1 RUN key rotation direction selection (Pr. 40)
Used to choose the direction of rotation by operating of the operation panel.
Parameter
Number
RUN key rotation direction 0 Forward rotation
40 0
selection 1 Reverse rotation
4.22.2 PU display language selection (Pr.145)
You can switch the display language of the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) to another.
Parameter
Number
0 Japanese
1 English
2 German
PU display language 3 French
145 1
selection 4 Spanish
5 Italian
6 Swedish
7 Finnish
242
4.22.3 Operation panel frequency setting/key lock selection (Pr. 161)
The setting dial of the operation panel can be used for setting like a potentiometer.
The key operation of the operation panel can be disabled.
Parameter Setting
Number Range
Setting dial frequency
0
setting mode
Key lock invalid
Setting dial
1
Frequency setting/key lock potentiometer mode
161 0
operation selection 10
Setting dial frequency
setting mode
Key lock valid
Setting dial
11
potentiometer mode
(1) Using the setting dial like a potentiometer to set the frequency
Operation example Changing the frequency from 0Hz to 50Hz during operation
Operation Display

mode.
appears.)
4. Turn until (Pr. 161) appears.
" "(initial value) appears.
6. Turn to change it to the set value " ".
7. Press to set.
Flicker Parameter setting complete!!

4
8. Mode/monitor check
Press twice to choose the monitor/
PARAMETERS
frequency monitor.
9. Press to start the inverter.
10.Turn until " " appears. The frequency flickers for about 5s.
The flickering frequency is the set frequency.
You need not press .
243
REMARKS
 If the display changes from flickering "50.00" to "0.00", the setting of Pr. 161 Frequency setting/key lock operation selection may not
be "1".
 Independently of whether the inverter is running or at a stop, the frequency can be set by merely turning the dial.
 When the frequency is changed, it will be stored in EEPROM as the set frequency after 10s.
NOTE
 When setting frequency by turning setting dial, the frequency goes up to the set value of Pr.1 Maximum frequency
(initial value: 120Hz). Adjust Pr.1 Maximum frequency setting according to the application.
(2) Disable the setting dial and key operation of the operation panel (Press [MODE] long (2s))
Operation using the setting dial and key of the operation panel can be invalid to prevent parameter change, and
unexpected start or frequency setting.
Set "10 or 11" in Pr. 161, then press for 2s to make the setting dial and key operation invalid.
When the setting dial and key operation are invalid, appears on the operation panel. If dial or key operation is
attempted while dial and key operation are invalid, appears. (When dial or key is not touched for 2s, monitor
display appears.)
To make the setting dial and key operation valid again, press for 2s.
REMARKS
 Even if the setting dial and key operation are disabled, the monitor display and are valid.
NOTE
 Release the operation lock to release the PU stop by key operation.
244
4.22.4 Magnitude of frequency change setting (Pr. 295)
When setting the set frequency with the setting dial, frequency changes in 0.01Hz increments in the initial status.
Setting this parameter increases the magnitude of frequency which changes according to the rotated amount of the
setting dial, improving operability.
Parameter Setting
Number Range
0 Function invalid
0.01
Magnitude of frequency The minimum varying width when the set
295 0 0.1
change setting frequency is changed by the setting dial can
1
be set.
10
The above parameters allow its setting to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77
Parameter write selection.
(1) Basic operation

When a value other than "0" is set in Pr. 295, the minimum varying width when the set frequency is changed by the setting dial
can be set.
For example, when "1.00Hz" is set in Pr. 295, one click (one dial gauge) of the setting dial changes the frequency in
increments of 1.00Hz2.00Hz3.00Hz.
When Pr. 295 = "1"
1 click 1 click 1 click
*One rotation of the setting dial equals to 24 clicks (24 dial gauges).
REMARKS
 When machine speed display is selected with Pr. 37, the minimum increments of the magnitude of change is determined by
Pr.295 as well. Note that the setting value may differ as speed setting changes the set machine speed and converts it to the
speed display again.
 When the set frequency (speed) is 100 or more, frequency is displayed in 0.1 increments. Therefore, the minimum varying
width is 0.1 even when Pr. 295  0.1.
 When the machine speed setting is 1000 or more, frequency is displayed in 1 increments. Therefore, the minimum varying
4
width is 1 even when Pr. 295  1.
NOTE
PARAMETERS
 For Pr. 295 , unit is not displayed .

 This parameter is valid only in the set frequency mode. When other frequency-related parameters are set, it is not
activated.
 When 10 is set, frequency setting changes in 10Hz increments. Be cautions for the excess speed. (in potentiometer
mode)
245
4.22.5 Buzzer control (Pr. 990)
You can make the buzzer "beep" when you press the key of the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07).
Parameter
Number
0 Without buzzer
990 PU buzzer control 1
1 With buzzer
The above parameter allow its setting to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write
selection.
REMARKS
Inverter alert faults with beep sounds when this parameter is set to activate the buzzer.
4.22.6 PU contrast adjustment (Pr. 991)
Contrast adjustment of the LCD of the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) can be performed.
Decreasing the setting value makes contrast light.
Parameter
Number
0: Light
991 PU contrast adjustment 58 0 to 63 
63: Dark
The above parameter is displayed as simple mode parameter only when the parameter unit FR-PU04/FR-PU07 is connected.
The above parameter allow its setting to be changed during operation in any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write
selection.
246
Parameter clear/ All parameter clear
4.23 Parameter clear/ All parameter clear
POINT
 Set "1" in Pr.CL Parameter clear, ALLC all parameter clear to initialize parameters. (Parameters are not cleared
when "1" is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write selection.)
 Refer to the extended parameter list on page 60 for parameters cleared with this operation.
Operation Display

mode.
Parameter clear
All parameter clear
" "(initial value) appears.
Parameter clear
7. Press to set.
All parameter clear
Flicker ··· Parameter setting complete!!


4
Setting Description
PARAMETERS
0 Clear is not executed.

Sets parameters back to the initial values. (Parameter clear sets back all parameters except calibration parameters,
1 terminal function selection parameters to the initial values.) Refer to the parameter list on page 60 for availability of parameter
clear and all parameter clear.
REMARKS
and are displayed alternately ... Why?

The inverter is not in the PU operation mode.
PU connector is used.
1. Press . [PU] is lit and the monitor (4-digit LED) displays "1". (When Pr. 79 = "0" (initial value))
2. Carry out operation from step 6 again.
247
Initial value change list
4.24 Initial value change list
Displays and sets the parameters changed from the initial value.
Operation Display

mode.
appears.)
* It may take several seconds

5. Pressing changes to the initial value for creating the initial value
change list screen. change list. " "
flickers while creating the list.
6. Turning displays the parameter number
changed.
Press to read the present set value.
Turn and press to change the
setting
(Refer to step 6 and 7 on page 59.) Flicker Parameter setting complete!!
Turn to read another parameter.
The display returns to after all

parameters are displayed.
7. Pressing in status returns to
the parameter setting mode.
 Turning sets other parameters.
 Pressing displays the change list again.
NOTE
 Calibration parameters (C1 (Pr. 901) to C7 (Pr. 905)) are not displayed even when these are changed from the initial
settings.
 Only simple mode parameter is displayed when simple mode is set (Pr. 160 = "9999")
 Pr. 160 is displayed independently of whether the setting value is changed or not.
 When parameter setting is changed after creating the initial value change list, the setting will be reflected to the initial
value change list next time.
Pr. 160 Extended function display selection Refer to page 165
C1 (Pr. 901) AM terminal calibration Refer to page 137
C2(Pr. 902) to C7(Pr. 905) (Frequency setting bias/gain parameter) Refer to page 156
248
Check and clear of the faults history
4.25 Check and clear of the faults history
(1) Check for the faults history
Monitor/frequency setting Parameter setting

[Operation panel is
[Parameter setting change]
used for operation]
Faults history
[Operation for displaying the faults history]
Past eight faults can be displayed with the setting dial.
(The latest fault is ended by ".".)
When no fault exists, i is displayed.
Output frequency Output current

Hz
A
Flickering Flickering
Flickering
Energization time ∗ Output voltage
Flickering Flickering
Faults history number

(The number of past faults is displayed.)
Press the
setting dial.
Flickering
Press the
setting dial.
4
Flickering
Press the
PARAMETERS
setting dial.
* The cumulative energization time and actual operation time are accumulated from 0 to 65535 hours, then cleared, and accumulated again from 0.
When the operation panel is used, the time is displayed up to 65.53 (65530h) in the indication of 1h = 0.001, and thereafter, it is added up from 0.
249
Check and clear of the faults history
(2) Clearing procedure
POINT
 Set "1" in Er.CL Fault history clear to clear the faults history.
Operation Display

2. Press to choose the parameter setting mode.

appears.)
3. Turn until (faults history clear)

appears.
4. Press to read the present set value. " " (initial

value) appears.
6. Press to set.
Flicker...Faults history clear complete!!

Pr. 77 Parameter write selection Refer to page 164
250
5 TROUBLESHOOTING
This chapter provides the "TROUBLESHOOTING" of this

product.
5.1 Reset method of protective function ......................................... 252 1

5.2 List of fault or alarm indications ................................................ 253
5.3 Causes and corrective actions ................................................... 254
5.4 Correspondences between digital and actual characters ....... 263
5.5 Check first when you have a trouble ......................................... 264
2
251
Reset method of protective function
When a fault occurs in the inverter, the inverter trips and the PU display automatically changes to one of the following fault or
alarm indications.
If the fault does not correspond to any of the following faults or if you have any other problem, please contact your sales
representative.
 Retention of fault output signal... When the magnetic contactor (MC) provided on the input side of the inverter is opened
when a fault occurs, the inverter's control power will be lost and the fault output will not be
held.
 Fault or alarm indication .......... When a fault or alarm occurs, the operation panel display automatically switches to the fault
or alarm indication.
 Resetting method .................... When a fault occurs, the inverter output is kept stopped. Unless reset, therefore, the inverter
cannot restart. (Refer to page 252)
 When any fault occurs, take the appropriate corrective action, then reset the inverter, and resume operation.
Not doing so may lead to the inverter fault and damage.
Inverter fault or alarm indications are roughly categorized as below.

(1) Error message
A message regarding operational fault and setting fault by the operation panel and parameter unit (FR-PU04 /FR-PU07)
is displayed. The inverter does not trip.
(2) Warnings
The inverter does not trip even when a warning is displayed. However, failure to take appropriate measures will lead to a
fault.
(3) Alarm
The inverter does not trip. You can also output an alarm signal by making parameter setting.
(4) Fault
When a fault occurs, the inverter trips and a fault signal is output.
REMARKS
 Past eight faults can be displayed using the setting dial.
5.1 Reset method of protective function
The inverter can be reset by performing any of the following operations. Note that the internal thermal integrated value of the
electronic thermal relay function and the number of retries are cleared (erased) by resetting the inverter.
Inverter recovers about 1s after the reset is released.
Operation 1: ...... Using the operation panel, press to reset the inverter.
(This may only be performed when a fault occurs (Refer to page 257 for
fault.))
Operation 2: ....... Switch power OFF once. After the indicator of the operation panel
ON
turns OFF, switch it ON again.
OFF
Operation 3: . ..... Turn ON the reset signal (RES) for more than 0.1s. (If the RES signal
Inverter
is kept ON, "Err." appears (flickers) to indicate that the inverter is in a
reset status.)
RES
PC
NOTE
 OFF status of the start signal must be confirmed before resetting the inverter fault. Resetting inverter fault with the
start signal ON restarts the motor suddenly.
252
List of fault or alarm indications
5.2 List of fault or alarm indications

Refer Refer
Operation Panel Operation Panel
Name to Name to
Indication Indication
Page Page
E--- Faults history 249 E.ILF Input phase loss 260
HOLD Operation panel lock 254 E.OLT Stall prevention stop 260
Error message
Brake transistor alarm

LOCD Password locked 254 E. BE 260
detection
Output side earth (ground)
to E.GF 260
Er1 to 4 Parameter write error 254 fault overcurrent at start
E.LF Output phase loss 260
Err. Inverter reset 255
External thermal relay
Stall prevention E.OHT 261
OL 255 operation
(overcurrent)
E.PTC PTC thermistor operation 261
Stall prevention
oL 255
(overvoltage) Parameter storage device
E.PE 261
Fault
Regenerative brake fault

RB 256
prealarm
E.PUE PU disconnection 261
Warning
Electronic thermal relay

TH 256
function prealarm E.RET Retry count excess 261
PS PU stop 256 E.5
CPU fault 262
MT Maintenance signal output 256 E.CPU
UV Undervoltage 256 Output current detection
E.CDO 262
value exceeded
SA Safety stop 257
E.IOH 262
fault
Alarm
FN Fan alarm 257

E.AIE Analog input fault 262
Overcurrent trip during
E.OC1 257 E.SAF Safety circuit fault 262
acceleration
E.OC2 257  If a fault occurs when using with the FR-PU04, "Fault 14" is displayed on the
constant speed
FR-PU04.
E.OC3 258
deceleration or stop
TROUBLESHOOTING
Regenerative overvoltage
E.OV1 258
trip during acceleration
E.OV2 258
trip during constant speed
Fault
E.OV3 trip during deceleration or 258
stop
Inverter overload trip
E.THT (electronic thermal relay 259
function)
Motor overload trip
E.THM (electronic thermal relay 259
function)
E.FIN Heatsink overheat 259
5
253
Causes and corrective actions
5.3 Causes and corrective actions

(1) Error message
A message regarding operational troubles is displayed. Output is not shut off.
Operation panel
HOLD
indication
Name Operation panel lock
Description Operation lock mode is set. Operation other than is invalid. (Refer to page 244)
Check point --------------
Corrective action Press for 2s to release lock.
Operation panel
LOCD
indication
Name Password locked
Description Password function is active. Display and setting of parameter is restricted.
Check point --------------
Enter the password in Pr. 297 Password lock/unlock to unlock the password function before operating. (Refer to page
Corrective action
166).
Operation panel
Er1
indication
Name Write disable error
 You attempted to make parameter setting when Pr. 77 Parameter write selection has been set to disable parameter write.
Description  Frequency jump setting range overlapped.
 The PU and inverter cannot make normal communication.
 Check the setting of Pr. 77 Parameter write selection. (Refer to page 164).
Check point  Check the settings of Pr. 31 to Pr. 36 (frequency jump). (Refer to page 87)
 Check the connection of the PU and inverter.
Operation panel
Er2
indication
Name Write error during operation
When parameter write was performed during operation with a value other than "2" (writing is enabled independently
Description
of operation status in any operation mode) is set in Pr. 77 and the STF (STR) is ON.
 Check the Pr. 77 setting. (Refer to page 164).
Check point
 Check that the inverter is not operating.
 Set "2" in Pr. 77.
Corrective action
 After stopping operation, make parameter setting.
Operation panel
Er3
indication
Name Calibration error
Description Analog input bias and gain calibration values are too close.
Check point Check the settings of C3, C4, C6 and C7 (calibration functions). (Refer to page 156).
Operation panel
Er4
indication
Name Mode designation error
 Appears if a parameter setting is attempted in the External or NET operation mode with Pr. 77  "2".
Description
 Appears if a parameter setting is attempted when the command source is not at the operation panel.
 Check that operation mode is PU operation mode.
 Check the Pr. 77 setting. (Refer to page 164).
Check point
 Check if a parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) is connected when Pr. 551 = "9999 (initial setting)."
 Check the Pr. 551 setting.
 After setting the operation mode to the "PU operation mode", make parameter setting. (Refer to page 168)
 After setting Pr. 77 = "2", make parameter setting.
Corrective action
 Disconnect the parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07), and make parameter setting.
 After setting Pr. 551 = "4", make parameter setting. (Refer to page 179).
254
Operation panel
Err.
indication
Name Inverter reset
 Executing reset using RES signal, or reset command from communication or PU
Description
 Displays at powering OFF.
Corrective action  Turn OFF the reset command
(2) Warning
When a warning occurs, the output is not shut off.
Operation panel FR-PU04
OL OL
indication FR-PU07
Name Stall prevention (overcurrent)
When the output current of the inverter exceeds the stall prevention operation level (Pr. 22 Stall
During prevention operation level, etc.), this function stops the increase in frequency until the overload current
acceleration decreases to prevent the inverter from resulting in overcurrent trip. When the overload current has
reduced below stall prevention operation level, this function increases the frequency again.
During When the output current of the inverter exceeds the stall prevention operation level (Pr. 22 Stall
constant- prevention operation level, etc.), this function reduces frequency until the overload current decreases to
Description
speed prevent the inverter from resulting in overcurrent trip. When the overload current has reduced below
operation stall prevention operation level, this function increases the frequency up to the set value.
When the output current of the inverter exceeds the stall prevention operation level (Pr. 22 Stall
During prevention operation level, etc.), this function stops the decrease in frequency until the overload current
deceleration decreases to prevent the inverter from resulting in overcurrent trip. When the overload current has
decreased below stall prevention operation level, this function decreases the frequency again.
 Check that the Pr. 0 Torque boost setting is not too large.
 Check that the Pr. 7 Acceleration time and Pr. 8 Deceleration time settings are not too small.
 Check that the load is not too heavy.
Check point
 Are there any failure in peripheral devices?
 Check that the Pr. 13 Starting frequency is not too large.
 Check that the Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level is appropriate
 Increase or decrease the Pr. 0 Torque boost setting by 1% and check the motor status. (Refer to page 77)
 Set a larger value in Pr. 7 Acceleration time and Pr. 8 Deceleration time. (Refer to page 99)
 Reduce the load weight.
 Try General-purpose magnetic flux vector control.
Corrective action  Change the Pr. 14 Load pattern selection setting.
 Set stall prevention operation current in Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level. (The initial value is 150%.) The
acceleration/deceleration time may change. Increase the stall prevention operation level with Pr. 22 Stall prevention
TROUBLESHOOTING
operation level, or disable stall prevention with Pr. 156 Stall prevention operation selection. (Operation at OL
occurrence can be selected using Pr. 156.)

oL oL
indication FR-PU07
Name Stall prevention (overvoltage)
 If the regenerative energy of the motor becomes excessive to exceed the regenerative energy
consumption capability, this function stops the decrease in frequency to prevent overvoltage trip.
During As soon as the regenerative energy has reduced, deceleration resumes.
Description
deceleration  If the regenerative energy of the motor becomes excessive when regeneration avoidance function
is selected (Pr. 882 = 1), this function increases the speed to prevent overvoltage trip.
(Refer to page 231).
 Check for sudden speed reduction.
5
Check point
 Check that regeneration avoidance function (Pr. 882, Pr. 883, Pr. 885, Pr. 886) is used. (Refer to page 231).
Corrective action The deceleration time may change. Increase the deceleration time using Pr. 8 Deceleration time.
255

PS PS
indication FR-PU07
Name PU stop
Stop with of the PU is set in Pr. 75 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection. (For Pr. 75 refer to
Description
page 161 .)
Check point Check for a stop made by pressing of the operation panel.
Corrective action Turn the start signal OFF and release with .

RB RB
indication FR-PU07
Name Regenerative brake prealarm
Appears if the regenerative brake duty reaches or exceeds 85% of the Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake duty value.
When the setting of Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake duty is the initial value (Pr. 70 = "0"), this warning does not occur. If
the regenerative brake duty reaches 100%, a regenerative overvoltage (E. OV_) occurs.
Description
The RBP signal can be simultaneously output with the [RB] display. For the terminal used for the RBP signal output,
assign the function by setting "7 (positive logic) or 107 (negative logic)" in Pr. 190, Pr. 192 or Pr. 197 (output terminal
function selection). (Refer to page 122).
 Check that the brake resistor duty is not high.
Check point
 Check that the Pr. 30 Regenerative function selection and Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake duty settings are correct.
 Increase the deceleration time.
Corrective action
 Check that the Pr. 30 Regenerative function selection and Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake duty settings.

TH TH
indication FR-PU07
Name Electronic thermal relay function prealarm
Appears if the cumulative value of the Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay reaches or exceeds 85% of the preset level. If
it reaches 100% of the Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay setting, a motor overload trip (E. THM) occurs.
Description The THP signal can be simultaneously output with the [TH] display. For the terminal used for THP signal output,
assign the function by setting "8 (positive logic) or 108 (negative logic)" in Pr. 190, Pr. 192 or Pr. 197 (output terminal
function selection). (Refer to page 122).
 Check for large load or sudden acceleration.
Check point
 Is the Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay setting is appropriate? (Refer to page 103)
 Reduce the load and frequency of operation.
Corrective action
 Set an appropriate value in Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay. (Refer to page 103)
Operation panel FR-PU04 ——

MT
indication FR-PU07 MT
Name Maintenance signal output
Indicates that the cumulative energization time of the inverter has reached a given time.
Description When the setting of Pr. 504 Maintenance timer alarm output set time is the initial value (Pr. 504 = "9999"), this warning
does not occur.
The Pr. 503 Maintenance timer setting is larger than the Pr. 504 Maintenance timer alarm output set time setting. (Refer to
Check point
page 238).
Corrective action Setting "0" in Pr. 503 Maintenance timer erases the signal.

UV ——
indication FR-PU07
Name Undervoltage
If the power supply voltage of the inverter decreases, the control circuit will not perform normal functions. In addition,
the motor torque will be insufficient and/or heat generation will increase. To prevent this, if the power supply voltage
Description decreases below about 115VAC (about 230VAC for 400V class), this function stops the inverter output and displays
.
An alarm is reset when the voltage returns to normal.
Check point Check that the power supply voltage is normal.
Corrective action Check the power supply system equipment such as power supply.
256

SA ——
indication FR-PU07
Name Safety stop
Description Appears when safety stop function is activated (during output shutoff).
Check if the shorting wire between S1 and SC or between S2 and SC is disconnected when not using the safety stop
Check point
function.
 When not using the safety stop function, short across terminals S1 and SC and across S2 and SC with shorting
wire for the inverter to run.
Corrective action  If is indicated when across S1 and SC and across S2 and SC are both shorted while using the safety stop
function (drive enabled), internal failure might be the cause. Check the wiring of terminals S1, S2 and SC and
contact your sales representative if the wiring has no fault.
(3) Alarm
When an alarm occurs, the output is not shut off. You can also output an alarm signal by making parameter setting.
(Set "98" in Pr. 190, Pr. 192 or Pr. 197 (output terminal function selection). Refer to page 122 ).
FN FN
indication FR-PU07
Name Fan alarm
For the inverter that contains a cooling fan, appears on the operation panel when the cooling fan stops due to
Description
an alarm or different operation from the setting of Pr. 244 Cooling fan operation selection.
Check point Check the cooling fan for an alarm.
Corrective action Check for fan alarm. Please contact your sales representative.
(4) Fault
When a fault occurs, the inverter trips and a fault signal is output.
E.OC1 OC During Acc
indication FR-PU07
Name Overcurrent trip during acceleration
When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds approximately 200% of the rated current during acceleration, the
Description
protective circuit is activated and the inverter trips.
 Check for sudden acceleration.
 Check that the downward acceleration time is not long for the lift.
 Check for output short-circuit/ground fault.
Check point  Check if the stall prevention operation level is set too high.
Check if the fast-response current limit operation is disabled.
 Check that regeneration is not performed frequently. (Check that the output voltage becomes larger than the V/F
TROUBLESHOOTING
reference value at regeneration and overcurrent occurs due to increase in motor current.)
 Increase the acceleration time. (Shorten the downward acceleration time for the lift.)
 When "E.OC1" is always lit at starting, disconnect the motor once and start the inverter.
If "E.OC1" is still lit, contact your sales representative.
Corrective action  Check the wiring to make sure that output short circuit/ground fault does not occur.
 Lower the setting of stall prevention operation level.
Activate the fast-response current limit operation. (Refer to page 82).
 Set base voltage (rated voltage of the motor, etc.) in Pr. 19 Base frequency voltage. (Refer to page 88)

E.OC2 Stedy Spd OC
indication FR-PU07
Name Overcurrent trip during constant speed
Description
When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds approximately 200% of the rated current during constant speed 5
operation, the protective circuit is activated and the inverter trips.
 Check for sudden load change.
Check point
 Check if the stall prevention operation level is set too high.
 Keep load stable.
 Check the wiring to make sure that output short circuit/ground fault does not occur.
Corrective action
Activate the fast-response current limit operation. (Refer to page 82).
257

E.OC3 OC During Dec
indication FR-PU07
Name Overcurrent trip during deceleration or stop
When the inverter output current reaches or exceeds approximately 200% of the rated inverter current during
Description
deceleration (other than acceleration or constant speed), the protective circuit is activated and the inverter trips.
 Check for sudden speed reduction.
Check point  Check for too fast operation of the motor's mechanical brake.
 Check if the stall prevention operation level is set too high.
 Increase the deceleration time.
 Check the wiring to make sure that output short circuit/ground fault does not occur.
Corrective action  Check the mechanical brake operation.
Activate the fast-response current limit operation.(Refer to page 82).

E.OV1 OV During Acc
indication FR-PU07
Name Regenerative overvoltage trip during acceleration
If regenerative energy causes the inverter's internal main circuit DC voltage to reach or exceed the specified value,
Description the protective circuit is activated and the inverter trips. The circuit may also be activated by a surge voltage produced
in the power supply system.
 Check for too slow acceleration. (e.g. during downward acceleration in vertical lift load)
Check point
 Check that the setting of Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level is not too small.
 Decrease the acceleration time.
Corrective action  Use regeneration avoidance function (Pr. 882, Pr. 883, Pr. 885, Pr. 886). (Refer to page 231).
 Set the Pr.22 Stall prevention operation level correctly.

E.OV2 Stedy Spd OV
indication FR-PU07
Name Regenerative overvoltage trip during constant speed
Description the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output. The circuit may also be activated by a surge voltage
produced in the power supply system.
 Check for sudden load change.
Check point
 Check that the setting of Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level is not too small.
 Keep load stable.
 Use regeneration avoidance function (Pr. 882, Pr. 883, Pr. 885, Pr. 886). (Refer to page 231).
Corrective action
 Use the brake resistor, brake unit or power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) as required.
 Set the Pr.22 Stall prevention operation level correctly.

E.OV3 OV During Dec
indication FR-PU07
Name Regenerative overvoltage trip during deceleration or stop
Description the protective circuit is activated to stop the inverter output. The circuit may also be activated by a surge voltage
produced in the power supply system.
Check point Check for sudden speed reduction.
 Increase the deceleration time. (Set the deceleration time which matches the moment of inertia of the load)
 Make the brake cycle longer.
Corrective action
 Use regeneration avoidance function (Pr. 882, Pr. 883, Pr. 885, Pr. 886). (Refer to page 231).
 Use the brake resistor, brake unit or power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) as required.
258

E.THT Inv. Overload
indication FR-PU07
Name Inverter overload trip (electronic thermal relay function)
If the temperature of the output transistor element exceeds the protection level under the condition that a current not
Description less than the rated inverter current flows and overcurrent trip does not occur (200% or less), the electronic thermal
relay activates to stop the inverter output. (Overload capacity 150% 60s, 200% 0.5s)
 Check that acceleration/deceleration time is not too short.
 Check that torque boost setting is not too large (small).
Check point  Check that load pattern selection setting is appropriate for the load pattern of the using machine.
 Check the motor for use under overload.
 Check for too high surrounding air temperature.
 Increase acceleration/deceleration time.
 Adjust the torque boost setting.
Corrective action  Set the load pattern selection setting according to the load pattern of the using machine.
 Set the surrounding air temperature to within the specifications.

E.THM Motor Ovrload
indication FR-PU07
Name Motor overload trip(electronic thermal relay function)
The electronic thermal relay function in the inverter detects motor overheat due to overload or reduced cooling
capability during constant-speed operation, and pre-alarm (TH display) is output when the integrated value reaches
85% of the Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay setting, and the protection circuit is activated to stop the inverter output
Description
when the integrated value reaches the specified value. When running a special motor such as a multi-pole motor or
multiple motors, provide a thermal relay on the inverter output side since such motor(s) cannot be protected by the
electronic thermal relay function.
 Check the motor for use under overload.
Check point  Check that the setting of Pr. 71 Applied motor for motor selection is correct. (Refer to page 106).
 Check that stall prevention operation setting is correct.
Corrective action  For a constant-torque motor, set the constant-torque motor in Pr. 71 Applied motor.
 Check that stall prevention operation setting is correct. (Refer to page 82).
 Resetting the inverter initializes the internal thermal integrated data of the electronic thermal relay function.

E.FIN H/Sink O/Temp
indication FR-PU07
Name Heatsink overheat
If the heatsink overheats, the temperature sensor is actuated and the inverter trips.
The FIN signal can be output when the temperature becomes approximately 85% of the heatsink overheat protection
TROUBLESHOOTING
Description operation temperature.

For the terminal used for the FIN signal output, assign the function by setting "26 (positive logic) or 126 (negative
logic)" in any of Pr. 190, Pr. 192 or Pr. 197 (output terminal function selection). (Refer to page 122).
 Check for too high surrounding air temperature.
Check point  Check for heatsink clogging.
 Check that the cooling fan is not stopped (Check that is not displayed on the operation panel).
 Set the surrounding air temperature to within the specifications.
Corrective action  Clean the heatsink.
 Replace the cooling fan.
259
Operation panel FR-PU04 Fault 14

E.ILF
indication FR-PU07 Input phase loss
Name Input phase loss
Inverter trips when function valid setting (=1) is selected in Pr. 872 Input phase loss protection selection and one phase of
Description the three phase power input is lost. (Refer to page 149).
It may function if phase-to-phase voltage of the three-phase power input becomes largely unbalanced.
 Check for a break in the cable for the three-phase power supply input.
Check point
 Check that phase-to-phase voltage of the three-phase power input is not largely unbalanced.
 Wire the cables properly.
 Repair a break portion in the cable.
Corrective action
 Check the Pr. 872 Input phase loss protection selection setting.
 Set Pr. 872 = "0" (without input phase loss protection) when three-phase input voltage is largely unbalanced.
 Available only for three-phase power input specification model.

E.OLT Stll Prev STP
indication FR-PU07
Name Stall prevention stop
If the output frequency has fallen to 1Hz by stall prevention operation and remains for 3s, a fault (E.OLT) appears and
Description the inverter trips. OL appears while stall prevention is being activated.
E.OLT may not occur if stall prevention (OL) is activated during output phase loss.
Check point  Check the motor for use under overload. (Refer to page 83).
Corrective action  Reduce the load weight. (Check the Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level setting.)

E.BE Br. Cct. Fault
indication FR-PU07
Name Brake transistor alarm detection
When a brake transistor alarm has occurred due to the large regenerative energy from the motor etc., the brake
Description transistor alarm is detected and the inverter trips.
In this case, the inverter must be powered OFF immediately.
 Reduce the load inertia.
Check point  Check that the frequency of using the brake is proper.
 Check that the brake resistor selected is correct.
Corrective action Replace the inverter.

E.GF Ground Fault
indication FR-PU07
Name Output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent at start
The inverter trips if an earth (ground) fault overcurrent flows at start due to an earth (ground) fault that occurred on
Description the inverter's output side (load side). Whether this protective function is used or not is set with Pr. 249 Earth (ground)
fault detection at start.
Check point Check for a ground fault in the motor and connection cable.
Corrective action Remedy the ground fault portion.

E.LF E.LF
indication FR-PU07
Name Output phase loss
If one of the three phases (U, V, W) on the inverter's output side (load side) is lost during inverter operation (except
Description during DC injection brake operation and when output frequency is under 1Hz), inverter stops the output. Whether the
protective function is used or not is set with Pr.251 Output phase loss protection selection.
 Check the wiring. (Check that the motor is normal.)
Check point
 Check that the capacity of the motor used is not smaller than that of the inverter.
 Wire the cables properly.
Corrective action
 Check the Pr. 251 Output phase loss protection selection setting.
260

E.OHT OH Fault
indication FR-PU07
Name External thermal relay operation
If the external thermal relay provided for motor overheat protection or the internally mounted temperature relay in the
motor, etc. switches ON (contacts open), the inverter output is stopped.
Description
Functions when "7" (OH signal) is set in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection).
This protective function does not function in the initial status (OH signal is not assigned).
 Check for motor overheating.
Check point
 Check that the value of 7 (OH signal) is set correctly in any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 182 (input terminal function selection).
 Reduce the load and frequency of operation.
Corrective action
 Even if the relay contacts are reset automatically, the inverter will not restart unless it is reset.

E.PTC
indication FR-PU07 PTC activated
Name PTC thermistor operation
Inverter trips when resistance of PTC thermistor connected between terminal 2 and terminal 10 is more than the
Description value set in Pr. 561 PTC thermistor protection level. This protective function does not function when Pr. 561 setting is
initial value (Pr. 561 = "9999").
 Check the connection of the PTC thermistor.
Check point  Check the Pr. 561 PTC thermistor protection level setting.
 Check the motor for operation under overload.
Corrective action Reduce the load weight.

E.PE Corrupt Memry
indication FR-PU07
Name Parameter storage device fault (control circuit board)
Description Appears when a fault occurred in the stored parameters. (EEPROM fault)
Check point Check for too many number of parameter write times.
Please contact your sales representative.
Corrective action When performing parameter write frequently for communication purposes, set "1" in Pr. 342 to enable RAM write. Note
that powering OFF returns the inverter to the status before RAM write.

E.PUE PU Leave Out
indication FR-PU07
Name PU disconnection
 This function stops the inverter output if communication between the inverter and PU is suspended, e.g. the
parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) is disconnected, when "2", "3", "16" or "17" was set in Pr. 75 Reset selection/
disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection.
TROUBLESHOOTING
 This function stops the inverter output when communication errors occurred consecutively for more than permissible
Description
number of retries when a value other than "9999" is set in Pr. 121 Number of PU communication retries during the RS-
485 communication with the PU connector (use Pr. 502 Stop mode selection at communication error to change).
 This function also stops the inverter output if communication is broken within the period of time set in Pr. 122 PU
communication check time interval during the RS-485 communication with the PU connector.
 Check that the parameter unit cable is connected properly.
 Check the Pr. 75 setting.
Check point  Check that RS-485 communication data is correct. And check that the settings of communication parameter at
inverter match settings of the computer.
 Check that data is transmitted from the computer within a time set in Pr. 122 PU communication check time interval.
Connect the parameter unit cable securely.
Corrective action Check the communication data and communication settings.
Increase the Pr. 122 PU communication check time interval setting. Or set "9999" (no communication check).
Operation panel FR-PU04 5

E.RET Retry No Over
indication FR-PU07
Name Retry count excess
If operation cannot be resumed properly within the number of retries set, this function trips the inverter.
Description Functions only when Pr. 67 Number of retries at fault occurrence is set.
When the initial value (Pr. 67 = "0") is set, this protective function does not function.
Check point Find the cause of fault occurrence.
Corrective action Eliminate the cause of the error preceding this error indication.
261
E.5 FR-PU04 Fault 5

Operation panel
indication FR-PU07
E.CPU CPU Fault
Name CPU fault
Description Stops the inverter output if the communication fault of the built-in CPU occurs.
Check point Check for devices producing excess electrical noises around the inverter.
 Take measures against noises if there are devices producing excess electrical noises around the inverter.
Corrective action
 Please contact your sales representative.

E.CDO
indication FR-PU07 OC detect level
Name Output current detection value exceeded
Description This function is activated when the output current exceeds the Pr. 150 Output current detection level setting.
Check the settings of Pr. 150 Output current detection level, Pr. 151 Output current detection signal delay time, Pr. 166 Output
Check point
current detection signal retention time, Pr. 167 Output current detection operation selection. (Refer to page 127)

E.IOH
indication FR-PU07 Inrush overheat
Name Inrush current limit circuit fault
Description This function is activated when the resistor of the inrush current limit circuit overheats. The inrush current limit circuit fault
Check point Check that frequent power ON/OFF is not repeated.
Configure a circuit where frequent power ON/OFF is not repeated.
Corrective action
If the problem still persists after taking the above measure, please contact your sales representative.

E.AIE
indication FR-PU07 Analog in error
Name Analog input fault
Appears if voltage(current) is input to terminal 4 when the setting in Pr.267 Terminal 4 input selection and the setting of
Description
voltage/current input switch are different.
Check point Check the setting of Pr. 267 Terminal 4 input selection and voltage/current input switch. (Refer to page 153).
Either give a frequency command by current input or set Pr. 267 Terminal 4 input selection, and voltage/current input
Corrective action
switch to voltage input.
FR-PU04 Fault 14
Operation panel
E.SAF Fault
indication FR-PU07
E.SAF
Name Safety circuit fault
Appears when safety circuit is malfunctioning.
Description
Appears when one of the lines between S1 and SC, or between S2 and SC is opened.
 Check if the shorting wire between S1 and SC or between S2 and SC is disconnected when not using the safety
Check point stop function.
 Check that the safety relay module or the connection has no fault when using the safety stop function.
 When not using the safety stop function, short across terminals S1 and SC and across S2 and SC with shorting
wire. (Refer to page 29)
 When using the safety stop function, check that wiring of terminal S1, S2 and SC is correct and the safety stop
Corrective action
input signal from safety relay module is operating properly. Refer to the Safety stop function instruction manual (BCN-
A211508-000 for sink-logic safety terminal model, BCN-A211508-005 for source-logic safety terminal model) for causes
and countermeasures.
NOTE
 If protective functions of E.ILF, E.AIE, E.IOH, E.PTC, E.CDO, E.SAF are activated when using the FR-PU04, "Fault 14"
is displayed.
Also when the faults history is checked on the FR-PU04, the display is "E.14".
 If faults other than the above appear, contact your sales representative.
262
Correspondences between digital and actual characters
5.4 Correspondences between digital and actual characters
There are the following correspondences between the actual alphanumeric characters and the digital characters displayed on
the operation panel:
Actual Digital Actual Digital Actual Digital
0 A M
1 B N
2 C O
3 D o
4 E P
5 F S
6 G T
7 H U
8 I V
9 J r
L -
TROUBLESHOOTING
263
Check first when you have a trouble
5.5 Check first when you have a trouble
POINT
 If the cause is still unknown after every check, it is recommended to initialize the parameters (initial value) then
set the required parameter values and check again.
5.5.1 Motor does not start

Refer
Check
Possible Cause Countermeasures to
points
page
Power ON moulded case circuit breaker (MCCB), an
earth leakage circuit breaker (ELB), or a magnetic
Appropriate power supply voltage is not applied.
contactor (MC). —
(Operation panel display is not provided.)
Check for the decreased input voltage, input phase loss,
Main
and wiring.
Circuit
Motor is not connected properly. Check the wiring between the inverter and the motor. 16
Securely fit a jumper across P/+ to P1.
The jumper across P/+ to P1 is disconnected. When using a DC reactor (FR-HEL), remove the jumper 39
across P/+ to P1, and then connect the DC reactor.
Check the start command source, and input a start
signal.
Start signal is not input. 171
PU operation mode:
External operation mode : STF/STR signal
Turn ON only one of the forward and reverse rotation
start signals (STF or STR).
Both the forward and reverse rotation start signals (STF,
If the STF and STR signals are turned ON 20
STR) are input simultaneously.
simultaneously in the initial setting, a stop command is
given.
Frequency command is zero. Check the frequency command source and enter a
171
(RUN LED on the operation panel is flickering.) frequency command.
AU signal is not ON when terminal 4 is used for
Turn ON the AU signal.
frequency setting. 153
Turning ON the AU signal activates terminal 4 input.
(RUN LED on the operation panel is flickering.)
Turn MRS or RES signal OFF.
Input Output stop signal (MRS) or reset signal (RES) is ON. Inverter starts the operation with a given start command
118,
Signal (RUN LED on the operation panel flickers while MRS and a frequency command after turning OFF MRS or
252
signal is ON.) RES signal.
Before turning OFF, ensure the safety.
Check that the control logic switchover jumper connector
Jumper connector of sink - source is wrongly selected. is correctly installed.
24
(RUN LED on the operation panel is flickering.) If it is not installed correctly, input signal is not
recognized.
Shorting wires between S1 and SC, S2 and SC are Short between S1 and SC, S2 and SC with shorting
20
disconnected. wires.
Voltage/current input switch is not correctly set for analog Set Pr. 73, Pr. 267, and a voltage/current input switch
input signal (0 to 5V/0 to 10V, 4 to 20mA). correctly, then input an analog signal in accordance with 20
(RUN LED on the operation panel is flickering.) the setting.
During the External operation mode, check the method
was pressed.
256
of restarting from a input stop from PU.
(Operation panel indication is (PS).)
Check the connection.
Two-wire or three-wire type connection is wrong. 120
Connect STOP signal when three-wire type is used.
264
Refer
Check
points
page
Increase Pr. 0 setting by 0.5% increments while
Pr. 0 Torque boost setting is improper when V/F control is
observing the rotation of a motor. 77
used.
If that makes no difference, decrease the setting.
Check the Pr. 78 setting.
Pr. 78 Reverse rotation prevention selection is set. Set Pr. 78 when you want to limit the motor rotation to 165
only one direction.
Select the operation mode which corresponds with input
Pr. 79 Operation mode selection setting is wrong. 171
methods of start command and frequency command.
Bias and gain (calibration parameter C2 to C7) settings Check the bias and gain (calibration parameter C2 to C7)
156
are improper. settings.
Set running frequency higher than Pr. 13.
Pr. 13 Starting frequency setting is greater than the
The inverter does not start if the frequency setting signal 101
running frequency.
is less than the value set in Pr. 13.
Frequency settings of various running frequency (such Set the frequency command according to the
as multi-speed operation) are zero. application. 86
Especially, Pr. 1 Maximum frequency is zero. Set Pr. 1 higher than the actual frequency used.
Pr. 15 Jog frequency setting is lower than Pr. 13 Starting Set Pr. 15 Jog frequency higher than Pr. 13 Starting
94
frequency. frequency.
Check Pr. 79, Pr. 338, Pr. 339, Pr. 551, and select an 168,
Operation mode and a writing device do not match.
operation mode suitable for the purpose. 179
Parameter Start signal operation selection is set by the Pr. 250 Stop Check Pr. 250 setting and connection of STF and STR
120
Setting selection signals.
When power is restored, ensure the safety, and turn
Inverter decelerated to a stop when power failure
OFF the start signal once, then turn ON again to restart. 145
deceleration stop function is selected.
Inverter restarts when Pr. 261 = "2".
When offline auto tuning ends, press of the
operation panel for the PU operation. For the External

operation, turn OFF the start signal (STF or STR).
Performing auto tuning. 108
This operation resets the offline auto tuning, and the
PU's monitor display returns to the normal indication.
(Without this operation, next operation cannot be
started.)
TROUBLESHOOTING
 Disable the automatic restart after instantaneous

Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure
power failure function and power failure stop function.
function or power failure stop function is activated.
 Reduce the load. 139,
(Performing overload operation with single-phase
 Increase the acceleration time if the automatic restart 145
power input specification model may cause voltage
after instantaneous power failure function or power
insufficiency, and results in a detection of power failure.)
failure stop function occurred during acceleration.
Load is too heavy. Reduce the load. —
Load
Shaft is locked. Inspect the machine (motor). —
When any fault occurs, take an appropriate corrective
Others Operation panel display shows an error (e.g. E.OC1). action, then reset the inverter, and resume the 253
operation.
265
5.5.2 Motor or machine is making abnormal acoustic noise

Refer
Check
points
page
Input
Take countermeasures against EMI. 44
signal Disturbance due to EMI when frequency command is
Parameter given from analog input (terminal 2, 4). Increase the Pr. 74 Input filter time constant if steady
155
Setting operation cannot be performed due to EMI.
In the initial setting, Pr. 240 Soft-PWM operation selection is
enabled to change motor noise to an unoffending
No carrier frequency noises (metallic noises) are
complex tone. Therefore, no carrier frequency noises 151
generated.
(metallic noises) are generated.
Set Pr. 240 = "0" to disable this function.
Set Pr. 31 to Pr. 36 (Frequency jump).
When it is desired to avoid resonance attributable to the
Resonance occurs. (output frequency) 87
natural frequency of a mechanical system, these
parameters allow resonant frequencies to be jumped.
Parameter Change Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection setting.
Setting Changing the PWM carrier frequency produces an effect
Resonance occurs. (carrier frequency) 151
on avoiding the resonance frequency of a mechanical
system or a motor.
Auto tuning is not performed under General-purpose
Perform offline auto tuning. 108
magnetic flux vector control.
To stabilize the measured value, change the proportional
band (Pr. 129) to a larger value, the integral time (Pr. 130)
Gain adjustment during PID control is insufficient. to a slightly longer time, and the differential time (Pr. 134) 215
to a slightly shorter time.
Check the calibration of set point and measured value.
Adjust machine/equipment so that there is no
Others Mechanical looseness —
mechanical looseness.
Operating with output phase loss Check the motor wiring. —
Motor
Contact the motor manufacturer.
266
5.5.3 Inverter generates abnormal noise

Refer
Check
points
page
Fan cover was not correctly installed when a cooling fan
Fan Install a fan cover correctly. 277
was replaced.
5.5.4 Motor generates heat abnormally

Refer
Check
points
page
Motor fan is not working Clean the motor fan.
—
Motor (Dust is accumulated.) Improve the environment.
Phase to phase insulation of the motor is insufficient. Check the insulation of the motor. —
Main Check the output voltage of the inverter.
The inverter output voltage (U, V, W) are unbalanced. 273
Circuit Check the insulation of the motor.
Parameter
The Pr. 71 Applied motor setting is wrong. Check the Pr. 71 Applied motor setting. 106
Setting
— Motor current is large. Refer to "5.5.11 Motor current is too large" 269
5.5.5 Motor rotates in the opposite direction

Refer
Check
points
page
Main Phase sequence of output terminals U, V and W is Connect phase sequence of the output cables (terminal
16
Circuit incorrect. U, V, W) to the motor correctly
The start signals (forward rotation, reverse rotation) are Check the wiring. (STF: forward rotation, STR: reverse
20
connected improperly. rotation)
Input
Adjustment by the output frequency is improper during
signal
the reversible operation with Pr. 73 Analog input selection Check the setting of Pr. 125, Pr. 126, C2 to C7. 155
setting.
Parameter Pr. 40 RUN key rotation direction selection setting is
Check the Pr. 40 setting. 242
Setting incorrect.
TROUBLESHOOTING
5.5.6 Speed greatly differs from the setting

Refer
Check
points
page
Frequency setting signal is incorrectly input. Measure the input signal level. —
Input
Take countermeasures against EMI such as using
signal The input signal lines are affected by external EMI. 44
shielded wires for input signal lines.
Check the settings of Pr. 1 Maximum frequency, Pr. 2
Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Pr. 18, calibration parameter C2 to C7 settings 86
Parameter Minimum frequency, Pr. 18 High speed maximum frequency.
are improper.
Setting Check the calibration parameter C2 to C7 settings. 156
Pr. 31 to Pr. 36 (frequency jump) settings are improper. Narrow down the range of frequency jump. 87 5
Load Reduce the load weight. —
Set Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level higher according
Parameter Stall prevention function is activated due to a heavy
to the load. (Setting Pr. 22 too large may result in 82
Setting load.
frequent overcurrent trip (E.OC).)
Motor Check the capacities of the inverter and the motor. —
267
5.5.7 Acceleration/deceleration is not smooth

Refer
Check
points
page
Acceleration/deceleration time is too short. Increase acceleration/deceleration time. 99
Torque boost (Pr. 0, Pr. 46) setting is improper under V/F Increase/decrease Pr. 0 Torque boost setting value by
77
control, so the stall prevention function is activated. 0.5% increments to the setting.
For V/F control, set Pr. 3 Base frequency and Pr. 47 Second
88
The base frequency does not match the motor V/F (base frequency).
characteristics. For General-purpose magnetic flux vector control, set Pr.
108
84 Rated motor frequency.
Parameter
Reduce the load weight. —
Setting
Stall prevention function is activated due to a heavy
load.
Check the capacities of the inverter and the motor. —
If the frequency becomes unstable during regeneration
Regeneration avoidance operation is performed avoidance operation, decrease the setting of Pr. 886 231
Regeneration avoidance voltage gain.
5.5.8 Speed varies during operation

When the slip compensation is selected, the output frequency varies between 0 and 2Hz as with load fluctuates. This is a
normal operation and not a fault.
Refer
Check
points
page
Input
Multi-speed command signal is chattering. Take countermeasures to suppress chattering. —
signal
Load Load varies during an operation. Select General-purpose magnetic flux vector control. 78
Frequency setting signal is varying. Check the frequency setting signal. —
Set filter to the analog input terminal using Pr. 74 Input
155
filter time constant.
The frequency setting signal is affected by EMI.
Input Take countermeasures against EMI, such as using
44
signal shielded wires for input signal lines.
Use terminal SD (terminal PC when sink logic) as a
Malfunction is occurring due to the undesirable current
common terminal to prevent a malfunction caused by 25
generated when the transistor output unit is connected.
undesirable current.
Pr. 80 Motor capacity setting is improper for the
capacities of the inverter and the motor for General- Check the Pr. 80 Motor capacity setting. 78
purpose magnetic flux vector control.
Change the Pr. 19 Base frequency voltage setting (about
Fluctuation of power supply voltage is too large. 88
3%) under V/F control.
Disable automatic control functions, such as energy
Parameter saving operation, fast-response current limit function,
Setting regeneration avoidance function, General-purpose
magnetic flux vector control, and stall prevention.
Hunting occurs by the generated vibration, for example, —
During the PID control, set smaller values to Pr.129 PID
when structural rigidity at load side is insufficient.
proportional band and Pr.130 PID integral time.
Adjust so that the control gain decreases and the level of
safety increases.
Change Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection setting. 151
Wiring length exceeds 30m when General-purpose
magnetic flux vector control is performed.
Adjust Pr. 0 Torque boost by increasing with 0.5%
Others 77
Wiring length is too long for V/F control, and a voltage increments for low-speed operation.
drop occurs. Change to General-purpose magnetic flux vector
78
control.
268
5.5.9 Operation mode is not changed properly

Refer
Check
points
page
Check that the STF and STR signals are OFF.
Input
Start signal (STF or STR) is ON. When either is ON, the operation mode cannot be 168
signal
changed.
When Pr. 79 Operation mode selection setting is "0" (initial
value), the inverter is placed in the External operation mode
at input power ON. To switch to the PU operation mode,
Pr. 79 setting is improper. press on the operation panel (press when the 168
Parameter
parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) is used). At other
Setting
settings (1 to 4, 6, 7), the operation mode is limited
accordingly.
Operation mode and a writing device do not Check Pr. 79, Pr. 338, Pr. 339, Pr. 551, and select an 168,
correspond. operation mode suitable for the purpose. 179
5.5.10 Operation panel display is not operating

Refer
Check
points
page
Check for the wiring and the installation.
Main
Wiring or installation is improper. Make sure that the connector is fitted securely across 14
Circuit
terminal P/+ to P1.
Main
Circuit
Power is not input. Input the power. 14
Control
Circuit
Check the setting of Pr. 551 PU mode operation command
Command sources at the PU operation mode is not at
source selection.
Parameter the operation panel.
(If parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) is connected 179
Setting (None of the operation mode displays ( )
while Pr. 551 = "9999" (initial setting), all the operation
is lit.)
mode displays ( ) turn OFF.)
TROUBLESHOOTING
5.5.11 Motor current is too large

Refer
Check
points
page
77
control, so the stall prevention function is activated. 0.5% increments to the setting.
Set rated frequency of the motor to Pr. 3 Base frequency.
Use Pr. 19 Base frequency voltage to set the base voltage 88
V/F pattern is improper when V/F control is performed.
(e.g. rated motor voltage).
(Pr. 3, Pr. 14, Pr. 19)
Change Pr. 14 Load pattern selection according to the load
90
Parameter characteristic. 5
Setting Reduce the load weight. —
load.
269
5.5.12 Speed does not accelerate

Refer
Check
points
page
Check if the start command and the frequency
Start command and frequency command are chattering. —
command are correct.
Input The wiring length used for analog frequency command
Perform analog input bias/gain calibration. 156
signal is too long, and it is causing a voltage (current) drop.
Take countermeasures against EMI, such as using
Input signal lines are affected by external EMI. 44
shielded wires for input signal lines.
Check the settings of Pr. 1 Maximum frequency and Pr. 2
Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Pr. 18, calibration parameter C2 to C7 settings Minimum frequency. If you want to run the motor at 120Hz 86
are improper. or higher, set Pr. 18 High speed maximum frequency.
Check the calibration parameter C2 to C7 settings. 156
77
control, so the stall prevention function is activated. 0.5% increments so that stall prevention does not occur.
Set rated frequency of the motor to Pr. 3 Base frequency.
Use Pr. 19 Base frequency voltage to set the base voltage 88
V/F pattern is improper when V/F control is performed.
(e.g. rated motor voltage).
Parameter (Pr. 3, Pr. 14, Pr. 19)
Change Pr. 14 Load pattern selection according to the load
Setting 90
characteristic.
Reduce the load weight. —
load.
During PID control, output frequency is automatically controlled to make measured value = set point. 215
Main Brake resistor is connected between terminal P/+ and Connect an optional brake transistor (MRS type, FR-
35
Circuit P1 by mistake. ABR) between terminal P/+ and PR.
5.5.13 Unable to write parameter setting

Refer
Check
points
page
Stop the operation.
Input Operation is being performed (signal STF or STR is
When Pr. 77 = "0" (initial value), write is enabled only 164
signal ON).
during a stop.
Choose the PU operation mode.
You are attempting to set the parameter in the External
Or, set Pr. 77 = "2" to enable parameter write regardless 164
operation mode.
of the operation mode.
Parameter is disabled by the Pr. 77 Parameter write
Parameter Check Pr. 77 Parameter write selection setting. 164
selection setting.
Setting
Key lock is activated by the Pr. 161 Frequency setting/key Check Pr. 161 Frequency setting/key lock operation selection
243
lock operation selection setting. setting.
Operation mode and a writing device do not Check Pr. 79, Pr. 338, Pr. 339, Pr. 551, and select an 168,
correspond. operation mode suitable for the purpose. 179
270
6 PRECAUTIONS FOR
MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
This chapter provides the "PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE

AND INSPECTION" of this product.
6.1 Inspection items............................................................................ 272 1

6.2 Measurement of main circuit voltages, currents and powers .... 279
271
Inspection items
The inverter is a static unit mainly consisting of semiconductor devices. Daily inspection must be performed to prevent any
fault from occurring due to the adverse effects of the operating environment, such as temperature, humidity, dust, dirt and
vibration, changes in the parts with time, service life, and other factors.
Precautions for maintenance and inspection

For some short time after the power is switched OFF, a high voltage remains in the smoothing capacitor. When accessing the
inverter for inspection, wait for at least 10 minutes after the power supply has been switched OFF, and then make sure that
the voltage across the main circuit terminals P/+ and N/- of the inverter is not more than 30VDC using a tester, etc.
6.1 Inspection items
6.1.1 Daily inspection
Basically, check for the following faults during operation.

(1) Motor operation fault
(2) Improper installation environment
(3) Cooling system fault
(4) Abnormal vibration, abnormal noise
(5) Abnormal overheat, discoloration
6.1.2 Periodic inspection
Check the areas inaccessible during operation and requiring periodic inspection.
For a periodic inspection, contact your sales representative.
(1) Check for cooling system fault............Clean the air filter, etc.
(2) Tightening check and retightening......The screws and bolts may become loose due to vibration, temperature changes,
etc. Check and tighten them.
Tighten them according to the specified tightening torque (Refer to page 17).
(3) Check the conductors and insulating materials for corrosion and damage.
(4) Measure insulation resistance.
(5) Check and change the cooling fan and relay.
When using the safety stop function, periodic inspection is required to confirm that safety function of the safety system
operates correctly.
(For more details, refer to the Safety stop function instruction manual (BCN-A211508-000 for sink-logic safety terminal model, BCN-
A211508-005 for source-logic safety terminal model).)
272
Inspection items
6.1.3 Daily and periodic inspection
Interval
Area of Corrective Action at Customer's
Inspection Item Description Periodic
Inspection Daily Alarm Occurrence Check

Surrounding Check the surrounding air temperature,
 Improve environment
environment humidity, dirt, corrosive gas, oil mist, etc.
Check alarm location and
Check for unusual vibration and noise. 
retighten
General Overall unit
Check for a smear like adhered foreign
 Clean
material and oil.
Check that the main circuit voltages are
Power supply voltage  Inspect the power supply
normal.
(1) Check with megger (across main circuit
 Contact the manufacturer
terminals and earth (ground) terminal).
General (2) Check for loose screws and bolts.  Retighten
(3) Check for overheat traces on the parts.  Contact the manufacturer
(4) Check for stain  Clean
(1) Check conductors for distortion.  Contact the manufacturer
Conductors, cables (2) Check cable sheaths for breakage and
deterioration (crack, discoloration, etc.)
Stop the device and
Main circuit Terminal block Check for damage. 
contact the manufacturer.
(1) Check for liquid leakage.  Contact the manufacturer
(2) Check for safety valve projection and
Smoothing aluminum bulge.
electrolytic capacitor (3) Visual check and judge by the life check
PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

of the main circuit capacitor (Refer to 
page 274)
Check that the operation is normal and no
Relay  Contact the manufacturer
chatter is heard.
(1) Check that the output voltages across
phases with the inverter operated alone is  Contact the manufacturer
balanced
Operation check
(2) Check that no fault is found in protective
and display circuits in a sequence  Contact the manufacturer
Control protective operation test.
circuit, (1) Check for unusual odor and Stop the device and

Protective Overall discoloration. contact the manufacturer.
circuit (2) Check for serious rust development  Contact the manufacturer
Parts check
(1) Check for liquid leakage in a capacitor

Aluminum  Contact the manufacturer
and deformation trace
electrolytic
(2) Visual check and judge by the life check
capacitor
of the main circuit capacitor (Refer to 
page 274)
(1) Check for unusual vibration and noise.  Replace the fan
Fix with the fan cover　
Cooling fan (2) Check for loose screws and bolts 
Cooling fixing screws
system (3) Check for stain  Clean
(1) Check for clogging  Clean
Heatsink
(1) Check that display is normal.  Contact the manufacturer
Indication
Display
Stop the device and
Meter Check that reading is normal 
contact the manufacturer.
Check for vibration and abnormal increase Stop the device and
Load motor Operation check 
in operation noise contact the manufacturer. 6
 It is recommended to install a device to monitor voltage for checking the power supply voltage to the inverter.
 One to two years of periodic inspection cycle is recommended. However, it differs according to the installation environment.
For a periodic inspection, contact your sales representative.
273
Inspection items
6.1.4 Display of the life of the inverter parts

The self-diagnostic alarm is output when the life span of the control circuit capacitor, cooling fan and each parts of the inrush
current limit circuit is near its end. It gives an indication of replacement time.
The life alarm output can be used as a guideline for life judgement.
Parts Judgement Level
Main circuit capacitor 85% of the initial capacity
Control circuit capacitor Estimated remaining life 10%
Estimated remaining life 10%
(Power ON: 100,000 times left)
Cooling fan Less than 50% of the predetermined speed
POINT
Refer to page 234 to perform the life check of the inverter parts.
Checking the inverter and converter modules

<Preparation>
(1) Disconnect the external power supply cables (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) and motor cables (U, V, W).
(2) Prepare a tester. (Use 100 range.)
<Checking method>
Change the polarity of the tester alternately at the inverter terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U, V, W, P/+ and N/-, and check for
continuity.
NOTE
1. Before measurement, check that the smoothing capacitor is discharged.
2. At the time of discontinuity, the measured value is almost . When there is an instantaneous continuity, due to the
smoothing capacitor, the tester may not indicate . At the time of continuity, the measured value is several to
several tens-of ohms depending on the module type, circuit tester type, etc. If all measured values are almost the
same, the modules are without fault.
<Module device numbers and terminals to be checked>
Tester Polarity Tester Polarity

Measured Measured
Value Value Converter module P/+ Inverter module
R/L1 P/+ Discontinuity R/L1 N/- Continuity TR1 TR3 TR5
D1 D4
P/+ R/L1 Continuity N/- R/L1 Discontinuity
D1 D2 D3
Converter
module
S/L2 P/+ Discontinuity S/L2 N/- Continuity

D2 D5
P/+ S/L2 Continuity N/- S/L2 Discontinuity R/L1 U
C
T/L3 P/+ Discontinuity T/L3 N/- Continuity
D3 D6 V
P/+ T/L3 Continuity N/- T/L3 Discontinuity S/L2
U P/+ Discontinuity U N/- Continuity
TR1 TR4 T/L3 W
P/+ U Continuity N/- U Discontinuity
Inverter
module
V P/+ Discontinuity V N/- Continuity

TR3 TR6
P/+ V Continuity N/- V Discontinuity D4 D5 D6
W P/+ Discontinuity W N/- Continuity TR4 TR6 TR2
TR5 TR2
P/+ W Continuity N/- W Discontinuity N/-
(Assumes the use of an analog meter.)
* T/L3, D3 and D6 are only for the three-phase power input specification models.
274
Inspection items
6.1.5 Cleaning
Always run the inverter in a clean status.
When cleaning the inverter, gently wipe dirty areas with a soft cloth immersed in neutral detergent or ethanol.
NOTE
Do not use solvent, such as acetone, benzene, toluene and alcohol, as these will cause the inverter surface paint to peel off.
The display, etc. of the operation panel and parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07) are vulnerable to detergent and alcohol.
Therefore, avoid using them for cleaning.
6.1.6 Replacement of parts
The inverter consists of many electronic parts such as semiconductor devices.

The following parts may deteriorate with age because of their structures or physical characteristics, leading to reduced
performance or fault of the inverter. For preventive maintenance, the parts must be replaced periodically.
Use the life check function as a guidance of parts replacement.
Part Name Estimated lifespan  Description
Cooling fan 10 years Replace (as required)
Main circuit smoothing
10 years Replace (as required)
capacitor
On-board smoothing
10 years Replace the board (as required)
capacitor
Relays — as required
 Estimated lifespan for when the yearly average surrounding air temperature is 40°C
(without corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt etc.)
 Output current: 80% of the inverter rated current
NOTE

For parts replacement, contact the nearest Mitsubishi FA Center.
275
Inspection items
(1) Cooling fan

The replacement interval of the cooling fan used for cooling the parts generating heat such as the main circuit semiconductor
is greatly affected by the surrounding air temperature. When unusual noise and/or vibration is noticed during inspection, the
cooling fan must be replaced immediately.
Removal
1) Push the hooks from above and remove the fan
cover.
FR-D740-080(SC) or lower FR-D740-120(SC) or higher

FR-D720S-070(SC) and 100(SC)
2) Disconnect the fan connectors.

3) Remove the fan.

FR-D720S-070(SC) and 100(SC)
Fan cover
Fan cover
Fan connector
Fan
Fan
Fan connector
Example for FR-D740-160(SC)

276
Inspection items
Reinstallation
1) After confirming the orientation of the fan, reinstall
the fan so that the arrow on the left of "AIR FLOW"
faces up. AIR FLOW
<Fan side face>
2) Reconnect the fan connectors.

3) When wiring, avoid the cables being caught by the fan.

FR-D720S-070(SC) and 100(SC)
4) Reinstall the fan cover.

FR-D720S-070(SC) and 100(SC)
2. Insert hooks until you 2. Insert hooks until
hear a click sound. 1. Insert hooks you hear a click
1. Insert hooks into holes. sound.
into holes.

NOTE
 Installing the fan in the opposite of air flow direction can cause the inverter life to be shorter.
 Prevent the cable from being caught when installing a fan.
 Switch the power OFF before replacing fans. Since the inverter circuits are charged with voltage even after
power OFF, replace fans only when the inverter cover is on the inverter to prevent an electric shock
accident.
277
Inspection items
(2) Smoothing capacitors

A large-capacity aluminum electrolytic capacitor is used for smoothing in the main circuit DC section, and an aluminum
electrolytic capacitor is used for stabilizing the control power in the control circuit. Their characteristics are deteriorated by the
adverse effects of ripple currents, etc. The replacement intervals greatly vary with the surrounding air temperature and
operating conditions. When the inverter is operated in air-conditioned and normal environment conditions, replace the
capacitors about every 10 years.
When a certain period of time has elapsed, the capacitors will deteriorate more rapidly. Check the capacitors at least every
year (less than six months if the life will be expired soon).
The appearance criteria for inspection are as follows:
1) Case: Check the side and bottom faces for expansion
2) Sealing plate: Check for remarkable warp and extreme crack.
3) Check for external crack, discoloration, liquid leakage, etc. Judge that the capacitor has reached its life when the
measured capacitance of the capacitor reduced below 80% of the rating.
POINT
Refer to page 234 to perform the life check of the main circuit capacitor.
(3) Relays
To prevent a contact fault, etc., relays must be replaced according to the cumulative number of switching times (switching life).
278
Measurement of main circuit voltages, currents and powers
6.2 Measurement of main circuit voltages, currents and powers
Since the voltages and currents on the inverter power supply and output sides include harmonics, measurement data
depends on the instruments used and circuits measured.
When instruments for commercial frequency are used for measurement, measure the following circuits with the instruments
given on the next page.
 When installing meters etc. on the inverter output side
When the inverter-to-motor wiring length is large, especially in the 400V class, small-capacity models, the meters and CTs
may generate heat due to line-to-line leakage current. Therefore, choose the equipment which has enough allowance for
the current rating.
To measure and display the output voltage and output current of the inverter, it is recommended to use the terminal AM
output function of the inverter.
Three-phase power input
Input voltage Output voltage
Input current
Output current

Single-phase power input
Inverter
Ar W11 R/L1 U Au W21

Vr Vu
Three-phase
power supply As W12 S/L2 V Av To the motor
∗
∗ Vs Vv
∗ W13 Aw
At T/L3 W W22
∗
∗ Vt Vw
∗
P/+ N/-
: Moving-iron type
: Electrodynamometer type
V
+ -
: Moving-coil type
Instrument types
: Rectifier type
 At, As, Vt, Vs, W12, W13 are only for the three-phase power input specification models.
Examples of Measuring Points and Instruments
279
Measuring Points and Instruments

Item Measuring Point Measuring Instrument Remarks (Reference Measured Value)
R/L1 and S/L2 Commercial power supply
Power supply voltage Moving-iron type AC
S/L2 and T/L3 Within permissible AC voltage fluctuation (Refer to
V1 voltmeter
T/L3 and R/L1 page 286)
Power supply side
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 line Moving-iron type AC
current
current ammeter
I1
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 and Digital power meter
Power supply side
R/L1 and S/L2, (designed for inverter) or
power P1=W11+W12+W13 (3-wattmeter method)
S/L2 and T/L3, electrodynamic type single-
P1
T/L3 and R/L1 phase wattmeter
Calculate after measuring power supply voltage, power
supply side current and power supply side power.
Power supply side
[Three-phase power supply] [Single-phase power supply]
power factor
Pf1 P1 P1
Pf 1 = ------------------------  100 % Pf 1 = ----------------  100 %
3V 1  I 1 V1  I1
Rectifier type AC voltage

Output side voltage Across U and V, V and W, meter Difference between the phases is within 1% of the
V2 and W and U (moving-iron type cannot maximum output voltage.
measure)
Output side current Moving-iron type AC Difference between the phases is 10% or lower of
U, V and W line currents
I2 ammeter the rated inverter current.
Digital power meter
Output side power U, V, W and (designed for inverter) or P2 = W21 + W22
P2 U and V, V and W electrodynamic type single- 2-wattmeter method (or 3-wattmeter method)
phase wattmeter
Calculate in similar manner to power supply side power factor.
Output side power
P2
factor Pf 2 = ------------------------  100 %
Pf2 3V 2  I 2
Moving-coil type
Converter output Across P/+ and N/- Inverter LED display is lit. 1.35 × V1
(such as tester)
Frequency setting Across 2(positive) and 5
0 to 10VDC, 4 to 20mADC
signal Across 4(positive) and 5
Frequency setting Moving-coil type "5" is
Across 10(positive) and 5 5.2VDC
power supply (tester and such may be common.
Frequency meter used) Approx. 10VDC at maximum
Across AM(positive) and 5
signal (internal resistance 50k or frequency (without frequency meter)
more) When open
Start signal Across PC(positive) and "PC" is
20 to 30VDC
Select signal STF, STR, RH, RM, or RL common.
ON voltage: 1V or less
Continuity check
Across A and C Moving-coil type Normal Fault
Fault signal
Across B and C (such as tester) Across A and C Discontinuity Continuity
Across B and C Continuity Discontinuity
 Use an FFT to measure the output voltage accurately. An FA tester or general measuring instrument cannot measure accurately.
 When the carrier frequency exceeds 5kHz, do not use this instrument since using it may increase eddy-current losses produced in metal parts inside the
instrument, leading to burnout. In this case, use an approximate-effective value type.
 When the setting of Pr. 192 A,B,C terminal function selection is positive logic
 T/L3 is only for the three-phase power input specification models.
 A digital power meter (designed for inverter) can also be used to measure.
280
6.2.1 Measurement of powers
Use digital power meters (for inverter) for the both of inverter input and output side. Alternatively, measure using
electrodynamic type single-phase wattmeters for the both of inverter input and output side in two-wattmeter or three-
wattmeter method. As the current is liable to be imbalanced especially in the input side, it is recommended to use the three-
wattmeter method.
Examples of process value differences produced by different measuring meters are shown below.
An error will be produced by difference between measuring instruments, e.g. power calculation type and two- or three-
wattmeter type three-phase wattmeter. When a CT is used in the current measuring side or when the meter contains a PT on
the voltage measurement side, an error will also be produced due to the frequency characteristics of the CT and PT.
[Measurement conditions] [Measurement conditions]
Constant-torque (100%) load, note that 60Hz or Constant-torque (100%) load, note that 60Hz or
more should be constantly output 3.7kW, 4-pole more should be constantly output 3.7kW, 4-pole
motor, value indicated in 3-wattmeter method is 100%. motor, value indicated in 3-wattmeter method is 100%.
% %
120 120
100 100
80 3-wattmeter method (Electro-dynamometer type) 80 3-wattmeter method (Electro-dynamometer type)

2-wattmeter method (Electro-dynamometer type) 2-wattmeter method (Electro-dynamometer type)
Clip AC power meter Clip AC power meter
(For balanced three-phase load) (For balanced three-phase load)
60 60

Clamp-on wattmeter Clamp-on wattmeter
(Hall device power arithmetic type) (Hall device power arithmetic type)
0 20 40 60 80 100 120Hz 0 20 40 60 80 100 120Hz
Example of Example of
Measuring Inverter Input Power Measuring Inverter Output Power
6.2.2 Measurement of voltages and use of PT
(1) Inverter input side

As the input side voltage has a sine wave and it is extremely small in distortion, accurate measurement can be made with an
ordinary AC meter.
(2) Inverter output side
Since the output side voltage has a PWM-controlled rectangular wave, always use a rectifier type voltmeter. A needle type
tester can not be used to measure the output side voltage as it indicates a value much greater than the actual value. A
moving-iron type meter indicates an effective value which includes harmonics and therefore the value is larger than that of the
fundamental wave. The value monitored on the operation panel is the inverter-controlled voltage itself. Hence, that value is
accurate and it is recommended to monitor values using the operation panel.
(3) PT
No PT can be used in the output side of the inverter. Use a direct-reading meter. (A PT can be used in the input side of the
inverter.)
281
6.2.3 Measurement of currents

Use moving-iron type meters on both the input and output sides of the inverter. However, If the carrier frequency exceeds
5kHz, do not use that meter since an overcurrent losses produced in the internal metal parts of the meter will increase and the
meter may burn out. In this case, use an approximate-effective value type.
Since current on the inverter input side tends to be unbalanced, measurement of three phases is recommended. Correct value
can not be obtained by measuring only one or two phases. On the other hand, the unbalanced ratio of each phase of the output
side current should be within 10%.
When a clamp ammeter is used, always use an effective value detection type. A mean value detection type produces a large
error and may indicate an extremely smaller value than the actual value. The value monitored on the operation panel is accurate
if the output frequency varies, and it is recommended to monitor values (provide analog output) using the operation panel.
Examples of process value differences produced by different measuring meters are shown below.
[Measurement conditions] [Measurement conditions]

Value indicated by moving-iron type ammeter is 100%. Value indicated by moving-iron type ammeter is 100%.
% %
120 Clip AC power meter 120
Moving-iron Clip AC power meter
type Moving-iron type
100 100
80 80
Clamp-on Clamp meter
wattmeter current
60 60 measurement
Clamp meter Clamp-on
wattmeter current measurement
0 20 40 60Hz 0 20 40 60Hz
Example of measuring inverter input current Example of measuring inverter output current
6.2.4 Use of CT and transducer

A CT may be used in both the input and output sides of the inverter, but the one used should have the largest possible VA
ability because an error will increase if the frequency gets lower.
When using a transducer, use the effective value calculation type which is immune to harmonics.
6.2.5 Measurement of inverter input power factor

Calculate using effective power and apparent power. A power-factor meter can not indicate an exact value.
Effective power
Total power factor of the inverter =
Apparent power
3-phase input power found by 3-wattmeter method
=
3  V (power supply voltage)  I (input current effective value)
6.2.6 Measurement of converter output voltage (across terminals P/+ and N/-)
The output voltage of the converter is developed across terminals P/+ and N/- and can be measured with a moving-coil type
meter (tester). Although the voltage varies according to the power supply voltage, approximately 270VDC to 300VDC (540VDC
to 600VDC for the 400V class) is output when no load is connected and voltage decreases during driving load operation.
When energy is regenerated from the motor during deceleration, for example, the converter output voltage rises to nearly
400VDC to 450VDC (800VDC to 900VDC for the 400V class) maximum.
282
6.2.7 Insulation resistance test using megger
 For the inverter, conduct the insulation resistance test on the main circuit only as shown below and do not perform the test
on the control circuit. (Use a 500VDC megger.)
Motor
Power R/L1 U
supply S/L2 V IM
T/L3 W
500VDC
Inverter
megger
Earth (Ground)
NOTE
 Before performing the insulation resistance test on the external circuit, disconnect the cables from all terminals of
the inverter so that the test voltage is not applied to the inverter.
 For the continuity test of the control circuit, use a tester (high resistance range) and do not use the megger or buzzer.
6.2.8 Pressure test

Do not conduct a pressure test. Deterioration may occur.
283
MEMO
284
7 SPECIFICATIONS
This chapter provides the "SPECIFICATIONS" of this product.

7.1 Rating............................................................................................. 286

7.2 Common specifications ............................................................... 287 1
7.3 Outline dimension drawings........................................................ 288
285
Rating
7.1 Rating
7.1.1 Inverter rating
 Three-phase 400V power supply
Model FR-D740-(SC)-EC 012 022 036 050 080 120 160
Applicable motor capacity (kW) 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5
Rated capacity (kVA) 0.9 1.7 2.7 3.8 6.1 9.1 12.2
1.2 2.2 3.6 5.0 8.0 12.0 16.0
Rated current (A)
Output
(1.4) (2.6) (4.3) (6.0) (9.6) (14.4) (19.2)

Overload current rating 150% 60s, 200% 0.5s (inverse-time characteristics)
Voltage Three-phase 380 to 480V
Regenerative braking torque 100% 50% 20%
Rated input AC voltage/frequency Three-phase 380 to 480V 50Hz/60Hz
Power supply
Permissible AC voltage fluctuation 325 to 528V 50Hz/60Hz

Permissible frequency fluctuation ±5%
Power supply capacity (kVA) 1.5 2.5 4.5 5.5 9.5 12.0 17.0
Protective structure (JEM1030) Enclosed type (IP20)

Cooling system Self-cooling Forced air cooling
Approximate mass (kg) 1.3 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.5 3.3 3.3
 The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable for use of the Mitsubishi 4-pole standard motor.
 The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 230V for three-phase 200V class and 440V for three-phase 400V class.
 When operating the inverter with surrounding air temperature of 40°C, the rated output current is shown in ( ).
 The % value of the overload current rating indicated is the ratio of the overload current to the inverter's rated output current (surrounding air temperature of
50°C). For repeated duty, allow time for the inverter and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load.
 The maximum output voltage does not exceed the power supply voltage. The maximum output voltage can be changed within the setting range. However,
the pulse voltage value of the inverter output side voltage remains unchanged at about 2 that of the power supply.
 The braking torque indicated is a short-duration average torque (which varies with motor loss) when the motor alone is decelerated from 60Hz in the shortest
time and is not a continuous regenerative torque. When the motor is decelerated from the frequency higher than the base frequency, the average
deceleration torque will reduce. Since the inverter does not contain a brake resistor, use the optional brake resistor when regenerative energy is large. A
brake unit (FR-BU2) may also be used.
 The power supply capacity varies with the value of the power supply side inverter impedance (including those of the input reactor and cables).
 Single-phase 200V power supply

Model FR-D720S-(SC)-EC 008 014 025 042 070 100
Applicable motor capacity (kW) 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2
Rated capacity (kVA) 0.3 0.6 1.0 1.7 2.8 4.0
Rated current (A) 0.8 1.4 2.5 4.2 7.0 10.0
Output
Overload current rating 150% 60s, 200% 0.5s (inverse-time characteristics)

Voltage Three-phase 200 to 240V
Regenerative braking torque 150% 100% 50% 20%
Rated input AC voltage/frequency Single-phase 200 to 240V 50Hz/60Hz
Power supply
Permissible AC voltage fluctuation 170 to 264V 50Hz/60Hz

Permissible frequency fluctuation ±5%
Power supply capacity (kVA) 0.5 0.9 1.5 2.3 4.0 5.2
Protective structure (JEM1030) Enclosed type (IP20)
Cooling system Self-cooling Forced air cooling
Approximate mass (kg) 0.5 0.5 0.9 1.1 1.5 2.0
 The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable for use of the Mitsubishi 4-pole standard motor.
 The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 230V.
 The % value of the overload current rating indicated is the ratio of the overload current to the inverter's rated output current. For repeated duty, allow time for
the inverter and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load. If the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function (Pr. 57) or
power failure stop function (Pr. 261) is set and power supply voltage is low while load becomes bigger, the bus voltage decreases to power failure detection
level and load of 100% or more may not be available.
 The maximum output voltage does not exceed the power supply voltage. The maximum output voltage can be changed within the setting range. However,
the pulse voltage value of the inverter output side voltage remains unchanged at about 2 that of the power supply.
 The braking torque indicated is a short-duration average torque (which varies with motor loss) when the motor alone is decelerated from 60Hz in the shortest
time and is not a continuous regenerative torque. When the motor is decelerated from the frequency higher than the base frequency, the average
deceleration torque will reduce. Since the inverter does not contain a brake resistor, use the optional brake resistor when regenerative energy is large.
(Option brake resistor cannot be used for FR-D720S-008(SC) and 014(SC).) A brake unit (FR-BU2) may also be used.
 The power supply capacity varies with the value of the power supply side inverter impedance (including those of the input reactor and cables).
286
Common specifications
7.2 Common specifications

Soft-PWM control/high carrier frequency PWM control (V/F control, General-purpose magnetic flux vector control,
Control method
and Optimum excitation control are available)
Output frequency range 0.2 to 400Hz
0.06Hz/60Hz (terminal2, 4: 0 to 10V/10 bits)
Control specifications
Frequency setting Analog input 0.12Hz/60Hz (terminal2, 4: 0 to 5V/9 bits)

resolution 0.06Hz/60Hz (terminal4: 0 to 20mA/10 bits)
Digital input 0.01Hz
Frequency Analog input Within 1% of the max. output frequency (25°C 10°C)
accuracy Digital input Within 0.01% of the set output frequency
Voltage/frequency characteristics Base frequency can be set from 0 to 400Hz. Constant-torque/variable torque pattern can be selected
Starting torque 150% or more (at 1Hz)...when General-purpose magnetic flux vector control and slip compensation is set
Torque boost Manual torque boost
0.1 to 3600s (acceleration and deceleration can be set individually),
Acceleration/deceleration time setting
Linear and S-pattern acceleration/deceleration modes are available.
DC injection brake Operation frequency (0 to 120Hz), operation time (0 to 10s), and operation voltage (0 to 30%) can be changed
Stall prevention operation level Operation current level (0 to 200%), and whether to use the function or not can be selected
Two terminals
Analog input Terminal 2: 0 to 10V and 0 to 5V are available
Frequency setting Terminal 4: 0 to 10V, 0 to 5V, and 4 to 20mA are available
signal
The signal is entered from the operation panel or parameter unit.
Digital input
Frequency setting increment can be set.
Start signal Forward and reverse rotation or start signal automatic self-holding input (3-wire input) can be selected.
The following signals can be assigned to Pr. 178 to Pr.182 (input terminal function selection): multi-speed selection,
remote setting, second function selection, terminal 4 input selection, JOG operation selection, PID control valid
terminal, external thermal input, PU-External operation switchover, V/F switchover, output stop, start self-holding
Input signal (five terminals)
selection, traverse function selection, forward rotation, reverse rotation command, inverter reset, PU-NET operation
Operation specifications
switchover, External-NET operation switchover, command source switchover, inverter operation enable signal, and
PU operation external interlock.
Maximum/minimum frequency setting, frequency jump operation, external thermal relay input selection, automatic
restart after instantaneous power failure operation, forward/reverse rotation prevention, remote setting, second
Operational functions function, multi-speed operation, regeneration avoidance, slip compensation, operation mode selection, offline
auto tuning function, PID control, computer link operation (RS-485), Optimum excitation control, power failure
stop, speed smoothing control, Modbus-RTU
Output signal The following signals can be assigned to Pr.190, Pr.192 and Pr.197 (output terminal function selection): inverter
Open collector output (two terminals) operation, up-to-frequency, overload alarm, output frequency detection, regenerative brake prealarm, electronic
Relay output (one terminal) thermal relay function prealarm, inverter operation ready, output current detection, zero current detection, PID
lower limit, PID upper limit, PID forward/reverse rotation output, fan alarm, heatsink overheat pre-alarm,
deceleration at an instantaneous power failure, PID control activated, PID output interruption, safety monitor
Operating status output, safety monitor output 2, during retry, life alarm, current average value monitor, remote output, alarm
output, fault output, fault output 3, and maintenance timer alarm.
The following signals can be assigned to Pr. 158 AM terminal function selection: output frequency, output current
(steady), output voltage, frequency setting, converter output voltage, regenerative brake duty, electronic thermal
For meter
relay function load factor, output current peak value, converter output voltage peak value, reference voltage
Analog output
output, motor load factor, PID set point, PID measured value, output power, PID deviation, motor thermal load
(0 to 10VDC: one terminal)
factor, and inverter thermal load factor.
0 to 10VDC
The following operating status can be displayed: output frequency, output current (steady), output voltage,
frequency setting, cumulative energization time, actual operation time, converter output voltage, regenerative
Operating status brake duty, electronic thermal relay function load factor, output current peak value, converter output voltage peak
Indication
Operation panel value, motor load factor, PID set point, PID measured value, PID deviation, inverter I/O terminal monitor, output
power, cumulative power, motor thermal load factor, inverter thermal load factor, and PTC thermistor resistance.
Parameter unit Fault definition is displayed when a fault occurs. Past 8 fault records (output voltage/current/frequency/cumulative
(FR-PU07) Fault record
energization time right before the fault occurs) are stored.
Interactive
Function (help) for operation guide 
guidance
Overcurrent during acceleration, overcurrent during constant speed, overcurrent during deceleration, overvoltage
during acceleration, overvoltage during constant speed, overvoltage during deceleration, inverter protection thermal
Protective operation, motor protection thermal operation, heatsink overheat, input phase loss , output side earth (ground) fault
function overcurrent at start, output phase loss, external thermal relay operation , PTC thermistor operation, parameter
Protective/warning error, PU disconnection, retry count excess , CPU fault, brake transistor alarm, inrush resistance overheat, analog
function input error, stall prevention operation, output current detection value exceeded , safety circuit fault
Fan alarm, overcurrent stall prevention, overvoltage stall prevention, PU stop, parameter write error,
Warning
regenerative brake prealarm , electronic thermal relay function prealarm, maintenance output , undervoltage,
function
operation panel lock, password locked, inverter reset, safety stop
Surrounding air temperature -10°C to +50°C maximum (non-freezing)
Environment
Ambient humidity 90%RH or less (non-condensing)

Storage temperature -20°C to +65°C
SPECIFICATIONS
Atmosphere Indoors (without corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt etc.)
Altitude/vibration Maximum 1000m above sea level, 5.9m/s 2 or less at 10 to 55Hz (directions of X, Y, Z axes)
 As the FR-D740-022(SC) or lower, FR-D720S-042(SC) or lower are not provided with the cooling fan, this alarm does not function.
 This operation guide is only available with option parameter unit (FR-PU07).
 This protective function is not available in the initial status.
 This protective function is available with the three-phase power input specification model only.
 When using the inverters at the surrounding air temperature of 40°C or less, the inverters can be installed closely attached (0cm clearance).
 Temperatures applicable for a short time, e.g. in transit.
287
Outline dimension drawings
7.3 Outline dimension drawings
FR-D720S-008(SC) to 042(SC)
1-φ5 hole
128
118
Rating
plate
5 4
D1
5
56
D
68
Inverter Model D D1
FR-D720S-008(SC) to 014(SC) 80.5 10
FR-D720S-025(SC) 142.5 42
FR-D720S-042(SC) 162.5 62
(Unit: mm)
FR-D740-012(SC) to 080(SC)
FR-D720S-070(SC)
5
FAN *
2-φ5 hole
128
118
Rating
plate
5 5
5
W1 D1
W D
 FR-D740-012(SC), 022(SC) are not provided with the cooling fan.
Inverter Model D D1
FR-D740-012(SC), 022(SC) 129.5 54
FR-D740-036(SC) 135.5
FR-D740-050(SC) 155.5
60
FR-D740-080(SC) 165.5
FR-D720S-070(SC) 155.5
(Unit: mm)
288
FR-D720S-100(SC)
6
FAN
2-φ5 hole
138
150 Rating
plate
5 5
6
128 60
140 145
(Unit: mm)
FR-D740-120(SC), 160(SC)
6
FAN
2-φ5 hole
138
150
Rating
plate
5 10
6
208 68
220 155
SPECIFICATIONS
(Unit: mm)
289
Parameter unit (option) (FR-PU07)

<Outline drawing> <Panel cut dimension drawing>
25.05
(14.2) (11.45)
83
2.5
40 40
*1
*1
Air-bleeding
51
50
hole
4-R1
*1 *1
135
67
56.8
57.8
4-φ4 hole
26.5 26.5 (Effective depth of the
installation screw hole 5.0)
M3 screw *2
 When installing the FR-PU07 on the enclosure, etc., remove
screws or fix the screws to the FR-PU07 with M3 nuts.
80.3  Select the installation screw whose length will not exceed the
effective depth of the installation screw hole. (Unit: mm)
Enclosure surface operation panel (option) (FR-PA07)

<Outline drawing> <Panel cut dimension drawing>
68 22
22
20
11
36
45
59
2-M3 screw
24
(15.5)
(Unit: mm)
290
APPENDIX
This chapter provides the "APPENDIX" of this product.

291
Appendix 1 Specification change
Appendix 1-1 SERIAL number check
Check the SERIAL number indicated on the inverter rating plate or package. (Refer to page 2)
Rating plate example

   
Symbol Year Month Control number
SERIAL (Serial No.)
The SERIAL consists of one symbol, two characters indicating the production year and month, and six characters indicating the control number.
Last digit of the production year is indicated as the Year, and the Month is indicated by 1 to 9, X (October), Y (November), and Z (December).
Appendix 1-2 Changed function

(1) Addition of output signal for the safety function and change of initial value for Pr.160 and Pr.122.
The change applied to the February 2009 production or later.
 Output of safety monitor output signal (SAFE) is enabled by setting "80 or 180" to any of Pr.190, Pr.192, Pr.197 (Output
terminal function selection), and output of safety monitor output signal 2 (SAFE2) is enabled by setting "81 or 181" to
any of Pr.190, Pr.192, and Pr.197.(Refer to page 122)
 The function of terminal SO is set by Pr.197 SO terminal function selection. (Refer to page 122)
 Terminal SO can be turned ON/OFF by setting Pr.496 Remote output data 1. (Refer to page 129)
 The initial value of Pr.160 Extended function display selection is changed from "9999" to "0". (Refer to page 165)
 The initial value of Pr.122 PU communication check time interval is changed from "0" to "9999." (Refer to page 187)
(2) Changed operating conditions of the SAFE and SAFE2 signals and addition of the terminal SO monitor
The change applied to the January 2012 production or later.
 E.CPU has been added to the operating conditions of the SAFE and SAFE2 signals used in the safety stop function.
(Refer to page 29, 31)
 Monitoring of the terminal SO, which is an I/O terminal, has become available on the operation panel. (Pr.52 = "55").
(Refer to page 134)
 The terminal SO monitor has been assigned to the output terminal monitor bit 7 of RS-485 communication (Mitsubishi
inverter protocol, Modbus-RTU protocol). (Refer to page 200, 212)
 The SO signal (Pr.197) has been assigned to the inverter status monitor (extended) bit 9 of RS-485 communication
(Mitsubishi inverter protocol). (Refer to page 201)
 The SO signal (Pr.197) has been assigned to the inverter status bit 9 of the RS-485 communication (Modbus-RTU
protocol). (Refer to page 212)
292
Appendix 2 Index
Numerics E
15-speed selection (combination with three speeds RL, RM, Earth (ground) fault detection at start (Pr. 249) ...................149
RH)(REX signal)............................................................. 92, 116 Easy operation mode setting (easy setting mode)................58
Electronic thermal O/L relay pre-alarm (THP signal)..103, 122
A Electronic Thermal Relay Function Load Factor .................131
Acceleration time, deceleration time setting (Pr. 7, Pr. 8, Pr. Electronic thermal relay function prealarm (TH)..........103, 256
20, Pr. 21, Pr. 44, Pr. 45)...................................................... 99 EMC measures ...........................................................................44
Acceleration/deceleration pattern (Pr. 29) ........................... 102 Exhibiting the best performance for the motor (offline auto
Actual operation time............................................................... 131 tuning) (Pr. 71, Pr. 80, Pr. 82 to Pr. 84, Pr. 90, Pr. 96) ..108
Alarm output (LF signal) ................................. 122, 187, 203, 233 Extended parameter display (Pr. 160) ..................................165
Analog input fault (E.AIE) ....................................................... 262 External thermal relay input (OH signal).......................103, 116
Analog input selection (Pr. 73, Pr. 267) ............................... 153 External thermal relay operation (E.OHT) ....................103, 261
Applied motor (Pr. 71, Pr. 450).............................................. 106 External/NET operation switchover (turning ON X66 selects
Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure/flying start NET operation) (X66 signal) .......................................116, 176
(Pr. 30, Pr. 57, Pr. 58, Pr. 96, Pr. 162, Pr. 165, Pr. 298, Pr.
299, Pr. 611) ......................................................................... 139 F
Avoid mechanical resonance points (frequency jumps) (Pr. 31 Fan alarm (FN)..................................................................233, 257
to Pr. 36).................................................................................. 87 Fan fault output (FAN signal)..........................................122, 233
Fault or alarm indication ..................................................131, 249
B Fault output (ALM signal) ................................................122, 125
Base frequency, voltage (Pr. 3, Pr. 19, Pr. 47) ..................... 88 Fault output 3 (power-OFF signal) (Y91 signal) ..........122, 125
Basic operation (factory setting).............................................. 57 Faults history (E.---) .................................................................249
Bias and gain of frequency setting voltage (current) (Pr. 125, Fin overheat (E.FIN).................................................................259
Pr. 126, Pr. 241, C2 (Pr. 902) to C7 (Pr. 905)) ............... 156 Forward rotation command (assigned to STF terminal (Pr.
Brake transistor alarm detection (E.BE)............................... 260 178) only) (STF signal) ................................................116, 120
Buzzer control (Pr. 990).......................................................... 246 Free parameter (Pr. 888, Pr. 889) .........................................241
Frequency setting value ..................................................131, 136
C Front cover.....................................................................................5
Cables and wiring length .......................................................... 17
Changing the control logic ........................................................ 24 G
Changing the parameter setting value ................................... 59 General-purpose magnetic flux vector control
Checking the inverter and converter modules..................... 274 (Pr. 71, Pr. 80).........................................................................78
Cleaning .................................................................................... 275
Command source switchover (turning ON X67 makes Pr. 338 H
and Pr. 339 commands valid) (X67 signal).............. 116, 179 Heatsink overheat pre-alarm (FIN signal).....................122, 259
Communication EEPROM write selection (Pr. 342)........... 190 High speed operation command (RH signal) .................92, 116
Condition selection of function validity by second function
selection signal (RT signal) ................................................ 119 I
Connection of a DC reactor (FR-HEL) ................................... 39 Initial settings and specifications of RS-485 communication
Connection of a dedicated external brake resistor (MRS type, (Pr. 117 to Pr. 120, Pr. 123, Pr. 124, Pr. 549) .................186
FR-ABR).................................................................................. 35 Input phase loss (E.ILF) ..................................................149, 260
Connection of the brake unit (FR-BU2).................................. 37 Input terminal function selection (Pr. 178 to Pr. 182) .........116
Connection of the high power factor converter (FR-HC) ..... 38 Input Terminal Status...............................................................131
Connection of the power regeneration common converter Input/output phase loss protection selection
(FR-CV) ................................................................................... 39 (Pr. 251, Pr. 872) ..................................................................149
Connection to the PU connector ............................................. 33 Inrush current limit circuit fault (E.IOH) .................................262
Control circuit terminal ........................................................ 20, 22 Insulation resistance test using megger ...............................283
Converter Output Voltage....................................................... 131 Inverter I/O Terminal Monitor..........................................131, 134
Converter output voltage peak value .................................... 131 Inverter installation environment ................................................8
Cooling fan operation selection (Pr. 244)............................. 233 Inverter operation ready (RY signal) .............................122, 124
Cooling system types for inverter panel ................................. 10 Inverter output shutoff signal (MRS signal, Pr. 17) .............118
CPU fault (E.5, E.CPU)........................................................... 262 Inverter overload trip (electronic thermal relay function)
Cumulative energization time................................................. 131 (E.THT)...........................................................................103, 259
Cumulative power .................................................................... 131 Inverter placement......................................................................11
Current average value monitor signal (Pr. 555 to Pr. 557) 239 Inverter reset (Err.) ...........................................................252, 255
Current average value monitor signal (Y93 signal) .... 122, 239 Inverter reset (RES signal)..............................................116, 252
Inverter run enable signal (FR-HC/FR-CV connection) (X10
D signal) .............................................................................113, 116
Daily and periodic inspection ................................................. 273 Inverter running (RUN signal).........................................122, 124
Daily inspection ........................................................................ 272 Inverter thermal load factor .....................................................131
Dancer control (Pr. 44, Pr. 45, Pr. 128 to Pr. 134) ............. 223
DC injection brake (Pr. 10 to Pr. 12)..................................... 112 J
Detection of output frequency Jog operation (Pr. 15, Pr. 16) ...................................................94
(SU, FU signal, Pr. 41 to Pr. 43)........................................ 126 JOG operation selection (JOG signal) ............................94, 116
Display of the life of the inverter parts
(Pr. 255 to Pr. 259) ...................................................... 234, 274 L
During PID control activated (PID signal) ............ 122, 215, 223 Leakage currents and countermeasures ................................42
During retry (Y64 signal)................................................. 122, 147 Life alarm (Y90 signal).....................................................122, 234
Load pattern selection (Pr. 14) .................................................90
293
Low-speed operation command (RL signal) ..................92, 116 Periodic inspection................................................................... 272
Peripheral devices........................................................................ 4
M PID control (Pr. 127 to Pr. 134, Pr. 575, Pr. 577) ............... 215
Magnitude of frequency change setting (Pr. 295) ...............245 PID control valid terminal (X14 signal).................. 116, 215, 223
Maintenance signal output (MT).....................................238, 256 PID Deviation ............................................................ 131, 215, 223
Maintenance timer alarm (Pr. 503, Pr. 504) .........................238 PID Forward/Reverse Rotation Output
Maintenance timer signal (Y95 signal)..........................122, 238 (RL signal) ............................................................. 122, 215, 223
Manual torque boost (Pr. 0, Pr. 46) .........................................77 PID lower limit (FDN signal) ................................... 122, 215, 223
Maximum/minimum frequency (Pr. 1, Pr. 2, Pr. 18)..............86 PID Measured Value................................................ 131, 215, 223
Measurement of converter output voltage ............................282 PID Set Point ............................................................ 131, 215, 223
Measurement of currents ........................................................282 PID upper limit (FUP signal)................................... 122, 215, 223
Measurement of inverter input power factor.........................282 Power failure deceleration signal (Y46 signal) ............ 122, 145
Measurement of powers ..........................................................281 Power supply harmonics........................................................... 46
Measurement of voltages and use of PT ..............................281 Power-failure deceleration stop function (Pr. 261) ............. 145
Middle-speed operation command (RM signal).............92, 116 Pressure test............................................................................. 283
Mitsubishi inverter protocol PTC thermistor operation (E.PTC) ........................................ 261
(computer link communication) ..........................................191 PTC thermistor resistance ...................................................... 103
Modbus-RTU communication specifications (Pr. 117, Pr. 118, PU contrast adjustment (Pr. 991) .......................................... 246
Pr. 120, Pr. 122, Pr. 343, Pr. 502, Pr. 549) ......................203 PU disconnection (E.PUE)...................................... 161, 187, 261
Monitor display selection of DU/PU and terminal AM (Pr. 52, PU display language selection (Pr. 145) .............................. 242
Pr. 158, Pr. 170, Pr. 171, Pr. 268, Pr. 563, Pr. 564) .......131 PU operation external interlock (X12 signal) ............... 116, 168
Motor Load Factor ....................................................................131 PU stop (PS) ..................................................................... 161, 256
Motor overheat protection (Electronic thermal O/L relay, PTC PU/NET operation switchover (turning ON X65 selects PU
thermistor protection) (Pr. 9, Pr. 51, Pr. 561)...................103 operation) (X65 signal) ................................................ 116, 176
Motor overload trip (electronic thermal relay function) PU-External operation switchover (turning ON X16 selects
(E.THM)..........................................................................103, 259 External operation) (X16)............................................ 116, 175
Motor thermal load factor ........................................................131 PWM carrier frequency and Soft-PWM control (Pr. 72, Pr.
Motor Torque.............................................................................131 240) ........................................................................................ 151
N R
Names and functions of the operation panel .........................56 Reference of the terminal AM (analog voltage output) (Pr. 55,
Pr. 56) .................................................................................... 136
O Reference voltage output................................................ 131, 137
Operation by multi-speed operation (Pr. 4 to Pr. 6, Pr. 24 to Regeneration avoidance function (Pr. 665, Pr. 882, Pr. 883,
Pr. 27, Pr. 232 to Pr. 239) .....................................................92 Pr. 885, Pr. 886) ................................................................... 231
Operation mode at power-ON (Pr. 79, Pr. 340)...................178 Regenerative brake duty................................................. 113, 131
Operation mode selection (Pr. 79).........................................168 Regenerative brake prealarm (RB) ............................... 113, 256
Operation panel frequency setting/key lock operation Regenerative brake prealarm (RBP signal) ................. 113, 122
selection (Pr. 161) ................................................................243 Regenerative overvoltage trip during acceleration
Operation panel lock (HOLD) .........................................243, 254 (E.OV1) .......................................................................... 231, 258
Operation selection at communication error occurrence (Pr. Regenerative overvoltage trip during constant speed
121, Pr. 122, Pr. 502)...........................................................187 (E.OV2) .......................................................................... 231, 258
Optimum excitation control (Pr. 60) .......................................150 Regenerative overvoltage trip during deceleration or stop
Output current ...................................................................131, 136 (E.OV3) .......................................................................... 231, 258
Output current detection (Y12 signal) ...........................122, 127 Remote output (REM signal) .......................................... 122, 129
Output current detection function (Y12 signal, Y13 signal, Pr. Remote output selection
150 to Pr. 153) ......................................................................127 (REM signal, Pr. 495, Pr. 496) ........................................... 129
Output current detection value exceeded (E.CDO) ............262 Remote setting (RH, RM, RL signal)............................... 96, 116
Output Current Peak Value.............................................131, 136 Remote setting function (Pr. 59) .............................................. 96
Output frequency ..............................................................131, 136 Replacement of parts .............................................................. 275
Output frequency detection (FU signal) ........................122, 126 Reset selection/disconnected PU detection/PU stop selection
Output phase loss (E.LF) ................................................149, 260 (Pr. 75) ................................................................................... 161
Output power.............................................................................131 Response level of analog input and noise elimination
Output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent at start (Pr. 74) ................................................................................... 155
(E.GF).............................................................................149, 260 Retry count excess (E.RET)........................................... 147, 261
Output stop (MRS signal)................................................116, 118 Retry function (Pr. 65, Pr. 67 to Pr. 69) ................................ 147
Output terminal function selection Reverse rotation command (assigned to STR terminal (Pr.
(Pr. 190, Pr. 192, Pr. 197) ...................................................122 179) only) (STR signal) ............................................... 116, 120
Output Terminal Status....................................................131, 131 Reverse rotation prevention selection (Pr. 78) .................... 165
Output voltage...........................................................................131 RUN key rotation direction selection (Pr. 40) ...................... 242
Overcurrent trip during acceleration (E.OC1) ......................257
Overcurrent trip during constant speed (E.OC2).................257 S
Overcurrent trip during deceleration or stop (E.OC3).........258 Safety circuit fault (E.SAF).......................................... 29, 31, 262
Overload alarm (OL signal)...............................................82, 122 Safety monitor output (SAFE signal)..................................... 122
Safety monitor output 2 (SAFE2 signal) ............................... 122
P Safety stop (SA) ........................................................... 29, 31, 257
Parameter list ..............................................................................60 Safety stop function ............................................................. 29, 31
Parameter storage device fault Second function selection (RT signal) .......................... 116, 119
(control circuit board) (E.PE) ..............................................261 Selection of a regenerative brake (Pr. 30, Pr. 70) .............. 113
Parameter write disable selection (Pr. 77) ...........................164 Setting dial push......................................................................... 59
Parameter write error (Er1 to Er4) .........................................254 Slip compensation (Pr. 245 to Pr. 247)................................... 81
Password function ....................................................................166 Specification of main circuit terminal....................................... 16
Password locked (LOCD)........................................................254 Speed display and speed setting (Pr. 37) ............................ 130
294
Speed smoothing control (Pr. 653) ....................................... 152
Stall prevention (E.OLT) ................................................... 82, 260
Stall prevention (overcurrent) (OL) ................................. 82, 255
Stall prevention (overvoltage) (oL)................................ 231, 255
Stall prevention operation (Pr. 22, Pr. 23, Pr. 48, Pr. 66, Pr.
156, Pr. 157) ........................................................................... 82
Start command source and frequency command source
during communication operation
(Pr. 338, Pr. 339, Pr. 551) .................................................. 179
Start self-holding selection (STOP signal) ................... 116, 120
Start signal operation selection (STF, STR, STOP signal, Pr.
250) ........................................................................................ 120
Starting frequency and start-time hold function (Pr. 13, Pr.
571) ........................................................................................ 101
Stop selection (Pr. 250) .......................................................... 115
T
Terminal 4 input selection (AU signal).......................... 116, 153
Terminal AM calibration (calibration parameter C1
(Pr.901)) ................................................................................ 137
Terminal arrangement of the main circuit terminal, power
supply and the motor wiring ................................................. 16
Terminal connection diagram................................................... 14
Traverse function (Pr. 592 to Pr. 597) .................................. 229
U
Undervoltage (UV) ................................................................... 256
Up-to-frequency signal (SU signal) ....................................... 126
Use of CT and transducer ...................................................... 282
V
V/F switchover (V/F control is exercised when X18 is ON)
(X18 signal)........................................................................... 116
W
Wiring and configuration of PU connector ........................... 183
Wiring cover .................................................................................. 7
Wiring of control circuit.............................................................. 26
Z
Zero current detection (Y13 signal)............................... 122, 127
295
REVISIONS
*The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.
Print Date Manual Number Revision

Dec. 2007 IB(NA)-0600353ENG-A First edition
Mar. 2008 IB(NA)-0600353ENG-B Partial modification
 Introduced products on blade terminals
 Instruction Code (Multi command, Inverter type monitor)
Apr. 2008 IB(NA)-0600353ENG-C Addition
 FR-D720S-008 to 100
May 2008 IB(NA)-0600353ENG-D Partial addition
 Inverter's rated output current (FR-D740-012 to 160)
Jun. 2009 IB(NA)-0600353ENG-E Addition
 5.5 Check first when you have a trouble
 Setting values "80, 81, 180, 181" of Pr.190 and Pr.192 (Output terminal function
selection)
 Pr.197 SO terminal function selection
Modification
 Description for vibration
 Safety stop function
 Initial value of Pr.160 Extended function display selection.
 Initial value of Pr.122 PU communication check time interval.
Jan. 2012 IB(NA)-0600353ENG-F Addition
 FR-D740-012SC to 160SC
 FR-D720S-008SC to 100SC
Modification
 Safety stop function
For Maximum Safety

• Mitsubishi inverters are not designed or manufactured to be used in equipment or systems in situations that
can affect or endanger human life.
• When considering this product for operation in special applications such as machinery or systems used in
passenger transportation, medical, aerospace, atomic power, electric power, or submarine repeating
applications, please contact your nearest Mitsubishi sales representative.
• Although this product was manufactured under conditions of strict quality control, you are strongly advised to
install safety devices to prevent serious accidents when it is used in facilities where breakdowns of the product
are likely to cause a serious accident.
• Please do not use this product for loads other than three-phase induction motors.
296 IB(NA)-0600353ENG-F
INVERTER
FR-D700
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
FR-D700-EC
FR-D740-012(SC) to 160(SC) - EC
FR-D720S-008(SC) to 100(SC) - EC
INVERTER
OUTLINE
1
WIRING
2
PRECAUTIONS FOR USE

OF THE INVERTER 3
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
PARAMETERS
4
TROUBLESHOOTING
5
HEAD OFFICE: TOKYO BUILDING 2-7-3, MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN
PRECAUTIONS FOR
MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 6
SPECIFICATIONS
7
IB(NA)-0600353ENG-F (1201)MEE Printed in Japan Specifications subject to change without notice.
F
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
HEADQUARTERS EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES EURASIAN REPRESENTATIVES

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. EUROPE GEVA AUSTRIA ALFATRADE Ltd. MALTA TOO Kazpromavtomatika KAZAKHSTAN
German Branch Wiener Straße 89 99, Paola Hill Ul. Zhambyla 28
Gothaer Straße 8 AT-2500 Baden Malta- Paola PLA 1702 KAZ-100017 Karaganda
D-40880 Ratingen Phone: +43 (0)2252 / 85 55 20 Phone: +356 (0)21 / 697 816 Phone: +7 7212 / 50 10 00
Phone: +49 (0)2102 / 486-0 Fax: +43 (0)2252 / 488 60 Fax: +356 (0)21 / 697 817 Fax: +7 7212 / 50 11 50
Fax: +49 (0)2102 / 486-1120 TECHNIKON BELARUS INTEHSIS srl MOLDOVA
MITSUBISHIELECTRICEUROPEB.V.-org.sl. CZECH REP. Oktyabrskaya 19, Off. 705 bld. Traian 23/1
Czech Branch BY-220030 Minsk MD-2060 Kishinev
Avenir Business Park, Radlická 714/113a Phone: +375 (0)17 / 210 46 26 Phone: +373 (0)22 / 66 4242 MIDDLE EAST REPRESENTATIVE
CZ-158 00 Praha 5 Fax: +375 (0)17 / 210 46 26 Fax: +373 (0)22 / 66 4280
Phone: +420 - 251 551 470 SHERF Motion Techn. Ltd. ISRAEL
ESCO DRIVES & AUTOMATION BELGIUM HIFLEX AUTOM.TECHNIEK B.V. NETHERLANDS Rehov Hamerkava 19
Fax: +420 - 251-551-471 Culliganlaan 3 Wolweverstraat 22 IL-58851 Holon
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. FRANCE BE-1831 Diegem NL-2984 CD Ridderkerk Phone: +972 (0)3 / 559 54 62
French Branch Phone: +32 (0)2 / 717 64 30 Phone: +31 (0)180 – 46 60 04 Fax: +972 (0)3 / 556 01 82
25, Boulevard des Bouvets Fax: +32 (0)2 / 717 64 31 Fax: +31 (0)180 – 44 23 55
F-92741 Nanterre Cedex CEG INTERNATIONAL LEBANON
Koning & Hartman b.v. BELGIUM Koning & Hartman b.v. NETHERLANDS Cebaco Center/Block A Autostrade DORA
Phone: +33 (0)1 / 55 68 55 68 Woluwelaan 31 Haarlerbergweg 21-23
Fax: +33 (0)1 / 55 68 57 57 Lebanon - Beirut
BE-1800 Vilvoorde NL-1101 CH Amsterdam Phone: +961 (0)1 / 240 430
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. IRELAND Phone: +32 (0)2 / 257 02 40 Phone: +31 (0)20 / 587 76 00 Fax: +961 (0)1 / 240 438
Irish Branch Fax: +32 (0)2 / 257 02 49 Fax: +31 (0)20 / 587 76 05
Westgate Business Park, Ballymount INEA RBT d.o.o. BOSNIA AND HERZEGOVINA Beijer Electronics AS NORWAY
IRL-Dublin 24 Aleja Lipa 56 Postboks 487
Phone: +353 (0)1 4198800 BA-71000 Sarajevo NO-3002 Drammen
Fax: +353 (0)1 4198890 AFRICAN REPRESENTATIVE
Phone: +387 (0)33 / 921 164 Phone: +47 (0)32 / 24 30 00
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. ITALY Fax: +387 (0)33 / 524 539 Fax: +47 (0)32 / 84 85 77 CBI Ltd. SOUTH AFRICA
Italian Branch AKHNATON BULGARIA Fonseca S.A. PORTUGAL Private Bag 2016
Viale Colleoni 7 4, Andrei Ljapchev Blvd., PO Box 21 R. João Francisco do Casal 87/89 ZA-1600 Isando
I-20041 Agrate Brianza (MB) BG-1756 Sofia PT - 3801-997 Aveiro, Esgueira Phone: + 27 (0)11 / 977 0770
Phone: +39 039 / 60 53 1 Phone: +359 (0)2 / 817 6000 Phone: +351 (0)234 / 303 900 Fax: + 27 (0)11 / 977 0761
Fax: +39 039 / 60 53 312 Fax: +359 (0)2 / 97 44 06 1 Fax: +351 (0)234 / 303 910
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. POLAND INEA RBT d.o.o. CROATIA Sirius Trading & Services srl ROMANIA
Poland Branch Losinjska 4 a Aleea Lacul Morii Nr. 3
Krakowska 50 HR-10000 Zagreb RO-060841 Bucuresti, Sector 6
PL-32-083 Balice Phone: +385 (0)1 / 36 940 - 01/ -02/ -03 Phone: +40 (0)21 / 430 40 06
Phone: +48 (0)12 / 630 47 00 Fax: +385 (0)1 / 36 940 - 03 Fax: +40 (0)21 / 430 40 02
Fax: +48 (0)12 / 630 47 01
AutoCont C.S. s.r.o. CZECH REPUBLIC INEA RBT d.o.o. SERBIA
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. RUSSIA Technologická 374/6 Izletnicka 10
52, bld. 3 Kosmodamianskaya nab 8 floor CZ-708 00 Ostrava-Pustkovec SER-113000 Smederevo
RU-115054 Мoscow Phone: +420 595 691 150 Phone: +381 (0)26 / 615 401
Phone: +7 495 721-2070 Fax: +420 595 691 199 Fax: +381 (0)26 / 615 401
Fax: +7 495 721-2071
Beijer Electronics A/S DENMARK SIMAP s.r.o. SLOVAKIA
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. SPAIN Lykkegårdsvej 17 Jána Derku 1671
Spanish Branch DK-4000 Roskilde SK-911 01 Trencín
Carretera de Rubí 76-80 Phone: +45 (0)46/ 75 76 66 Phone: +421 (0)32 743 04 72
E-08190 Sant Cugat del Vallés (Barcelona) Fax: +45 (0)46 / 75 56 26 Fax: +421 (0)32 743 75 20
Phone: 902 131121 // +34 935653131
Fax: +34 935891579 Beijer Electronics Eesti OÜ ESTONIA PROCONT, spol. s r.o. Prešov SLOVAKIA
Pärnu mnt.160i Kúpelná 1/A
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. UK EE-11317 Tallinn SK-080 01 Prešov
UK Branch Phone: +372 (0)6 / 51 81 40 Phone: +421 (0)51 7580 611
Travellers Lane Fax: +372 (0)6 / 51 81 49 Fax: +421 (0)51 7580 650
UK-Hatfield, Herts. AL10 8XB
Phone: +44 (0)1707 / 27 61 00 Beijer Electronics OY FINLAND INEA RBT d.o.o. SLOVENIA
Fax: +44 (0)1707 / 27 86 95 Peltoie 37 Stegne 11
FIN-28400 Ulvila SI-1000 Ljubljana
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION JAPAN Phone: +358 (0)207 / 463 540 Phone: +386 (0)1 / 513 8116
Office Tower “Z” 14 F Fax: +358 (0)207 / 463 541 Fax: +386 (0)1 / 513 8170
8-12,1 chome, Harumi Chuo-Ku
Tokyo 104-6212 UTECO GREECE Beijer Electronics AB SWEDEN
Phone: +81 3 622 160 60 5, Mavrogenous Str. Box 426
Fax: +81 3 622 160 75 GR-18542 Piraeus SE-20124 Malmö
Phone: +30 211 / 1206 900 Phone: +46 (0)40 / 35 86 00
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION, Inc. USA Fax: +30 211 / 1206 999 Fax: +46 (0)40 / 93 23 01
500 Corporate Woods Parkway
Vernon Hills, IL 60061 MELTRADE Kft. HUNGARY Omni Ray AG SWITZERLAND
Phone: +1 847 478 21 00 Fertő utca 14. Im Schörli 5
Fax: +1 847 478 22 53 HU-1107 Budapest CH-8600 Dübendorf
Phone: +36 (0)1 / 431-9726 Phone: +41 (0)44 / 802 28 80
Fax: +36 (0)1 / 431-9727 Fax: +41 (0)44 / 802 28 28
Beijer Electronics SIA LATVIA GTS TURKEY
Ritausmas iela 23 Bayraktar Bulvari Nutuk Sok. No:5
LV-1058 Riga TR-34775 Yukarı Dudullu-Ümraniye-İSTANBUL
Phone: +371 (0)784 / 2280 Phone: +90 (0)216 526 39 90
Fax: +371 (0)784 / 2281 Fax: +90 (0)216 526 3995
Beijer Electronics UAB LITHUANIA CSC Automation Ltd. UKRAINE
Savanoriu Pr. 187 4-B, M. Raskovoyi St.
LT-02300 Vilnius UA-02660 Kiev
Phone: +370 (0)5 / 232 3101 Phone: +380 (0)44 / 494 33 55
Fax: +370 (0)5 / 232 2980 Fax: +380 (0)44 / 494-33-66
Systemgroup UKRAINE
2 M. Krivonosa St.
UA-03680 Kiev
Phone: +380 (0)44 / 490 92 29
Fax: +380 (0)44 / 248 88 68
Mitsubishi Electric Europe B.V. /// FA - European Business Group /// Gothaer Straße 8 /// D-40880 Ratingen /// Germany
Tel.: +49(0)2102-4860 /// Fax: +49(0)2102-4861120 /// info@mitsubishi-automation.com /// www.mitsubishi-automation.com

D700 Instruction Guide PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

D700 Instruction Guide PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

INVERTER

PRECAUTIONS FOR USE

(6) Maintenance, inspection and parts replacement

1.1 Product checking and parts identification ......................................... 2

1.3 Removal and reinstallation of the cover............................................. 5

1.4 Installation of the inverter and enclosure design .............................. 8

2.1 Wiring ................................................................................................. 14

2.2 Main circuit terminal specifications ................................................. 16

2.3 Control circuit specifications ........................................................... 20

2.4 Connection of stand-alone option unit.............................................. 35

3.1 EMC and leakage currents................................................................ 42

3.2 Installation of power factor improving reactor................................ 47

3.3 Power-OFF and magnetic contactor (MC) ........................................ 48

3.4 Inverter-driven 400V class motor ..................................................... 49

3.5 Precautions for use of the inverter .................................................. 50

3.6 Failsafe of the system which uses the inverter............................... 52

4.1 Operation panel................................................................................. 56

4.2 Parameter list ................................................................................... 60

4.3 Adjustment of the output torque (current) of the motor................. 77

4.4 Limiting the output frequency ......................................................... 86

4.5 V/F pattern........................................................................................ 88

4.6 Frequency setting by external terminals ........................................ 92

4.7 Setting of acceleration/deceleration time and acceleration/

4.8 Selection and protection of a motor .............................................. 103

4.9 Motor brake and stop operation..................................................... 112

4.10 Function assignment of external terminal and control................. 116

4.11 Monitor display and monitor output signal .................................... 130

4.12 Operation selection at power failure and instantaneous power

4.13 Operation setting at fault occurrence ........................................... 147

4.14 Energy saving operation ................................................................ 150

4.15 Motor noise, EMI measures, mechanical resonance .................... 151

4.16 Frequency setting by analog input (terminal 2, 4) ........................ 153

4.17 Misoperation prevention and parameter setting restriction ........ 161

4.18 Selection of operation mode and operation location ................... 168

4.19 Communication operation and setting .......................................... 183

4.20 Special operation and frequency control ...................................... 215

4.21 Useful functions ............................................................................. 233

4.23 Parameter clear/ All parameter clear ............................................ 247

4.24 Initial value change list.................................................................. 248

4.25 Check and clear of the faults history ............................................ 249

5.1 Reset method of protective function .............................................. 252

5.2 List of fault or alarm indications..................................................... 253

5.3 Causes and corrective actions ....................................................... 254

5.4 Correspondences between digital and actual characters ............. 263

5.5 Check first when you have a trouble .............................................. 264

6 PRECAUTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 271

6.2 Measurement of main circuit voltages, currents and powers....... 279

7.1 Rating .............................................................................................. 286

7.2 Common specifications .................................................................. 287

7.3 Outline dimension drawings ........................................................... 288

Appendix 1 Specification change ................................................................................ 292

Appendix 2 Index ........................................................................................................... 293

This chapter explains the "OUTLINE" for use of this product.

1.1 Product checking and parts identification ................................. 2

Parameters referred to : Related parameters are stated.

1.1 Product checking and parts identification

Symbol Voltage class Symbol Model

Voltage/current input switch

Changing the control

Inverter model Serial number Inverter model FR-D740-036-EC

1.2 Inverter and peripheral devices

Devices connected to the output Earth (Ground)

1.2.1 Peripheral devices